JVC QP ES1ALUG RX ES1&XV NK58[UG&UX] User Manual ES1ALUG, ES1ALUX LVT1002 009B
RX-ES1SL RX-ES1SL LVT1002-009B nglish, Arabic,
QP-ES1ALUX QP-ES1ALUX LVT1002-009B nglish, Arabic,
User Manual: JVC QP-ES1ALUG QP-ES1ALUG, QP-ES1ALUX nglish, Arabic,
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 154
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
English
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
DVD VIDEO PLAYER
RX-ES1SL
XV-NK58SL
INSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No.
which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
LVT1002-009B
[UG, UX]
coverRX-ES1&XV-NK58[UG&UX]f
1
03.8.5, 17:22
Warnings, Cautions, and Others /
Caution –– STANDBY/ON
switch!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The
STANDBY/ON
switch in any position does not disconnect the
mains line. The power can be remote controlled.
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
Caution
The model number, supply ratings and identifications are
located on the bottom.
G-1
safety.RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
1
03.5.21, 18:47
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user
serviceable parts inside the Unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and
interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED
INSIDE THE UNIT.
G-2
safety.RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
2
03.5.21, 18:42
Caution: Proper Ventilation / RX-ES1SL
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Front:
No obstructions open spacing.
Sides:
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.
Top:
No obstructions in 10 cm from the top.
Back:
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back
Bottom:
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Spacing 15 cm or more
RX-ES1SL
Wall or
obstructions
Stand height 15 cm or more
Floor
Caution: Proper Ventilation / XV-NK58SL
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Front:
No obstructions open spacing.
Sides:
No obstructions in 3 cm from the sides.
Top:
No obstructions in 5 cm from the top.
Back:
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back
Bottom:
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Spacing 15 cm or more
XV-NK58SL
Wall or
obstructions
Stand height 5 cm or more
Floor
* Do not stack RX-ES1SL and XV-NK58SL.
G-3
safety.RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
3
03.5.21, 18:42
Parts identification ................................................... 2
Getting started ......................................................... 5
XV-NK58SL
Before operation ................................................... 33
Precautions ------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
Checking the supplied accessories ------------------------------------ 5
Putting batteries in the remote control -------------------------------- 5
Setting the voltage selector ---------------------------------------------- 5
Connecting the FM and AM antennas -------------------------------- 6
Connecting the speakers and DVD player --------------------------- 7
Connecting other video components ---------------------------------- 9
Connecting the power cord -------------------------------------------- 12
About this manual -------------------------------------------------------- 33
About discs ---------------------------------------------------------------- 33
RX-ES1SL
Basic operations ................................................... 13
1 Turn on the power -------------------------------------------------2 Select the source to play -----------------------------------------3 Adjust the volume --------------------------------------------------Selecting the digital decode mode ----------------------------------Turning off the sounds temporarily—Muting ---------------------Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer -----------------------Changing the display brightness -------------------------------------
13
13
14
14
15
15
15
Basic operations ................................................... 34
Turning on/off the player -----------------------------------------------Initial setup ----------------------------------------------------------------Basic playback -----------------------------------------------------------Resuming playback -----------------------------------------------------Various speed playback -----------------------------------------------Locating the beginning of a scene or song ------------------------
34
34
35
36
37
38
Advanced operations ............................................ 39
Playing from a specific position --------------------------------------Changing the playback order -----------------------------------------Repeat playback ---------------------------------------------------------Changing the language, sound and scene angle ---------------Special picture/sound effect ------------------------------------------Menu bar functions ------------------------------------------------------
39
40
42
43
44
45
MP3/WMA disc playback ...................................... 47
Operations ----------------------------------------------------------------- 47
Speaker settings ................................................... 16
JPEG disc playback .............................................. 49
Setting the speakers information automatically
—Smart Surround Setup ----------------------------------------- 16
Setting the speakers and subwoofer information quickly
—Quick Setup ------------------------------------------------------- 17
Setting the speakers and subwoofer information manually
—Manual Setup ----------------------------------------------------- 18
About JPEG discs -------------------------------------------------------- 49
Basic operations ---------------------------------------------------------- 49
Viewing pictures continuously (slide show mode) --------------- 50
Basic settings ........................................................ 20
Operating procedure ---------------------------------------------------Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals
—DIGITAL IN -------------------------------------------------------Setting Auto Surround—AUTO SR ---------------------------------Setting the video component input mode
—DVD VIDEO/DBS VIDEO --------------------------------------
20
20
21
21
Sound adjustments ............................................... 22
Operating procedure ---------------------------------------------------Adjusting the tone—BASS, TREBLE -------------------------------Adjusting the subwoofer output level—SUBWFR ---------------Adjusting the front speakers output balance—BAL ------------Reinforcing the bass—B.BOOST -----------------------------------Attenuating the input signal—ATT -----------------------------------
22
22
22
23
23
23
Tuner operations ................................................... 24
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing ------------------------------Tuning in to stations manually ---------------------------------------Using preset tuning -----------------------------------------------------Selecting the FM reception mode ------------------------------------
24
24
24
25
Creating realistic sound fields ............................. 26
Reproducing theater ambience ---------------------------------------Introducing the Surround/DSP modes ------------------------------About relations between speaker layout
and Surround/DSP modes ---------------------------------------Using Surround modes ------------------------------------------------Using DSP modes -------------------------------------------------------
KARAOKE operation ............................................. 52
Preparation ---------------------------------------------------------------Reserving songs --------------------------------------------------------Selecting audio ----------------------------------------------------------Adding an effect to your voice ---------------------------------------Shifting the musical key ------------------------------------------------
52
52
53
55
56
Changing the initial settings ................................ 57
Selecting preferences --------------------------------------------------- 57
Limiting playback by children ------------------------------------------ 60
Additional information .......................................... 62
Appendix A: Country/Area code list for Parental Lock ---------Appendix B: Table of languages and their abbreviations ------Appendix C: Digital output signal chart ----------------------------Appendix D: Glossary ---------------------------------------------------
62
63
63
64
AV COMPLU LINK remote control system ........... 65
Operating other JVC products .............................. 67
Operating other manufacturers’ equipment .......... 68
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 70
Specifications ......................................................... 73
26
26
28
28
30
Using the DVD MULTI playback mode ................. 32
Activating the DVD MULTI playback mode -------------------------- 32
Adjusting the speaker output level ------------------------------------ 32
1
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
1
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Table of Contents
English
Parts identification
See pages in parentheses for details.
Remote control
• When operating this receiver (RX-ES1SL), set the mode
selector (1) to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• When operating the player (XV-NK58SL), set the mode
selector (1) to “DVD.”
• When using KARAOKE function, set the mode selector
(1) to “KARAOKE.”
1
2
3
4
f
g
h
5
6
7
8
9
j
k
p
q
w
l
e
r
t
yu
i
o
; a
c
b
/
z
x
v
n
s
1 Mode selector
AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS, KARAOKE, DVD
2 OPEN/CLOSE button (35)
3 Standby/on buttons (13, 67 – 69)
AUDIO, DVD
, VCR
, DBS
, TV
4 Source selecting buttons (13)
DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM
5 CHANNEL +/– buttons (67 – 69)
6 TV VOL (volume) +/– buttons (67, 69)
7 • Operating buttons for video components (67, 69)
4, 3, ¢, 1, 7, 8, ¡
• Operating buttons for tuner (24, 25)
TUNING 9, TUNING (, FM MODE, MEMORY
8 Operating buttons for DVD
TOP MENU, MENU, CHOICE, ON SCREEN, ENTER,
3, 2, 5, ∞
9 • ECHO button (55)
• SUBTITLE button (43)
p AUDIO button (43, 53)
q • KARAOKE SOUND button (54)
• ZOOM button (44, 50)
w • PROGRESSIVE button (10)
• VFP button (44)
e • KARAOKE button (52)
•
button (38)
r • KEY 9 button (56)
• ANGLE button (43)
t • VOCAL button (55)
• 3D button (45)
y • KEY ( button (56)
• REPEAT button (42, 48, 51)
u SLEEP button (15)
i DIMMER button (15, 35)
o BASS BOOST button (23)
; SMART S (surround). SETUP button (16)
a EFFECT button (31)
s TEST button (29 – 31)
d Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels
(22, 29, 31, 32)
SUBWFR (subwoofer) +/–, CENTER +/–, SURR L (Left
surround) +/–, SURR R (right surround) +/–
f TV/VIDEO button (67, 69)
g MUTING button (15)
h VOLUME +/– buttons (14)
j • RESERVE button (52)
• TITLE/GROUP button (39, 48, 50)
k RETURN button (39)
l • Numeric buttons for adjusting tone (22)
BASS 9/(, TREBLE 9/(
• Numeric buttons for selecting preset channels (25)
• Numeric buttons for operating video components
/ EFFECT button (55)
z ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (13, 14)
x CANCEL button (41, 52)
c TONE button (22)
v A (audio).POSITION button (23)
b DECODE button (14)
n SURROUND button (28, 30, 31)
d
To open the cover of
the remote control,
push here then slide
downward.
1
4
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
2
03.8.5, 17:23
5
3
8
+10
REM RM-SQ
OTE PES1
CO
NTROU
L
2
2
7
6
9
English
Parts identification
RX-ES1SL
See pages in parentheses for details.
Front panel
3
2
1
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 5 6
SETTING
ADJUST
9 p
8
7
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
q
w
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
8 • SET button (17, 18, 20, 22, 29 – 32)
• TUNER PRESET button (25)
9 Remote sensor (5)
p SOURCE SELECTOR (13)
MULTI JOG (17, 18, 20, 22, 25, 29 – 32)
q MASTER VOLUME control (14)
w PHONES jack (14)
STANDBY/ON
button and STANDBY lamp (13, 24)
DIMMER button (15)
SETTING button (17, 18, 20, 24)
ADJUST button (22, 24, 29, 31, 32)
SURROUND button (29, 31)
Display window (see below)
Source indicators
DVD MULTI, DVD, DBS, VCR, TV, FM/AM
Display window
2 3 4 56
1
ANALOG L
PLΙΙ SLEEP
C
R
DSP HP
LPCM
SUBWFR LFE
DOLBY D
AUTO SR
LS S RS INPUT ATT
DTS
p
BASS BOOST
q
2
FM 75
220V
230 240V
ANTENNA
110V
COAXIAL
127V
AV
COMULINK-III
8
AUDIO
AM EXT
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
4
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
5
PR
IN
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
COMPONENT VIDEO
9
1 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (5)
2 ANTENNA terminals (6)
3 DVD IN terminals (8, 11)
FRONT, CENTER, SURR (REAR), SUBWOOFER
4 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (8, 9, 11)
DVD IN, DBS IN, MONITOR OUT
5 VIDEO terminals (8 – 11)
DVD IN, DBS IN, VCR OUT (REC)/IN (PLAY), MONITOR OUT
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
7
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
VIDEO
Y
R
TV
6
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
PB
OUT VCR
e r
8 Tuner operation indicators (24)
TUNED, ST (stereo)
9 AUTO MUTING indicator (25)
p INPUT ATT (attenuator) indicator (23)
q AUTO SR (surround) indicator (21)
w Main display
e Volume level indicator (13)
r A (audio).POSITION indicator (23)
L
DBS
AUTO MUTING
A.POSITION
ST
w
3
AM LOOP
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
TUNED
9
MHZ
kHZ
VOL
1 Signal format indicators (13, 14)
ANALOG, LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS
2 Signal and speaker indicators (15)
3 DSP indicator (27, 30, 31)
4
PLII indicator (26)
5 HP (headphone) indicator (14)
6 SLEEP indicator (15)
7 BASS BOOST indicator (23)
Rear panel
1
8
7
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
p
6 DIGITAL IN terminals (8, 12)
DIGITAL 1 (DVD) , DIGITAL 2 (DBS), DIGITAL 3 (TV)
7 Speaker terminals (7)
FRONT SPEAKERS, SURROUND SPEAKERS, CENTER
SPEAKER
8 AV COMPULINK-III terminals (65)
9 AUDIO terminals (9 – 11)
DBS IN, VCR OUT (REC)/IN (PLAY), TV IN
p SUBWOOFER OUT jack (7)
3
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
3
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Parts identification
XV-NK58SL
See pages in parentheses for details.
Front panel
1
2 3
6
5
4
7 8
-
9 0
STANDBY / ON
MIC
PROGRESSIVE
MIC LEVEL
MIN
MAX
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
=
~
!
button (34)
STANDBY/ON indicator (34)
Display window (see below)
Remote sensor (5)
Disc tray (35)
0 button (35)
4 button (37, 39)
~
!
¢ button (37, 39)
7 button (35, 36)
3 button (35, 36)
8 button (36, 37)
PROGRESSIVE indicator (10)
MIC jack (52)
MIC LEVEL control (52)
Display window
1
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
23
5
6
7
-
9 0
7
8
9
0
-
Audio format indicators
Disc indicator
Karaoke indicator
Group/title/track/chapter indicators
Repeat mode indicator
Program/random indicators
Total time/remaining time indicators
3D indicator
3 (play)/8 (pause) indicators
Resume indicator
Multi-information window
Rear panel
1
VIDEO
LEFT
Y
AUDIO OUT
PB
NTSC
PR
PAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
1 AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT jacks
2 DIGITAL OUT jacks (8)
COAXIAL, OPTICAL
3 VIDEO OUT jacks*
VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT
4 VIDEO SIGNAL SELECTOR (9)
NTSC, PAL
REMOTE, 525p, 525i
5 AV COMPU LINK terminals
4
525p
525i
REMOTE
AV COMPU LINK
S-VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
NOTE
* When connecting the DVD player (XV-NK58SL) to the receiver
(RX-ES1SL) or TV
Connect only one of the following jacks—the VIDEO (composite),
S-VIDEO, or COMPONENT jacks.
Color and brightness do not display correctly if you connect them
using more than two types of jacks at the same time.
4
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
5
VIDEO SIGNAL
SELECTOR
COMPONENT
COAXIAL
PCM/ STREAM
RIGHT
4
3
2
03.8.5, 17:23
English
Getting started
Precautions
Putting batteries in the remote control
General precautions
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
• When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the front panel.
• DO NOT disassemble the unit or remove screws, covers, or cabinet.
• DO NOT expose the unit to rain or moisture.
• DO NOT expose the unit to direct sunlight or place it near a heating
device.
1
Press and slide the
battery cover on the back
of the remote control.
2
Insert batteries.
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture and dust.
If water gets inside the unit, turn off the power and remove the plug
from the outlet, then consult your dealer. Using the unit in this state
may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold
between 5˚C and 35˚C
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
• Leave sufficient distance between the unit and the TV.
• Do not install the unit in a place subject to vibrations.
Handling the receiver
Make sure to match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
3
• DO NOT touch the power cord with wet hands.
• DO NOT pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the
cord.
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cords and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. It
is recommended to use a coaxial cable for antenna connection,
since it is well-shielded against interference.
• When a power failure occurs, or when you unplug the power cord,
the preset settings such as preset FM or AM channels and sound
adjustments may be erased in a few days.
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended period or
time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small amount of power
is always consumed while the power cord is connected to the wall
outlet.
To prevent the malfunction
• There are no user-servicable parts inside. If anything goes wrong,
unplug the power cord and consult your dealer.
• Do not insert any metallic objects, such as wires, hairpins, coins,
etc. into the unit.
• Do not block the vents. Blocking the vents may damage the unit.
To clean the cabinet
• Use a soft cloth. Follow the relevant instructions on the use of
chemically-coated cloths.
• Do not use benzene, thinner or other organic solvents and
disinfectants. These may cause deformation or discoloring.
Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace
the batteries. Use two R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell batteries.
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued use.
CAUTION:
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
Setting the voltage selector
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear of the
receiver by using a screw driver. Check to be sure if the voltage mark
is set to the voltage for your area where this unit plugs in.
Checking the supplied accessories
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied accessories.
The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece
supplied.
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
Voltage mark
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote control (1)
Batteries (2)
AM loop antenna (1)
FM antenna (1)
Digital coaxial cord (1)
AC plug adaptor (1)
Audio/video cord (1)
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.
5
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
5
03.8.5, 17:23
English
Getting started
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
If FM reception is poor, connect
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).
If AM reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinylcovered wire (not supplied).
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Snap the tabs on the loop
into the slots of the base to
assemble the AM loop
antenna.
FM antenna (supplied)
RX-ES1SL
AM antenna connection
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP terminals.
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and the black cord to
H terminal.
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop
antenna connected.
NOTES
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the
right.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any
other terminals, connecting cords and power cord.
This could cause poor reception.
FM antenna connection
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL terminal
as temporary measure.
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not
supplied). Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable with a connector
(IEC or DIN 45325), disconnect the supplied FM antenna.
6
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
6
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Getting Started
Connecting the speakers and DVD player
Turn off all components before connections.
Speaker Layout Diagram
After connecting the front, center and surround speakers, and/or a subwoofer, set the speaker setting information properly to obtain the best
possible surround effect. For details, see pages 16 to 19.
Subwoofer
Center
speaker
Left front
speaker
Right front
speaker
XV-NK58SL
MIN
MAX
RX-ES1SL
Left surround
speaker
Right surround
speaker
Connecting the front, center, and surround speakers
Connecting the subwoofer
For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the rear panel
to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the speakers respectively.
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or reproduce
the original LFE signals recorded in the digital software.
1
Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each
speaker cord (not supplied).
2
Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal (1),
then insert the speaker cord (2).
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
3
Release the finger from the clamp.
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.
NOTE
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.
CAUTION:
Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals.
Powered subwoofer
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
1
FRONT
SPEAKERS
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
2
AB CD E
FM 75
220V
230 240V
110V
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
127V
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
L
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
PB
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
TV
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
R
AV
COMULINK-III
3
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
A
B
C
D
E
To center speaker
To right surround speaker
To left surround speaker
To right front speaker
To left front speaker
S-VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
7
1
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
SUBWOOFER
OUT
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
2
7
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Getting started
Connecting the DVD player (XV-NK58SL)
Notes for video connection:
• You can use component video cord in addition to composite video cord and S-video cord.
By using S-video cord or component video cord, you can get a better picture quality—in the order: composite < S-video < component.
• To view the picture from the DVD player, connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of cord.
Component video cord (not supplied)
Green
Red
Blue
Blue
Red
Green
Connect using one of the
video terminals.
FRONT
DVD
IN
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
SUBWOOFER
DVD
IN
CENTER
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
S-video cord (not supplied)
PB
Audio/video cord
(supplied: 1 cable)
PR
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
COMPONENT VIDEO
LEFT
Red
White
White
Red
Yellow
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
Digital coaxial cord
(supplied: 1 cable)
MONITOR OUT
PR
TV
CENTER
SPEAKER
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
PB
Yellow
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
LEFT
COAXIAL
RIGHT
OPTICAL
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COMPONENT
Y
PCM/ STREAM
S-VIDEO
PB
PR
VIDEO OUT
XV-NK58SL
RX-ES1SL
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
PCM/ STREAM
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
Before connecting a
digital optical cord,
unplug the
protective plug.
Digital optical cord
(not supplied)
NOTES
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For DBS tuner
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For TV tuner
If you connect other components, change the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN” on page 20.
• Select the correct digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or
digital input mode” on page 13.
• To enjoy the digital sound, digital connection is required—Digital
optical connection or Digital coaxial connection.
8
EN01-08RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
8
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Getting started
Connecting other video components
Turn off all components before making connections.
• Illustrations of the input/output terminals are typical examples. When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the
terminal names actually printed on the rear vary among different components.
Notes for video connection:
• You can use composite video cord or S-video cord for connecting the VCR to this receiver.
• You can use component video cord in addition to composite video cord and S-video cord for connecting your DVD player, TV and DBS tuner
to this receiver.
• By using S-video cord or component video cord, you can get a better picture quality—in the order: composite < S-video < component.
• To view the picture from the DVD player, DBS tuner or VCR on your TV, connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of cord for
connecting the DVD player, DBS tuner or VCR to this receiver.
TV connection
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in VCR; Otherwise, the picture may be distorted.
Component video cord (not supplied)
Connect using one of the video terminals.
DVD IN
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
Green
Green
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
PB
MONITOR OUT
Composite video cord (not supplied)
PR
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
S-video cord (not supplied)
FM 75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AV
COMULINK-III
AM EXT
FRONT
DVD
IN
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
CENTER
L
PB
R
PR
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
TV
IN
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
Stereo audio cord (not supplied)
AUDIO
LEFT
L
R
RIGHT
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
TV
OUT
IN
AUDIO
About VIDEO SIGNAL SELECTOR on XV-NK58SL
VIDEO SIGNAL
SELECTOR
NTSC
PAL
525p
525i
REMOTE
Selecting PAL or NTSC
Set the PAL/NTSC selector on the rear panel to “PAL” or “NTSC” to
match the color system of your TV. Make sure that the color system
of a DVD VIDEO/SVCD/video CD disc labeled on the package
matches your TV.
If you use a multi-color system TV, you can play discs recorded on
both PAL and NTSC systems by setting the PAL/NTSC selector
appropriately.
• Change the PAL/NTSC selector position in stop mode or with no
disc inserted. The changed setting is not effective if you change
the selector position in playback mode.
Selecting the 525i/525p/REMOTE selector position
You must change the 525i/525p/REMOTE selector position while
the player power is off. Otherwise, the changed setting is not
effective.
• If your television equipped with component jacks does not support
the progressive scanning mode, set the selector to “525i.”
• If your television equipped with component jacks supports the
progressive scanning mode, set the selector to “525p.”
• If you want to select the scanning mode between the interlace and
progressive modes (depending on the source condition, or when
connecting more than one television, etc.), set the selector to
“REMOTE.”
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
9
EN09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
9
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Getting started
Activating the Progressive scanning mode using the remote
control unit
When the player is turned on and the 525i/525p/REMOTE
selector is set to “REMOTE,” press and hold down PROGRESSIVE for
a few seconds.
The scanning mode switches between the Progressive scanning and
Interlaced scanning modes.
When the scanning mode is set to the Progressive mode, the
PROGRESSIVE indicator on the front panel turns on.
Depending on the [PICTURE SOURCE] setting on the
[PICTURE] preference display and whether the current DVD
VIDEO disc is film-source or video-source, the color of the indicator
differs, as shown in the table below.
Setting of
[PICTURE SOURCE]
Source type of DVD VIDEO
Film source
Video source
AUTO
Green
Red
FILM
Green
Green
Red
Red
VIDEO (NORMAL)/
(ACTIVE)
* While stopped in the Progressive scanning mode, the
PROGRESSIVE indicator is lit in red regardless of the [PICTURE
SOURCE] selection.
NOTES
• The Progressive scanning mode works only when you connect the
player’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to your TV.
• The Progressive scanning mode works only when the signal format
is NTSC.
• There are some progressive TV and High-Definition TV sets that
are not fully compatible with the player, resulting in the unnatural
picture when playing back a DVD VIDEO disc in the Progressive
scanning mode. In such a case, use the Interlaced scanning mode.
To check the compatibility of your TV set, contact your local JVC
customer service center.
• All JVC progressive TV and High-Definition TV sets are fully
compatible with the player (Example: AV-61S902).
• The VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
jacks cannot be used at the same time. Connect cable(s) only to
the jack(s) you want to use.
Progressive scan video playback available
In the Progressive scanning mode, you can enjoy high quality picture
with less flickers when the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks are
connected to a TV or monitor that supports the progressive video
input.
About the scanning mode
Depending on the material source format, DVD VIDEO discs can be
classified into two types; film source and video source (note that some
DVD VIDEO discs contain both film source and video source). Film
sources are recorded as 24-frame-per-second information, while
(NTSC) video sources are recorded as 30-frame-per-second (60-fieldper-second interlaced) information.
When the player plays back a film source material, uninterlaced
progressive output signals are created using the original information.
When a video source material is played back, the player interleaves
lines between the interlaced lines on each to create the interpolated
picture and outputs as the progressive signal.
VCR connection
Composite video cord (not supplied)
Connect using one of the video
terminals.
VIDEO
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S-video cord (not supplied)
S-VIDEO
FM 75
AM LOOP
DVD
IN
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AM EXT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
PB
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
VCR
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
Stereo audio cord (not supplied)
AUDIO
L
LEFT
R
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
RIGHT
IN
OUT
IN
AUDIO
10
EN09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
10
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Getting started
DBS tuner connection
Green
Green
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
DVD IN
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
PB
Composite video cord (not supplied)
MONITOR OUT
PR
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Connect using one of the video terminals.
S-video cord (not supplied)
DBS tuner
FM 75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
R
DBS IN
DVD IN
L
VIDEO
DVD
IN
CENTER
L
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
TV
IN
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
DBS
CENTER
SPEAKER
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
PB
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
AM EXT
FRONT
DVD
IN
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
SUBWOOFER
OUT
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
Stereo audio cord (not supplied)
AUDIO
LEFT
L
RIGHT
R
DBS
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
TV
OUT
IN
AUDIO
Analog connection for DVD MULTI playback (see page 32)
• DVD MULTI playback is not available for XV-NK58SL. See page 8 for how to connect XV-NK58SL.
Green
Green
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
DVD IN
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
Composite video cord (not supplied)
VIDEO
PB
MONITOR OUT
PR
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
S-video cord (not supplied)
RX-ES1SL
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
VIDEO
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
DVD Player with 5.1 channel
analog discrete jacks
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
PB
S
CENTER
SPEAKER
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Stereo audio cord (not supplied)
To front right channel audio output
DVD
IN
FRONT
R
L
To front left channel audio output
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
To center channel audio output
To surround left channel audio output
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
To surround right channel audio output
To subwoofer output
Monaural audio cord (not supplied)
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
11
EN09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
11
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Getting started
Digital connection
TV
Digital optical cord (not supplied)
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
DIGITAL IN
Digital coaxial cord
(supplied: 1 cable)
DBS IN
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
PB
VIDEO
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DBS tuner
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
ONENT VIDEO
CENTER
SPEAKER
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
RX-ES1SL
S-VIDEO
Before connecting
a digital optical
cord, unplug the
protective plug.
NOTES
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For DBS tuner
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For TV tuner
If you connect other components, change the digital input (DIGITAL
IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital input (DIGITAL
IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN” on page 20.
• Select the correct digital input mode.
See “Selecting the analog or digital input mode” on page 13.
Connecting the power cord
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are inserted
firmly. The STANDBY lamp on the receiver and indicator on the DVD player light in red.
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference.
NOTES
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
– when you unplug the power cord.
– when a power failure occurs.
• Disconnect the power cord:
– if you are not going to use the player for a long period of time.
– before cleaning the player.
– before moving the player.
CAUTIONS:
•
•
•
•
Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power cord replaced with a new one.
Do not plug in before setting the voltage selector switch on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are completed.
12
EN09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
12
03.5.16, 16:15
RX-ES1SL
English
Basic operations
2 Select the source to play
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
On the front panel:
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name
you want appears on the display.
The source indicator corresponding to the selected source lights in
red.
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as follows:
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
CHANNEL
TUNING
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
always set the mode selector
to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
DVD
VCR
VOLUME
FM MODE
TUNING
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
DVD MULTI
DVD (DVD DIGITAL)
VCR
DBS (DBS DIGITAL)
TV (TV DIGITAL)
(Back to the beginning)
FM
AM
MEMORY
MENU
TOP MENU
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
AUDIO
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
2
BASS
4
5
7
8
ANGLE
KEY
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
DVD MULTI:
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
REPEAT
• Each time you press FM/AM, FM and AM changes alternately.
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KARAOKE SOUND
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DVD (DIGITAL)*:
DBS (DIGITAL)*:
VCR:
TV (DIGITAL)*:
FM:
AM:
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode
1 Turn on the power
Press STANDBY/ON
control).
(or
AUDIO on the remote
The STANDBY lamp goes off. The current source indicator lights in
red. The name of the current source (or station frequency) appears on
the display.
Current volume level is shown here.
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
Current source name appears.
When you have connected the DVD player, DBS tuner, or TV tuner
using both the analog connection and the digital connection methods
(see pages 8 to 12), you need to select the correct input mode.
• You can select the digital input only for sources which you have
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN” on page 20.)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the analog
or digital input mode.
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates between
the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input (“DGTL AUTO”).
DGTL AUTO:
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver
automatically detects the incoming signal format,
then the digital signal format indicator (DOLBY D,
DTS or LPCM) for the detected signals lights up.
ANALOG*:
Select for the analog input mode.
To turn off the power (into standby)
Press STANDBY/ON
again (or
The STANDBY lamp lights up.
Select the DVD player using the analog discrete
output mode (5.1 channel reproduction). To enjoy
the DVD MULTI playback, see page 32.
Select the DVD player.
Select the DBS tuner.
Select the VCR.
Select the TV tuner.
Select an FM broadcast.
Select an AM broadcast.
AUDIO on the remote control).
NOTE
* Initial setting
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn the
power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.
NOTE
You cannot select the digital input mode when selecting “DVD MULTI”
as the playing source.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
13
EN13-15RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
13
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Basic operations
CAUTION:
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
Be sure to turn down the volume:
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume can
damage both the headphones and your hearing.
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from the
speakers.
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
TV VOL
CHANNEL
TUNING
When operating the
receiver using the remote
control, always set the
mode selector to AUDIO/TV/
VCR/DBS.
MUTING
VOLUME
FM MODE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
MENU
Selecting the digital decode mode
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS
Digital Surround software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 13),
follow the procedure below:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or tracks.
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
AUDIO
KARAOKE SOUND
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
REPEAT
2
BASS
4
7
KEY
ANGLE
From the remote control ONLY:
1 Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select “DGTL
AUTO.”
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
5
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
2 Press DECODE to select “DGTL D.D.” or “DGTL
+10
3D
DTS.”
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
• Each time you press the button, the digital decode mode
changes as follows:
L
C
R
SUBWFR LFE
DOLBY D
LS
3 Adjust the volume
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME control
clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the remote control).
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME control
counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on the remote
control).
RS
VOL
DGTL D.D.
DGTL AUTO
DGTL DTS
• To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select “DGTL
D.D.”
• To play back software encoded with DTS Digital Surround,
select “DGTL DTS.”
NOTE
CAUTION:
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any sources.
If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy
can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.
When you turn off the power or select another source, “DGTL DTS” or
“DGTL D.D.” is canceled and the digital decode mode is automatically
reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
The following are the analog/digital signal format indicators on the
display to indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.
NOTE
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum) to
“50” (maximum).
ANALOG:
Lights when analog input is selected.
LPCM:
Lights when Linear PCM signal comes in.
Listening with headphones
DOLBY D:
• Lights when Dolby Digital signal comes in.
• Flashes when “DGTL D.D.” is selected for software
not encoded with Dolby Digital.
DTS:
• Lights when DTS signal comes in.
• Flashes when “DGTL DTS” is selected for software
not encoded with DTS.
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the front
panel. This cancels the Surround mode currently selected,
deactivates speakers, and activates the HEADPHONE mode.
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.
• Disconnecting a pair of headphone from the PHONES jack cancels
the HEADPHONE mode and activates the speakers.
HEADPHONE mode
When using the headphones, the following signal is output
regardless of your speaker setting:
— For 2 channel sources, the front left and right channel signal is
output directly from the left and right headphones.
— For multi-channel sources, the front left and right, center and
surround channel signal is down-mixed and then output from
the headphones without missing bass element.
You can enjoy multi-channel sound source using the
headphones.
NOTE
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.
14
EN13-15RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
14
03.5.16, 16:15
Turning off the sounds temporarily—
Muting
From the remote control ONLY:
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all
connected speakers.
NOTES
• When setting speakers and basic items or adjusting sound, select
“DIMMER OFF” to confirm the setting you make on the display.
• When selecting DVD or DVD MULTI as a source using the remote
control, DIMMER functions for the DVD player. To dim the display
and indication on the receiver, select a source except DVD or DVD
MULTI on the remote control, and then press DIMMER.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off (the
volume level indicator goes off).
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control on the
front panel) also restores the sound.
Turning off the power with the Sleep
Timer
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display, and the shut-off time
changes in 10 minutes intervals.
SLEEP indicator
ANALOG
L
R
VOL
20
30
0 (Canceled)
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:
• when you turn off the power,
• when you change the source, and
• when you change the analog/digital input mode (see page 13).
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the
newly selected source are automatically recalled.
The following can be stored for each source:
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 13)
• Tone adjustment (see page 22)
• Subwoofer output level (see page 22)
• Bass boost (see page 23)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 23)
• Balance (see page 23)
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 23)
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see pages 26 – 31)
NOTES
SLEEP
SUBWFR
10
Basic adjustment of auto memory
40
50
60
90
80
70
When the shut-off time comes:
The receiver turns off automatically.
• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign a different setting for
each band.
• You cannot assign and store different settings for digital input
mode and analog input mode.
Signal and speaker indicators on the display
Signal indicators
L
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off time:
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
To cancel the Sleep Timer:
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP 0” appears on the display. (The
SLEEP indicator goes off.)
• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.
Changing the display brightness
You can dim the display.
Press DIMMER repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the indication changes as follows:
DIMMER 1:
DIMMER 2:
DIMMER 3:
DIMMER OFF:
•
•
•
•
Dims the display slightly.
Dims the blue indication lighting source lamps.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
Dims the blue indication lighting source lamps
(same as DIMMER 1).
Turns off the display and the blue indication
lighting source lamps.
Cancels the dim (normal display).
C
R
LFE
LS
S
Speaker indicators
L
ANALOG L
PL ΙΙ
C
R
DSP HP
LPCM
SUBWFR LFE
AUTO SR
DOLBY D
LS
S
RS
DTS
INPUT ATT
RS
C
R
SUBWFR
LS
RS
The following signal indicators light up —:
L:
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the left
channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
R:
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the right
channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
C:
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
LS: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes in.
RS: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes in.
S:
Lights up when the monaural surround channel signal
comes in.
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
The speaker indicators light up as follows:
• The subwoofer indicator (SUBWFR) lights up when “SUBWFR” is
set to “USE” for Quick Setup (see page 17) or to “YES” for
Manual Setup (see page 18).
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the
corresponding speaker is set to “SML” or “LRG,” and also when
required for the current playback.
15
EN13-15RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
15
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Basic operations
English
RX-ES1SL
Speaker settings
To obtain the best possible surround effect from Surround/DSP modes (see pages 26 to 31), you need to set up the speaker and subwoofer
information after all the connections are completed. You can set the speaker information using one of the following three methods.
Smart Surround Setup: Set the speakers information automatically by one simple action—clapping hands. The delay time and output level for
the center and surround speakers are set automatically.
Quick Setup:
Set the speakers and subwoofer information quickly by entering the use of the subwoofer, the number of the speakers,
and your room size.
Manual Setup:
Set the speakers and subwoofer information manually.
• Before starting the speaker setting, connect and position the speakers and subwoofer (see page 7) and turn on the receiver.
Setting the speakers information
automatically—Smart Surround Setup
3 Confirm “SETTING UP” stops flashing and clap
your hands over your head once while “SETTING
UP” appears on the display.
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of the
important element to obtain the best possible sound effect for the
Surround/DSP modes.
You need to set the delay time of the center and surround speakers
relative to the front speakers so that sounds through all the speakers
can reach you at the same time (see also page 19).
By using Smart Surround Setup, the speaker delay time and output
level are automatically calculated by one simple action—clapping
hands.
• To set the speaker information effectively using Smart Surround
Setup, unplug the power cords of all the components connected to
this receiver such as a TV, DVD player, DBS tuner, and VCR which
may cause noise.
• To use Smart Surround Setup effectively, connect both the center
and surround speakers.
• You can also set the crossover frequency, the low frequency effect
attenuator and the dynamic range compression manually (see page
19).
• When you change your speakers, do the following steps again.
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming
through all speakers (except the subwoofer).
After detecting the sound, one of the following indications appears
on the display.
From the remote control ONLY:
• The speaker delay time and output levels are set automatically
when:
—the receiver detects the sound as “SILENT” twice in
succession.
—the receiver detects the sound as “SILENT” at the third time
after detecting “SILENT”, “SILENT-ALL” and/or “FAILED”
twice.
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
2
BASS
7
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
3
TREBLE
5
6
8
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
When operating the receiver using
the remote control, always set the
mode selector to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
1 Take your position where you listen to the sound.
SUCCESSFUL:
SILENT:
SILENT-ALL:
FAILED:
Sound of your clapping is successfully
detected. The receiver sets the delay time
and the output level of the center and
surround speakers automatically.
The receiver cannot detect sound from some
speakers.
The receiver cannot detect any sound from all
speakers.
The receiver cannot detect both right and left
channels for the front and/or surround
speakers correctly.
• When the receiver cannot detect the sound correctly (“SILENT,”
“SILENT-ALL” or “FAILED” appears on the display), “SETTING
UP” appears on the display again then repeat step 3.
• When the receiver detects the sound as “SILENT-ALL” or
“FAILED” three times, “MANUAL” appears on the display. Set
the speaker and subwoofer information using Quick Setup (see
page 17) or Manual Setup (see page 18), and the speakers’
output levels for the center and surround speakers (see pages
29 to 31).
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART S. SETUP while
“SETTING UP” flashes on the display.
• Any other operations cannot be done after “SETTING UP” stops
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.
NOTES
• You need to set the subwoofer information and output level
manually (see pages 18 and 22).
• When you use Smart Surround Setup, the speaker delay time and
output levels you have set before will be ineffective.
• Set the speakers information using Quick Setup (see page 17) or
Manual Setup (see page 18), and the speakers’ output levels for the
center and surround speakers (see pages 29 to 31) when:
—you like to change the speaker setting made by Smart Surround
Setup
—Smart Surround Setup is not done correctly due to some factors
such as the environment, speaker types and clapping strength.
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if your body or
other object blocks the sound.
• Do not clap your hands hard because it may hurt your hands.
MIN
MAX
2 Press and hold SMART S. SETUP.
“SETTING UP” flashes on the display.
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
16
EN16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
16
03.5.16, 16:14
5 Press SET.
Setting the speakers and subwoofer
information quickly—Quick Setup
“ENTER USE OF SUBWOOFER” scrolls on the display.
Entering the use of the subwoofer, the number of the speakers, and
your room size, the center and surround speakers’ delay time is
automatically calculated.
• When you change your speakers, register the information about the
speakers again.
• You can also set the crossover frequency, the low frequency effect
attenuator and the dynamic range compression manually (see page 19).
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
6 Turn MULTI JOG to select whether or not you
have connected a subwoofer.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
NO
USE *
* Initial setting
7 Press SET.
FM / AM
“ENTER ROOM SIZE” scrolls on the display.
8 Turn MULTI JOG to select the room size.
On the front panel ONLY:
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
ANALOG
L
VOL
1 Press SETTING.
SMALL*
MULTI JOG now works for the setting operation.
on the display.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
9 Press SET to finish the setting.
R
SUBWFR
VOL
SUBWFR
SURR SP
CROSS
DIGITAL IN
DBS VIDEO
CNTR SP
FRNT SP
CNTR DL
SURR DL
LFE
D.COMP
DVD VIDEO
AUTO SR
QUICK SETUP
(Back to the beginning)
3 Press SET.
“ENTER THE NUMBER OF SPEAKERS” scrolls on the display.
• Once you have selected “QUICK SETUP,” previously adjusted
speaker setting is cleared.
4 Turn MULTI JOG to select the number of the
speakers you have connected.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
ANALOG
L
* Initial setting
The center and surround speakers’ delay time is registered
appropriately according to the room size. For details, see the list
“Speaker delay time according to room size” below.
R
SUBWFR
VOL
5 SPEAKERS*
3 SPEAKERS
4 SPEAKERS
5 SPEAKERS*:
Select when the front, center and surround
speakers are connected.
Select when the front and surround speakers
are connected.
3 SPEAKERS:
Select when the front and center speakers
are connected.
NOTES
• The setting you have made is not registered until “SETUP END”
appears on the display.
• Performing any operation other than volume and dimmer
adjustment cancels Quick Setup process.
• When you want to change the speaker and subwoofer information
after Quick Setup, use Manual Setup (see page 18).
Speaker size according to the number of speakers
Number of
speakers
3
3
4
4
5
5
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
NO
USE (YES)
NO
USE (YES)
NO
USE (YES)
LRG (large)
SML (small)
LRG (large)
SML (small)
LRG (large)
SML (small)
SML (small)
SML (small)
NO
NO
SML (small)
SML (small)
NO
NO
SML (small)
SML (small)
SML (small)
SML (small)
Speaker delay time according to room size
When selecting “SMALL ROOM,”
• Center speaker delay time
is set to 1 msec.
• Surround speakers delay time
is set to 3 msec.
L
R
C
2.4 m
2.1 m
1.8 m
1.5 m
LS
4 SPEAKERS:
“SETUP END” appears for a while, then the indication of the
previously selected source appears on the display.
RS
L
MEDIUM
LARGE
2 Turn MULTI JOG until “QUICK SETUP” appears
ANALOG
R
SUBWFR
* Initial setting
Each speaker size is registered appropriately according to the
number of the connected speakers. For details, see the list
“Speaker size according to the number of speakers” on the right.
EN16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
17
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
17
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Speaker settings
English
Speaker settings
When selecting “MEDIUM ROOM,”
• Center speaker delay time
is set to1 msec.
• Surround speakers delay time
is set to 2 msec.
L
C
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the appropriate setting
R
2.7 m
2.4 m
for the item selected in step 2, then press SET.
Your setting is stored.
2.1 m
ANALOG
L
R
VOL
LS
RS
EX.: When selecting “NO” for “SUBWFR.”
4 If you would like to set other items, repeat steps
2 and 3.
C
When selecting “LARGE ROOM,”
• Center speaker delay time
is set to 0 msec.
• Surround speakers delay time
is set to 0 msec.
R
L
3.0 m
Setting the subwoofer information
— SUBWFR (subwoofer)
LS
RS
Register whether you have connected a subwoofer or not.
Setting the speakers and subwoofer
information manually—Manual Setup
You can set the following speakers and subwoofer information
manually as you prefer. When you change your speakers, register the
information again.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Subwoofer information—SUBWFR
Speaker size—FRNT SP, CNTR SP, SURR SP
Speaker delay time—CNTR DL, SURR DL
Crossover frequency—CROSS
Low frequency effect attenuator—LFE
Dynamic range compression—D.COMP
DIMMER
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
DVD
Select when you have not connected or have
disconnected a subwoofer.
* Initial setting
— FRNT SP (front speakers), CNTR SP (center
speaker), SURR SP (surround speakers)
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
NO:
LRG (large):
SURROUND
STANDBY
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.
The subwoofer speaker indicator (SUBWFR) lights up
on the display (see page 15). You can adjust the
subwoofer output level (see page 22).
Setting the speakers size
Operating procedure
STANDBY / ON
YES*:
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
SML (small)*: Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than
12 cm.
NO:
On the front panel ONLY:
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than
12 cm.
Select when you have not connected a speaker. (Not
selectable for the front speakers.)
* Initial setting
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
1 Press SETTING.
MULTI JOG now works for the setting operation.
2 Turn MULTI JOG until the setting item you want
NOTES
• If you have selected “SML (small)” for the front speaker size, you
cannot select “LRG (large)” for the center and surround speaker
sizes.
• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer setting (see above and
page 17), you can only select “LRG (large)” for the front speaker
size.
to set appears on the display, then press SET.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
SUBWFR
SURR SP
CROSS
DIGITAL IN
DBS VIDEO
CNTR SP
FRNT SP
CNTR DL
SURR DL
LFE
D.COMP
AUTO SR
DVD VIDEO
QUICK SETUP
(Back to the beginning)
18
EN16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
18
03.5.16, 16:15
Setting the speaker delay time
Setting the crossover frequency—CROSS
— CNTR DL (center speaker delay),
SURR DL (surround speakers delay)
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If you
use a small speaker in any position, this receiver automatically
reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to the small speaker to
the large speakers.
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level
according to the size of the small speaker connected.
• If you have selected “LRG (large)” for all speakers (see page 18),
this function will not take effect.
You can set the speaker delay time easily by using Smart Surround
Setup (see page 16) or Quick Setup (see page 17).
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of the
important element to obtain the best possible surround sound for the
Surround modes.
You need to set the delay time of the center and surround speakers
relative to the front speakers so that sounds through all the speakers
can reach you at the same time.
• 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 30 cm
increase (or decrease) in distance.
80HZ:
Select when the cone speaker unit built in the
speaker is about 12 cm.
100HZ:
Select when the cone speaker unit built in the
speaker is about 10 cm.
CNTR DL*:
Set the delay time for the center speaker within a
range of 0 msec to 5 msec (in 1 msec intervals).
120HZ:
Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker
is about 8 cm.
SURR DL*:
Set the delay time for the surround speakers within a
range of 0 msec to 15 msec (in 1 msec intervals).
150HZ*:
Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker
is about 6 cm.
200HZ:
Select when the cone speaker unit built in the
speaker is less than 5 cm.
* “0ms” is the initial setting.
* Initial setting
nt
fro er
t
f
Le peak
s
Center speaker
Rig
sp ht fr
ea on
ke t
r
NOTE
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE mode.
3.0 m
2.7 m
2.4 m
2.1 m
Le
ft
sp sur
ea ro
ke un
r d
d
un
rro er
u
t s ak
gh e
Ri sp
Setting the low frequency effect attenuator
—LFE
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software encoded
with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate distortion.
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.
0dB*:
Normally select this.
–10dB:
Select when the bass sound is distorted.
* Initial setting
Setting the dynamic range compression
—D.COMP
Example: In this case,
set “CNTR DL” to “1ms” and
set “SURR DL” to “2ms.”
NOTE
If the center and/or surround speakers are not connected (see pages
17 and 18), you cannot set the speaker delay time for the center and/
or surround speakers.
You can compress the dynamic range (difference between maximum
sound and minimum sound) of the reproduced sound. This is useful
when listening to surround sound at night.
• This function takes effect only when playing back a source encoded
with Dolby Digital.
OFF:
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full
dynamic range. (No effect applied.)
MID*:
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a
little.
MAX:
Select when you want to apply the compression effect
fully. (Useful at night.)
* Initial setting
19
EN16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
19
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Speaker settings
English
RX-ES1SL
Basic settings
Operating procedure
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)
terminals—DIGITAL IN
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
On the front panel ONLY:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
When you use the digital input terminals, register what components
are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL 1/2/3 (see pages 8 and
12) so that the correct source name will appear when you select the
digital source.
1DVD2DBS3TV* : Select when connecting the following
components;
DIGITAL 1:DVD player
DIGITAL 2:DBS tuner
DIGITAL 3:TV tuner
1DVD2TV3DBS
: Select when connecting the following
components;
DIGITAL 1:DVD player
DIGITAL 2:TV tuner
DIGITAL 3:DBS tuner
1DBS2DVD3TV
: Select when connecting the following
components;
DIGITAL 1:DBS tuner
DIGITAL 2:DVD player
DIGITAL 3:TV tuner
1DBS2TV3DVD
: Select when connecting the following
components;
DIGITAL 1:DBS tuner
DIGITAL 2:TV tuner
DIGITAL 3:DVD player
1TV2DVD3DBS
: Select when connecting the following
components;
DIGITAL 1:TV tuner
DIGITAL 2:DVD player
DIGITAL 3:DBS tuner
1TV2DBS3DVD
: Select when connecting the following
components;
DIGITAL 1:TV tuner
DIGITAL 2:DBS tuner
DIGITAL 3:DVD player
1 Press SETTING.
MULTI JOG now works for the setting operation.
2 Turn MULTI JOG until the setting item you want
to set appears on the display, then press SET.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
SUBWFR
SURR SP
CROSS
DIGITAL IN*
DBS VIDEO
CNTR SP
FRNT SP
CNTR DL
SURR DL
LFE
D.COMP
DVD VIDEO
AUTO SR
QUICK SETUP
(Back to the beginning)
* Setting item you can select appears on the display after
“DIGITAL IN” appears for a few seconds.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the appropriate setting
for the item selected in step 2, then press SET.
Your setting is stored.
ANALOG
L
* Initial setting
R
SUBWFR
VOL
Ex.: When selecting “1DVD2DBS3TV” for “DIGITAL IN”.
20
EN16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
20
03.5.16, 16:15
Setting Auto Surround—AUTO SR
You can enjoy Surround mode simply by selecting the source (with
digital input selected for that source).
Select “ON” when activating Auto Surround.
ON:
• If multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate
Surround mode will be turned on.
• If Dolby Digital 2 channel or DTS 2 channel signal
including surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will
be selected.
• If Dolby Digital 2 channel or DTS 2 channel signal not
including surround signal comes in, “STEREO” will be
selected.
• If Linear PCM signal comes in, nothing will change.
The AUTO SR indicator lights up on the display.
OFF*:
Setting the video component input
mode—DVD VIDEO/DBS VIDEO
When you use the component video inputs for the DVD player and/or
DBS tuner, you have to register the type of input terminals.
Without setting this correctly, you cannot view the correct input on the
TV.
S/C*:
Select when connecting the video component to
the composite video or S-video input terminals.
COMP.:
Select when connecting the video component to
the component video input terminals.
* Initial setting
Select this to deactivate Auto Surround.
* Initial setting
NOTES
• This function does not take effect in the following cases:
– While playing an analog source, and
– While selecting “DGTL D.D.” or “DGTL DTS” as the fixed digital
decode mode (see page 14).
• If Surround mode is automatically activated by Auto Surround, any
other Surround mode in use will be canceled temporarily. When the
multi-channel digital signal stops coming in, “PLII MOVIE” activates.
• If you press SURROUND with Auto Surround activated, Auto Surround
will be canceled temporarily for the currently selected source.
Auto Surround setting will be restored in the following cases:
– When you turn the receiver off and on,
– When you change the source,
– When you change the analog/digital input, and
– When you reset “AUTO SR” to “ON” again.
21
EN16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
21
03.5.16, 16:15
English
Basic settings
English
RX-ES1SL
Sound adjustments
When operating the receiver using the remote control, always set the mode selector to
AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
Operating procedure
Adjusting the tone—BASS, TREBLE
You can adjust the bass and treble sounds to your preference.
• You have to make these adjustments for each source.
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
BASS*:
To adjust the bass (from –10 dB to +10 dB).
TREBLE*:
To adjust the treble (from –10 dB to +10 dB).
* “0” is the initial setting.
On the front panel:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
When using the remote control:
1 Press TONE.
2 Press BASS 9/( or
1 Press ADJUST.
MULTI JOG now works for the sound adjustment.
2 Turn MULTI JOG until the setting item you want
TREBLE 9/( to adjust the
sound level (from –10 dB to
+10 dB).
to set appears on the display, then press SET.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
ANALOG
L
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
7
KEY
TREBLE
2
BASS
3
TREBLE
5
6
8
9
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
KEY
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
REPEAT
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
TEST
EFFECT
DECODE
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
R
SUBWFR
VOL
NOTE
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT
B.BOOST
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA
(Back to the beginning)
ATT
3 Turn MULTI JOG to adjust the item selected in
step 2, then press SET.
Your setting is stored.
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
When you use the 10 keys to operate your target source after tone
adjustments, press the corresponding source selecting button first so
that the 10 keys work for your target source.
Adjusting the subwoofer output level
—SUBWFR
You can adjust the subwoofer output level if you have connected a
subwoofer and set the subwoofer information correctly—“USE” for the
Quick Setup or “YES” for the Manual Setup (see pages 17 and 18).
• You have to make this adjustment for each source.
Ex.: When selecting “+10 (dB)” for “BASS”.
SUBWFR*:
To adjust the subwoofer output level (from –10 dB to
+10 dB).
* “0” is the initial setting.
When using the remote control:
Press SUBWFR +/– to adjust the
subwoofer output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
2
BASS
7
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
5
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
22
EN22-23RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
22
03.5.16, 16:14
Setting the subwoofer audio position
When a stereo source is played back, the subwoofer sound is
reinforced compared to the sound from a multi-channel source.
Once you have set the subwoofer audio position, the subwoofer
output level is decreased by the selected value when a stereo source
is played back. The A (audio).POSITION indicator lights up when this
function is activated.
• You have to make this adjustment for each source.
From the remote control ONLY:
Press A.POSITION repeatedly to
select the subwoofer audio position
level from “–2 (dB),” “–4 (dB),” and
“–6 (dB).”
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.
• You have to make these adjustments for each source.
ON:
Select to boost the bass level (Bass Boost).
The BASS BOOST indicator lights up on the display.
OFF*:
Select to deactivate Bass Boost.
* Initial setting
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
TREBLE
2
BASS
KEY
The smaller the number becomes, the more the
level decreases automatically when listening in
stereo.
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF”
(initial setting).
Reinforcing the bass—B.BOOST
4
5
7
8
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
NOTE
This function affects the sound coming out only through the front
speakers.
+10
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
TEST
EFFECT
DECODE
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
When using the remote control:
Press BASS BOOST.
• Each time you press the button, Bass Boost
turns on and off alternately.
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
2
BASS
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
4
5
7
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
NOTES
• The maximum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.
Ex.:
When setting the subwoofer output level to “−8 (dB)” and the
subwoofer audio position to “−4 (dB),” the subwoofer output level
when listening in stereo will be −10 dB.
• This function does not take effect when activating a Surround
mode.
Attenuating the input signal—ATT
Adjusting the front speakers output
balance—BAL
If the sounds you hear from the front right and left speakers are
unequal, you can adjust the speakers output balance.
• You have to make this adjustment for each source.
• You cannot use the remote control for this setting.
BAL*:
To adjust the front speakers balance.
• “CENTER” to “L-21”: Decrease the left channel output.
• “CENTER” to “R-21”: Decrease the right channel
output.
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will be
distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input signal level
to prevent the sound distortion.
• You have to make this adjustment for each analog source.
• You cannot use the remote control for this setting.
ON:
Select to attenuate the input signal level.
The INPUT ATT indicator lights up on the display.
NORMAL*:
Select to deactivate attenuation.
* Initial setting
* “CENTER” is the initial setting.
23
EN22-23RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
23
03.5.16, 16:14
English
Sound adjustments
English
RX-ES1SL
Tuner operations
Tuning in to stations manually
The buttons on the remote control are mainly used for tuner
operations. To use buttons on the remote control, press
FM/AM before operation.
From the remote control ONLY:
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
When operating this receiver using the remote control,
always set the mode selector to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between
FM and AM.
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
ANALOG
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
TUNING ( until you find the frequency you
want.
If you select “FM” or “AM” using SOURCE SELECTOR on the
front panel, press FM/AM on the remote control before this
operation.
MENU
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING ( decreases the frequency.
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KEY
BASS
1
ZOOM
4
5
7
8
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
NOTES
TREBLE
2
BASS
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or TUNING (, the
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED
indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (Stereo) indicator
also lights up.
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
Using preset tuning
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other countries
use 10 kHz spacing. 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial setting.
• Be sure the receiver is turned off, but is plugged into an AC outlet
when setting the AM tuner interval.
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
STANDBY
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
MHZ
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or
TUNING
TOP MENU
KARAOKE SOUND
DVD
DBS
AUTO MUTING
MUTING
VOLUME
FM MODE
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
ST
You can also select “FM” or “AM” by turning SOURCE SELECTOR
on the front panel.
MEMORY
AUDIO
TUNED
VOL
VCR
TUNING
R
DVD
DVD
TV VOL
L
SUBWFR
AUDIO
KARAOKE
VCR
TV
FM / AM
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned. You can preset up to 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
To store the preset stations
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
From the remote control ONLY:
On the front panel ONLY:
To select the 10 kHz interval:
Hold down ADJUST and press STANDBY/ON
To change back to the 9 kHz interval:
Hold down SETTING and press STANDBY/ON
1
.
.
Tune in to the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning in to stations manually” above).
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the FM
reception mode” on page 25.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
ST
SUBWFR
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
2 Press MEMORY.
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 5 seconds.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
ST
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
24
EN24-25RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
24
03.5.16, 16:16
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to select
On the front panel:
a channel number while the channel number
position is flashing.
DIMMER
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
STANDBY / ON
ST
AUTO MUTING
SUBWFR
MHZ
VOL
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected channel
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
• The selected channel number stops flashing.
ANALOG
L
R
“AM.”
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
number is flashing on the display.
TUNED
ST
2 Press TUNER PRESET.
AUTO MUTING
SUBWFR
MHZ
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for
selecting preset channels.
VOL
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel
number during “P” appears on the display.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the
• Turning MULTI JOG clockwise increases the preset channel
numbers.
• Turning MULTI JOG counterclockwise decreases the preset
channel numbers.
stations you want.
To erase a stored preset station
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the
previously stored one.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
ST
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
To tune in a preset station
From the remote control:
Selecting the FM reception mode
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and the
numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between
FM and AM.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
ST
SUBWFR
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station (see
page 24).
From the remote control ONLY:
VOL
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to select
a channel number.
If you select “FM” or “AM” using SOURCE SELECTOR on the
front panel, press FM/AM on the remote control before this
operation.
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
ST
If you select “FM” using SOURCE SELECTOR on the front panel,
press FM/AM on the remote control before this operation.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates
between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”
AUTO MUTING*:
Normally select this.
When a program is broadcast in stereo, you
will hear stereo sound; when in monaural, you
will hear monaural sound. This mode is also
useful to suppress static noise between
stations. The AUTO MUTING indicator lights
up on the display.
MONO:
Select this to improve the reception (but
stereo effect will be lost).
In this mode, you will hear noise while tuning
in to the stations. The AUTO MUTING
indicator goes off from the display. (The ST
indicator also goes off.)
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
* Initial setting
25
EN24-25RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
25
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Tuner operations
English
RX-ES1SL
Creating realistic sound fields
Reproducing theater ambience
Introducing the Surround/DSP modes
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to
reproduce impressive multi-surround sound, reaching you from all
directions.
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound movement
can be expressed.
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the
same surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.
You can use the following Surround/DSP modes with this receiver.
■ Surround modes
• Dolby Pro Logic II
• Dolby Digital
• DTS
■ DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes
• DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) modes
• All Channel Stereo
■ Surround modes
Dolby Pro Logic II*
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multi-channel playback
format to decode all 2 channel sources—stereo source and Dolby
Surround encoded source—into 5.1 channel.
Matrix-based encoding/decoding method for Dolby Pro Logic II makes
no limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and
enables stereo surround sound compared to conventional Dolby Pro
Logic.
Dolby Pro Logic II enables you to reproduce spacious sound from
original sound without adding any new sounds and tonal colorations.
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes—Movie mode and Music mode:
Pro Logic II Movie—suitable for reproduction of Dolby Surround
DOLBY SURROUND . You can enjoy a
encoded sources bearing the mark
sound field very close to the one created with discrete 5.1 channel
sounds.
Pro Logic II Music—suitable for reproduction of any 2-channel stereo
music sources. You can enjoy wide and deep sound by using this
mode. For this mode, Panorama control can be selected, which gives
“wraparound” sound effect with side-wall image.
• When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the
on the display.
PLII indicator lights up
Dolby Digital*
MIN
MAX
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and
decoding (1 channel up to 5.1 channel).
Dolby Digital 5.1 channel encoding method records and digitally
compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel,
left surround channel, right surround channel, and LFE channel
signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is counted as 0.1
channel. Therefore, it is called 5.1 channel).
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.
• To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the source
component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver.
(See pages 8 and 12.)
NOTE
Dolby Digital software can be roughly grouped into two categories
—multi-channel (up to 5.1 channel) and 2 channel software. To enjoy
surround sound while playing Dolby Digital 2 channel software, you
can use Dolby Pro Logic II.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
**“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
26
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
26
03.5.16, 16:16
DTS**
The following DAP modes are provided with this receiver:
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel encoding
and decoding.
DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio
format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a
lower audio compression rate, which enables it to add breadth and
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround
features natural, solid and clear sound.
• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround, connect
the source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this
receiver. (See pages 8 and 12.)
■ DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) modes
DAP modes have been designed to create important acoustic
surround elements.
The sound heard in a live club, dance club, hall or pavilion consists of
direct sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the
distances of the ceiling and walls (see the diagram below).
These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic
surround effects. The DAP mode can create these important
elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.
LIVE CLUB:
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club
with a low ceiling.
DANCE CLUB:
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance
club.
HALL:
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a hall for
classical recitals.
PAVILION:
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition
hall.
These DAP modes can be used to add acoustic surround effects
while reproducing 2 channel stereo software, either analog or Linear
PCM digital signal, and can give you a real “being there” feeling.
• When one of the DAP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights
up on the display.
All Channel Stereo
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
All Channel Stereo can be used when the front and surround
speakers are connected to this receiver without respect to the
center speaker connection.
• If the center speaker is connected and activated, the same phase of
the front left and right signals are mixed and output through the
center speaker.
All Channel Stereo can be used while reproducing 2 channel stereo
software, either analog or Linear PCM digital signal.
• When All Channel Stereo is selected, the DSP indicator lights up on
the display.
Reflections from behind
Early reflections
Direct sounds
Normal stereo
reproduction
DAP modes can be used when the front and surround speakers
are connected to this receiver (without respect to the center
speaker connection: no sound comes out of the center speaker
even if it is connected).
Sound reproduced from All
Channel Stereo
NOTE
MPEG Multichannel signals cannot be reproduced.
䡬: Possible ⳯: Impossible
Available Surround/DSP modes for each input signal
Mode
STEREO
DOLBY
DIGITAL
LIVE
CLUB
DANCE
CLUB
HALL
PAVILION
ALL CH
ST.
Dolby Digital
(Multi-channel)
䡬
䡬
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
Dolby Digital
(2-channel)
䡬
⳯
⳯
䡬
䡬
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
DTS Digital
Surround
(Multi-channel)
䡬
⳯
䡬
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
DTS Digital
Surround
(2-channel)
䡬
⳯
⳯
䡬
䡬
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
Linear PCM
䡬
⳯
⳯
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
Analog
䡬
⳯
⳯
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
䡬
DVD MULTI
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
⳯
Signals
DTS
PRO LOGIC II PRO LOGIC II
SURROUND MOVIE
MUSIC
27
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
27
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Creating realistic sound fields
English
Creating realistic sound fields
About relations between speaker layout
and Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes will vary depending on how many
speakers are used with this receiver.
Make sure that you have set the speakers information correctly
(see pages 16 to 19).
• If only front speakers are connected, you cannot use the Surround
modes.
• If surround speakers are not connected, you cannot use DSP
modes.
When multi-channel digital software such as Dolby Digital or DTS
Digital Surround is played back, the appropriate multichannel
Surround mode is automatically activated (“DOLBY D” or “DTS”) by
pressing SURROUND (with the digital input mode selected).
• For Dolby Digital 2 channel software, you can select “PLII MUSIC”
or ”PLII MOVIE” by pressing SURROUND.
• For more details, see “Available Surround/DSP modes for each
input signal” on page 27.
Using Surround modes
Once you have adjusted the Surround modes, the adjustment is
memorized for each source.
• If you set the speaker information using Smart Surround Setup (see
page 16), you do not have to adjust speaker output level.
When operating this receiver using the
remote control, always set the mode
selector to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
Before you start, remember...
Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see
pages 16 to 19).
From the remote control:
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
TREBLE
2
3
BASS
7
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
TREBLE
5
6
8
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
When connecting 5 speakers and 4 speakers
Front
TV
Front
Front
Surround
Surround
Center
TV
It will be convenient for you to use the
remote control for the sound
adjustments, since you can make
adjustments from your listening point,
and use the test signal.
• For selecting Panorama control for
Pro Logic II Music, use the buttons
on the front panel.
Front
1 Select and play software you like.
Surround
Surround
Available Surround modes:
PLII MOVIE (Pro Logic II MOVIE)
PLII MUSIC (Pro Logic II MUSIC)
If “AUTO SR (Auto Surround)” is set to “ON”
Playing a digital source automatically activates an appropriate
Surround mode. (See page 21.) → Go to step 3.
2 Press SURROUND to select an appropriate
Surround mode.
Available DSP modes:
• Each time you press the button, the Surround/DSP modes
change as follows:
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
HALL
PAVILION
ALL CH ST. (All Channel Stereo)
When playing back multi-channel digital software such as
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround:
L
C
R
SUBWFR LFE
DOLBY D
LS
RS
VOL
When connecting 3 speakers
TV
Front
Center
DOLBY D or DTS
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
Front
When playing back 2 channel digital software such as
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround:
PLII MUSIC
PLII MOVIE
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
Available Surround modes:
PLII MOVIE (Pro Logic II MOVIE)
PLII MUSIC (Pro Logic II MUSIC)
NOTE
When “AUTO SR (Auto Surround)” is turned “ON” (see page 21),
Surround mode is automatically activated when you select and start
playing back a multi-channel digital source.
When playing back any software other than above:
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
(Back to the beginning)
28
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
28
03.5.16, 16:16
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
On the front panel:
3 Press TEST to check the speakers output
balance.
• No test tone is available when using the buttons on the front panel.
“TEST L” starts flashing on the display, and a test tone comes out
of the speakers as follows:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
L
LPCM
PL ΙΙ
R
SUBWFR
VOL
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
TEST C
TEST L
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
TEST R
(Left front speaker) (Center speaker) (Right front speaker)
TEST LS
TEST RS
(Left surround speaker) (Right surround speaker)
4 Adjust the following speaker output levels
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
• Make adjustments so that the sound level of the selected
speaker is set at the same level as that of the front speakers.
1 Select and play software you like.
If “AUTO SR (Auto Surround)” is set to “ON”
Playing a digital source automatically activates an appropriate
Surround mode. (See page 21.) → Go to step 4.
2 Press SURROUND.
To adjust the center speaker level,
press CENTER +/–.
To adjust the left surround speaker level,
press SURR L +/–.
To adjust the right surround speaker level,
press SURR R +/–.
MULTI JOG now works for the Surround/DSP mode selection.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select an appropriate
Surround mode.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
L
LPCM
R
PL ΙΙ
SUBWFR
VOL
When playing back multi-channel digital software such as
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround:
Ex.: When selecting “+8 (dB)” for “CENTER.”
L
C
R
SUBWFR LFE
DOLBY D
LS
5 Press TEST again to stop the test tone.
The currently selected source name appears on the display.
RS
VOL
DOLBY D or DTS
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
When playing back 2 channel digital software such as
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround:
PLII MUSIC
PLII MOVIE
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
When playing back any software other than above:
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
(Back to the beginning)
4 Press ADJUST.
MULTI JOG now works for the sound adjustment.
5 Turn MULTI JOG until the setting item you want
to set appears on the display, then press SET.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
L
LPCM
PL ΙΙ
R
SUBWFR
VOL
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT
B.BOOST
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA*
(Back to the beginning)
ATT
* Available only for “PLII MUSIC.”
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
29
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
29
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Creating realistic sound fields
English
Creating realistic sound fields
CENTER*1:
To adjust the center speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
Using DSP modes
SURR L*1:
To adjust the left surround speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
SURR R*1:
To adjust the right surround speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
Once you have adjusted the DSP modes, the adjustment is
memorized for each source.
• You cannot use the DSP modes if no surround speakers are
connected.
• You cannot adjust the effect level for “ALL CH ST.”
PANORAMA control*2:
• Select “ON” when you would like to enjoy
“wraparound” sound effect with side-wall image.
• Select “OFF” when you would like to hear
originally recorded sound.
When operating this receiver using the
remote control, always set the mode
selector to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
Before you start, remember...
Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see
pages 16 to 19).
*1 “0” is the initial setting for each speaker setting.
*2 “OFF” is the initial setting.
6 Turn MULTI JOG to adjust the item selected in
step 5, then press SET.
From the remote control:
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
Your setting is stored.
• When adjusting the speaker output levels, make adjustments so
that the sound level of the selected speaker is set at the same
level as that of the front speakers.
1
TREBLE
2
3
BASS
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
4
5
7
8
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
KEY
It will be convenient for you to use
the remote control for the sound
adjustments, since you can make
adjustments from your listening
point, and use the test signal.
TREBLE
10
0
+10
VOCAL
EFFECT
3D
REPEAT
DIMMER
L
LPCM
R
PL ΙΙ
SUBWFR
VOL
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
Ex.: When selecting “+8 (dB)” for “CENTER.”
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust the other
settings.
1 Start playing 2 channel software—either Linear
PCM or analog signal—and select the source.
To cancel Surround mode
Press SURROUND repeatedly on the remote control or press
SURROUND then turn MULTI JOG on the front panel so that
“STEREO” appears on the display.
• If Surround mode is canceled while playing back multi-channel
digital software, all channel signals are mixed and output through
the front speakers (and subwoofer if you have connected a
subwoofer and set the subwoofer setting correctly—“USE” for Quick
Setup or “YES” for Manual Setup—see pages 17 and 18).
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly until one of the
DSP modes you want to apply appears on the
display.
The DSP indicator lights up on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the DSP modes change as
follows:
L
LPCM
R
DSP
SUBWFR
VOL
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
NOTES
• You can adjust the speaker output levels using the remote control
without outputting the test tone.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and no test tone
comes out of the center speaker when “CNTR SP” is set to “NO.”
• You cannot adjust the surround speaker output levels and no test
tone comes out of the surround speakers when “SURR SP” is set
to “NO.”
• Remember not to change the speaker setting while using any
Surround modes; otherwise, the Surround mode may be canceled
when you deactivate the speakers required for it .
• You cannot use any Surround modes when selecting DVD MULTI
as a playback source.
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
(Back to the beginning)
3 Press TEST to check the speakers output
balance.
“TEST L” starts flashing on the display, and a test tone comes out
of the speakers as follows:
L
LPCM
R
SUBWFR
DSP
VOL
TEST L
TEST C
TEST R
(Left front speaker) (Center speaker) (Right front speaker)
TEST LS
TEST RS
(Left surround speaker) (Right surround speaker)
30
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
30
03.5.16, 16:16
5 Turn MULTI JOG until the setting item you want
4 Adjust the surround speaker output levels
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
to set appears on the display, then press SET.
• Make adjustments so that the sound level of the selected
speaker is set at the same level as that of the front speakers.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
L
LPCM
R
DSP
SUBWFR
VOL
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT*
B.BOOST
R
DSP
SUBWFR
L
LPCM
To adjust the left surround speaker level,
press SURR L +/–.
To adjust the right surround speaker level,
press SURR R +/–.
VOL
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA
(Back to the beginning)
ATT
* Available only for DAP modes.
Ex.: When selecting “–8 (dB)” for “SURR R.”
5 Press TEST again to stop the test tone.
SURR L*1:
To adjust the left surround speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
6 Only for DAP modes:
SURR R*1:
To adjust the right surround speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
Press EFFECT to select the DAP effect level (1 to
5) you want.
• As the number increases, the DAP effect becomes stronger
(normally set it to “EFFECT 3”).
L
LPCM
R
*1 “0 (dB)” is the initial setting for each speaker setting.
*2 “3” is the initial setting.
DSP
SUBWFR
VOL
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
EFFECT 2
EFFECT (available only for DAP modes) *2:
To adjust the DAP effect level.
As the number increases, the effect becomes
stronger (normally set it to “EFFECT 3”).
EFFECT 5
6 Turn MULTI JOG to adjust the item selected in
step 5, then press SET.
EFFECT 1
Your setting is stored.
• When adjusting the speaker output levels, make adjustments so
that the sound level of the selected speaker is set at the same
level as that of the front speakers.
On the front panel:
• No test tone is available when using the buttons on the front panel.
L
LPCM
DIMMER
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
SUBWFR
R
DSP
PHONES
VOL
STANDBY / ON
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
Ex.: When selecting “–8 (dB)” for “SURR R.”
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust the other
settings.
1 Start playing 2 channel software—either Linear
PCM or analog signal—and select the source.
2 Press SURROUND.
MULTI JOG now works for the Surround/DSP mode selection.
To cancel DSP Modes
Press SURROUND repeatedly on the remote control or press
SURROUND then turn MULTI JOG on the front panel so that
“STEREO” appears on the display. The DSP indicator goes off from
the display.
3 Turn MULTI JOG until one of the DSP modes you
want to apply appears on the display.
The DSP indicator lights up on the display.
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
L
LPCM
SUBWFR
R
DSP
VOL
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO (Surround/DSP off)
NOTES
• You can adjust the speaker output levels using the remote control
without outputting the test tone.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and no test tone
comes out of the center speaker when “CNTR SP” is set to “NO.”
• You cannot adjust the surround speaker output levels and no test
tone comes out of the surround speakers when “SURR SP” is set
to “NO.”
(Back to the beginning)
4 Press ADJUST.
MULTI JOG now works for the sound adjustment.
31
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
31
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Creating realistic sound fields
English
RX-ES1SL
Using the DVD MULTI playback mode
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing
the analog discrete output mode (5.1 channel reproduction) of the
DVD player.
In addition, the DVD MULTI playback mode can be used for
reproducing a DVD Audio sound.
Before playing back a DVD, refer also to the manual supplied with the
DVD player.
• When using the DVD MULTI playback mode, connect the DVD
player with its analog discrete output jacks to the DVD IN jacks on
the rear panel (see page 11).
• DVD MULTI playback mode cannot be used for XV-NK58SL.
On the front panel:
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
1 Press ADJUST.
When operating this receiver using the
remote control, always set the mode selector
to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
MULTI JOG now works for the sound adjustment.
2 Turn MULTI JOG until the setting item you want
to set appears on the display, then press SET.
Activating the DVD MULTI playback mode
• As you turn MULTI JOG, the indication changes as follows:
ANALOG
On the front panel:
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
STANDBY
L
C
R
SUBWFR LFE
LS
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until “DVD MULTI”
appears on the display.
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT
B.BOOST
2 Select the analog discrete output mode on the
DVD player, and start playing a DVD.
The DVD MULTI indicator lights in red.
OPEN/CLOSE
To adjust the center speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
SURR L*:
To adjust the left surround speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
SURR R*:
To adjust the right surround speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
2 Select the analog discrete output
mode on the DVD player, and start
playing a DVD.
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
TV VOL
CHANNEL
TUNING
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA
(Back to the beginning)
ATT
CENTER*:
The DVD MULTI indicator lights in red.
From the remote control:
1 Press DVD MULTI.
VOL
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
RS
MUTING
3 Turn MULTI JOG to adjust the item selected in
step 2, then press SET.
VOLUME
FM MODE
* “0 (dB)” is the initial setting.
Your setting is stored.
• Make adjustments so that the sound level of the selected
speaker is set at the same level as that of the front speakers.
TUNING
ANALOG
Adjusting the speaker output level
L
C
R
SUBWFR LFE
LS
You can adjust the speaker output level while playing a DVD using the
analog discrete output mode on the DVD player.
Once you have adjusted the sound, the adjustment is memorized.
• The test tone does not output through the speakers to adjust the
speakers output levels when selecting DVD MULTI.
RS
VOL
Ex.: When selecting “+8 (dB)” for “CENTER.”
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
settings.
From the remote control:
It will be convenient for you to use the remote control for the sound
adjustments, since you can make adjustments from your listening point.
Adjust the following speaker output
levels (from –10 dB to +10 dB).
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
5
7
8
KEY
• Make adjustments so that the sound level of
the selected speaker is set at the same level
as that of the front speakers.
To adjust the center speaker level,
press CENTER +/–.
To adjust the left surround speaker level,
press SURR L +/–.
To adjust the right surround speaker level,
press SURR R +/–.
2
BASS
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
3
TREBLE
6
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
NOTES
9
100+
TV RETURN
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
• When you select DVD MULTI as a source to play, the selected
Surround/DSP mode is canceled, and the SURROUND button does
not work.
• When using a pair of headphones, the sounds of front left and right
channels are output from the headphones.
32
EN26-32RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
32
03.5.16, 16:16
01_Before_operation.fm Page 33 Monday, August 18, 2003 4:50 PM
XV-NK58SL
About this manual
• Discs of irregular shape or discs with tape, seals or paste on
either the label side or playback side. Playing back these discs
may damage the player.
• The display window information and OSD (On Screen Display)
menu items are put in brackets [ ] in the operation procedures.
• Usable disc(s) for each operation/function is (are) referred to by
the icons;
Digital audio formats
The player supports the following digital audio formats (see page
64 “Appendix D: Glossary” for descriptions of each audio format):
Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, MPEG Multichannel, DTS (Digital
Theater Systems)
About discs
NOTE
Depending on the player’s [DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT] setting,
digital audio signals may not be output as they are recorded on
the disc. See “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” on page 59 for details.
Playable disc types
Discs with the following marks can be played back on the player.
DVD VIDEO
SVCD
Video CD
Audio CD
VIDEO
The DVD Logo is a trademark.
The player can also play back the following discs:
• DVD-R and DVD-RW discs written in the DVD VIDEO format
and finalized
• CD-R and CD-RW discs written in the SVCD, Video CD or
Audio CD format and finalized
• CD-R and CD-RW discs written in MP3 or WMA in accordance
with the “ISO 9660” format (See page 47 for details.)
• CD-R and CD-RW discs written in JPEG in accordance with the
“ISO 9660” format (See page 49 for details.)
NOTE
If a disc gets dirty, scratched or warped, or due to the disc
characteristics or recording conditions, it may take considerable
time for the player to read the content, or the player may not be
able to play back such discs.
The player can play back audio signals recorded in MIX-MODE
CD, CD-G, CD-EXTRA and CD TEXT.
Region code of DVD VIDEO
DVD VIDEO players and DVD VIDEO discs have their own
Region Code numbers. This player can play back DVD VIDEO
discs whose Region Code numbers include the player’s Region
Code, which is indicated on the region code symbol on the rear
panel.
Example of playable DVD discs when the player’s Region Code is
“2”:
ALL
2
25
1 2
3 4
123
456
Color system format
This player is compatible with the PAL and NTSC systems. You
can select “PAL” or “NTSC” while using the PAL/NTSC selector
on the rear panel (for details, see page 9).
Notes on discs
• With some DVD VIDEO discs, the player starts playback
automatically after inserting the disc.
• The image may be sometimes poor or noisy due to defects in
the disc itself.
• With some discs, operations described in this manual may not
be possible.
Care and handling of discs
If a disc gets dirty, dusty, scratched or warped, playback sound
and picture may be deteriorated. Take proper precautions when
handling discs.
Handling
• Do not touch the surface of the disc.
• Do not damage, stick paper to, or use any adhesive on either
the label side or playback side.
Storing discs
• Keep discs in their cases. If discs are piled on top of one
another without their protective cases, they can be damaged.
• Do not put discs in a location where they may be exposed to
direct sunlight, or where the humidity or temperature is high.
Avoid leaving discs in a car!
Cleaning discs
• Wipe with a soft dry cloth, moving from the center outwards. If a
disc is difficult to clean, wipe with a cloth moistened with water.
• Never use record cleaners, petrol, alcohol or any anti-static
agents.
Notes on copyright
Check the copyright laws in your country before recording from
DVD VIDEO, SVCD, Video CD, Audio CD, MP3, WMA and JPEG
discs.
Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.
Unplayable discs
The player does not play back discs listed below. If you try to play
back these discs, noise may generate causing damage to
speakers.
• DVD-RW discs written in the VR format
• DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD AUDIO, CD-ROM, PHOTO CD,
SACD
In addition, the player does not play:
• Unfinalized discs
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
33
English
Before operation
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 34 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
English
Basic operations
NOTE
Even if you turn off the player, the player is not disconnected
from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall
outlet. This state is called standby mode. In this state, the player
consumes a very small amount of power.
Initial setup
When you turn on the player for the first time after purchase, the
following message appears on the TV screen.
EXECUTE DVD PLAYER SETUP? - BASIC PICTURE/AUDIO
SETTING
YES - PRESS ENTER NO - CANCEL
You can set the display language, TV monitor type and digital
output before using the player, by following the procedure below.
1
Press ENTER.
The first page of the DVD PLAYER SET UP display appears.
The pull-down menu of the [ON SCREEN LANGUAGE] is
already open.
NOTE
DVD PLAYER SET UP
When operating the player, set the mode
selector to “DVD.”
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
CHINESE
SPANISH
SELECT
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
ENTER
About invalid operation icon
When you press a button, and if the player does not accept its
operation,
appears on your TV screen. Operations are
occasionally unacceptable even if
is not displayed.
Note that some operations may not be accepted. For example,
some discs may not allow rapid advance/reverse or slowmotion playback.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE options
2
Press 5/∞ to select the desired language.
You can select the on-screen language for the preference
displays, etc. from among ENGLISH, CHINESE and
SPANISH.
3
Press ENTER.
The second page is shown, in which the pull-down menu of
the [MONITOR TYPE] is already open.
Turning on/off the player
Press DVD
on the remote control unit or
press
on the front panel.
DVD PLAYER SET UP
MONITOR TYPE
The STANDBY/ON indicator on the front panel, which lights
in red during standby, lights in green.
The left and right sides of the display window are illuminated.
4:3 L.B.
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
MP3&WMA/JPEG
The opening display appears on the TV screen, and the following
messages may appear at the bottom of the opening display.
SELECT
16:9 NORMAL
AUTO AUTO
16:9
4:3 LB
ON
4:3 PS
MP3 MULTI NORMAL
16:9
16:9 MULTI AUTO
4:3 MULTI LB
4:3 MULTI PS
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
ENTER
MONITOR TYPE options
4
NOW READING
Message area
• NOW READING (The player is reading the disc information.)
• REGION CODE ERROR! (The region code of the DVD VIDEO
disc does not match the player. The disc cannot be played
back.)
• OPEN
• CLOSE
• NO DISC
34
Press 5/∞ to select the desired monitor type.
For a normal (conventional) TV, select [4:3 LB] or [4:3 PS].
For a wide-screen TV, select [16:9 NORMAL] or [16:9
AUTO]. (See page 58.)
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 35 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
5
English
Basic operations
Press ENTER.
The third page is shown, in which the pull-down menu of the
[DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT] is already open.
Basic playback
DVD PLAYER SET UP
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
ANALOG DOWN MIX
DOLBY PROLOGIC
DOLBY
DIGITAL/PCM
D RANGE CONTROL
STREAM/PCM
ON
OUTPUT LEVEL
SELECT
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
1
Press 0 (or OPEN/CLOSE on the remote
control unit) to open the disc tray.
2
Place a disc in the disc tray.
ENTER
With the label side up
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT options
6
Press 5/∞ to select a desired digital output
signal type.
Set this item correctly when you connect the player to an
external surround decoder or D/A converter. (If you do not
connect the player to such a device, you do not have to set
this item.)
• When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder, select
[DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM].
• When connecting to a DTS decoder, select [STREAM/
PCM].
• When connecting to other digital device, select [PCM
ONLY].
7
Press ENTER.
The TV screen returns to the opening display.
To bring up the DVD PLAYER SET UP display later
Press CHOICE for a few seconds until the DVD PLAYER SET
UP display appears.
To change the brightness of the display window
Press DIMMER on the remote control unit.
You can select the display window brightness from three levels,
or off. If the brightness is set to off, nothing will be shown on
the display.
IVE
SS
RE
OG
PR
• To insert an 8-cm disc, place it in the inner recess.
3
Press 3.
The player starts playback from the beginning.
If a menu is shown on the TV screen
When inserting a DVD VIDEO, SVCD or Video CD disc, a menu
may be shown on the TV screen. From the menu, you can select
a desired item to be played back.
For DVD VIDEO
1 Press 5/∞/2/3 to select a desired item.
2 Press ENTER.
The player starts playback of the selected item.
For SVCD/Video CD
Press the numeric buttons to select a desired item.
The player starts playback of the selected item.
NOTES
• Do not insert an unplayable disc. (See page 33.)
• When inserting a disc on the disc tray, be sure to position the
disc inside the recess. Otherwise, the disc may be damaged
when the disc tray is closed, or you may not be able to remove
the disc from the player.
About PBC (Playback Control)
Some SVCD/Video CD discs support the PBC function.
The PBC function allows you to enjoy menu-driven operation
and high-resolution still images which have a resolution four
times greater than moving pictures.
• To play a PBC-compatible SVCD/Video CD disc without
activating the PBC function, press the numeric buttons
instead of 3 to start playback.
• To activate the PBC function again,
1) press TOP MENU or MENU,
or
2) press 7 to stop playback, then press 3.
35
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 36 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
Basic operations
About On-screen guide icons
You may see the following icons displayed over the picture.
They have the following meanings.
: Appears at the beginning of a scene recorded from
multiple angles (see page 43).
: Appears at the beginning of a scene recorded with
multiple audio languages (see page 43).
: Appears at the beginning of a scene recorded with
multiple subtitle languages (see page 43).
Resuming playback
The player can memorize the position on a disc where you
interrupt playback, and resume playback from that position later.
There are three resume modes; ON, OFF and DISC RESUME.
The mode is initially set to ON when you purchased the player.
• You can select the mode using the preference display (see
page 59).
When the resume mode is “ON”
To check the playback status
You can see the current selection number (the title/chapter
number for DVD VIDEO or track number for SVCD/Video CD/
Audio CD), time information (the track or chapter time while
stopped, or elapsed track or chapter time during playback) and
the transport status (stop, playback, pause, etc.) on the TV
screen.
Press ON SCREEN.
Example: for DVD VIDEO
Current chapter
number
Transfer rate
8.5Mbps
TITLE 33 CHAP 33
Current title number
Current transport
status
TOTAL 1:25:58
Current chapter
time
Note that pressing ON SCREEN again brings up the menu bar
under the status bar, from which you can access various
functions. See page 45 for details about the menu bar.
To turn off the status bar
Press ON SCREEN repeatedly until the status bar goes off.
When you press 7, the player stops playback and memorizes the
interrupted position. The TV screen shows [RESUME STOP] and
the [RESUME] indicator lights up in the display window.
The memory of the interrupted position is not cleared if you turn
off the player.
When you turn off the player after setting the resume function,
simply press 3. The player is turned on, and playback starts from
the interrupted position. If you turn on the player by pressing
then press 3, playback starts from the beginning of the disc.
Note that the memory is cleared if you open the disc tray.
When the resume mode is “DISC RESUME”
When you press 7, the player stops playback and memorizes the
interrupted position. The TV screen shows [RESUME STOP] and
the [RESUME] indicator lights up in the display window.
The memory of the interrupted position is not cleared if you open
the disc tray or turn off the player.
Hint
The player memorizes interrupted positions for the last 30 discs
played. Storing a new interrupted position will erase the
interrupted position stored for the first disc.
To clear the memory
To stop playback completely
Press 7.
Hint
If you press 0 during playback, the player stops playback and
opens the disc tray.
To stop playback temporarily
Press 8.
To resume playback, press 3. (See the following item.)
NOTE
When playback is stopped temporarily while the KARAOKE
function is turned on, the input signal from the MIC jack is not
output.
36
Press 7 while the disc is stopped.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 37 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
To resume playback
English
Basic operations
Various speed playback
When the resume mode is “ON”
While the disc you interrupted playback is
still on the disc tray, press 3.
To advance or reverse playback rapidly
while monitoring
The player resumes playback from the position where
playback was interrupted. The TV screen shows [RESUME
PLAY].
To play back from the beginning
Press 7 before pressing 3 to start playback.
During playback, press ¡ or 1 on the
remote control unit.
When the resume mode is “DISC RESUME”
You can select from 1.5 times, 5 times, 20 times and 60
times normal speed. Pressing 3 returns the player to normal
playback.
1
Press 0 to insert a disc for which the player
has stored an interrupted position.
The TV screen shows [RESUME STOP].
2
Press 3.
The TV screen shows [RESUME PLAY] and the player
resumes playback from the position where playback was
interrupted.
To play back from the beginning
After inserting the disc, press 7 before pressing 3 to start
playback.
During playback, hold down ¢ or 4.
Playback is advanced or reversed at 5 times normal speed.
NOTE
During rapid playback, the sound will be muted except when
playing an Audio CD, and when playing a DVD VIDEO or Video
CD at 1.5 times normal speed. For Audio CD discs, the sound will
be heard intermittently.
x1.5 Quick Playback with sound
NOTES
• If you change the [RESUME] setting from [DISC RESUME] to
[OFF] or [ON], you cannot resume playback of a disc whose
“resuming” position is stored. However, when you again set
[RESUME] to [DISC RESUME], you will then be able to resume
playback of the disc.
• If you interrupt the playback of a disc for which an interrupted
position has already been stored, the memory will be updated
with the new interrupted position.
• For a double-sided DVD VIDEO disc, the player regards each
side as a different disc. Therefore, to resume playback of such
a disc, the disc must be inserted with the same side down.
• When the player memorizes an interrupted point for a disc, it
also memorizes Audio, Subtitle and Angle settings.
• The player may not resume playback exactly from the
interrupted point. In the case of an SVCD/Video CD disc with
PBC function, the player may resume playback from a point
slightly earlier or later than the point where playback was
interrupted.
When you select 1.5 times normal speed playback, the disc is
played back with sound.
• For DVD VIDEO discs, the subtitle does not go off.
• If the sound of a DVD VIDEO disc is recorded in Dolby Digital or
DTS format, stereo linear PCM signals are output. With some
DVD VIDEO discs, the sound quality and volume may alter, or
the sound may be out of tune.
• To switch from rapid reverse playback to x1.5 Quick Playback,
first press 3, then press ¡ once.
• When the KARAOKE function is turned on, no sound will be
heard during x 1.5 Quick Playback. Also, note that you cannot
change the KARAOKE function settings during x 1.5 Quick
Playback, though the input signalfrom the MIC jackis output
from the player.
To advance a still picture frame by frame
While paused, press 8.
Each time you press 8, the still picture advances to the next
frame.
Pressing 3 returns to normal playback.
37
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 38 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
Basic operations
Locating the beginning of a scene or
song
For DVD VIDEO: During playback, you can skip a chapter or title,
depending on the disc configuration.
For SVCD/Video CD: During playback without PBC function, you
can skip a track.
For Audio CD: During playback or while in stop mode, you can
skip a track.
To skip forward, press ¢.
To skip backward, press 4.
Using the numeric buttons
For DVD VIDEO/Audio CD: During playback or while in stop
mode
For SVCD/Video CD: During playback without PBC function or
while in stop mode
Press the numeric buttons to specify the
number.
To play back in slow motion
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
You can select from 1/32 times, 1/16 times, 1/4 times and 1/2
times normal speed.
During playback, press 8, then press ¡ (to
play forward slow motion), or 1 (to play
reverse slow motion, for DVD VIDEO disc
only).
Pressing 3 returns to normal playback.
NOTES
• During slow motion playback, the sound will be muted.
• Reverse slow motion playback is not possible for an SVCD and
Video CD.
• When a DVD VIDEO disc is played in reverse slow motion while
the KARAOKE function is turned on, the input signal from the
MIC jack is not output.
To replay the previous scenes (One touch
replay function)
During DVD VIDEO playback, press
The player starts playback from the beginning of the
selection.
NOTES
• Depending on the disc type and the player status, what is
specified differs:
Player
status
While
stopped
During
playback
Disc type
What is specified
DVD VIDEO
title
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
track
DVD VIDEO
chapter
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
track
• During DVD VIDEO playback, if a menu is shown on the TV
screen, the numeric buttons may be used for selecting an item
in the menu.
.
The playback position moves back 10 seconds before the
current position.
NOTES
• This function works only within the same title, though it works
between chapters.
• This function may not work with some DVD VIDEO discs.
• Before using this function while the KARAOKE function is
turned on, be sure to set the mode selector on the remote
control unit to “DVD.”
38
About screen saver function
A television monitor may have an image burned into it if a static
image is displayed for a long time. To prevent this, the player
automatically activates the screen saver function if a static
picture, such as an on-screen display or menu, is displayed for
over 5 minutes.
When the screen saver function is activated, the TV screen
gets darker.
Pressing any buttons will release the screen saver function.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 39 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
Locating a desired scene from the menu of
a SVCD/Video CD with PBC
Some SVCD/Video CD discs support the PBC function. PBC is
an abbreviation of “Playback Control.” Some SVCD/Video CD
discs recorded with PBC have their own menus, such as a list of
the songs of the disc. You can locate a specific scene by using
the PBC menu.
1
In stop mode, press 3 or TOP MENU.
A disc menu appears on the TV screen.
2
Press the numeric buttons to select the
desired item.
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
The player starts playback of the selected item.
To return to the menu, press RETURN.
NOTE
When operating the player, set the mode
selector to “DVD.”
Hint
If something like [NEXT] or [PREVIOUS] appears on the TV
screen, pressing ¢ advances to the next page, and pressing
4 returns to the previous page.
Playing from a specific position
Specifying a desired title
Locating a desired scene from the DVD
menu
1
During playback, press TITLE/GROUP.
[--] is shown in the title display area of the display window.
2
DVD VIDEO discs generally have their own menus which show
the disc contents. These menus contain various items such as
titles of movies, names of songs, or artist information, and display
them on the TV screen. You can locate a desired scene using the
DVD menu.
1
While a DVD VIDEO disc is inserted, press
TOP MENU or MENU.
The menu appears on the TV screen.
2
Press the numeric buttons to specify a title to
be played.
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
The player starts playback from the specified title.
NOTE
This function may not work with some DVD VIDEO discs.
Press 5/∞/2/3 to select a desired item, then
press ENTER.
The player starts playback of the selected item.
Hints
• Some DVD VIDEO discs may also have a different menu which
appears when MENU is pressed.
• See the instructions of each DVD VIDEO disc for its particular
menu.
• With some discs, you can select items by entering the
corresponding number using the numeric buttons, which may
cause the player to automatically start playback.
NOTE
The MENU button does not work while stopped.
39
English
Advanced operations
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 40 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
English
Advanced operations
3
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
The specified time is displayed in the pull-down menu.
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
Example (for DVD VIDEO)
To play back from 2(H):34(M):00(S)
Press 2, 3, then 4.
VOLUME
CHANNEL
TUNING
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
the desired time.
FM MODE
TIME 2:34: __
TUNING
MEMORY
MENU
TOP MENU
Example (for SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD)
To play back from 23(M):40(S)
Press 2, 3, then 4.
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
AUDIO
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KARAOKE SOUND
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
BASS
1
ZOOM
2
TREBLE
TIME
3
BASS
TREBLE
4
5
6
7
8
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
23:4_
You do not have to press “0” to enter the trailing zeros (for the
last two digits in the example above).
+10
To correct a mistake
Press 2 repeatedly to move back to the digit where you
entered a wrong number, and reenter the correct one.
4
Locating a desired position in the current
title or track (Time search)
Press ENTER.
The player starts playback from the specified time.
To dismiss the menu bar
Press ON SCREEN.
Hint
You can play a disc from the desired position by specifying the
time from the beginning of the current title (for DVD VIDEO) or
the disc (for SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD).
For DVD VIDEO/Audio CD: During playback or while in stop
mode
For SVCD/Video CD: In any condition except SVCD/Video CD
playback with PBC
1
Press ON SCREEN twice.
Press 2/3 to move
ENTER.
to
NOTES
• Some DVD VIDEO discs do not contain time information, and
the time search function cannot be used.
• The time search function cannot be used during program
playback.
Changing the playback order
The menu bar appears on the TV screen.
2
“10” and “+10” buttons are not used with this function.
, then press
The pull-down menu for entering time appears.
To play back in a specific order (Program
play)
Screen example for DVD VIDEO
TITLE 33 CHAP 33
8.5Mbps
OFF
CHAP.
TIME
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/5
1/3
_:__:__
1
Screen example for Audio CD
PROG.
TIME
RND.
In stop mode, press ON SCREEN twice.
The menu bar appears on the TV screen.
TRACK 33
OFF
By programming tracks, you can play up to 99 tracks in any order.
You may program the same track more than once.
TIME
25:58
2
Press 2/3 to move
to
PROG.
.
Screen example for Audio CD
__:__
TRACK 33
OFF
3
PROG.
TIME
25:58
RND.
Press ENTER.
The program table appears.
The [PRGM] indicator lights up in the display window.
40
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 41 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
4
Press the numeric buttons to specify tracks
in the desired order.
To play back in random order (Random play)
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
The total program time
1
In stop mode, press ON SCREEN twice.
The menu bar appears on the TV screen.
Total Program Time
PROGRAM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
3
7
4
3
5
6
00:25:12
TrackDisc
1
5
4
2
3
4
6
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
CANCEL DELETES THE LAST STEP. 7 DELETES ALL.
Selected track number
To correct the program
Press 5/∞ to move
to the track to be corrected, then
press CANCEL. The track is erased and the subsequent
programmed tracks move up.
Pressing 7 clears all the programmed tracks.
5
2
Press 2/3 to move
to
RND.
.
Screen example for Audio CD
TRACK 33
OFF
3
PROG.
TIME
25:58
RND.
Press ENTER.
The player starts random playback.
With an SVCD/Video CD disc, the menu bar is automatically
dismissed.
During random playback, the [RND] indicator lights up in the
display window.
After playing all tracks of the disc, the player stops the disc
and exits the random playback mode.
To stop and quit random playback
Press 7. The player stops playback and exits the random
playback mode.
Press 3 to start program playback.
With an Audio CD disc, the program table remains on the TV
screen during program playback. (Pressing ON SCREEN
brings up the status bar.)
When all of the programmed tracks have finished playback,
the player stops and the program table appears again.
Note that the program remains.
• During program playback, you cannot edit the program
contents.
To check the program contents
During playback, press 7. Playback stops and the program table
is shown.
When the player is playing back an Audio CD and the program
table is not shown, you can bring up the table by carrying out
steps 1 to 3.
During SVCD/Video CD playback, you can check the program
contents via the menu bar.
To stop program playback
Press 7.
To clear the program
While stopped and the program table is shown, press 7.
To exit the program mode
After clearing the program, press ON SCREEN.
NOTE
When the disc tray is opened or the player is turned off, the
program is cleared.
41
English
Advanced operations
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
03_Advanced_operations.fm Page 42 Monday, August 18, 2003 4:52 PM
English
Advanced operations
NOTE
The repeat playbak may not function with some discs, even if you
select one of the repeat modes.
To repeat a desired part (A-B repeat
playback)
First make sure:
• The player is in playback mode except SVCD/Video CD
playback with PBC.
1
Press ON SCREEN twice.
The menu bar appears on the TV screen.
2
Press 2/3 to move
ENTER.
to
, then press
The pull-down menu for repeat mode selection appears.
Repeat playback
3
4
To repeat the current selection or all tracks
Press 5/∞ to select [A-B].
Press ENTER at the beginning of the part you
want to repeat (point A).
The pull down menu disappears.
The repeat icon shows
5
For DVD VIDEO: During playback
For SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD: In any condition except SVCD/
Video CD playback with PBC
Press REPEAT.
If you press REPEAT in stop mode, press 3 to start
playback.
Each time you press REPEAT, the repeat mode cycles
among All repeat, Repeat 1 and off.
The indication on the display window shows the selected
repeat mode.
: Repeats the current title for DVD VIDEO or all tracks
for SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD.
1: Repeats the current chapter for DVD VIDEO or the
current track for SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD.
No indication: The repeat mode is off.
A window which indicates the current repeat mode will be
displayed on the TV screen. The mode indication on the window
is same as the one on the menu bar.
(Repeat mode example on the TV screen)
CHAP
To stop repeat playback
Press 7.
When a DVD VIDEO disc is set, the player stops playback and
quits the repeat mode.
When an SVCD, Video CD or Audio CD disc is set, the player
stops playback but does not quit the repeat mode.
To quit repeat playback
Press REPEAT until the repeat mode indicator goes off in the
display window.
Hint
When the program playback mode is active with an SVCD, Video
CD or Audio CD, the repeat mode changes in the same manner.
Note, however, that in the “
” mode the player repeats all the
programmed tracks instead of all tracks on the disc.
42
A-
.
Press ENTER at the end of the part you want
to repeat (point B).
A-B .
The repeat icon shows
The player locates “A” and starts repeat playback between
“A” and “B.”
The [
] indicator lights in the display window.
To quit A-B repeat playback
A-B , and press ENTER. The A-B
Press 2/3 to move
to
repeat mode turns off, then normal playback continues.
NOTES
• The A and B points must be set in the same title/track.
• The A-B repeat playback cannot be made when the KARAOKE
function is turned on.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 43 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
2
Changing the language, sound and
scene angle
English
Advanced operations
Press 5/∞ or AUDIO to select the desired
audio.
Each time you press 5/∞ or AUDIO, the audio changes.
For DVD VIDEO (example)
1/3 ENGLISH
To select the subtitle language (SUBTITLE)
2/3 FRENCH
3/3 SPANISH
For SVCD
ST1
Some DVD VIDEO and SVCD discs contain more than one
subtitle language. You can choose a desired one from them.
ST (Stereo)
At the beginning of the part where the subtitles are recorded,
appears on the TV screen (except when the [ON SCREEN
GUIDE] preference is set to [OFF]).
1/3
ENGLISH
Press 5/∞ or SUBTITLE to select the subtitle.
Each time you press 5/∞ or SUBTITLE, the subtitle
language changes.
3
R-1
L-2
R-2
3
L
R
Press ENTER.
You can hear the selected audio.
The audio selection window is dismissed.
During playback, press SUBTITLE.
The subtitle selection window appears on the TV screen.
2
L-1
For Video CD
Hint
1
ST2
NOTES
• The audio selection window will automatically disappear if you
do not change the audio for several seconds.
• For DVD VIDEO, the selected language may be abbreviated on
the TV screen. See “Appendix B: Table of languages and their
abbreviations” on page 63.
To select a scene angle of DVD VIDEO
(ANGLE)
Press ENTER.
Subtitles are displayed in the selected language.
The subtitle selection window is dismissed.
NOTES
• An SVCD disc can have up to four subtitles. Pressing 5/∞
cycles through those channels regardless of whether the
subtitles are recorded or not.
• The subtitle selection window will automatically disappear if you
do not change the subtitle for several seconds.
• For DVD VIDEO, the selected language may be abbreviated on
the TV screen. See “Appendix B: Table of languages and their
abbreviations” on page 63.
You can enjoy a variety of scene angles if the DVD VIDEO disc
contains “multi-angle” parts, where multiple cameras were used
to shoot the same scene from different angles.
Hint
At the beginning of a “multi-angle” part,
appears on the TV
screen (except when the [ON SCREEN GUIDE] preference is set
to [OFF]).
1
During playback, press ANGLE.
The angle selection window appears on the TV screen.
To change the audio language or sound
(AUDIO)
1/3
1
2
The audio selection setting allows you to change the audio
language of a movie, or to listen to karaoke with or without the
vocal.
Hint
At the beginning of the part where multiple audio tracks are
recorded,
appears on the TV screen (except when the [ON
SCREEN GUIDE] preference is set to [OFF]).
1
During playback, press AUDIO.
The audio selection window appears on the TV screen.
Press 5/∞ or ANGLE to select the desired
angle.
Each time you press 5/∞ or ANGLE, the angle changes.
3
Press ENTER.
You can see the picture from the selected angle.
The angle selection window is dismissed.
NOTE
The angle selection window will automatically disappear if you do
not change the angle for several seconds.
1/3
ENGLISH
43
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 44 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
English
Advanced operations
2
Press 2/3 to select the desired preset.
Each time you press the button, the VFP mode changes as
follows.
Set the video type most suitable to the current program or the
room conditions.
NORMAL
CINEMA
USER 1
USER 2
Selected preset
USER 1
GAMMA
+ 4
BRIGHTNESS
+ 4
CONTRAST
+13
SATURATION
+13
TINT
+13
SHARPNESS
+ 3
Y DELAY
+ 2
Parameter
[NORMAL]: for watching TV in a general room.
[CINEMA]: for watching a movie software in a room with
suppressed light.
[USER 1] [USER 2]: you can adjust parameters that affect
the picture character and store the settings as a user
preset. See the next step.
Special picture/sound effect
To zoom in pictures
3
1
During playback or while paused, press
ZOOM.
• GAMMA
Adjust this if the neutral color is bright or dark. The
brightness of dark and bright portion is maintained.
Available range: –4 (darkest) to +4 (brightest).
• BRIGHTNESS
Adjust this if the picture is bright or dark on the whole.
Available range: –16 (darkest) to +16 (brightest).
• CONTRAST
Adjust this if the far and near position is unnatural.
Available range: –16 to +16.
• SATURATION
Adjust this if the picture is whitish or blackish.
Available range: –16 (blackest) to +16 (whitest).
• TINT
Adjust this if the appearance of flesh tone is unnatural.
Available range: –16 to +16.
• SHARPNESS
Adjust this if the picture is indistinct.
Available range: 0 to +3.
• Y DELAY
Adjust this if the picture looks separately/overlapped.
Available range: –2 to +2.
Pressing ZOOM causes the player to zoom in on the image.
At the top left of the screen, the information for the current
magnification appears for about 5 seconds.
Each time you press ZOOM, the magnification is doubled
(1.8, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 times).
ZOOM x 4
When a picture of a DVD VIDEO disc is viewed on a normal
TV screen (4:3, Letter Box), black bars may appear at the top
and bottom of the screen. In this case, if you select the
“ZOOM x1.8” mode, the black bars become almost invisible.
When a 1:2.35 or 1:1.85 DVD VIDEO source is played back,
however, the black bars are visible on the screen.
2
Press 5/∞/2/3 to move the zoomed position.
To return to the normal playback
Press ENTER.
To define a user setting, press 5/∞ to select
a parameter to be edited from the following.
4
Press ENTER.
A window for setting parameters appears.
NOTES
SATURATION
• While zoomed, the picture may look coarse.
• When the KARAOKE function is turned on, you cannot zoom in
pictures even if the mode selector on the remote control unit is
set to “DVD.”
To adjust the picture character (VFP)
+ 4
Selected parameter
5
Press 5/∞ to adjust the level of the
parameter.
The higher value enhances the effect.
6
The VFP (Video Fine Processor) function allows you to adjust the
picture character according to the type of programming, picture
tone or personal preferences.
1
During playback, press VFP.
The VFP mode selection window appears on the TV screen.
44
Press ENTER.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 if you want to set other parameters.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 45 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
English
Advanced operations
To dismiss the VFP mode selection window
Menu bar functions
Press VFP.
NOTES
• The window for VFP mode selection and parameter setting
disappear if no operation is made for about 10 seconds.
• When the KARAOKE function is turned on, the VFP function
cannot be activated even if the mode selector on the remote
control unit is set to “DVD.”
To bring up the menu bar
To simulate surround sound (3D PHONIC)
2
1
When a disc is inserted, press ON SCREEN.
A status bar for the type of disc inserted will appear on the TV
screen.
See page 36 for details about the status bar.
Press ON SCREEN again.
A menu bar for the type of disc inserted will appear under the
status bar.
(for DVD VIDEO)
Using the 3D PHONIC function, you can get a simulated
surround effect from your stereo system.
1
During playback, press 3D.
The 3D PHONIC window appears on the TV screen.
2
THEATER
1/3
OFF
NONE
1/3
PROG.
RND.
PROG.
RND.
PROG.
RND.
ST1
TIME
25:58
-/4
(for Video CD)
TRACK 33
OFF
ACTION
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/5
TRACK 33
Each time you press the button, the 3D PHONIC mode
changes as follows:
DRAMA
CHAP.
(for SVCD)
Press 2/3 to select the desired mode.
ACTION
TITLE 33 CHAP 33
8.5Mbps
OFF
TIME
25:58
TIME
25:58
ST
+45
(for Audio CD)
Selected effect mode
TRACK 33
OFF
• ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports programs in which the
sound source moves.
• DRAMA
Natural and warm sound. You can enjoy movies in a relaxed
mood.
• THEATER
You can enjoy sound effects like in a theater.
3
Press 5/∞ to adjust the effect level.
You can set the effect level from [1] to [5].
The higher value enhances the effect.
To dismiss the menu bar and status bar
Press ON SCREEN.
Basic operation procedure
1
Press 2/3 to select the icon you want to
work with.
The selected icon is pointed by
To dismiss the 3D PHONIC window
Press 3D.
NOTES
• The 3D PHONIC window disappears if no operation is made for
about 10 seconds.
• The 3D PHONIC function works correctly only when playing
back a DVD VIDEO disc recorded with Dolby Digital.
• When playing back a DVD VIDEO disc recorded with Dolby
Digital that does not contain the rear signal, you can change the
3D PHONIC setting, but you will not be able to achieve a correct
3D effect.
• The 3D PHONIC function does not affect the Dolby Digital
bitstream signal from the DIGITAL OUT jack.
• When the 3D PHONIC function is active, the [ANALOG DOWN
MIX] setting in the [AUDIO] setting display is not available.
• When the KARAOKE function is turned on, the 3D PHONIC
function is deactivated.
2
.
Press ENTER.
With many icons, an appropriate pull-down window appears,
however, there are some exceptions.
NOTES
• A mark or text on the menu icon for the function or mode
currently selected is shown in green.
• Some functions are not available during playback. (You cannot
move
to the associated icon when it is not available.)
45
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 46 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
English
Advanced operations
Menu bar functions for DVD VIDEO
Menu bar functions for SVCD/Video CD/
Audio CD
Time mode selection
During playback, selects the time mode shown in the display
window and in the status bar.
Press ENTER to select the time mode from the following.
• TOTAL: Current title elapsed time
• T.REM: Current title remaining time
• TIME: Current chapter elapsed time
• REM: Current chapter remaining time
Repeat mode (See also page 42)
Time mode selection
Selects the time mode shown in the display window and in the
status bar.
Press ENTER to select the time mode from the following.
• TIME: Current track elapsed time
• REM: Current track remaining time (while in stop mode,
current track total time)
• TOTAL: Disc elapsed time
• T.REM: Disc remaining time (while in stop mode, disc total time)
Selects the repeat mode during playback.
Repeat mode (See also page 42)
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select the repeat mode from the following.
• CHAPTER: Current chapter repeat
• TITLE:
Current title repeat
• A-B:
A-B repeat
• OFF:
Repeat mode deactivated
3. Press ENTER to make the selected repeat function active.
Time search (See also page 40)
Selects the repeat mode.
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select the repeat mode from the following.
• TRACK: Current track repeat
• ALL:
All track repeat
• A-B:
A-B repeat
• OFF:
Repeat mode deactivated
3. Press ENTER to make the selected repeat function active.
Specifies a time from the beginning of the current title as the
point from which to begin playback.
CHAP.
Chapter search
During playback, specifies a desired chapter to be played back
from.
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter a desired chapter
number. (For example, to specify “10,” press 1, then 0.)
3. Press ENTER to begin playback from the specified chapter.
Audio selection (See also page 43)
During playback, selects the audio language or sound track.
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select a desired audio language or sound track.
3. Press ENTER to begin playback with the selected audio.
Subtitle selection (See also page 43)
During playback, selects the subtitle language.
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select a desired subtitle language.
3. Press ENTER to begin playback with the selected subtitle.
Angle selection (See also page 43)
During playback, selects a desired scene angle in a multi-angle
part.
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select a scene angle.
3. Press ENTER to begin playback with the selected scene angle.
46
Time search (See also page 40)
Specifies a time from the beginning of the disc as the point from
which to begin playback.
PROG.
Program playback (See also pages 40 and 41)
While stopped, specifies the playback order of tracks.
RND.
Random playback (See also page 41)
While stopped, activates random playback.
Audio selection (See also page 43)
During SVCD/Video CD playback, selects the audio channel(s).
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select a desired audio channel(s).
3. Press ENTER to play back with the selected audio channel(s).
Subtitle selection (See also page 43)
During SVCD playback, selects the subtitle.
1. Open the pull-down window.
2. Press 5/∞ to select a desired subtitle.
3. Press ENTER to begin playback with the selected subtitle.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 47 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
• As for MP3 files, we recommend you to record your material at
a 44.1 kHz sampling rate, using the 128 kbps data transfer rate.
• As for WMA files, make sure that the copyright feature is set to
off.
• As for WMA files, we recommend you to record your material at
a bit rate of 64 kbps or higher.
Basic operations
Use the following buttons to control MP3/WMA disc playback.
ENTER:
3:
7:
8:
4/¢:
Starts playback while stopped.
Starts playback while stopped or paused.
Stops playback.
Pauses playback.
Skips back or forward a track during playback.
Selects the previous or next track while stopped.
If you press 3 during playback, or press 7 to stop playback
followed by 3, the player starts playback from the beginning of
the current track.
NOTE
NOTES
When operating the player, set the mode
selector to “DVD.”
Operations
The player can play back MP3 files and WMA files on a home
recorded CD-R/RW disc or commercially available CD. We refer
to a disc that contains MP3 and/or WMA files as an “MP3/WMA
disc” in this manual.
Note that if a disc contains both of MP3/WMA files and JPEG
files, you can only play back files of the type selected by the
[MP3&WMA/JPEG] setting in the [PICTURE] preference display.
(see page 59).
About MP3/WMA discs
On an MP3/WMA disc, each song is recorded as a file (track).
Files are sometimes grouped into folders by artists, album, etc.
• Each file is regarded as a track.
• A folder which has one or more files is regarded as a group.
• A folder which does not directly contain any tracks is ignored.
• Files which do not belong to any folder are grouped into “group
1.”
• The player recognizes up to 150 tracks per group, and up to 99
groups per disc. If there are files other than MP3/WMA files,
they also count in the 150-file total.
Max. 99 groups per disc
Track 1.mp3
Track 2.mp3
Track 3.mp3
Group 1
Max.150 tracks
per group
Selecting the desired group and track
When inserting an MP3/WMA disc, after the disc contents are
read, the MP3/WMA CONTROL display automatically appears
on the TV screen.
You can specify the desired group/track from the display using
the following procedure.
1
Make sure that the black (cursor) bar is in the
left (group) column.
If it is in the right column, press 2 to move it to the left
column.
Group 2
Group 4
• The player does not support “packet writing (UDF format)”
discs.
• The player does not support the ID3 tag.
• The player supports discs recorded with multiple sessions.
• Some discs may not play due to disc characteristics or
recording conditions.
• Programmed and random playback functions do not work with
MP3/WMA discs.
• When an MP3/WMA disc is played back, the KARAOKE
function cannot be turned on.
• As for MP3, the player only can play back tracks with the
following file extensions; “.MP3,” “.Mp3,” “.mp3” and “.mP3.”
• As for WMA, the player only can play back tracks with the
following file extensions; “.WMA,” “.wma,” and any other
combination of upper case and lower case letters (such as
“.Wma”).
• Time required for reading the disc contents may vary for
different discs, depending on the numbers of groups (folders)
and tracks (files) recorded, etc.
• You cannot advance or reverse playback by pressing ¡ or
1, or by holding down ¢ or 4 during MP3/WMA disc
playback.
• The player supports WMA files recorded with a bit rate of 48
kbps or higher. The player cannot play back WMA files
recorded with a bit rate under 48 kbps.
2
Track 4.mp3
Track 5.mp3
Track 6.mp3
Group 3
Press 5/∞ to move the bar to a desired
group.
On the right column, tracks in the selected group are shown.
3
Press 4/¢ to select a desired track, then
press ENTER or 3.
or
Notes for making your own MP3/WMA disc using a
CD-R/CD-RW disc
Press the numeric buttons to directly specify
a desired track number.
• Select “ISO 9660” as the disc format.
To select 5: press 5.
47
English
MP3/WMA disc playback
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 48 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
MP3/WMA disc playback
2
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
Press the numeric buttons to specify a
desired group number.
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
The player starts playback from the selected track.
Specify the group number within several seconds after
pressing TITLE/GROUP (i.e. while the display window shows
[--]).
The player starts playback from track 1 of the selected group.
3
Press the numeric buttons to specify a
desired track number.
The player starts playback from the specified track.
You can also use 4/¢ or 5/∞ to specify a track, instead
of the numeric buttons.
Repeat playback
During playback or while stopped, press
REPEAT.
Current track elapsed time
MP3/WMA CONTROL
Time : 00:03:08
Group : 01 / 10
Track : 01 / 06 (Total 28)
spring
summer
fall
winter
sea
mountain
camp
picnic
skiing
flower
begonia.mp3
german chamomile.mp3
kiwi fruit.mp3
orchard grass.mp3
petunia.mp3
north pole.mp3
Each time you press REPEAT, the repeat mode changes as
follows.
If you press REPEAT while stopped, you need to press
ENTER or 3 to start repeat playback.
MP3/WMA
CONTROL
display
Display
window
REPEAT TRACK
1
Track column of the
current group
Repeats the current
track.
REPEAT GROUP
Repeats all tracks in
the current group.
REPEAT ALL
Repeats all tracks on
the disc.
No indication
Group column
Function
The repeat mode is off.
Selected track
(TV screen)
Selected repeat mode
Hint
You can also select a desired track by pressing 3 to move the
black bar to the right (track) column then using 5/∞.
NOTES
• If an MP3/WMA file name includes any 2-byte character, the
player cannot show the file name correctly.
• Only MP3/WMA files are shown on the MP3/WMA CONTROL
display.
• The order of groups/tracks shown in the MP3/WMA CONTROL
display may differ from the order shown on your personal
computer when you set the disc on your computer.
MP3/WMA CONTROL
REPEAT TRACK
Group : 01 / 10
Track : 01 / 06 (Total 28)
spring
summer
fall
begonia.mp3
german chamomile.mp3
kiwi fruit.mp3
To stop repeat playback
Press 7. Note that the repeat mode remains active.
To quit repeat playback
Direct selection
You can select a desired group directly by specifying the group
number.
1
During playback or while stopped, press
TITLE/GROUP.
[--] is shown in the group display area of the display window.
48
During playback, press REPEAT until no repeat icon is shown on
the display window.
While stopped, press REPEAT until repeat mode indication on
the MP3/WMA CONTROL display goes off.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 49 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
Notes for making your own JPEG disc using a CD-R/
CD-RW disc
• Select “ISO 9660” as the disc format.
• We recommend you to record your material at a 640 x 480 pixel
resolution.
• This player supports the baseline JPEG format.
Basic operations
To see a desired picture
When inserting a JPEG disc, after the disc contents are read, the
JPEG CONTROL display automatically appears on the TV
screen.
JPEG CONTROL
NOTE
When operating the player, set the mode
selector to “DVD.”
The player can play back JPEG files on a home recorded CD-R/
RW disc. We refer to a disc that contains JPEG files as a “JPEG
disc” in this manual.
Note that if a disc contains both of MP3/WMA files and JPEG
files, you can only play back files of the type selected by the
[MP3&WMA/JPEG] setting in the [PICTURE] preference display.
(see page 59).
Group : 01 / 10
File : 01 / 06 (Total 28)
spring
summer
fall
winter
sea
mountain
camp
picnic
skiing
flower
begonia.jpg
german chamomile.jpg
kiwi fruit.jpg
orchard grass.jpg
petunia.jpg
north pole.jpg
You can select a desired file for playback via this display.
1
Make sure that the black (cursor) bar is in the
left (group) column.
If it is in the right column, press 2 to move it to the left
column.
About JPEG discs
2
On a JPEG disc, each picture is recorded as a file. Files are
sometimes grouped into folders by category, etc.
• A folder which has one or more files is regarded as a group.
• A folder which does not directly contain any files is ignored.
• Files which do not belong to any folder are grouped into “group
1.”
• The player recognizes up to 150 files per group, and up to 99
groups per disc. If there are files other than JPEG files, they
also count against the 150-file total.
Max. 99 groups per disc
Press 5/∞ to move the bar to a desired
group.
On the right column, files in the selected group are shown.
3
Press 4/¢ to select a desired file, then
press ENTER.
The selected file (still picture) is shown on the TV.
Hint
You can also select a desired file by pressing 3 to move the
black bar to the right (file) column then using 5/∞.
NOTE
If the selected file is unplayable, a black screen appears.
File 1.jpg
File 2.jpg
File 3.jpg
Group 1
Press 4/¢ or 5/∞ to select the desired picture.
Group 2
Group 4
Max.150 files
per group
To display another picture
To dismiss the picture
File 4.jpg
File 5.jpg
File 6.jpg
Press 7 or MENU.
The TV screen returns to the JPEG CONTROL display.
Group 3
49
English
JPEG disc playback
05_JPEG_disc_playback.fm Page 50 Monday, August 18, 2003 4:48 PM
English
JPEG disc playback
Viewing pictures continuously (slide
show mode)
You can see files (still pictures) one after another automatically.
To start the slide show
Press 3.
The slide show starts from the beginning of the disc.
Each file (still picture) is displayed for approximately 3
seconds.
To stop slide show playback in the middle
Press 7 or MENU.
The TV screen returns to the JPEG CONTROL display.
Pressing 3 resumes slide show playback from the last picture
displayed.
To keep showing the current picture
NOTES
• The player supports the baseline JPEG format.
• The player does not support “packet writing (UDF format)”
discs.
• The player supports discs recorded with multiple sessions.
• The player may not be able to read some discs, or may take a
long time to display a picture on the disc, due to disc
characteristics, recording conditions, or numbers of groups
(folders), etc.
• Programmed and random playback functions do not work with
JPEG discs.
• When a JPEG disc is played back, the KARAOKE function
cannot be turned on.
• The screen saver function will be activated if the same picture is
displayed for more than 5 minutes except during slide show
playback.
• The player only can play back files with the following file
extensions; “.jpg,” “.jpeg,” “.JPG,” “.JPEG” and any other
combination of upper case and lower case letters (such as
“.Jpg”).
• If a JPEG file name includes any 2-byte character, the player
may not show the file name correctly.
• If a picture has been saved at greater than 640 x 480 pixel
resolution, it may take some time to display the picture.
• The player does not support pictures of more than 2400 pixels
in horizontal resolution. Make sure that the horizontal resolution
of the picture is 2400 pixels or less.
Press 8 or ENTER.
Pressing 3 resumes the slide show playback.
To select the start point of the slide show
From the JPEG CONTROL display
1
If it is in the right column, press 2 to move it to the left
column.
2
Press 5/∞ to move the bar to a desired
group.
3
4
Press 4/¢ to select a desired file.
Direct selection
1
During playback or while stopped, press
TITLE/GROUP.
2
Press the numeric buttons to specify a
desired group number.
2
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
While in pause mode, press ZOOM.
Pressing ZOOM causes the player to zoom in on the image.
Each time you press ZOOM, the magnification is doubled
(1.8, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 times).
Press 5/∞/2/3 to move the zoomed position.
50
Press 3.
The slide show starts from the specified file.
To zoom in the picture
1
Make sure that the black (cursor) bar is in the
left (group) column.
3
Press the numeric buttons to specify a
desired file number.
The player starts slide show playback from the specified file.
If you do not specify a file, the player starts slide show
playback from the first file in the group.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 51 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
JPEG disc playback
Repeat function
In the slide show mode, you can repeat playback of JPEG files in
a group or on the disc.
1
While the JPEG CONTROL display is shown,
press REPEAT.
Pressing REPEAT switches the repeat mode.
When the repeat mode is turned on, the [
] indicator
lights in the display window.
The selected repeat mode is shown on the JPEG CONTROL
display.
REPEAT ALL:
All files on the disc are repeated.
REPEAT GROUP:All files in the current group are repeated.
No indication:
The repeat mode is off.
2
Press 3 to start repeat playback.
To stop repeat playback
Press 7.
The repeat mode remains active.
To quit repeat playback
Press 7 or MENU while the JPEG CONTROL display is shown,
and press REPEAT until the repeat mode indication goes off.
51
06_Karaoke_operation.fm Page 52 Monday, August 18, 2003 4:53 PM
XV-NK58SL
English
KARAOKE operation
Connecting a microphone
Connect a microphone to the MIC jack on the
front panel.
To adjust the microphone volume
Turn MIC LEVEL on the front panel.
Turning it clockwise raises the level, while turning it counterclockwise lower the level.
NOTES
NOTE
When using the KARAOKE function, set
the mode selector to “KARAOKE.”
• When a DVD VIDEO, SVCD, Video CD or Audio CD disc is
inserted, you can enjoy the input signal from the MIC jack with
the DIGITAL OUT jacks.
• When the KARAOKE mode is turned on, “PCM ONLY” is
forcibly applied to the type of the digital output signal,
regardless of the [DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT] setting in the
[AUDIO] preference (see page 59).
• While playback is stopped temporarily or while a DVD VIDEO
disc is played in reverse slow motion, the input signal from the
MIC jack is not output.
Reserving songs
Preparation
You can reserve up to 12 songs to play in the desired order.
You may reserve the same song more than once.
Turning on the KARAOKE function
Playing back songs reserved
Press KARAOKE.
The KARAOKE function turns on, the [KARAOK] indicator
lights up on on the display window, and the KARAOKE menu
appears on the TV screen.
Turn on the KARAOKE function, and proceed as follows:
1
The reservation table appears on the TV screen, and the
[PRGM] indicator lights up in the display window.
TV screen
AUDIO
KARAOKE
VOCAL
ECHO
EFFECT
KEY CONT
1/1
L+R
NORMAL
2
OFF
0
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Each time you press ON SCREEN, the KARAOKE menu
appears and disappears, while the KARAOKE function remains
active.
To deactivate the KARAOKE function
Press KARAOKE again.
The KARAOKE function is turned off, and the [KARAOK]
indicator goes off.
NOTES
• During program or random playback, you cannot turn on the
KARAOKE function.
• When an MP3/WMA or JPEG disc is played back, the
KARAOKE function cannot be turned on.
• When the KARAOKE menu is displayed on the TV screen, the
DVD VIDEO disc picture cannot be manipulated with 5/∞/2/3
on the remote control unit.
• The A-B repeat playback cannot be made when the KARAOKE
function is turned on.
Press the numeric buttons to specify tracks
in the desired order.
To select 5: press 5.
To select 23: press +10, +10, then 3.
To select 40: press +10, +10, +10, then 10.
To turn on and off the KARAOKE menu
52
Press RESERVE.
NO
Track
1
5
2
4
3
2
4
3
5
6
6
To correct the reservation
Press 5/∞ to move
to the song to be corrected, then press
CANCEL. The song is erased and the subsequent reserved
songs move up.
Pressing 7 clears all the reserved songs.
3
Press 3.
The player starts playback of the first reserved song.
A song which has started playback is deleted from the
reservation table.
After playing back all reserved songs, the player stops.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 53 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
KARAOKE operation
To turn off and on the reservation table
Press RESERVE to turn off the reservation table. To turn on the
reservation table, for example in order to check the reservation
contents, press RESERVE again.
Selecting audio
Most KARAOKE discs have the capability of adding a “guide
vocal” or “guide melody” to the KARAOKE accompaniment.
To reserve additional songs
Make sure that
points the next to the last song in the
reservation table, and press the numeric buttons to select the
song(s) you want to reserve.
To insert a song to be reserved
Press 5/∞ to move
to the position where you want to insert a
song, then press the numeric button to select the song you want
to reserve.
NOTE
You cannot reserve songs during SVCD/Video CD playback with
PBC. To reserve songs, press 7 before operating the above.
Selecting audio track (AUDIO)
With most DVD VIDEO or SVCD KARAOKE discs, you can
choose an audio track that gives an option such as “with guide
vocal,” “with guide melody” and “accompaniment only.”
Using the KARAOKE menu
See page 52 for how to turn on the KARAOKE menu.
1
2
Press 2/3 to move
to [AUDIO].
Press 5/∞ to select the desired audio track to
be played back.
Example for DVD VIDEO
1/3 Multi audio KARAOKE
2/3 With guide vocal
3/3 Accompaniment only
Example for SVCD
1/2 With guide vocal
2/2 Accompaniment only
Using the AUDIO button
You can select an audio track without activating the KARAOKE
menu.
1
Press AUDIO.
The [AUDIO] selection window appears on the TV screen.
AUDIO
1/3
2
3
Press 5/∞ to select the desired audio track.
Press ENTER, or wait until the [AUDIO]
selection window goes off.
53
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 54 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
KARAOKE operation
Example for SVCD, Video CD or Audio CD with
KARAOKE
L+R Stereo audio
L Left channel only
R Right channel only
Using the KARAOKE SOUND button
You can select sound without activating the KARAOKE menu.
1
Press KARAOKE SOUND.
The [KARAOKE] selection window appears on the TV
screen.
KARAOKE
L+R
Selecting KARAOKE sound (KARAOKE
SOUND)
Among KARAOKE DVD VIDEO discs, there are “multi-sound
KARAOKE” discs. With such a disc, for example, you can sing
along with the other vocal part recorded on a disc.
Using the KARAOKE menu
2
3
Press 5/∞ to select the desired sound.
Press ENTER, or wait until the [KARAOKE]
selection window goes off.
Using convenient functions for practicing
KARAOKE (VOCAL)
See page 52 for how to turn on the KARAOKE menu.
NOTES
• When playing back a “multi-sound KARAOKE” disc, [AUDIO]
should be set to [1] (see page 53).
• With a DVD VIDEO disc which does not contain “multi-sound
KARAOKE,” the KARAOKE SOUND cannot be changed.
You can mask a vocal recorded on normal non-KARAOKE discs,
or have the guide vocal replace your voice automatically when
you stop singing.
1
2
Using the KARAOKE menu
Press 2/3 to move
to [KARAOKE].
Press 5/∞ to select the desired sound to be
played back.
Example for multi-sound KARAOKE DVD VIDEO
See page 52 for how to turn on the KARAOKE menu.
1
2
Press 2/3 to move
Press 5/∞ to select the desired function.
NORMAL
1
With guide vocal (1)
2
With guide vocal (2)
1+2 With guide vocal (1+2)
PRO Only accompaniment
OFF With guide melody
54
to [VOCAL].
MASK
REPLACE
[NORMAL]: normal playback.
[MASK]:
a vocal recorded on normal non-KARAOKE disc
is masked.
[REPLACE]: the guide vocal automatically replaces your
voice when you stop singing.
06_Karaoke_operation.fm Page 55 Monday, August 18, 2003 4:54 PM
Using the VOCAL button
You can select a desired function without activating the
KARAOKE menu.
1
Adding various effects to the vocal (VOCAL
EFFECT)
Press VOCAL.
The [VOCAL] selection window appears on the TV screen.
VOCAL
Using the KARAOKE menu
NORMAL
See page 52 for how to turn on the KARAOKE menu.
2
3
Press 5/∞ to select the desired function.
Press ENTER, or wait until the [VOCAL]
selection window goes off.
1
2
Press 2/3 to move
to [EFFECT].
Press 5/∞ to select the desired effect.
OFF
FLANGER
CHORUS
NOTES
• If [KARAOKE SOUND] is set to [L] or [R], the “MASK” and
“REPLACE” functions do not work correctly.
• With some materials, such as those recorded in monaural and
sung by multiple voices, the voice may not be satisfactorily
masked.
• When playing back a disc with the multiplex audio or with multisound KARAOKE, the guide vocal is not played back at all.
With other discs, the voice may not be satisfactorily masked.
• The “MASK” and “REPLACE” functions may not work with
some SVCD and Video CD discs.
[FLANGER]: adds a wet, metallic sweeping sound to your
voice, similar to some electric guiter sounds.
[CHORUS]: produces a doubling effect on your vocal, as if
another person is singing in unison.
Using the EFFECT button
You can select a desired vocal effect without activating the
KARAOKE menu.
1
Press EFFECT.
The [EFFECT] selection window appears on the TV screen.
Adding an effect to your voice
EFFECT
You can add various effects to your voice using the echo and
vocal effect functions.
Adding an echo effect (ECHO)
OFF
2
3
Press 5/∞ to select the desired effect.
Press ENTER, or wait until the [EFFECT]
selection window goes off.
NOTE
If you adjust the echo level after selecting an effect, the effect will
be reset to OFF.
Using the KARAOKE menu
See page 52 for how to turn on the KARAOKE menu.
1
2
Press 2/3 to move
to [ECHO].
Press 5/∞ to adjust the echo level.
OFF
1
2
3
The higher the number, the stronger the echo effect.
Using the ECHO button
You can adjust the echo level without activating the KARAOKE
menu.
1
Press ECHO.
The [ECHO] selection window appears on the TV screen.
ECHO
OFF
2
3
Press 5/∞ to adjust the echo level.
Press ENTER, or wait until the [ECHO]
selection window goes off.
NOTE
If you select an effect (VOCAL EFFECT) after adjusting the echo
level, the echo level will be reset to OFF.
55
English
KARAOKE operation
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 56 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
KARAOKE operation
NOTES
• The key returns to the normal key after the current song ends.
• You cannot shift the musical key when playing back a disc
listed below:
- Audio CD with DTS
- DVD with DTS
- DVD with MPEG Multichannel
- DVD with 96 kHz linear PCM
Shifting the musical key
You can shift the musical key of a song recorded on a disc to fit to
your voice.
Using the KARAOKE menu
See page 52 for how to turn on the KARAOKE menu.
1
2
Press 2/3 to move
to [KEY CONT].
Press 5 to raise up the key, and ∞ to drop
down the key.
The adjustable range is from –4 to +4.
Using the KEY 9/KEY ( buttons
You can shift the musical key without activating the KARAOKE
menu.
1
Press KEY 9 or KEY (.
The [KEY CONT] selection window appears on the TV
screen.
KEY CONT
+1
2
Press KEY 9/KEY ( to raise up or drop
down the key.
3
Press ENTER, or wait until the [KEY CONT]
selection window goes off.
56
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 57 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
English
Changing the initial settings
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
STREAM/PCM
ANALOG DOWN MIX
STEREO
D RANGE CONTROL
NORMAL
OUTPUT LEVEL
STANDARD
SELECT
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
OTHERS
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
ON
AUTO STANDBY
OFF
AV COMPULINK MODE
DVD1
PARENTAL LOCK
SELECT
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
How to set preferences
NOTES
• When operating the player, set the mode
selector to “DVD.”
• If the KARAOKE function is turned on,
you cannot change the initial settings.
Before changing the initial settings, be
sure to turn off the KARAOKE function
and set the mode selector to “DVD.”
1
Press CHOICE.
One of the preference on-screen displays appears on the TV
screen.
You can see four icons at the top right of the on-screen
display for the settings.
: LANGUAGE menu
: PICTURE menu
Selecting preferences
: AUDIO menu
This section refers to the settings which are already made when
you purchase the player. Read this section when you want to
connect this player to a wide-vision TV set, or when you want to
otherwise change the settings according to your preferences and
viewing environment.
: OTHERS menu
2
The appropriate display appears on the TV screen.
3
About the Preference display
The Preference display consists of the LANGUAGE, PICTURE,
AUDIO and OTHERS setting displays, each having setting items.
Press 2/3 to select the appropriate icon.
Press 5/∞ to move
want to edit.
to select the item you
The color of the selected item changes.
4
Press ENTER.
A pull-down menu appears over the selected item.
LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
CHINESE
SPANISH
SELECT
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
Selected item
PICTURE
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
4:3 LB
PICTURE SOURCE
AUTO
SCREEN SAVER
ON
MP3&WMA/JPEG
MP3&WMA
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
5
Press 5/∞ to select from the options then
press ENTER.
The selected option is set.
• For details about each setting, see the following.
To dismiss a preference display
Press CHOICE.
NOTES
• While an MP3/WMA or JPEG disc is inserted, you cannot bring
up any preference display.
• When a preference display is shown on a wide TV screen, the
upper and lower parts of the preference display sometimes may
be cut off. If this happens, adjust the picture size control of the
TV.
57
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 58 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
Changing the initial settings
LANGUAGE menu
MENU LANGUAGE
You can select the default menu language to be displayed if it is
contained on a DVD VIDEO disc.
Setting options
ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,
ITALIAN, JAPANESE, language code from AA to ZU
• If the disc does not have a menu in the selected language, the
disc’s default language will be used.
• For details about language codes, see “Appendix B: Table of
languages and their abbreviations” on page 63.
• You cannot change the setting during playback.
[16:9 AUTO] (Wide television screen): select when you
connect the player to a wide-screen (16:9) TV.
[4:3 LB] (Letter Box conversion): select when you connect the
player to a normal (4:3) TV.
When playing back a DVD VIDEO disc recorded in wide picture
format, the picture is shown with black bars at the top and
bottom.
AUDIO LANGUAGE
You can select the default audio language to be played if it is
contained on a DVD VIDEO disc.
Setting options
ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,
ITALIAN, JAPANESE, language code from AA to ZU
• If the disc does not have the selected language, the disc’s
default language will be used.
• For details about language codes, see “Appendix B: Table of
languages and their abbreviations” on page 63.
• You cannot change the setting during playback.
SUBTITLE
[4:3 PS] (Pan Scan conversion): select when you connect the
player to a normal (4:3) TV.
When playing back a DVD VIDEO disc recorded in wide picture
format, the picture is zoomed to fill the screen vertically, and the
left and right sides of the image are chopped off.
Note, however, that the picture will be shown in the 4:3 LB
mode even if you select the 4:3 PS mode depending on the
disc.
You can select the default subtitle language to be displayed if it is
contained on a DVD VIDEO disc.
Setting options
OFF, ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,
ITALIAN, JAPANESE, language code from AA to ZU
• If the disc does not have a subtitle in the selected language, the
disc’s default language will be used.
• For details about language codes, see “Appendix B: Table of
languages and their abbreviations” on page 63.
• You cannot change the setting during playback.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
[16:9 MULTI NORMAL] [16:9 MULTI AUTO]
[4:3 MULTI LB] [4:3 MULTI PS]: These “MULTI” options should
be selected when you connect the unit to a TV that supports
both the PAL and NTSC systems. If you select one of these
options, the unit outputs a PAL or NTSC video signal according
to the disc, regardless of the PAL/NTSC selector setting.
You can select the on-screen display language of the player.
PICTURE SOURCE
Setting options
This mode selects whether the content on the disc is processed
by field (video source) or by frame (film source). You can obtain
optimal picture quality according to the source type to be played
back by selecting an appropriate option. This setting is available
for both the interlaced mode and progressive scanning mode.
ENGLISH, CHINESE, SPANISH
• Some on-screen messages are shown in English regardless of
the setting.
• You cannot change the on-screen language shown on the MP3
display.
PICTURE menu
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play
back DVD VIDEO discs recorded for wide-screen televisions.
Setting options
16:9 NORMAL, 16:9 AUTO, 4:3 LB, 4:3 PS, 16:9 MULTI
NORMAL, 16:9 MULTI AUTO, 4:3 MULTI LB, 4:3 MULTI PS
[16:9 NORMAL] (Wide television screen): select when you
connect the player to a wide-screen (16:9) TV whose aspect
ratio is fixed to 16:9 (the player automatically adjusts the screen
width of the output signal correctly when playing back a 4:3
source).
If you play a 4:3 DVD VIDEO source using the [16:9 NORMAL]
mode, the picture character changes slightly due to the process
for converting the picture width.
58
Setting options
AUTO, FILM, VIDEO(NORMAL), VIDEO(ACTIVE)
[AUTO]: select when playing back a disc containing both video
and film source materials.
The player recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current disc according to the disc information. Normally,
select this option.
[FILM]: select when playing back a film source disc.
[VIDEO(NORMAL)]: select when playing back a video source
disc with relatively a few movements.
[VIDEO(ACTIVE)]: select when playing back a video source disc
with relatively a lot of movements.
SCREEN SAVER
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF. (See page
38.)
Setting options
ON, OFF
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 59 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
MP3&WMA/JPEG
The player can play MP3/WMA and JPEG files recorded on a
CD-R/CD-RW disc. However, if a disc contains both MP3/WMA
and JPEG files, you can only play files of the type selected in this
menu item.
Setting options
MP3&WMA, JPEG
[MP3&WMA]: when selected, only MP3/WMA files can be
played back.
[JPEG]: when selected, only JPEG files can be played back.
AUDIO menu
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
To connect the player’s digital output to an external device
equipped with a digital input, this item must be set correctly.
See “Appendix C: Digital output signal chart” on page 63 for
details about the relation between the setting and output signals.
Setting options
PCM ONLY, DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM, STREAM/PCM
[PCM ONLY]: select when you connect the DIGITAL OUT jack of
the player to the linear PCM digital input of other audio
equipment.
[DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM]: select when you connect the digital
input of a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
When this option is selected, playing back a disc recorded by
the MPEG Multichannel format outputs a linear PCM digital
signal.
[STREAM/PCM]: select when you connect the digital input of an
amplifier with a built-in DTS, MPEG Multichannel or Dolby
Digital decoder, or the stand-alone unit of such a decoder.
• With some DVD VIDEO discs that are not fully copy-protected,
a 20 or 24 bit digital signal may be output.
• A signal recorded with the 96 kHz or higher sampling frequency
is output from the DIGITAL OUT jack with the 48 kHz sampling
frequency.
• When playing a DVD VIDEO or Audio CD disc with DTS, use a
DTS decoder to get correct signals from your speakers.
TV program sound level. Thus you can hear sound at a lower
volume clearly.
OUTPUT LEVEL
This setting allows you to attenuate the level of the signal output
from the player’s analog AUDIO OUT terminals.
Setting options
STANDARD, LOW
• If the sound output from the speaker is distorted, select [LOW].
OTHERS menu
RESUME
You can select the resume playback mode.
See pages 36 and 37 for details about the resume playback
function.
Setting options
ON, OFF, DISC RESUME
[ON]: when selected, the player can resume playback of the disc
from the position where playback was last interrupted, if the
disc is still in the disc tray.
[OFF]: when selected, the resume function is deactivated.
[DISC RESUME]: when selected, the player can resume
playback of the last 30 discs played. The player retains a
memory of the interrupted positions of the last 30 discs played,
even though they have been removed from the disc tray.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
The player can display “on-screen guide” icons or characters on
the picture, which show what is happening to the disc or the
player.
Example of “on-screen guide” icons:
,
,
Setting options
ON, OFF
[ON]: when selected, the on-screen guide is activated.
AUTO STANDBY
ANALOG DOWN MIX
To correctly play the audio on a DVD VIDEO disc recorded with
surround multichannel audio, you must set this item properly
according to your audio system configuration.
(This function does not work when the 3D PHONIC function is
activated.)
Setting options
DOLBY SURROUND, STEREO
[DOLBY SURROUND]: select when listening to multichannel
surround audio with the player’s analog AUDIO OUT terminals
connected to a surround decoder.
[STEREO]: select when listening to conventional two-channel
stereo audio with the player’s AUDIO OUT terminals connected
to a stereo amplifier/receiver or television set, or in case you
want to record the audio from a DVD VIDEO disc to MiniDisc,
cassette, etc.
When the player is stopped for more than 30 minutes or 60
minutes, the player enters standby mode automatically.
Setting options
60, 30, OFF
AV COMPULINK MODE
You must set this item correctly to use the AV COMPU LINK
system.
Setting options
DVD1, DVD2, DVD3
• See page 65 for details about the AV COMPU LINK function.
D. RANGE CONTROL
This setting provides optimal audio quality from the analog
AUDIO OUT terminals for listening to DVD VIDEO discs recorded
in Dolby Digital format, at low or middle volume.
Setting options
WIDE RANGE, NORMAL, TV MODE
[WIDE RANGE]: when selected, audio is played back with the
widest dynamic range so that you can enjoy powerful playback
sound.
[NORMAL]: normally, select this option.
[TV MODE]: select if DVD VIDEO disc sound level is lower than
59
English
Changing the initial settings
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 60 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
English
Changing the initial settings
PARENTAL LOCK
3
When this option is selected, pressing ENTER on the remote
control unit brings up the PARENTAL LOCK display shown
below. This allows you to restrict children from playing DVD
VIDEO discs.
While
is pointing to [COUNTRY CODE],
press ENTER to bring up the pull-down
menu.
4
Press 5/∞ to select the country code.
Select the code of the country whose standards were used to
rate the DVD VIDEO disc content.
See “Appendix A: Country/Area code list for Parental Lock”
on page 62.
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
MY
SET LEVEL
NONE
PASSWORD
____
EXIT
PARENTAL LOCK
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
• See this page for details about the parental lock setting.
COUNTRY CODE
MY
MY
SET LEVEL
NONE
MZ
PASSWORD
____
EXIT
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
SELECT
ENTER
5
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
Press ENTER.
moves to [SET LEVEL].
6
Press ENTER to bring up the pull-down
menu.
In the pull-down menu, [NONE] and levels [8] to [1] are
available.
[NONE] does not restrict playback. Level [1] is the strictest
level. Discs rated higher than the selected level are
restricted.
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
MY
NONE
SET LEVEL
NONE
8
PASSWORD
____
EXIT
7
6
5
4
3
SELECT
ENTER
Limiting playback by children
This function restricts playback of DVD VIDEO discs which
contain violent (and other) scenes according to the level set by
the user. For example, if a movie which includes violent scenes
supports the parental lock feature, such scenes which you do not
want to let children view can be cut or replaced with other
scenes.
7
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
Press 5/∞ to select a desired parental lock
level, then press ENTER.
moves to [PASSWORD].
8
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter a
4-digit password.
PARENTAL LOCK
To set Parental Lock for the first time
COUNTRY CODE
MY
SET LEVEL
NONE
PASSWORD
1234
EXIT
1
2
SELECT
Bring up the OTHERS menu.
Press 5/∞ to move
to select [PARENTAL
LOCK] then press ENTER.
The Parental Lock on-screen display appears on the TV
screen.
COUNTRY CODE
MY
SET LEVEL
NONE
PASSWORD
____
EXIT
SELECT
60
9
NEW PASSWORD? ... PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEY
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
Press ENTER.
The parental lock feature is set.
moves to [EXIT]. Pressing ENTER again returns to the
[OTHERS] menu of the preference display.
Hint
PARENTAL LOCK
ENTER
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
If you want to change the password at step 8, do it before
pressing ENTER.
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 61 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
To change the settings
To temporarily release the Parental Lock
You can change the parental lock settings later.
Press 5/∞ to move
to select [PARENTAL
LOCK] and press ENTER.
If the parental level is set to a strict value, some discs may not
play at all.
When you insert such a disc and try to play it, the following
parental lock on-screen display appears on the TV screen,
asking you whether you want the parental lock to be temporarily
released or not.
The parental lock on-screen display appears on the TV
screen.
1
1
2
3
Bring up the OTHERS menu.
While
is pointing to [PASSWORD], press
the numeric buttons to enter your current 4digit password then press ENTER.
Press 5/∞ to move
to [TEMPORARY
RELEASE], then press ENTER.
PARENTAL LOCK
TEMPORARY RELEASE
moves to [COUNTRY CODE] if you enter the correct
password.
If you enter a wrong password, “WRONG! RETRY...”
appears on the TV screen, and you cannot go to the next
step.
If you forget your password, enter “8888.” The current
password is deleted and you can set a new password.
4
5
To change the [COUNTRY CODE] or [SET
LEVEL], press ENTER to bring up the
associated pull-down menu when
is
pointing to the desired item.
Press 5/∞ to select the desired option then
press ENTER.
If you change the country code, you must reselect the
parental lock level.
6
While
is pointing to [PASSWORD], press
the numeric buttons to enter a 4-digit
password.
NOT RELEASE
PASSWORD
SELECT
____
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
ENTER
2
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
your 4-digit password.
The Parental Lock is released, and the player starts
playback.
If you enter a wrong password, “WRONG! RETRY...”
appears on the TV screen. Enter the correct password.
NOTE
When you enter the wrong password 3 times at step 2 above,
moves to [NOT RELEASE] automatically and 5/∞ do not work.
The password entered in this step becomes the new
password. If you want to keep the same password as before,
enter the same password.
7
Press ENTER.
moves to [EXIT]. Pressing ENTER again returns to the
[OTHERS] menu of the preference display.
NOTE
If you enter the wrong password more than 3 times in step 3
above,
moves to [EXIT] automatically and 5/∞ do not work.
61
English
Changing the initial settings
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 62 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
English
Additional information
Appendix A: Country/Area code list for Parental Lock
(for page 60)
AD
Andorra
ES
Spain
LI
Liechtenstein
SE
AE
United Arab Emirates
ET
Ethiopia
LK
Sri Lanka
SG
Sweden
Singapore
FI
Finland
LR
Liberia
SH
Saint Helena
AF
Afghanistan
AG
Antigua and Barbuda
FJ
Fiji
LS
Lesotho
SI
Slovenia
AI
Anguilla
FK
Falkland Islands
LT
Lithuania
SJ
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
AL
Albania
FM
Micronesia (Federated
States of)
LU
Luxembourg
SK
Slovakia
LV
Latvia
SL
Sierra Leone
Faroe Islands
LY
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
SM
San Marino
AM
Armenia
AN
Netherlands Antilles
AO
Angola
AQ
Antarctica
AR
Argentina
AS
American Samoa
AT
Austria
AU
Australia
AW
Aruba
AZ
Azerbaijan
BA
Bosnia and Herzegovina
BB
Barbados
BD
Bangladesh
BE
Belgium
BF
Burkina Faso
BG
Bulgaria
BH
Bahrain
BI
Burundi
BJ
Benin
BM
Bermuda
FO
FR
France
MA
Morocco
SN
Senegal
FX
France, Metropolitan
MC
Monaco
SO
Somalia
GA
Gabon
MD
Moldova, Republic of
SR
Suriname
GB
United Kingdom
MG
Madagascar
ST
Sao Tome and Principe
GD
Grenada
MH
Marshall Islands
SV
El Salvador
GE
Georgia
ML
Mali
SY
Syrian Arab Republic
GF
French Guiana
MM
Myanmar
SZ
Swaziland
GH
Ghana
MN
Mongolia
TC
Turks and Caicos Islands
GI
Gibraltar
MO
Macau
TD
Chad
TF
French Southern
Territories
Togo
GL
Greenland
MP
Northern Mariana Islands
GM
Gambia
MQ
Martinique
GN
Guinea
MR
Mauritania
TG
GP
Guadeloupe
MS
Montserrat
TH
Thailand
GQ
Equatorial Guinea
MT
Malta
TJ
Tajikistan
GR
Greece
MU
Mauritius
TK
Tokelau
GS
South Georgia and the
South Sandwich
Maldives
TM
Turkmenistan
MW
Malawi
TN
Tunisia
MX
Mexico
TO
Tonga
MY
Malaysia
TP
East Timor
MZ
Mozambique
TR
Turkey
NA
Namibia
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
NC
New Caledonia
TV
Tuvalu
NE
Niger
TW
Taiwan
TZ
Tanzania, United Republic
of
UA
Ukraine
GT
Guatemala
GU
Guam
Brunei Darussalam
GW
Guinea-Bissau
BO
Bolivia
GY
Guyana
BR
Brazil
HK
Hong Kong
HM
Heard Island and
McDonald Islands
BN
BS
Bahamas
BT
Bhutan
BV
Bouvet Island
HN
BW
Botswana
BY
Belarus
BZ
MV
Honduras
NF
Norfolk Island
HR
Croatia
NG
Nigeria
HT
Haiti
NI
Nicaragua
Belize
HU
Hungary
NL
Netherlands
UG
Uganda
UM
United States Minor
Outlying Islands
CA
Canada
ID
Indonesia
NO
Norway
CC
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
IE
Ireland
NP
Nepal
US
United States
CF
Central African Republic
IL
Israel
NR
Nauru
UY
Uruguay
CG
Congo
IN
India
NU
Niue
UZ
Uzbekistan
CH
Switzerland
IO
NZ
New Zealand
VA
CI
Côte d’Ivoire
British Indian Ocean
Territory
OM
Oman
Vatican City State (Holy
See)
CK
Cook Islands
IQ
Iraq
PA
Panama
VC
CL
Chile
IR
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
PE
Peru
Saint Vincent and the
Grenadines
CM
Cameroon
IS
Iceland
PF
French Polynesia
Italy
PG
Papua New Guinea
Jamaica
PH
Philippines
CN
China
IT
CO
Colombia
JM
CR
Costa Rica
JO
Jordan
PK
Pakistan
CU
Cuba
JP
Japan
PL
Poland
CV
Cape Verde
KE
Kenya
PM
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
CX
Christmas Island
KG
Kyrgyzstan
PN
Pitcairn
CY
Cyprus
KH
Cambodia
PR
Puerto Rico
CZ
Czech Republic
KI
Kiribati
PT
Portugal
Germany
KM
Comoros
PW
Palau
DJ
Djibouti
KN
Saint Kitts and Nevis
PY
Paraguay
KP
DE
DK
Denmark
DM
Dominica
DO
Dominican Republic
DZ
Algeria
EC
Ecuador
EE
Estonia
EG
Egypt
EH
Western Sahara
ER
62
Eritrea
Korea, Democratic
People's Republic of
KR
Korea, Republic of
KW
Kuwait
KY
Cayman Islands
KZ
Kazakhstan
LA
Lao People's Democratic
Republic
LB
Lebanon
LC
Saint Lucia
QA
Qatar
RE
Réunion
RO
Romania
RU
Russian Federation
RW
Rwanda
SA
Saudi Arabia
SB
Solomon Islands
SC
Seychelles
SD
Sudan
VE
Venezuela
VG
Virgin Islands (British)
VI
Virgin Islands (U.S.)
VN
Vietnam
VU
Vanuatu
WF
Wallis and Futuna Islands
WS
Samoa
YE
Yemen
YT
Mayotte
YU
Yugoslavia
ZA
South Africa
ZM
Zambia
ZR
Zaire
ZW
Zimbabwe
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 63 Friday, May 16, 2003
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
5:26 PM
Appendix B: Table of languages and their abbreviations
(for pages 43 and 58 )
AA
Afar
FA
Persian
KM
Cambodian
OM
(Afan) Oromo
SU
Sundanese
AB
Abkhazian
FI
Finnish
KN
Kannada
OR
Oriya
SV
Swedish
AF
Afrikaans
FJ
Fiji
KO
Korean (KOR)
PA
Panjabi
SW
Swahili
AM
Ameharic
FO
Faroese
KS
Kashmiri
PL
Polish
TA
Tamil
AR
Arabic
FY
Frisian
KU
Kurdish
PS
Pashto, Pushto
TE
Telugu
AS
Assamese
GA
Irish
KY
Kirghiz
PT
Portuguese
TG
Tajik
AY
Aymara
GD
Scots Gaelic
LA
Latin
QU
Quechua
TH
Thai
Tigrinya
AZ
Azerbaijani
GL
Galician
LN
Lingala
RM
Rhaeto-Romance
TI
BA
Bashkir
GN
Guarani
LO
Laothian
RN
Kirundi
TK
Turkmen
BE
Byelorussian
GU
Gujarati
LT
Lithuanian
RO
Rumanian
TL
Tagalog
BG
Bulgarian
HA
Hausa
LV
Latvian, Lettish
RU
Russian
TN
Setswana
BH
Bihari
HI
Hindi
MG
Malagasy
RW
Kinyarwanda
TO
Tongan
BI
Bislama
HR
Croatian
MI
Maori
SA
Sanskrit
TR
Turkish
BN
Bengali, Bangla
HU
Hungarian
MK
Macedonian
SD
Sindhi
TS
Tsonga
BO
Tibetan
HY
Armenian
ML
Malayalam
SG
Sangho
TT
Tatar
BR
Breton
IA
Interlingua
MN
Mongolian
SH
Serbo-Croatian
TW
Twi
CA
Catalan
IE
Interlingue
MO
Moldavian
SI
Singhalese
UK
Ukrainian
CO
Corsican
IK
Inupiak
MR
Marathi
SK
Slovak
UR
Urdu
CS
Czech
IN
Indonesian
MS
Malay (MAY)
SL
Slovenian
UZ
Uzbek
CY
Welsh
IS
Icelandic
MT
Maltese
SM
Samoan
VI
Vietnamese
DA
Danish
IW
Hebrew
MY
Burmese
SN
Shona
VO
Volapuk
DZ
Bhutani
JI
Yiddish
NA
Nauru
SO
Somali
WO
Wolof
EL
Greek
JW
Javanese
NE
Nepali
SQ
Albanian
XH
Xhosa
EO
Esperanto
KA
Georgian
NL
Dutch
SR
Serbian
YO
Yoruba
ET
Estonian
KK
Kazakh
NO
Norwegian
SS
Siswati
ZU
Zulu
EU
Basque
KL
Greenlandic
OC
Occitan
ST
Sesotho
Appendix C: Digital output signal chart
(for page 59)
Output
Disc type
PCM ONLY
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
DVD with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
DVD with 96 kHz, 16/22/24 bit
linear PCM
48kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM (Down sampling)
DVD with DTS
DVD with Dolby Digital
DVD with MPEG Multichannel
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
Audio CD with DTS
CD-R/RW with MP3/WMA
Any disc with KARAOKE mode
STREAM/PCM
48kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
DTS bitstream
Dolby Digital bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
MPEG bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
48kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
DTS bitstream
No output
48/44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo linear PCM
63
English
Additional information
XV-NK58SL[UGUX].book Page 64 Friday, May 16, 2003
5:26 PM
XV-NK58SL/LET0230-017A/English
English
Additional information
Appendix D: Glossary
525i/525p
Indicates the number of scanning lines and scanning format of an
image signal. 525i indicates 525 scanning lines with interlace
format, and 525p indicates 525 scanning lines with progressive
format.
Aspect ratio
A ratio which defines the shape of the rectangular picture in a TV.
It is the width of the picture relative to the height. A conventional
TV picture is 4:3 in aspect ratio.
Bitstream
The digital form of multichannel audio data (e.g., 5.1-channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
Chapter/title
Chapter is the smallest division and title is the largest division on
DVD VIDEO. A chapter is a division of a title and similar to a track
for Video CD or Audio CD.
Component video
Video signals with three channels of separate information that
makes up the picture. There are some types of component video,
such as R/G/B and Y/CB(PB)/CR(PR).
Composite video
A single video signal commonly used in most consumer video
products that contains all luminance, color, and synchronization
information.
Dolby Digital (AC3)
A six-channel system consisting of left, center, right, left rear,
right rear and LFE (Low-Frequency Effect channel, for use with a
sub-woofer) channels. All processing is done in the digital
domain. Not all Dolby Digital discs contain six (5.1) channels of
information.
Dolby Surround/Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Surround records four channels of front and rear audio in
two channels in a way that allows a decoder to recover the
original four channels for playback. Because the audio is
recorded in two channels, it can be played back naturally by a
two-channel stereo system.
Dolby Pro Logic introduces directional circuits in decoder-side
processing (increasing the level of specific channels and lowering
the level of silent channels) for greater spatial perspective, and
adds a center speaker used primarily for dialog. The result is
enhanced channel separation.
Down-mix
Internal stereo mix of multichannel surround audio by a DVD
player. The down-mix signals are output from stereo output
connectors.
DTS
A Digital Surround audio encoding format configured with six
(5.1) channels, similar to Dolby Digital. It requires a decoder,
either in the player or in an external receiver. DTS stands for
Digital Theater Systems.
Not all DTS discs contain six (5.1) channels of information.
Dynamic range
The difference between the loudest and softest sounds.
Interlaced scanning
In a conventional video system, a picture is shown on the display
monitor in between lines of two halves. The Interlaced scanning
system places lines of the second half of the picture in-between
lines of the first half of the picture.
64
JPEG
A popular file format for still image compression and storage.
JPEG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group.
There are three sub-types of the JPEG format as follows.
• baseline JPEG: used for digital cameras, the web, etc.
• progressive JPEG: used for the web
• lossless JPEG: an old type, rarely used now
Linear PCM audio
PCM stands for “pulse code modulation.” Linear PCM is the usual
method for digitally encoding audio without compression, and is
used for the audio tracks on DVD VIDEO discs, Audio CDs, etc.
MP3
MP3 is an audio data compression format, which stands for
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3. Using MP3, you can achieve a data
reduction of about 1:10.
MPEG
A family of Standards for compressing audio-visual information.
“MPEG” standards include MPEG-1, MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.
Video CD and MP3 are based on MPEG-1, while DVD is based
on MPEG-2. MPEG stands for Moving Picture coding Experts
Group.
MPEG Multichannel
This feature expands the 5.1 channel audio format recorded on
the disc to a 7.1 channel format. The further expansion of the 5.1
channel audio makes it easy for you to reproduce the movie
theater experience in your own home.
NTSC (National television system committee)
A black and white and color television system format used in the
U.S.A., Canada, Mexico and Japan.
PAL (Phase Alternation by Line)
A color television system format used extensively in Western
Europe.
PBC
PBC stands for “Playback control” and is a method of controlling
disc play for Video CDs (VCD). You are able to interact with the
disc through menus.
Progressive scanning
Progressive scanning displays all the horizontal lines of a picture
at one time, as a single frame. A progressive scanning DVD
player converts the interlaced (525i) video from DVD into
progressive (525p) format for connection to a progressive display.
It dramatically increases the vertical resolution.
S-video
A video signal which improves picture quality over standard
composite connections. Used on Super VHS, DVD, high end TV
monitors, etc.
Track
The smallest division on SVCD, Video CD and Audio CD discs.
WMA
WMA is an abbreviation of “Windows Media Audio,” and is an
audio data compression format developed by Microsoft
Corporation. Sound quality of data compressed using WMA is
the same as that of MP3, though the WMA file size is smaller
than that of MP3.
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player and VCR) through this
receiver.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the video
components terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect the video components you want to operate, following the
diagrams below and the procedures on page 66.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.
CONNECTIONS 1: AV COMPU LINK Connection
TV
VCR
XV-NK58SL
Monaural mini-plugs
AV
COMPU LINK EX
AV
COMPU LINK
or
AV
COMPU LINK-ΙΙΙ
AV
COMULINK-III
AV COMPU LINK
FM 75
AM LOOP
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AV
COMULINK-III
Monaural mini-plugs
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
IN
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
L
R
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
COMPONENT VIDEO
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
IMPORTANT:
CAUTION:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the DBS
tuner connected to the DBS terminals.
When connecting the TV with the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system, connect the receiver to the
AV COMPU LINK EX or AV COMPU LINK-III
terminal. DO NOT connect the receiver to the AV
COMPU LINK RECEIVER/AMP terminal.
NOTES
• When connecting the receiver and a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use Automatic
selection of TV’s input mode (see page 66).
• When connecting the XV-NK58SL or VCR and TV to this receiver, connect it directly to the receiver using cable with monaural mini-plugs.
CONNECTIONS 2: Video Cable Connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals coming into
this receiver through one type of video terminals can output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to connect the VCR and TV
to this receiver using one of the following three ways.
• When using the AV COMPULINK remote control system, set the component video input for the DVD player and the DBS tuner correctly (see
“Setting the video component input mode—DVD VIDEO/DBS VIDEO” on page 21); otherwise, the correct input for this receiver will not be
selected on the TV.
CASE 1: When connecting the source equipment
to the receiver through the S-video
terminals, connect this receiver to the
TV’s Video Input 1 terminal using S-video
cords.
CASE 2: When connecting the source equipment
to the receiver through the composite
video terminals, connect this receiver to
the TV’s Video Input 2 terminal (composite
video input) using composite video
cords.
CASE 3: When connecting the source equipment
to the receiver through the component
video terminals, connect this receiver to
the TV’s Video Input 2 terminals
(component video input) using
component video cords.
Source
Equipment
S-video cord
RX-ES1SL
S-video cord
TV
To Video Input 1
Source
Equipment
Composite
video cord
RX-ES1SL
Composite
video cord
TV
To Video Input 2
(Composite)
Source
Equipment
Component
video cord
RX-ES1SL
Component
video cord
TV
To Video Input 2
(Component)
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
65
EN65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
65
03.5.16, 16:16
English
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
English
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
1. If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD
player, TV and this receiver into the AC outlets,
unplug their AC power cords first.
2. Connect your VCR, DVD player, TV and this
receiver, using the cords with the monaural miniplugs (not supplied).
• See “CONNECTIONS 1” on the previous page.
3. Connect the audio input/output terminals on
VCR, DVD player, TV and this receiver using the
audio cords with RCA pin plugs.
• See pages 8 to 11.
4. Connect the video input/output terminals on
VCR, DVD player, TV and this receiver, using the
cords with RCA pin plugs, S-video plug or
component video plugs.
• See “CONNECTIONS 2” on the previous page.
5. Plug the AC power cords of the components and
the receiver into the AC outlets.
6. When turning on the TV for the first time after the
AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV volume
to the minimum using the TV volume control on
the TV.
7. Turn on the connected components first, then
turn on this receiver.
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied with
this receiver (press VCR).
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use the
five basic functions listed below.
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this
remote control
One-touch DVD play
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input jacks
on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the receiver
automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD” or “DVD
MULTI.”
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the receiver
automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode
• When you select “TV” as the source to play on the receiver, the TV
automatically changes the input mode to the TV tuner so that you
can watch TV.
• When you select “DVD,” “DVD MULTI,” “VCR” or “DBS” as the source
to play on the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input
mode to the appropriate position (either Video Input 1 or Video Input
2) so that you can view the playback picture.
NOTE
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and the
TV with the AV COMPU LINK using the TV’s AV COMPU LINK EX
terminal. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to case 1 or case 2
on page 65.
Automatic power On/Off
The TV, VCR, and DVD player turn on and off along with the receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “VCR,” the TV and VCR will turn
on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “DVD” or “DVD MULTI,” the TV
and DVD player will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “TV” or “DBS,” only the TV will
turn on automatically.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, VCR and the DVD player will
turn off.
NOTE
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR will
not turn off, but continue recording.
See page 65 for details.
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
target component.
One-touch video play
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other switches
manually. The receiver automatically turns on and changes the source
to “VCR.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the play
3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can get the
(3
same result.
66
EN65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
66
03.5.16, 16:16
You can use the remote control to operate not only this
receiver but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied for the other products.
– Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control
signals—remote codes “A” and “B”. This remote control can
operate a VCR whose remote control code is set to “A.”
• To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the
remote sensor on the target product.
Set the mode selector to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
CHANNEL
VOLUME
7 VCR
You can always perform the following operations:
VCR
FM MODE
MENU
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
KARAOKE SOUND
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
2
BASS
KEY
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
4
5
6
7
8
9
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.
1 – 9, 0:
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
3:
Start playback.
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
¡:
Fast-wind a tape.
1:
Rewind a tape.
7 DVD player
You can always perform the following operations:
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
REPEAT
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.
After setting the mode selector to “DVD” then pressing DVD
(source selecting button), you can perform the following operations on
the DVD Player.
3:
Start playback.
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
¢:
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.
4:
Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) chapter.
MENU:
Display or erase the menu screen.
5/∞/3/2:
Select an item on the menu screen.
ENTER:
Enter a selected item.
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
Turn on or off the VCR.
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
:
After pressing VCR (source selecting button), you can perform the
following operations on the VCR.
DVD
TUNING
English
Operating other JVC products
You can also use ¡, 1, OPEN/CLOSE, AUDIO, SUBTITLE,
, ANGLE, REPEAT,
TITLE/GROUP, RETURN, ZOOM, VFP,
DIMMER, 3D, PROGRESSIVE, KARAOKE operation buttons and
numeric buttons for operating JVC DVD player.
7 TV
You can always perform the following operations:
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
TV VOL +/–:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
TV/VIDEO:
Change the input mode (Video input and TV
tuner) on the TV.
After pressing TV (source selecting button), you can perform the
following operations on the TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers.
1 – 9, 0, +10 (100+): Select the channel numbers.
10 (TV RETURN):
Function as the TV RETURN button.
67
EN65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
67
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Operating other manufacturers’ equipment
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the
remote control supplied for this unit to operate other
manufacturers’ equipment.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
• To operate those components with the remote control, first you
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the DBS tuner,
VCR, and TV.
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the
manufacturers’ codes again.
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating a
DBS tuner
1 Press and hold DBS
.
2 Press DBS.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons 1 – 9,
and 0.
4 Release DBS
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the DBS
tuner.
Set the mode selector to AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.
DBS
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.
After pressing DBS (source selecting button), you can perform
the following operations on the DBS tuner.
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
CHANNEL
TUNING
VOLUME
FM MODE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
MENU
AUDIO
ON
SCREEN
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
2
BASS
4
5
7
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DIMMER
Change the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
1 – 9, 0:
Select the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing
DBS .
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
If more than one codes are listed for your brand of the DBS
tuner, try each one until the correct one is entered.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner
ENTER
CHOICE
KARAOKE SOUND
CHANNEL +/–:
AUDIO
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
Manufacturer
G.I.
GEMINI
HAMLIN
JERROLD
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
S. ATLANTA
SAMSUNG
TOCOM
ZENITH
ECHOSTAR
G.I.
HITACHI
HUGHES
PANASONIC
PRIMESTAR
RCA
SONY
TOSHIBA
* Initial setting
68
EN65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
68
03.5.16, 16:16
Codes
01*
02
03 – 06
07 – 15
16 – 18
19
20 – 22
23, 24
25 – 30
31, 32
33 – 35
36
37
38, 39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating a
VCR
1 Press and hold VCR
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating a
TV
1 Press and hold TV
.
.
2 Press VCR.
2 Press TV.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons 1 – 9,
and 0.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons 1 – 9,
and 0.
4 Release VCR
4 Release TV
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the VCR.
VCR
:
Turn on or off the VCR.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the
VCR.
1 – 9, 0:
Select the channel numbers on the
VCR.
3:
Start playback.
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press
3.
¡:
Fast-wind a tape.
1:
Rewind a tape.
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR
.
If more than one codes are listed for your brand of VCR, try
each one until the correct one is entered.
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
AIWA
AKAI
BELL+HOWELL
DAEWOO
EMERSON
FISHER
G.E.
GO VIDEO
GOLD STAR
GO-VIDEO A
GO-VIDEO B
HITACHI
MAGNAVOX
MITSUBISHI
NEC
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SCOTT
SHARP
SHINTOM
SONY
SYMPHO
TEKNICA
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
* Initial setting
EN65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
01* – 04
05
06 – 08
09
10
11 – 15
16 – 19
20, 21
22
23
24
25
20, 26
27 – 29
30 – 33
34, 35
36, 37
27
38
39 – 41
16 – 19
42
43, 44
45
46 – 51
52
53, 54
55
56
:
Turn on or off the TV.
TV VOL +/–:
Adjust the volume.
TV/VIDEO:
Change the input mode (either TV
or VIDEO).
After pressing TV (source selecting button), you can perform
the following operations on the TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers.
1 – 9, 0:
Select the channel numbers.
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
If more than one codes are listed for your brand of TV, try
each one until the correct one is entered.
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.
TV
After pressing VCR (source selecting button), you can perform
the following operations on the VCR.
.
Manufacturers’ codes for TV
Manufacturer
JVC
AKAI
BELL+HOWELL
CENTURION
CORONAD
DAEWOO
EMERSON
FISHER
GE•PANA
GE•RCA
GOLD STAR
HITACHI
KTV
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROSCAN
QUASAR
RADIOSHACK
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SEARS
SHARP
SONY
SYMPHONIC
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
Codes
01*
02
03
04
05
06 – 08
09 – 13
14
15, 16
17
18, 19
20, 21
22, 23
24
25
25
26, 27
24
28
29
30
31
02, 17, 32 – 35
36, 37
14
38
39
40
41, 42
38
43,44
* Initial setting
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
69
69
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Operating other manufacturers’ equipment
English
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s service center.
RX-ES1SL
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The power does not come on.
The power cord is not plugged in.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary.
An incorrect source is selected.
Select the correct source.
Muting is activated.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute.
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)
is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or digital).
Connections are incorrect.
Check connections.
The balance is set to one extreme.
Adjust the balance properly (see page 23).
Sound from one speaker only.
General
The unit turns off and becomes standby Speakers are overloaded because of high
volume.
mode.
1. Stop the playback source.
2. Turn on the unit again, and adjust the volume.
Speakers are overloaded because of a
short circuit at the speaker terminals.
Check the speaker wiring.
If speaker wiring is not short-circuited, contact your
dealer.
The unit is overloaded because of a high
voltage.
Consult your dealer after unplugging the power cord.
Remote control does not operate as
you intend.
The remote control is not ready for your
intended operation.
Press a source selecting button or TONE first, then
press the buttons you want to use. (See pages 22
and 67 – 69.)
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction hiding the remote
sensor on the unit.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries.
The mode selector is set to the incorrect
position.
Set the mode selector to the proper position.
Appropriate bass level is not selected.
Adjust audio position level (see page 23).
Bass sound is reinforced too much
when listening in stereo.
70
EN70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
70
03.5.16, 16:16
SOLUTION
Surround mode cannot be selected.
Surround mode is not available on the
software being played back, or only the
front speakers are set for use.
Play not multi-channel software or
check the speaker setting.
DSP mode cannot be selected.
DSP mode is not available on the
software being played back, or only the
front speakers are set for use.
Play back Linear PCM or analog software or
check the speaker setting.
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM
reception.
Incoming signal is too weak.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact your
dealer.
The station is too far away.
Select a new station.
An incorrect antenna is used.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have the
correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Check connections.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Move the antenna farther from automobile traffic.
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Surround/DSP
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FM/AM
PROBLEM
NOTE
When you use the digital coaxial connection, the sounds may be intermittently distorted by the outside noise such as a lightning discharge but
they will restore automatically. This is not a malfunction.
71
EN70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
71
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Troubleshooting
English
Troubleshooting
XV-NK58SL
Power
PROBLEM
The power does not come on.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Power plug is not inserted securely.
“REGION CODE ERROR!” is shown on Region code of the inserted disc does not
match the player.
the TV screen.
JPEG
MP3/WMA
Audio
Picture
Operation
Operation is not possible.
Plug in securely.
Check the region code of the disc printed on the disc
jacket.
Microcomputer malfunction due to
lightning or static electricity.
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord, then
connect the power cord again.
Moisture condensation caused by a
sudden change of temperature or
humidity.
Turn off the power, then turn it on a few hours later.
The disc does not allow the operation, or
an unplayable disc is inserted.
Check and replace the disc (see page 33).
[LOCK] is displayed on the display
window and the disc tray does not
open.
When you press 0 while pressing down 7 The disc tray cannot be opened or closed in this
on the player in standby mode, the tray
status. To release this status, press 0 while pressing
lock function is activated.
down 7 on the player in standby mode.
Picture is noisy.
The player is connected to a VCR directly
and the copyguard function is activated.
Connect the player so that the picture signal flows
directly to the TV.
With some discs, the picture may be
blurred when [PICTURE SOURCE] is set
to [FILM] or [AUTO].
Set [PICTURE SOURCE] to [VIDEO (NORMAL)] or
[VIDEO (ACTIVE)].
Picture is distorted when using
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT or
S-VIDEO output jack(s).
Both the component connection and
S-video connection are made.
Disconnect the unused one.
No picture is displayed on the TV
screen or the screen is blurred or
divided into two parts.
The player is in the progressive scanning
mode though it is connected to a TV via
the VIDEO or S-VIDEO jack.
Set the 525i/525p/REMOTE selector on the rear
panel to “525i,” or set it to “REMOTE” and make the
progressive scanning mode inactive by using the
PROGRESSIVE button (see page 10).
DVD VIDEO disc playback sound level [D.RANGE CONTROL] preference is set
is lower than TV broadcast sound level. to other than [TV MODE].
Set the [D.RANGE CONTROL] preference to [TV
MODE] (see page 59).
Analog audio output is distorted.
[OUTPUT LEVEL] preference is set to
[STANDARD]
Set the [OUTPUT LEVEL] preference to [LOW] (see
page 59).
No sound comes out.
MP3/WMA disc is recorded with the
“packet writing (UDF format).”
It cannot be played.
Files (tracks) are not played in the
recorded order.
WMA files cannot be played back.
This player plays the files in the alphabetic order. So,
the playback order can vary.
The file is copy protected.
The player cannot play copy protected files.
The file is recorded with a bit rate under 48 kbps.
The player does not support such WMA files.
No picture is played back, or the screen Format of the files is not the baseline
JPEG.
turns black.
The unit supports only the baseline JPEG format.
The preference display cannot be
turned on.
You cannot turn on the preference display when a
JPEG disc is inserted.
The KARAOKE function cannot be
turned on.
KARAOKE
SOLUTION
An MP3/WMA disc is played back.
You cannot turn on the KARAOKE function while
playing back an MP3/WMA disc.
The musical key cannot be shifted.
You cannot shift the musical key when playing back
an Audio CD with DTS, or a DVD with DTS, MPEG
Multichannel or 96 kHz linear PCM.
The multichannel playback cannot be made. The KARAOKE function is turned on.
Turn off the KARAOKE function.
72
EN70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
72
03.5.16, 16:16
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.
English
Specifications
RX-ES1SL
Amplifier
FM tuner (IHF)
Output Power
At stereo operation:
Tuning Range:
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Usable Sensitivity:
Monaural:
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
At surround operation:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
Stereo:
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 Ω)
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 Ω)
Front channels:
Stereo Separation at REC OUT:
35 dB at 1 kHz
Front channels:
100 W per channel*, min. RMS, driven into
8 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion. (IEC268-3)
100 W per channel*, min. RMS, driven into
8 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
Center channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz,
with no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Surround channels: 100 W per channel*, min. RMS, driven into
8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz to 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
*Measured on AC 110V, 127 V, 220 V and 240 V.
Audio
General
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz):
DVD, DVD MULTI, DBS, VCR, TV:
260 mV/47 kΩ
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)* :
Coaxial: DIGITAL 1 (DVD):
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Optical: DIGITAL 2/3 (DBS/TV):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm
(660 nm ±30 nm)
Power Requirements:
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V,
adjustable with the voltage selector,
50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption:
100 W (at operation)
5 W (in standby mode)
Dimensions (W x H x D):
435 mm x 69.5 mm x 330.5 mm
Mass:
6.5 kg
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital
Surround (with sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
Audio Output Level: VCR:
250 mV
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN):
DVD MULTI:
87 dB/62 dB
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
DVD, DBS, VCR, TV:
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±1 dB)
Tone Control:
Bass (100 Hz):
±10 dB ±2 dB
Treble (10 kHz):
±10 dB ±2 dB
Bass Boost:
+4 dB ± 1 dB at 100 Hz
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz):
Composite video:DVD, DBS, VCR:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-Video:DVD, DBS, VCR:
(Y:luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(C:chrominance):
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Component video:DVD, DBS:
(Y:luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(PB/PR):
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Video Output Level/Impedance (1 kHz):
Composite video: VCR, MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-Video: VCR, MONITOR OUT:
(Y:luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(C:chrominance):
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Component video: MONITOR OUT:
(Y:luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(PB/PR):
Synchronize:
Negative
73
EN70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
73
03.5.16, 16:16
English
Specifications
XV-NK58SL
General
Readable discs:
Video format:
Audio outputs
DVD VIDEO, DVD-R (Video format), DVD-RW
(Video format), SVCD, Video CD, Audio CD
(CD-DA), MP3/WMA format, JPEG, CD-R/RW
(CD-DA, SVCD, Video CD, MP3/WMA format,
JPEG)
NTSC
PAL
525i (Interlaced scan)/525p
(Progressive scan) selectable
596i (Interlaced scan)
ANALOG OUT (pin jack):
2.0 Vrms (10 kΩ)
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL):
0.5 V(p-p) (75 Ω termination)
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (peak)
Audio characteristics
Other
Power requirements:
AC 110 V – 240 V
Frequency response
CD (sampling frequency 44.1 kHz): 2 Hz to 20 kHz
, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption:
13 W (POWER ON)
1.1 W (STANDBY mode)
Mass:
DVD (sampling frequency 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz
(4 Hz to 20 kHz for DTS and Dolby Digital bitstream signals)
DVD (sampling frequency 96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz
Dynamic range:
16 bit: More than 98 dB
20/24 bit: More than 100 dB
Wow and flutter:
Unmeasurable (less than ±0.002%)
2.1 kg
Dimensions (W X H X D) :
435 mm X 45 mm X 270.5 mm
Video outputs
COMPONENT (pin jacks):
Y Output: 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω
PB/PR Output: 0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Total harmonic distortion:
less than 0.006%
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
VIDEO OUT (pin jacks):
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-VIDEO OUT (S jack):
Y Output: 1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω
C Output: 286 mV(p-p)/75 Ω
Horizontal resolution:
500 lines or more
Audio input
MIC:
4 mVrms (8.2 kΩ)
74
EN70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UGUX]f
74
03.8.21, 15:21
U¹u²;« ‰Ëbł
XV-NK58SL
≥≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qOGA²« q³
wÐdŽ
≥≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qOb« «c¼ ‰uŠ
≥≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ U½«uDÝô« ‰uŠ
≥¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²« UOKLŽ
≥¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qÒGA*« ·UI¹≈ØqOGAð
≥¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOzb³*« W¾ON²«
≥µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ wÝUÝ_« ÷dF«
≥∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ÷dF« ·UM¾²Ý≈
≥∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WHK² UŽd Ð ÷dF«
≥∏ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOMž√ Ë√ bNA W¹«bÐ œU−¹≈
≥π ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ …—ÒuD²*« qOGA²« UOKLŽ
≥π ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ 5F l{u s ÷dF«
¥∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ÷dF« VOðdð dOOGð
¥≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ —dJ²*« ÷dF«
¥≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ bNA*« W¹Ë«“Ë uB«Ë WGK« dOOGð
¥¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WU)« uB«Ø…—uB« «dŁR
¥µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ «—UO²šô« rz«u jš nzUþË
¥∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ MP3/WMA U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
¥∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qOGA²« UOKLŽ
¥π ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ JPEG U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ¡«ełô« n¹dFð
µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ “UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ «d¹c%
µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WId*« UI×K*« s oIײ«
µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË qš«œ U¹—UD³« l{Ë
µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WODKH« V ²M j³{
∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ AM Ë FM Włu UOz«u¼ qOuð
∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGAË UŽUL « qOuð
π ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ Èdšô« u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOuð
±≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ qOuð
RX-ES1SL
±≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOÝUÝô« öOGA²«
±≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qOuð ±
±≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qOGA²K —bB*« —UO²š« ≤
±¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ uB« Èu² q¹bFð
Ò ≥
±¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ wLd« …dHOA« qOK% l{Ë —UO²š«
±µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ uB« r²— ÎU²R «uô« ·UI¹«
±µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ÂuM« XR WDÝ«uÐ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB
±µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WýUA« ŸuDÝ dOOGð
±∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WŽUL « UÞu³{
µ≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ KARAOKE tË«dJ« öOGAð
±∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ —UOJOðUuðË« UŽUL « UuKF j³{
—WŽd Ð WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{
±∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ l¹d « j³C«
—ÎU¹Ëb¹ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{
±∏ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ÍËbO« j³C«
µ∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOzb³*« U¾ON²« dOOGð
≤∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qOGA²« ¡«dł«
≤∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DIGITAL IN —wLd« qšb« (DIGITAL IN) ·«dÞ« j³{
≤± ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ AUTO SR —ÎUOzUIKð jO;« uB« j³{
—u¹bOH« X½U½u³L “UNł qšœ l{Ë j³{
≤± ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DVD VIDEO/DBS VIDEO
¥π ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ JPEG U½«uDÝ« ‰uŠ
¥π ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²« UOKLŽ
µ∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ©uý b¹ö « l{Ë® q«u² qJAÐ …—uB« …b¼UA
µ≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOÞUO²Š« UNO³Mð
µ≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ UOMž_« e−Š
µ≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ uB« —UO²š≈
µµ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ pðuB dŁR WU{≈
µ∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ wIOÝu*« ÂUI*« dOOGð
µ∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ öOCH²« —UO²š≈
∂∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ‰UHÞ_« q³ s ÷dF« bOOIð
∂≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOzb³*« U¾ON²« dOOGð
∂≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ s¹b«u« qHI oÞUM*«Ø‰Ëb« “u— WLzU ∫ A o×K
∂≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ UNð«—UB²š«Ë UGK« ‰Ëbł ∫ B o×K
∂≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOLd« «—Uýù« jD ∫ C o×K
∂¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ U×KDB*« r−F ∫ D o×K
∂µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½
∂∑ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ Èdšô« JVC …eNł« qOGAð
∂∏ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ Èdšô« …eNłô« qOGAð
∑∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ UNŠö«Ë ‰UDŽô« sŽ Y׳«
∑≥ UH«u*«
≤∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOÝUÝô« UÞu³C«
≤≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ uB« UÞu³{
≤≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ qOGA²« ¡«dł«
≤≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ BASS, TREBLE —WLGM« q¹bFð
≤≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ SUBWFR —WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð
≤≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ BAL —WOUô« UŽUL « Ãdš Ê“«uð q¹bFð
≤≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ B.BOOST —’U³« u W¹uIð
≤≥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ATT —qšb« …—Uý« nOH ð
≤¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ n«u*« öOGAð
≤¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ AM Włu n«u* wMe« qUH« j³{
≤¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ ÎU¹Ëb¹ UD;« vKŽ nOu²«
≤¥ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ o³ *« j³C« nOuð ‰ULF²Ý«
≤µ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý« l{Ë —UO²š«
≤∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
≤∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ Õd *U «u« s¹uJð
≤∂ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« n¹dFð
≤∏ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë«Ë UŽUL « l¹“uð 5Ð UöF« ‰uŠ
≤∏ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý«
≥∞ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DSP ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý«
≥≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý«
≥≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë qOGAð
≥≤ ÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆÆ WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð
±
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
1
19/5/03, 1:47 PM
¡«ełô« n¹dFð
AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS, KARAOKE, DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
2
3
AUDIO , DVD
, VCR , DBS , TV
4
DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM
CHANNEL +/–
5
TV VOL
+/–
6
• 7
4, 3, ¢, 1, 7, 8, ¡
©≥µ®
‚öžô«Ø`²H« —«—“«
©∂π ≠ ∂∑ ¨ ±≥® qOGA²«ØqOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« —«—“«
©±≥® —bB*« —UO²š« —«—“«
©∂π ¨ ∂∑®
©∂π ≠ ∂∑®
…UMI« —«—“«
© uB« ® Êu¹eHK²« u Èu² —«—“«
©∂π ¨ ∂∑® u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOGAð —«—“«
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË
l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨(RX-ES1SL) q³I² *« «c¼ qOGAð bMŽ •
Æ“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS” vKŽ (1)
vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨(XV-NK58SL) qÒGA*« qOGAð bMŽ •
Æ“DVD” vKŽ (1)
V ²M j³{« ¨KARAOKE tË«dJ« WHOþË ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ •
Æ“KARAOKE” vKŽ (1) l{u«
wÐdŽ
ÆqOUH²K ”«uô« qš«œ U×HB« dE½«
l{u« V ²M 1
©≤µ ¨ ≤¥® n«u*« qOGAð —«—“« •
TUNING 9, TUNING (, FM MODE, MEMORY
DVD
TOP MENU, MENU, CHOICE, ON SCREEN, ENTER,
3, 2, 5, ∞
ECHO
•
•
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
KARAOKE SOUND
•
ZOOM
•
PROGRESSIVE
•
VFP
•
KARAOKE
•
W½«uDÝ« qOGAð —«—“«
©µµ®
ÈbB« —“
WOŽdH« WLłd²« —“
©¥≥®
©µ≥ ¨ ¥≥®
uB« —“
©µ¥®
tË«dJ« u —“
©µ∞ ¨ ¥¥®
dO³J²« —“
©±∞®
ÂbI²*« ` *« —“
©¥¥®
oOb« u¹bOH« ZUF —“
©µ≤®
tË«dJ« —“
©≥∏® qOGA²« …œUŽ« —“ •
©µ∂® KEY 9 ÕU²H*« —“ •
©¥≥® ANGLE W¹Ë«e« —“ •
©µµ® VOCAL uB« —“ •
©¥µ® 3D uB« —“ •
©µ∂® KEY ( ÕU²H*« —“ •
©µ± ¨ ¥∏ ¨ ¥≤® REPEAT —«dJ²« —“ •
©±µ® SLEEP ÂuM« —“
©≥µ ¨ ±µ® DIMMER …¡U{ô« XUš —“
©≤≥® BASS BOOST ’U³« W¹uIð —“
©±∂® SMART S. SETUP Ÿ—U³« ©jO;« uB«® j³{ —“
©≥±® EFFECT WOUFH« —“
©≥± ≠ ≤π® TEST h×H« —“
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² j³{ —«—“«
©≥≤ ¨ ≥± ¨ ≤π ¨ ≤≤®
¨CENTER +/– ©W¹ed*« WŽUL «® ¨SUBWFR +/– ©WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ®
SURR R +/– ©51 jO× u® ¨SURR L +/– ©—U ¹ jO× u®
©∂π ¨ ∂∑® TV/VIDEO u¹bOH«ØÊu¹eHK²« —“
©±µ® MUTING uB« r² —“
©±¥® VOLUME +/– uB« Èu² —«—“«
©µ≤® RESERVE kH(« —“ •
©µ∞ ¨ ¥∏ ¨ ≥π® TITLE/GROUP WŽuL:«ØÊ«uMF« —“ •
©≥π® RETURN Ÿułd« —“
©≤≤® WLGM« j³C ÂU—ô« —«—“« •
TREBLE 9/( qÐdð ¨BASS 9/( ’UÐ,
©≤µ® ÎUI³ WÞu³C*« «uMI« —UO²šô ÂU—ô« —«—“« •
u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOGA² ÂU—ô« —«—“« •
©µµ® EFFECT WOUFH« —“
©±¥ ¨ ±≥® ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT wLd«ØdþUM²*« qšb« —“
©µ≤ ¨ ¥±® CANCEL ¡UGô« —“
©≤≤® TONE WLGM« —“
©≤≥® A. POSITION © uB«® l{Ë —“
©±¥® DECODE …dHOA« qOK% —“
©≥± ¨ ≥∞ ¨ ≤∏® SURROUND jO;« uB« —“
9
1
2
3
!
"
4
:
;
<
#
$
%
5
6
&
(
)
~
+
,
.
/
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
^
_
{
=
>
!
"
#
?
$
%
&
()
~
+
,-
]
_
.
@
[
\
^
{
/
sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ¡UDž `²H
ÁU&UÐ o“« rŁ UM¼ lœ« ¨bFÐ
ÆqHÝô«
1
4
2
7
5
+1+1
00
8
3
8
6
9
REM RM-SQ
OTE PES1
CO
NTROU
L
≤
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
2
15/8/03, 3:06 PM
¡«ełô« n¹dFð
RX-ES1SL
ÆqOUHK ”«uô« qš«œ U×HB« dE½«
WOUô« WŠuK«
2
wÐdŽ
1
3 4 5 6
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
9 !
7 8
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
"
#
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
©≥≤ ≠ ≤π ¨ ≤≤ ¨ ≤∞ ¨ ±∏ ¨ ±∑® SET j³C« —“ •
©≤µ® TUNER PRESET n«uLK o³ *« j³C« —“ •
©µ® bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ”U Š
©±≥® SOURCE SELECTOR —bB*« V ²M
©≥≤ ≠ ≤π ¨ ≤µ ¨ ≤≤ ¨ ≤∞ ¨ ±∏ ¨ ±∑® MULTI JOG œbF²*« ’dI«
©±¥® MASTER VOLUME w Ozd« uB« Èu² jÐU{
©±¥® PHONES ”√d« UŽULÝ f³I
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
ÕU³BË STANDBY/ON qOGA²«ØqOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« —“
©≤¥ ¨ ±≥® STANDBY qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô«
©±µ® DIMMER …¡U{ô« XUš —“
©≤¥ ¨ ≤∞ ¨ ±∏ ¨ ±∑® SETTING j³C« —“
©≥≤ ¨ ≥± ¨ ≤π ¨ ≤¥ ¨ ≤≤® ADJUST q¹bF²« —“
©≥± ¨ ≤π® SURROUND jO;« uB« —“
©qHÝôUÐ dE½«® ÷dF« …cU½ —“
—bB*« «dýR
8
9
!
"
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DVD MULTI, DVD, DBS, VCR, TV, FM/AM
÷dF« …cU½
2 34 56
1
ANALOG L
PLΙΙ SLEEP
C
R
DSP HP
LPCM
SUBWFR LFE
DOLBY D
AUTO SR
LS S RS INPUT ATT
DTS
!
8
7
BASS BOOST
TUNED
9
AUTO MUTING
A.POSITION
ST
MHZ
kHZ
VOL
#
"
©≤¥® n«u*« qOGAð «dýR
©u¹dO²Ý® ST ¨©nOuð® TUNED
©≤µ® AUTO MUTING ÎUOzUIKð uB« r² dýR
©≤≥® INPUT ATT qšb« ©nH ® dýR
©≤±® AUTO SR wzUIK²« ©jO;« uB«® dýR
WO Ozd« WýUA«
©±≥® uB« Èu² dýR
©≤≥® A.POSITION © uB«® l{Ë dýR
8
$ %
DTS ¨
9
!
"
#
$
%
©±¥\±≥® …—Uýô« WGO «dýR
©wL— w³Ëœ® DOLBY D ¨©wDš PCM® LPCM ¨ANALOG
©±µ® WŽUL «Ë …—Uýô« «dýR
©≥± \≥∞ \≤∑® DSP dýR
©≤∂® PLII dýR
©±¥® ©”√d« WŽULÝ® HP dýR
©±µ® SLEEP ÂuM« dýR
©≤≥® BASS BOOST ’U³« W¹uIð dýR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WOHK)« WŠuK«
2
1
FM 75
AM LOOP
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V
230 240V
3
ANTENNA
110V
COAXIAL
127V
AV
COMULINK-III
8
©±≤ ¨ ∏®
AUDIO
AM EXT
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
4
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
PB
R
PR
IN
OUT VCR
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
COMPONENT VIDEO
9
7
FRONT SPEAKERS, SURROUND SPEAKERS, CENTER SPEAKER
AV COMPULINK-III
8
AUDIO
9
DBS IN, VCR OUT (REC)/IN (PLAY), TV IN
SUBWOOFER OUT
!
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ·«dÞ«
©±± ≠ π®
uB« ·«dÞ«
©∑®
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš f³I
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
3
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
©µ® VOLTAGE SELECTOR WODKH« V ²M
©∂® ANTENNA wz«uN« ·«dÞ«
©±± ¨ ∏® DVD IN qšœ ·«dÞ«
1
2
3
FRONT, CENTER, SURR (REAR), SUBWOOFER
©±± ¨ π ¨ ∏® COMPONENT VIDEO Vd*« u¹bOH« ·«dÞ«
4
DVD IN, DBS IN, MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
5
DVD IN, DBS IN, VCR OUT (REC)/IN (PLAY), MONITOR OUT
©±± ≠ ∏®
≥
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
CENTER
SPEAKER
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
!
wLd« qšb« ·«dÞ«
©∑® WŽUL « ·«dÞ«
DVD
IN
7
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
VIDEO
Y
L
DBS
6
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
DIGITAL IN
6
DIGITAL 1 (DVD) , DIGITAL 2 (DBS), DIGITAL 3 (TV)
©∂µ®
5
19/5/03, 1:47 PM
u¹bOH« ·«dÞ«
¡«ełô« n¹dFð
XV-NK58SL
ÆqOUH²K ”«uô« qš«œ U×HB« dE½«
23
5
4
wÐdŽ
1
WOUô« WŠuK«
6 7 8 9 A B
STANDBY / ON
MIC
PROGRESSIVE
MIC LEVEL
MIN
MAX
C
©≥π ¨ ≥∑® ¢ .bI²« —“
©≥∂ ¨ ≥µ® 7 ·UI¹ô« —“
©≥∂ ¨ ≥µ® 3 qOGA²« —“
©≥∑ ¨ ≥∂® 8 XR*« ·UI¹ô« —“
©±∞® PROGRESSIVE ÂbI²*« ` *« dýR
©µ≤® MIC ÊuËdJO*« f³I
©µ≤® MIC LEVEL ÊuËdJO*« Èu² jÐU{
5
wI³²*« Xu«ØwKJ« Xu« «dýR
3D uB« dýR
8 ©XR*« ·UI¹ô«®Ø3 ©qOGA²«® «dýR
·UM¾²Ýô« dýR
…œbF²*« UuKF*« …cU½
VIDEO
4
Y
PB
WOHK)« WŠuK«
5
VIDEO SIGNAL
SELECTOR
REMOTE
525p
PAL
525i
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
NTSC
PR
AV COMPU LINK
S-VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
WEŠö
‰U³H²Ýô« “UN−Ð ©XV-NK58SL® DVD W½«uDÝ« qGA qOuð bMŽ *
Êu¹eHOK²« Ë√ ©RX-ES1SL®
f³I Ë√ ©Vd*«® VIDEO f³I—WOK²« fÐUI*« bŠ√ qOu²Ð r
.COMPONENT f³I Ë√
ÍœR¹ ·uÝ Xu« fH½ wÎUF qOu²K fÐUI*« s 5Žu½ s d¦√ ‰ULF²Ý« Ê≈
ÆWýUA« vKŽ `O× dOž qJAÐ …—uB« ŸuDÝË Ê« u_« ÷dž v≈
S.VIDEO
uB« WGO «dýR
W½«uDÝô« dýR
tË«dJ« dýR
qBH«Ø—U *«ØÊ«uMF«ØWŽuL:« «dýR
—dJ²*« qOGA²« l{Ë dýR
wz«uAF«ØZd³*« qOGA²« «dýR
7
8
9
A
B
COMPONENT
COAXIAL
PCM/ STREAM
AUDIO OUT
÷dF« …cU½
7
3
1 2
RIGHT
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
8 9A
LEFT
©≥¥® WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qOuð —“
©≥¥® STANDBY/ON qOGA²«ØqOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« dýR
©qHÝôUÐ dE½«® ÷dF« …cU½
©µ® bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ”U Š
©≥µ® W½«uDÝô« WOMO
©≥µ® 0 W½«uDÝô« ëdš« —“
©≥π ¨ ≥∑® 4 lOłd²« —“
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
4
1 23
D E
51Ø—U ¹ uB« Ãdš fÐUI
wLd« Ãd)« fÐUI
ÍdBÐ ¨
—u;« bײ
u¹bOH« Ãdš fÐUI
AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
* VIDEO OUT
VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT
VIDEO SIGNAL SELECTOR
NTSC, PAL
REMOTE, 525p, 525i
AV COMPU LINK
©∏®
©π®
1
2
3
u¹bOH« …—Uý« V ²M
WLE½«
4
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ·«dÞ«
5
¥
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
4
15/8/03, 3:06 PM
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
«d¹c%
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË qš«œ U¹—UD³« l{Ë
wÐdŽ
ÆôË« WId*« U¹—UD³« l{ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« q³
ÁU&UÐ …dýU³ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË tłË ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ •
ÆWOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ”U Š
¡UDž o“«Ë jG{«
vKŽ œułu*« U¹—UD³«
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË nKš
±
U¹—UD³« qšœ«
≤
∫WO³DI« oÐUDð s bQð
Æ©≠® v« ©≠® Ë ©´® v« ©´®
WUŽ UNO³Mð
ÆWMOÐUJ« Ë« WODžô« Ë« wž«d³« ŸeMð Ë« “UN'«« pJHð ô •
ÆWÐuÞd« Ë« dD*« v« “UN'« ÷dFð ô •
—bB s »dIUÐ “UN'« lCð ôË …dýU³*« fLA« WFý« v« “UN'« ÷dFð ô •
ÆÍ—«dŠ
“UN'« VB½ ÊUJ
Æ—U³G«Ë WÐuÞd« s wL×Ë u² `DÝ Ë– ÊUJ w q³I² *« “UNł V—
Ò •
s fÐUI« Ÿe½«Ë WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qOuð nË« ¨“UN'« qš«œ v« ¡U*« qšœ «–«
Ác¼ w u¼Ë “UN'« ‰ULF²Ý« Ê« ÆpKOË dA²Ý« p– bFÐ rŁ ¨—UO²« cšQ Wײ
ÆWOzUÐdN Wb ÀËbŠ Ë« o¹dŠ »uA½ V³ ¹ Ê« sJ1 WU(«
ÆW¹u¾ Wł—œ ≥µ Ë µ 5Ð «Îbł œ—UÐ ôË «Îb?ł —UŠ ÊuJ¹ ô YO×Ð ·UłË u² ÊUJ d²š« •
V³ ð Ê« sJ1 WHOFC« W¹uN²« Æq³I² *« V½«uł ‰uŠ WOU W¹uNð œułË s bQð •
Æq³I² *« —dC¹ U2 “UN'« qš«œ …—«d(« Wł—œ ŸUHð—«
ÆÊu¹eHK²«Ë “UN'« 5Ð WOU Á«d WU „dð« •
Æ «“«e²¼ö ÷dF ÊUJ w “UN'« Vdð ô •
q³I² *« l qUF²«
Æ¡UDG« VOdð bŽ«
≥
5²¹—UDÐ qLF²Ý« Æ U¹—UD³« ‰b³²Ý« ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË dOŁQð Èb iH ½« «–«
ÆR6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) WUł WOKš Ÿu½
ƉULF²Ýô« w —«dL²Ýö UNb³²Ý« Æwz«b²Ðô« j³C« qLF w¼ WId*« U¹—UD³« •
∫d¹c%
∫ U¹—UD³« U¹öš —U−H½« Ë« qzU « »d ð VM−² UNO³M²« Ác¼ l³ð«
∫iFÐ l UNÐUD« oÐUD²ð YO×Ð bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË qš«œ U¹—UD³« l{ •
Æ©≠® v« ©≠® Ë ©´® v« ©´®
Ê« sJ1 WNÐUA² Ëb³ð w²« U¹—UD³« Æ U¹—UD³« s `O×B« ŸuM« qLF²Ý« •
ÆWODKHUÐ nK² ð
ÆXu« fHMÐ UF 5²¹—UD³« ö ‰b³²Ý« ULz«œ •
ÆVNK« Ë« …—«d×K U¹—UD³« ÷dFð ô •
WODKH« V ²M j³{
ÆU¹—Ëd{ p– ÊU «–« ôË« wK¹ U qLŽ« ULz«œ ¨ öOu²« qLŽ q³
œułu*« VOLTAGE SELECTOR WODKH« V ²M qš«œ W×O×B« WODKH« d²š«
WöŽ Ê« s bQ²² h׫ Æwž«dÐ pH ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« WOHKš vKŽ
«c¼ ‰ULF²Ý« UNO r²¹ ·uÝ w²« WIDM*UÐ WU)« WODKH« vKŽ WÞu³C WODKH«
Æ“UN'«
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
WODKH« WöŽ
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
ÆW³Þ— Ë« WKK³ p¹b¹ X½U «–« WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ fLKð ô •
p « ÎULz«œ ¨pK « Ÿe½ bMŽ ÆpK « qBH WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ V× ð ô •
ÆpK « —dC²¹ ô v²Š pK « qBH fÐUI«
V³ ¹ Ê« sJ1 Æwz«uN«Ë qOu²« „öÝ« sŽ ΫbOFÐ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ kHŠ« •
bײ q³ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ wu½ ÆWýUAK g¹uAð Ë« ZO−{ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ
Æg¹uA²« b{ ΫbOł nKG t½ô ¨wz«uN« qOu² —u;«
¨WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ Ÿe½ bMŽ Ë« ¨WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« w qB ÀËbŠ bMŽ •
uB« UÞu³{ Ë AM Ë« FM Włu «uM q¦ ÎUI³ WÞu³C*« UÞu³C«
ÆWKOK ÂU¹« …bŽ bFÐ UN× r²¹ Ê« sJ1
WOM“ …b* dš« V³Ý Íô ‰eM*« ×Uš Ë« ΫdU Ë« ‰eM*« ×Uš ÊuJð UbMŽ •
„öN²Ý« r²¹ ÎULz«œ Æ—«b'« w …œułu*« —UO²« cšQ Wײ s fÐUI« Ÿe½« ¨WK¹uÞ
—UO²« cšQ Wײ l WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ qOuð ¡UMŁ« WOzUÐdN WUÞ WOL
Æ—«b'« w …œułu*«
qOGA²« w dOBI²« lM*
w Æ“UN'« «cN qLF² *« h A« q³ s W½UOBK WKÐU WOKš«œ ¡«eł« błu¹ ô •
Æ pKOË dOA²Ý« Ë WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ Ÿe½« ¨qDŽ Í« ‰uBŠ WUŠ
¨a« ¨WO½bF*« œuIM« ¨dFA« fOÐUÐœ ¨„öÝô« q¦ WO½bF ÂU ł« Í« qšbð ô •
Æ“UN'« qš«œ
Æ“UN'« —dC¹ Ê« sJ1 W¹uN²« Uײ ÒbÝ Ê« ÆW¹uN²« Uײ bÒ ð ô •
WMOÐUJ« nOEM²
W'UF*« ‘ULI« lD ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WIKF²*« ULOKF²« l³ð« ÆWLŽU½ ‘UL WFD qLF²Ý« •
ÆUOzUOLO ‡
nOEM² ULIF Ë« W¹uCŽ œ«u qOU× W¹« Ë« dMO¦« Ë« s¹eM³« qLF² ð ô •
ÆWMOÐUJ« Êu dOOGðË nK𠜫u*« Ác¼ V³ ð Ê« sJ1 Æ“UN'«
WId*« UI×K*« s oIײ«
ÆWOU²« UI×K*« lOLł œułË s bQ²K h׫
ÆWId*« lDI« œbŽ vKŽ ‰b¹ ”«uô« qš«œ œułu*« rd«
©±® bFÐ sŽ rJ% …bŠË •
©≤® U¹—UDÐ •
©±® Í—UÞ« AM Włu wz«u¼ •
©±® FM Włu wz«u¼ •
©±® wL— —u;« bײ pKÝ •
©±® AC œœd²*« —UO²« fÐU T¹UN •
©±® u¹bOØ u pKÝ •
ÎÆ pKOuÐ qBð« ¨…œułu dOž UI×K*« Ác¼ ÈbŠ« X½U «–«
«—u
µ
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
5
19/5/03, 1:48 PM
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
qË« ¨UHOF{
Î
FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý« ÊU «–«
Æ©od dOž® wł—Uš FM Włu wz«u¼
Ë FM Włu UOz«u¼ qOuð
…œU0 vDG œdH wł—Uš pKÝ qË« ¨UHOF{
Î
AM Włu ‰U³I²Ý« ÊU «–«
Æ©od dOž® qOMOH«
Í—UÞô« AM Włu wz«u¼
©od®
—UÞô« vKŽ …œułu*« WM ô« qšœ«
…bŽUI« vKŽ …œułu*« UײH« qš«œ
ÆÍ—UÞô« AM Włu wz«u¼ VOd²
©od® FM Włu wz«u¼
RX-ES1SL
UEŠö
¨qOMOH« …œU0 vDG Í—UÞô« AM Włu wz«u¼ pKÝ ÊU «–
Æ5LO« vKŽ ÷ËdF u¼ UL UNHKÐ qOMOH« …œU Ÿe½«
¨Èdš« ·«dÞ« Í« l fö²ð ô wz«uN« öu Ê« s bQð
p– V³ ¹ Ê« sJ1 ÆWOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ Ë qOuð „öÝ«
ƉU³I²ÝôUÐ nF{
•
•
AM
Włu wz«u¼ qOuð
ÆAM LOOP ·«dÞ« l od*« Í—UÞô« AM Włu wz«u¼ qË«
Æ H ·dÞ l œuÝô« pK «Ë ¨AM EXT ·dÞ l iOÐô« pK « qË«
ƉU³I²Ý« qC« vKŽ qB% Ê« W¹UG Í—UÞô« wz«uN« —Ëœ
Ò
qOMOH« …œU0 vDG œdH wł—Uš pKÝ qË« ¨ÎUHOF{ ‰U³I²Ýô« ÊU «–« •
ÎÆ
ôuu
AM Włu* Í—UÞô« wz«uN« wIЫ ÆAM EXT ·dÞ l ©od dOž®
FM
Włu wz«u¼ qOuð
—u;« bײ*« ·dD« l od*« FM Włu wz«u¼ qË«
ÆXR wÝUO ¡«dłS
ÎÆUOI« od*« FM Włu wz«u¼ œb
q³ Æ©od dOž® wł—Uš FM Włu wz«u¼ qË« ÆÎUHOF{ ‰U³I²Ýô« ÊU «–« •
¨©DIN45325 Ë« IEC® qu ·dÞ Ë– ÂË« ∑µ —u;« bײ*« q³J« qOuð
Æod*« FM Włu wz«u¼ qB«
FM 75 Ω COAXIAL
∂
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
6
19/5/03, 1:48 PM
wÐdŽ
AM
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
DVD
W½«uDÝ« qÒGAË UŽUL « qOuð
Æ öOu²« ¡«dł« q³ X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« lOLł qOGAð nË«
UŽUL « l¹“uð jD
wÐdŽ
uBK WMJ2 WOUF qC« vKŽ ‰uB×K `O× qJAÐ j³C« UuKF j³{« ¨WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ë«ØË ¨jO;« uB«Ë W¹ed*«Ë WOUô« UŽUL « qOuð bFÐ
Ʊπ v« ±∂ s U×HB« dE½« ¨qOUH²K ÆjO;«
WOŽd dH¹Ë WŽULÝ
WŽULÝ
W¹ed
WOU« WŽULÝ
Èd ¹
WOU« WŽULÝ
vM1
XV-NK58SL
MIN
MAX
RX-ES1SL
u WŽULÝ
Èd ¹ jO×
jO× u WŽULÝ
vM1
jO;« uB«Ë W¹ed*«Ë WOUô« UŽUL « qOuð
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ qOuð
·«dÞô« l WOHK)« WŠuK« vKŽ …œułu*« ©≠® Ë ©´® ·«dÞô« qË« ¨WŽULÝ qJ
Æq K ²UÐ UŽUL « vKŽ …œułu*« …dýR*« ©≠® Ë ©´®
Æ©od dOž® WŽULÝ pKÝ q ·dÞ W¹UN½ s ‰“UF« Ÿe½« rŁ n
Ò ±
s¹uJð …œUŽ« Ë« ’U³« u W¹uIð pMJ1 ¨WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ qOuð WDÝ«uÐ
ÆwLd« ZU½d³« qš«œ WK− *« LFE iH M*« œœd²« WOUF «—Uý«
l WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« l Wuu*« WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ qšœ f³I qË«
WDÝ«uÐ ¨WOHK)« WŠuK« vKŽ œułu*« SUBWOOFER OUT Ãd)« f³I
Æ©od dOž® RCA ”uÐœ Ÿu½ fÐU Ë– pKÝ ‰ULF²Ý«
ÆWOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ l od*« qOGA²« ULOKFð VOÒ² v« ÎUC¹« lł—« •
WŽUL « pKÝ qšœ« rŁ ¨(1) WŽUL « p³A ·dÞ vKŽ jGC« lÐUðË jG{«
Æ(2)
Æp³A*« sŽ pF³« —dŠ
WEŠö
vKŽ WMO³«
Ò SPEAKER IMPEDANCE WŽUL « WF½U2 pK²9 UŽULÝ qLF²Ý«
ÆWŽUL « ·«dÞ«
WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« l Wuu*« dH¹u« WŽULÝ
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
2 1
FRONT
SPEAKERS
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
SUBWOOFER
OUT
AB CD E
FM 75
AM LOOP
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
PB
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
TV
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER
OUT
S-VIDEO
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
W¹ed*« WŽUL « v«
vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ v«
Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ v«
vMLO« WOUô« WŽUL « v«
Èd O« WOUô« WŽUL « v«
RX-ES1SL
∑
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
7
≥
∫tO³Mð
…œUŽ Æw¼U&« dOž ’U³« u Êô Áb¹dð ÊUJ Í« w dH¹u« WŽULÝ VOdð pMJ1
ÆpU« WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ l{uð
CENTER
SPEAKER
≤
19/5/03, 1:48 PM
A
B
C
D
E
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
©XV-NK58SL q¹œu*«® DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA qOuð
∫u¹bOH« qOu² UEŠö
•
wÐdŽ
ÆS-video u¹bOH« pKÝË Vd*« u¹bOH« pKÝ v« WU{ôUÐ u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1
ÆX½U½u³L > S-video u¹bO > Vd ∫wU²« VOðd²UÐ — qC« …—u …œuł ‰uB(« pMJ1 ¨u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ Ë« S-video u¹bOH« pKÝ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ
ÆŸuM« fH½ s „öÝ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ q³I² *« «c¼ l Êu¹eHK²« qË« ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA s …—uB« …b¼UA*
•
©od dOž® u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ
dCš«
dLŠ«
‚—“«
‚—“«
dLŠ«
bŠ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ qË«
Æu¹bOH« ·«dÞ«
FRONT
DVD
IN
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
SUBWOOFER
DVD
IN
CENTER
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
©od dOž® S-video u¹bO pKÝ
VCR
PB
PR
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
dH«
COMPONENT VIDEO
iOЫ
dLŠ«
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
PB
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
COMPONENT VIDEO
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
u¹bOØ u pKÝ
©q³ ± ∫od®
dLŠ«
iOЫ
dH«
wL— —u;« bײ pKÝ
©q³ ± ∫od®
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
TV
CENTER
SPEAKER
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
dCš«
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
VIDEO
LEFT
COAXIAL
RIGHT
OPTICAL
S-VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COMPONENT
Y
PCM/ STREAM
S-VIDEO
PB
PR
VIDEO OUT
XV-NK58SL
RX-ES1SL
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
PCM/ STREAM
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
wLd« pK « qOuð q³
fÐU Ÿe½« ¨ÍdB³«
ÆW¹Uu«
dOž®©od dOž® ÍdBÐ wL— pKÝ
©od
UEŠö
WOLd« qšb« ·«dÞ« j³{ - ¨lMB*« s “UN'« s×ý bMŽ
∫X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« l ‰ULF²Ýö
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA* ∫©—u;« bײ® DIGITAL 1 –
DBS n«u* ∫©ÍdBЮ DIGITAL 2 –
Êu¹eHK²« n«u* ∫©ÍdBЮ DIGITAL 3 –
wLd« qšb« ·dÞ j³{ dÒOž ¨Èdš« X½U½u³L …eNł« XKË« «–
(DIGITAL IN) ·«dÞ« j³{” r dE½« Æ`O× qJAÐ (DIGITAL IN)
Æ≤∞ W×H vKŽ …œułu*« “DIGITAL IN —wLd« qšb«
Ë« dþUM²*« qšb« l{Ë —UO²š«” r dE½« Æ`O×B« wLd« qšb« l{Ë d²š«
Ʊ≥ W×H vKŽ œułu*« “wLd« qšb«
Ë« ÍdBÐ wL— qOuð —wL— qOuð VKD²¹ p– ¨wLd« uBUÐ l²L²K
ÆwL— —u;« bײ qOuð
DIGITAL IN
•
•
•
∏
AR01-08.RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
8
19/5/03, 1:48 PM
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
Èdšô« u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOuð
Æ öOu²« ¡«dł« q³ X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« lOLł qOGAð nË«
¡ULÝ« Êô UNÐ WU)« qOGA²« ULOKFð U³ÒO² v« ÎUC¹« lł—« ¨Èdš« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOuð bMŽ ÆWOł–u/ WK¦« w¼ Ãd)«Øqšb« ·«dÞô WO×O{u²« UuÝd«
ÆX½U½u³LJ« …eNł« Ÿ«u½« 5Ð nK² ð “UN'« WOHKš vKŽ WŽu³D*« WOKFH« ·«dÞô«
•
wÐdŽ
∫u¹bOH« qOu² UEŠö
Æq³I² *« «c¼ l VCR u¹bO XOÝU q− qOu² S-video u¹bO pKÝ Ë« Vd u¹bO pKÝ ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1
«c¼ l DBS n«uË Êu¹eHK²«Ë DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA qOu² S-video u¹bOH« pKÝ Ë Vd*« u¹bOH« pKÝ v« WU{ôUÐ u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1
Æq³I² *«
ÆX½U½u³L > S-video u¹bO > Vd ∫wU²« VOðd²UÐ —qC« …—u …œuł ‰uB(« pMJ1 ¨u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ Ë« S-video u¹bOH« pKÝ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ
s „öÝ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ q³I² *« «c¼ l Êu¹eHK²« qË« ¨Êu¹eHK²« vKŽ VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë« DBS n«u Ë« DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA s …—uB« …b¼UA*
Æq³I² *« «c¼ l VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë« DBS n«u Ë« DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA qOu² ŸuM« fH½
•
•
•
•
Êu¹eHK²« qOuð
Æ…—uBUÐ g¹uAð qB×¹ Ê« sJ1 ¨wKš«œ VCR u¹bO XOÝU q− vKŽ Íu²×¹ Êu¹eHKð Ë« VCR u¹bO XOÝU q− ‰öš s ‰uu Êu¹eHKð qLF² ð ô
©od dOž® u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ
Æu¹bOH« ·«dÞ« bŠ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ qË«
DVD IN
DBS IN
dCš«
‚—“«
dLŠ«
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
PB
MONITOR OUT
©od dOž® Vd u¹bO pKÝ
PR
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
FM 75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AM EXT
FRONT
DVD
IN
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
CENTER
L
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
PB
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
TV
IN
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
©od dOž® S-video u¹bO pKÝ
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
dCš«
‚—“«
dLŠ«
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
AUDIO
©od dOž® u¹dO²Ý u pKÝ
LEFT
L
R
TV “UNł
Êu¹eHK²«
RIGHT
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
OUT
IN
AUDIO
ÆqOGA²« l{Ë w
525i/525p/REMOTE
…—Uýô« V ²M l{u —UO²š«
WUD« qB ¡UMŁ« 525i/525p/REMOTE …—Uýô« V ²M l{u dOOGð pOKŽ V−¹
ƉUF ÊuJ¹ s j³C« dOOGð ¨p– fJFÐ ÆqÒGA*« sŽ
` *« l{Ë rŽbð ô X½U½u³L …eNł« fÐUI0 eÒN− Êu¹eHK²« “UNł ÊU «–« •
Æ“525i” l{Ë vKŽ V ²M*« j³{« ¨ÂbI²*«
` *« l{Ë rŽbð X½U½u³L …eNł« fÐUI0 eÒN− Êu¹eHK²« “UNł ÊU «–« •
Æ“525p” l{Ë vKŽ V ²M*« j³{« ¨ÂbI²*«
ΫœUL²Ž«® ÂbI²*« l{u«Ë pÐUA²*« l{u« 5Ð ` *« ŸU{Ë« —UO²š« œ—« «–« •
V ²M*« j³{« ¨©a« ¨Êu¹eHKð “UNł s d¦« qOuð bMŽ Ë« ¨—bB*« WUŠ vKŽ
Æ“REMOTE” l{Ë vKŽ
VIDEO SIGNAL SELECTOR
VIDEO SIGNAL
SELECTOR
NTSC
REMOTE
525p
PAL
525i
NTSC
π
9
Ë« PAL ÂUEM« —UO²š«
Ë« “PAL” vKŽ WOHK)« WŠuK« vKŽ œułu*« PAL/NTSC ÂUEM« V ²M j³{«
vKŽ oBK*« ÊuK« ÂUE½ Ê« s bQð ÆÊu¹eHK²« Êu ÂUE½ l oÐUD²O “NTSC”
Êu ÂUE½ l oÐUD²¹ DVD VIDEO/SVCD/Video CD u¹bOH« W½«uDÝ« ·öž
ÆÊu¹eHK²«
U½«uDÝô« qOGAð pMJ1 ¨…œbF² Ê«u« WLE½« Ë– Êu¹eHKð qLF² ð XM «–«
ÂUEM« V ²M j³{ WDÝ«uÐ NTSC ÂUE½Ë PAL ÂUE½ s Îö vKŽ WK− *«
ÆVÝUM qJAÐ PAL/NTSC
ÂbŽ WUŠ w Ë« ·UI¹ô« l{Ë w PAL/NTSC ÂUEM« V ²M l{u dOž
Ò •
V ²M*« l{u dÒOž «–« ‰UF ÊuJ¹ s j³C« dOOGð ÆWKšb W½«uDÝ« œułË
WOU²« W×HB« vKŽ l³²¹
AR09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
u¹bOH« …—Uý« V ²M ‰uŠ
XV-NK58SL q¹œu*« vKŽ
19/5/03, 1:49 PM
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²ÝUÐ ÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë qOGAð
•
•
•
•
…—Uýô« V ²MË qOGAð l{Ë w qÒGA*« ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
—e« vKŽ qHÝô jGC« lÐUðË jG{« ¨“REMOTE” l{Ë vKŽ ◊u³C
ÆÊ«uŁ …bF bFÐ sŽ r×J²« …bŠË vKŽ PROGRESSIVE
ÆpÐUA²*« ` *«Ë ÂbI²*« ` *« ŸU{Ë« 5Ð ` *« l{Ë ‰uײ¹
ÂbI²*« ` *« dýR ¡wC¹ ¨ÂbI²*« l{u« vKŽ ` *« l{Ë j³{ bMŽ
ÆWOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ PROGRESSIVE
öOCH²« WýUý vKŽ [PICTURE SOURCE] …—uB« —bB j³{ vKŽ «œUL²Ž«
Î
Ë« rK ≠ —bB w¼ DVD VIDEO u¹bOH« W½«uDÝ« X½U «–« ULOË [PICTURE]
ÆqHÝôUÐ ‰Ëb'« w ÷ËdF u¼ UL ¨dýR*« Êu nK² ¹ ¨u¹bO ≠ —bB
525i/525p/REMOTE
u¹bO?H« W½«uDÝ« —bB Ÿu½
u¹bO —bB
rK —bB
•
DVD VIDEO
ÂbI²*« ` *UÐ u¹bOH« ÷dŽ duð
Ò
dLŠ«
dCš«
dLŠ«
◊uDš “«e²¼«Ë iOË l WOUŽ …—u …œu−Ð l²L²« pMJ1 ¨ÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë w
l Wuu COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Ãd)« fÐUI ÊuJð UbMŽ qOK
ÆÂbI²*« u¹bOH« qšœ rŽb¹ »Ud Ë« Êu¹eHK²«
dCš«
dCš«
dLŠ«
…—uB« —bB j³{
[PICTURE SOURCE]
AUTO
FILM
VIDEO (NORMAL)/
(ACTIVE)
ÂbI²*« ` *« dýR ¡wC¹ ¨ÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë w nu²« ¡UMŁ«
…—uB« —bB —UO²š« sŽ dEM« iGÐ dLŠô« ÊuKUÐ PROGRESSIVE
*
Æ[PICTURE SOURCE]
` *« ŸU{Ë« ‰uŠ
Î
DVD VIDEO u¹bOH« U½«uDÝ« nOMBð sJ1 ¨…œU*« —bB WGO vKŽ «œUL²Ž«
Íu²% u¹bOH« U½«uDÝ« iFÐ Ê« kŠô® u¹bO —bBË rK —bB ª5MŁ« 5Žu½ v«
‰bF0 UuKF qJý vKŽ UNKO− ð r²¹ rKH« œUB Æ©u¹bO —bBË rK —bB vKŽ
UuKF qJý vKŽ UNKO− ð r²¹ (NTSC) u¹bOH« —œUB ULMOÐ ¨WO½U¦UÐ —UÞ« ≤¥
Æ©pÐUA² WO½U¦UÐ ‰U− ∂∞® WO½U¦UÐ —UÞ« ≥∞ ‰bF0
dOž ÂbI²*« Ãd)« «—Uý« s¹uJð r²¹ ¨rK —bB …œU qOGA²Ð qÒGA*« ÂuI¹ UbMŽ
ÆWOKô« UuKF*« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WJÐUA²*«
WJÐUA²*« ◊uD)« 5Ð ◊uDš l{uÐ qÒGA*« ÂuI¹ ¨u¹bO —bB …œU qOGAð bMŽ
ÆWbI²*« …—Uýô« q¦ UNł«dšUÐ ÂuI¹Ë WKLJ² …—u s¹uJ² qJ« vKŽ
VCR
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− qOuð
©od dOž® Vd u¹bO pKÝ
Æu¹bOH« ·«dÞ« bŠ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ qË«
VIDEO
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
©od dOž® S-video u¹bO pKÝ
S-VIDEO
FM 75
AM LOOP
DVD
IN
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AM EXT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
PB
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
VCR u¹bO XOÝU q−
VCR
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
AUDIO
©od dOž® u¹dO²Ý u pKÝ
L
LEFT
R
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
RIGHT
IN
OUT
IN
AUDIO
±∞
AR09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
10
19/5/03, 1:49 PM
wÐdŽ
UEŠö
qÒGA*« Ãdš fÐUI qOuð bMŽ jI ÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë qG²A¹
ÆÊu¹eHK²« l COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ÆNTSC ÂUE½ w¼ …—Uýô« WGO ÊuJð UbMŽ jI ÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë qG²A¹
ô wUF« Õu{u« «– U½u¹eHK²«Ë ÂbI²*« ` *« U½u¹eHKð …eNł« iFÐ „UM¼
bMŽ WOFO³Þ dOž …—u ¡UDŽ« v« ÍœR¹ U2 ¨qÒGA*« l qU qJAÐ o«u²ð
Ác¼ q¦ w ÆÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë w DVD VIDEO u¹bO W½«uDÝ« qOGAð
ÆpÐUA²*« ` *« l{Ë qLF²Ý« ¨WU(«
ÆwK;« JVC ÊuÐe« Ubš ed0 qBð« ¨p½u¹eHKð oÐUDð s bQ²K
JVC W—U wUF« Õu{u« «– U½u¹eHK²«Ë ÂbI²*« ` *« U½u¹eHKð lOLł
Æ©AV-61S902 q¹œu*« ∫‰U¦® qÒGA*« l ÎUOK o«u²ð
fÐUIË S-VIDEO u¹bOH« f³IË VIDEO u¹bOH« f³I ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1 ô
©qЫuJ«® q³J« qË« ÆXu« fHMÐ UF COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Ãd)«
ÆUNULF²Ý« b¹dð w²« ©fÐUI*«® f³I*« l jI
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
n«u qOuð
DBS
dCš«
‚—“«
dLŠ«
dCš«
‚—“«
dLŠ«
wÐdŽ
©od dOž® u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ
DVD IN
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
©od dOž® Vd u¹bO pKÝ
VIDEO
PB
MONITOR OUT
PR
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Æu¹bOH« ·«dÞ« bŠ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ qË«
FM 75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
FRONT
DVD
IN
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
DVD
IN
CENTER
L
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
TV
IN
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
DBS n«u
DBS
tuner
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
DBS
CENTER
SPEAKER
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
IN
(PLAY)
PB
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
Y
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
AM EXT
©od dOž® S-video u¹bO pKÝ
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
AUDIO
©od dOž® u¹dO²Ý u pKÝ
LEFT
L
RIGHT
R
DBS
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
TV
OUT
IN
AUDIO
©≥≤ W×H dE½«® DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{u dþUM²*« qOu²«
ÆXV-NK58SL q¹œu*« qOuð WOHO ‰uŠ ∏ W×H dE½« ÆXV-NK58SL q¹œuLK du² dOž DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë
dCš«
dCš«
‚—“«
‚—“«
dLŠ«
dLŠ«
•
©od dOž® u¹bOH« X½U½u³L pKÝ
DVD IN
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
©od dOž® Vd u¹bO pKÝ
VIDEO
PB
MONITOR OUT
PR
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
©od dOž® S-video u¹bO pKÝ
RX-ES1SL
FM 75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
L
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
fÐUI
DVD W½«uDÝ« qGA
Ò
DVDlPlayer
qBHM dþUM² …UM µ[±
(ex. XV-NA7SL)
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
SUBWOOFER
OUT
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
IN
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
MONITOR OUT
PR
DBS
CENTER
SPEAKER
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
PB
R
AV
OMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
©od dOž® u¹dO²Ý u pKÝ
WOUô« vMLO« …UMI« u Ãdš v«
FRONT
R
SUBWOOFER
WOUô« Èd O« …UMI« u Ãdš v«
L
CENTER
W¹ed*« …UMI« u Ãdš v«
Èd O« jO;« uB« …UM u Ãdš v«
vMLO« jO;« uB« …UM u Ãdš v«
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš v«
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
©od dOž® ÍœUŠ« u pKÝ
WOU²« W×HB« vKŽ l³²¹
±±
AR09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
11
19/5/03, 1:49 PM
“UN'« VOdð ¡bÐ
wLd« qOu²«
Êu¹eHK²«
TV“UNł
©od dOž® ÍdBÐ wL— pKÝ
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
FRONT
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
PB
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
COMPONENT VIDEO
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
wL— —u;« bײ pKÝ
©q³ ± ∫od®
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DBS n«u
DBS
tuner
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
CENTER
SPEAKER
DIGITAL IN
wÐdŽ
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
DIGITAL 2 (STB)
R
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
RX-ES1SL
S-VIDEO
pK « qOuð q³
¨ÍdB³« wLd«
ÆW¹Uu« fÐU Ÿe½«
UEŠö
WOLd« qšb« ·«dÞ« j³{ - ¨lMB*« s “UN'« s×ý bMŽ
∫WOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« l ‰ULF²Ýö
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA* ∫©—u;« bײ® DIGITAL 1 –
DBS n«u* ∫©ÍdBЮ DIGITAL 2 –
Êu¹eHK²« n«u* ∫©ÍdBЮ DIGITAL 3 –
(DIGITAL IN) wLd« qšb« ·dÞ j³{ dOÒž ¨Èdš« X½U½u³L …eNł« XKË« «–«
—wLd« qšb« (DIGITAL IN) ·«dÞ« j³{” r dE½« Æ`O× qJAÐ
Æ≤∞ W×H vKŽ …œułu*« “DIGITAL IN
Æ`O×B« wLd« qšb« l{Ë d²š«
W×H vKŽ œułu*« “wLd« qšb« Ë« dþUM²*« qšb« l{Ë —UO²š«” r dE½«
Ʊ≥
DIGITAL IN
•
•
WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ qOuð
qJAÐ WKšb fЫuI« Ê« s bQð Æ—«b'« w …œułu*« —UO²« cšQ Wײ l AC œœd²*« —UO²« WUÞ fÐU qË« ¨…—uB«Ø uB« öOuð lOLł qLŽ s ¡UN²½ô« bMŽ
ÆdLŠô« ÊuKUÐ DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA vKŽ dýR*«Ë q³I² *« vKŽ STANDBY qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« ÕU³B ¡wC¹ ÆXÐUŁË rJ×
ÆWýUAK g¹uAð Ë« ZO−{ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ V³ ¹ Ê« sJ1 Æwz«uN«Ë qOu²« qЫu sŽ ΫbOFÐ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ kHŠ« •
UEŠö
∫WOU²« ôU(« w WKOK ÂU¹« …bŽ bFÐ UN× r²¹ Ê« sJ1 uB« j³{Ë UI³ WÞu³C*« «uMI« q¦ UI³ WÞu³C*« UÞu³C«
ÆWOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ Ÿe½ bMŽ –
ÆWOzUÐdNJ« WUD« —UO²Ð ŸUDI½« ÀËbŠ bMŽ –
∫WOU²« ôU(« w WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ qB«
ÆXu« s WK¹uÞ …d²H qÒGA*« ‰ULF²Ý« ÂbŽ WUŠ w –
ÆqÒGA*« nOEMð q³ –
ÆqÒGA*« p¹d% q³ –
•
•
∫ «d¹c%
ÆW³Þ— Ë« WKK³ p¹b¹ ÊuJð UbMŽ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ fLKð ô
Àœ«uŠ Ë« W¹QÐdN Wb ÀËbŠ Ë« ¨o¹dŠ »uA½ v« p– ÍœR¹ Ê« sJ1 ¨pK « vKŽ WKOIŁ ÂU ł« lCðË« ¨WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ V×Ý Ë« Íu Ë« ¨ vKŽ q¹bF²UÐ rIð ô
ÆÈdš«
Æb¹bł pK Ð WOz«dNJ« WUD« pKÝ ‰b³²Ý«Ë pKOË dA²Ý« ÆpK « —dCð «–«
ÆqOu²« «¡«dł« lOLł ÂU9«Ë q³I² *« nKš vKŽ WODKH« V ²M ÕU²H j³Cð Ê« q³ WUD« b¹Ëeð Wײ qš«œ fÐUI« qšbð ô
•
•
•
•
±≤
AR09-12RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
12
19/5/03, 1:50 PM
RX-ES1SL
WOÝUÝô« öOGA²«
qOGA²K —bB*« —UO²š« ≤
wÐdŽ
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG SOURCE SELECTOR —bB*« V ²M —Ëœ
Ò
ÆWýUA« vKŽ »užd*« —bB*« rÝ«
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
ÆdLŠô« ÊuKUÐ —U²<« —bBLK oÐUD*« —bB*« dýR ¡wC¹
∫wK¹ UL —bB*« dÒOG²¹ ¨SOURCE SELECTOR —bB*« V ²M —ÒËœ ULK •
L
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
ANALOG
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
STANDBY
R
DVD
WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË
l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
SUBWFR
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
VOL
DVD MULTI
DVD (DVD DIGITAL)
VCR
DBS (DBS DIGITAL)
TV (TV DIGITAL)
FM
AM
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
CHANNEL
TUNING
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
VOLUME
FM MODE
TUNING
MEMORY
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s
TOP MENU
Æ—bB*« —UO²š« —«—“« bŠ« jG{«
MENU
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
ƉœU³²UÐ AM Ë FM Włu dÒOG²ð ¨FM/AM —e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w •
Ãd)« l{Ë ‰ULF²ÝUÐ DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA —UO²š«
: DVD MULTI
qOGA²UÐ ŸU²L²Ýö Æ©µ[± …UM u® qBHM*« dþUM²*«
Æ≥≤ W×H dE½« ¨DVD MULTI œbF²*«
ÆDVD W½«uDÝô« qÒGA —UO²š« :*DVD (DIGITAL)
ÆDBS n«u*« —UO²š« :*DBS (DIGITAL)
:VCR
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− —UO²š«
ÆÊu¹eHK²« n«u —UO²š« :*TV (DIGITAL)
ÆFM Włu YÐ —UO²š«
:FM
ÆAM Włu YÐ —UO²š«
:AM
AUDIO
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KARAOKE SOUND
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
3
TREBLE
5
7
KEY
TREBLE
2
BASS
4
8
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
9
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
6
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qOuð ±
wLd« qšb« Ë« dþUM²*« qšb« l{Ë —UO²š« *
‰ULF²ÝUÐ Êu¹eHK²« n«u Ë« DBS n«u Ë« DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA quð UbMŽ
v« ∏ s U×HB« dE½«® wLd« qOu²«Ë dþUM²*« qOu²« w²I¹dÞ s ö
Î
Æ`O×B« qšb« l{Ë —UO²š« v« ÃU²% p½U ¨©±≤
ÆwLd« qšb« ·«dÞ« UN d²š« w²« —œUBLK wLd« qšb« —UO²š« jI pMJ1 •
vKŽ “DIGITAL IN —wLd« qšb« (DIGITAL IN) ·«dÞ« j³{” dE½«®
©Æ≤∞ W×H
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
l{Ë —UO²šô ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT —e« jG{«
ÆwLd« Ë« dþUM²*« qšb«
dþUM²*« qšb« 5Ð qšb« l{Ë ‰œU³ð r²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w
Æ©“DGTL AUTO”® wLd« qšb«Ë ©“ANALOG”®
·UA²UÐ q³I² *« ÂuI¹ ¨wLd« qšb« l{Ë —UO²šô
WGO dýR ¡wC¹ rŁ UOJOðUuðË« WœUI« …—Uýô« WGO
«—Uýö ©LPCM Ë« DTS, DOLBY D® WOLd« …—Uýô«
ÆUNUA²« - w²«
ÆdþUM²*« qšb« l{Ë —UO²šô
…bŠË vKŽ
AUDIO
ÊuKUÐ —bB*« dýR iu¹ ÆSTANDBY qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« ÕU³B wH² ¹
ÆWýUA« vKŽ ©WD;« œœdð Ë«® wU(« —bB*« rÝ« dNE¹ ÆdLŠô«
ÆwU(« uB« Èu² UM¼ ÷dF¹
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
ÆwU(« —bB*« rÝ« dNE¹
•
:DGTL AUTO
Ë« ® STANDBY/ON —e« jG{
Æ©bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
…bŠË vKŽ
©qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« l{Ë vKŽ® qOGA²« ·UI¹ô
AUDIO
Ë«® Èdš« …d STANDBY/ON
—e« jG{« jG{«
Æ©bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
ÆSTANDBY qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« ÕU³B ¡wC¹
WEŠö
:*ANALOG
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
WEŠö
·UI¹ô ÆqOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« l{Ë w WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« s qOK —b „öN²Ý« r²¹
ÆAC œœd²*« —UO²« WUÞ pKÝ Ÿe½« ÆqUJUÐ WUD« qOuð
—bBL “DVD MULTI” l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ wLd« qšb« l{Ë —UO²š« pMJ1 ô
ÆqOGA²K
WOU²« W×HB« vKŽ l³²¹
±≥
AR13-15RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
13
19/5/03, 1:51 PM
WOÝUÝô« öOGA²«
∫d¹c%
SETTING
ADJUST
Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ q− ZU½dÐ qOGAð ¡UMŁ« WOU²« ÷«dŽô« XŁbŠ «–«
dE½«® “DGTL AUTO” WHOþË l{Ë —UO²š« l DTS wLd« jO;« uB«
∫qHÝô« w ¡«dłô« l³ð« ¨©±≥ W×H
ÆqOGA²« W¹«bÐ w uB« —bB¹ ô •
Æ «—U *« Ë« ‰uBH« sŽ eHI« Ë« sŽ Y׳« ¡UMŁ« ZO−{ —bB¹ •
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
—UO²šô ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT —e« jG{« ±
Æ“DGTL AUTO”
Ë«
“DGTL D.D.”
L
C
VOL
DGTL D.D.
DGTL AUTO
DGTL DTS
d²š« ¨wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ dÒHA ZU½dÐ qOGA²
wLd« jO;« uB« ÂUEMÐ dHÒA ZU½dÐ qOGA²
.“DGTL D.D.”
“DGTL DTS”
DTS
Æ
d²š« ¨
VCR
TV
•
•
WEŠö
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
j³{« UÎLz«œ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË
l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
MUTING
VOLUME
.AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
TUNING
FM MODE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
MENU
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
AUDIO
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KARAOKE SOUND
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
7
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
2
BASS
4
5
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
uB« Èu² q¹bFð
Ò ≥
l{Ë ¡UG« r²¹ ¨dš« —bB —UO²š« Ë« WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB bMŽ
vKŽ ÎUOJOðUuðË« wLd« …dHOA« qOK% l{Ë j³{ …œUŽ« r²¹Ë “DGTL D.D.” Ë«
Æ“DGTL AUTO” l{u«
∫d¹c%
- «–« Æ—bB Í« qOGAð ¡bÐ q³ Èu² v½œ« vKŽ uB« Èu² j³{« ULz«œ
Î
wUF« uB« …u V³ ð Ê« sJ1 ¨wUŽ Èu² vKŽ uB« Èu² j³{
Æ UŽUL « nK²ð Ë«ØË pFLÝ WÝU( rz«œ —d{ W¾łUH*«
“DGTL DTS”
÷dF« WýUý vKŽ WOLd«Ø…dþUM²*« …—Uýô« WGO «dýR* w¼ WOU²« UH¹dF²«
Æq³I² LK WKš«b« …—Uýô« Ÿu½ sOÒ³²
ÆdþUM²*« qšb« —UO²š« bMŽ ¡wC¹
ÆwD)« PCM ÂUE½ …—Uý« ‰ušœ sŽ ¡wC¹
ÆwLd« w³Ëœ ÂUE½ …—Uý« ‰ušœ sŽ ¡wC¹ •
dÒHA dOž ZU½d³ “DGTL D.D.” l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ iu¹ •
ÆwLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ
ÆDTS ÂUE½ …—Uý« ‰ušœ sŽ ¡wC¹ •
dÒHA dOž ZU½d³ “DGTL DTS” l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ iu¹ •
ÆDTS ÂUEMÐ
MASTER VOLUME
FM / AM
ÁU&UÐ MASTER VOLUME jÐUC« —ËÒœ ¨ uB« Èu² …œU¹e
Æ©bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ VOLUME + —e« jG{« Ë«® WŽU « »—UIŽ
WŽU « »—UIŽ fJŽ MASTER VOLUME j?ÐUC« —ËÒœ ¨ uB« Èu² iH)
Æ©bFÐ s?Ž rJײ« …bŠË vK?Ž VOLUME – —e« jG{« Ë«®
R
SUBWFR LFE
RS
DBS
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
•
DOLBY D
LS
DVD
—UO²šô DECODE —e« jG{« ≤
Æ“DGTL DTS”
∫wK¹ UL wLd« qšb« l{Ë dÒOG²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
PHONES
DVD MULTI
TV VOL
wLd« …dHOA« qOK% l{Ë —UO²š«
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
STANDBY
wÐdŽ
∫WOU²« ôU(« w uB« Èu² iHš s bQð
s Îö —dC¹ Ê« sJ1 wUF« uB« Êô ¨”√d« UŽULÝ l{Ë Ë« qOuð q³ •
ÆpFLÝ WÝUŠË ”√d« UŽULÝ
UŽUL « s wUF« uB« ëdš« r²¹ Ê« sJ1 t½ô ¨”√d« UŽULÝ Ÿe½ q³ •
ÆWO Ozd«
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
:ANALOG
:LPCM
:DOLBY D
:DTS
WEŠö
ô ¨WKš«b« …—Uýô« eOO9 s “DGTL AUTO” l{Ë WHOþË sJL²ð ô UbMŽ
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ WOLd« …—Uýô« WGOB dýR Í« ¡wC¹
(µ∞) “50” v« ©v½œ« bŠ® (∞ ) “0” Èb*« sL{
WEŠö
uB« Èu² q¹bFð sJ1
Æ©vB« bŠ®
”√d« UŽULÝ ‰öš s ŸUL²Ýô«
wGK¹ ¡«dłô« «c¼ ÆWOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ PHONES f³I*« l ”√d« w²ŽULÝ qË«
l{Ë qGA¹Ë WO Ozd« UŽUL « qOGAð nu¹Ë ¨ÎUOUŠ —U²<« jO;« uB« l{Ë
ÆHEADPHONE ”√d« UŽULÝ
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ ©”√d« UŽULÝ® HP dýR ¡wC¹
”√d« UŽULÝ qOGAð nu¹ PHONES f³I*« s ”√d« w²ŽULÝ qB •
ÆWO Ozd« UŽUL « qGA¹Ë HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE
”√d« UŽULÝ l{Ë
sŽ dEM« iGÐ WOU²« …—Uýô« ëdš« r²¹ ·uÝ ¨”√d« UŽULÝ ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
∫WŽUL « j³{
s …dýU³ vMLO«Ë Èd O« …UMI« …—Uý« ëdš« r²¹ ¨…UM ≤ «– —œUBLK –
ÆvMLO«Ë Èd O« ”√d« UŽULÝ
vMLO«Ë Èd O« …UMI« …—Uý« Zœ r²¹ ·uÝ ¨…UMI« …œbF²*« —œUBLK –
UŽUL « s UNł«dš« r²¹ p– bFÐ rŁ jO;« uB«Ë W¹ed*«Ë WOUô«
Æ’U³« u dUMŽ Ê«bI ÊËœ
UŽULÝ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ …UMI« …œbF²*« uB« —œUB0 ŸU²L²Ýô« pMJ1
Æ”√d«
±¥
AR13-15RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
14
19/5/03, 1:51 PM
WOÝUÝô« öOGA²«
wÐdŽ
UEŠö
l{u« d²š« ¨ uB« q¹bFð Ë« WOÝUÝô« œuM³«Ë UŽUL « j³{ bMŽ
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ t²KLŽ Íc« j³C« s bQ²K “DIMMER OFF”
sŽ rJײ« …bŠË «b ²ÝUÐ —bBL DVD MULTI Ë« DVD l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ
…¡U{« XH) ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qGA*
Ò DIMMER …¡U{ô« XUš qG²A¹ ¨bFÐ
Ë« DVD l{Ë «bŽ U —bB d²š« ¨q³I² *« vKŽ ÊUO³«Ë ÷dF« WýUý
ÆDIMMER —e« jG{« p– bFÐ rŁ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ DVD MULTI
•
uB« r²—ÎU²R «uô« ·UI¹«
•
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
lOL' uB« qOGAð ·UI¹ô MUTING —e« jG{«
ÆWuu*« UŽUL «
wH² ¹® uB« qOGAð nu²¹Ë ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “MUTING” …—U³F« dNEð
Æ© uB« Èu² dýR
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
WOzUIK²« …d«cK wÝUÝô« q¹bF²«
∫—bB qJ uB« UÞu³{ kH×Ð q³I² *« «c¼ ÂuI¹
¨WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB bMŽ •
Ë ¨—bB*« dOOGð bMŽ •
Æ©±≥ W×H dE½«® wLd«ØdþUM²*« qšb« l{Ë dOOGð bMŽ •
- Íc« b¹b'« —bBLK WþuH;« UÞu³C« ¡UŽb²Ý« r²¹ ¨—bB*« dOOGð bMŽ
ÎÆUOJOðUuðË« …—UO²š«
∫—bB qJ wK¹ U Êeš sJ1
©±≥ W×H dE½«® wLd«ØdþUM²*« qšb« l{Ë •
©≤≤ W×H dE½«® WLGM« q¹bFð •
©≤≤ W×H dE½«® WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² •
©≤≥ W×H dE½«® ’U³« u W¹uIð •
©≤≥ W×H dE½«® qšb« nH l{Ë •
©≤≥ W×H dE½«® Ê“«u²« •
©≤≥ W×H dE½«® WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ u l{u •
©≥± ≠ ≤∂ U×HB« dE½«® DSPØjO;« uB« l{Ë —UO²š« •
UEŠö
ÆWłu qJ nK² j³{ 5OFð pMJ1 ¨AM Ë« FM Włu u¼ —bB*« ÊU «–«
qšb« l{Ë Ë wLd« qšb« l{u WHK² UÞu³{ ÊešË 5OFð pMJ1 ô
ÆdþUM²*«
•
•
÷dF« WýUý vKŽ WŽUL «Ë …—Uýô« «dýR
…—Uýô« «dýR
L
C
R
LFE
LS
S
WŽUL « «dýR
L
ANALOG L
PL ΙΙ
C
R
DSP HP
LPCM
SUBWFR LFE
AUTO SR
DOLBY D
LS
S
RS
DTS
INPUT ATT
RS
C
R
ÆÈdš« …d MUTING —e« jG{« ¨ uB« …œUF²Ýô
vKŽ MASTER VOLUME jÐUC« d¹Ëbð Ë«® VOLUME +/– —e« jG{ •
Æ uB« …œUF²Ý« r²¹ ÎUC¹« ©WOUô« WŠuK«
ÂuM« XR WDÝ«uÐ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB
ÆÂuM« XR—vIOÝuLK ŸUL²Ýô« ¡UMŁ« ÂuM« w ‚«dG²Ýô« pMJ1
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
ÆlÐU²²UÐ SLEEP —e« jG{«
qUHÐ qOGA²« ·UI¹« XË dOG²¹Ë ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ SLEEP dýR*« ¡wC¹
ÆozUœ ±∞ …—«bI wM“
SLEEP ÂuM« dýR
ANALOG
L
R
SLEEP
SUBWFR
VOL
10
20
0
30
©¡UG«®
RS
∫— WOU²« …—Uýô« «dýR ¡wCð
ÆÈd O« …UMI« …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫wL— qšœ —UO²š« bMŽ • ∫L
Æ¡wC¹ ULz«œ
Î ∫dþUM² qšœ —UO²š« bMŽ •
ÆvMLO« …UMI« …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫wL— qšœ —UO²š« bMŽ • ∫R
Æ¡wC¹ ULz«œ
Î ∫dþUM² qšœ —UO²š« bMŽ •
ÆW¹ed*« …UMI« …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫C
ÆÈd O« jO;« uB« …UM …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫LS
ÆvMLO« jO;« uB« …UM …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫RS
ÆW¹œUŠô« jO;« uB« …UM …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫S
ÆLFE iH M*« œœd²« WOUF …UM …—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ ¡wC¹ ∫LFE
∫wK¹ UL WŽUL « «dýR ¡wCð
dýR*« j³{ bMŽ ©SUBWFR® WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ dýR ¡wC¹ •
©±∑ W×H dE½«® l¹d « j³CK “USE” ‰ULF²Ý« l{Ë vKŽ “SUBWFR”
Æ©±∏ W×H dE½«® ÍËbO« j³CK “YES” rF½ vKŽ Ë«
l{Ë vKŽ WIÐUD*« WŽUL « j³{ bMŽ jI Èdšô« WŽUL « «dýR ¡wCð •
ÆwU(« qOGA²« VKD²¹ UbMŽ ÎUC¹«Ë ¨“LRG” dO³ Ë« “SML” dOG
15
60
90
80
70
∫qOGA²« ·UI¹« XË 5×¹ UbMŽ
∫qOGA²« ·UI¹« XË 5×¹ Ê« W¹UG wI³²*« Xu« dOOGð Ë« h×H
Æ…bŠ«Ë …d SLEEP —e« jG{«
ÆqOGA²« ·UI¹« XË 5×¹ Ê« W¹UG ©ozUbUЮ wI³²*« Xu« dNE¹
ÆlÐU²²UÐ SLEEP —e« jG{« ¨qOGA²« ·UI¹« XË dOOG² •
∫qOGA²« XR ¡UGô
WýUý vKŽ “SLEEP 0” dýR*« dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG lÐU²²UÐ SLEEP —e« jG{«
©ÆSLEEP ÂuM« dýR wH² ¹® Æ÷dF«
ÆÂuM« XR UC¹«
Î wGK¹ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB •
WýUA« ŸuDÝ dOOGð
Æ÷dF« WýUý …¡U{« XHš pMJ1
ÆlÐU²²UÐ DIMMER —e« jG{«
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w •
ÎÆöOK ÷dF« WýUý …¡U{« XH ¹ •
∫DIMMER 1
Æ—œUBLK ¡U—e« ÊUO³« …¡U{« `OÐUB …¡U{« XH ¹ •
ÆDIMMER1 l{Ë s d¦« ÷dF« WýUý …¡U{« XH ¹ •
∫DIMMER 2
fH½® Æ—œUBLK ¡U—e« ÊUO³« …¡U{« `OÐUB …¡U{« XH ¹ •
Æ©DIMMER1 l{Ë
¡U—e« ÊUO³«« …¡U{« `OÐUBË ÷dF« WýUý qOGAð nu¹
∫DIMMER 3
Æ—œUBLK
Æ©ÍœUŽ qOGAð® …¡U{ô« XHš WHOþË wGK¹ ∫DIMMER OFF
±µ
AR13-15RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
50
ÎÆUOJOðUuðË« q³I² *« qOGAð ·UI¹« r²¹
SUBWFR
LS
40
19/5/03, 1:51 PM
RX-ES1SL
dH¹u« WŽULÝË WŽUL « UuKF j³{ v« ÃU²% ¨©≥± v« ≤∂ U×HB« dE½«® DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« s sJ1 U qCUÐ jO;« uB« WOUF vKŽ ‰uB×K
ÆWOU²« WŁö¦« ‚dD« bŠ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WŽUL « UuKF j³{ pMJ1 ÆqUJUÐ öOu²« lOLł qLŽ s ¡UN²½ô« bFÐ WOŽdH«
W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² Ë dOšQ²« XË j³{ r²¹ Æs¹bO« oOHBð—jO Ð bŠ«Ë ¡«dł« WDÝ«uÐ ÎUOJOðUuðË« UŽUL « UuKF j³{ ∫Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{
ÎÆUOJOðUuðË« jO;« uB« UŽULÝË
ÆWdG« ”UIË ¨ UŽUL « œbŽË ¨WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ ‰ULF²Ý« ‰Ušœ« WDÝ«uÐ WŽd Ð WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{
∫l¹d « j³C«
ÎÆU¹Ëb¹ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{
∫ÍËbO« j³C«
Æq³I² *« qÒGý rŁ ©∑ W×H dE½«® W×O×B« UNMU« w UNF{Ë WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « qË« ¨WŽUL « j³CÐ ¡b³« q³ •
oÒH rŁ “SETTING UP” dýR*« iOË nuð s bQð ≥
dýR*« —uNþ ¡UMŁ« …bŠ«Ë …d pÝ√— ‚u p¹bOÐ
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “SETTING UP”
U® UŽUL « lOLł ‰öš s ÂœUI« uB« Èu² ·UA²UÐ q³I² *« √b³¹
Æ©WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ «bŽ
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ WOU²« «dýR*« bŠ« dNE¹ ¨ uB« ·UA²« bFÐ
q³I² *« j³C¹ ÆÕU−MÐ p¹b¹ oOHBð u ·UA²« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL K Ãd)« Èu² Ë dOšQ²« XË
ÎÆUOJOðUuðË« jO;« uB«
Æ UŽUL « iFÐ s u ·UA²« q³I² *« lOD² ¹ ô
Æ UŽUL « lOLł s u Í« ·UA²« q³I² *« lOD² ¹ ô
vMLO« «uMI« s ö ·UA²« q³I² *« lOD² ¹ ô
jO;« uB« UŽULÝ Ë«ØË WOUô« UŽUL K Èd O«Ë
Æ`O× qJAÐ
:SUCCESSFUL
:SILENT
:SILENT-ALL
:FAILED
dýR*« dNE¹® `O× qJAÐ uB« ·UA²« q³I² *« lOD² ¹ ô UbMŽ
¨©÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “FAILED” Ë« “SILENT-ALL” ¨ “SILENT”
bFÐ rŁ ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ Èdš« …d “SETTING UP” dýR*« dNE¹
Æ≥ …uD)« —d p–
∫UbMŽ ÎUOJOðUuðË« Ãd)« U¹u² Ë WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹
5ðd “SILENT” XU t½UË uB« q³I² *« nA²J¹ —
Æ5²OU²²
…d*« w “SILENT” XU t½UË uB« q³I² *« nA²J¹ —
•
j³{—UOJOðUuðË« UŽUL « UuKF j³{
Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB«
vKŽ ‰uB×K WLN*« dUMF« bŠ« w¼ UŽUL « v« ŸUL²Ýô« WDI½ s WU *«
ÆDSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ëô sJ1 U qCUÐ uB« WOUF
l ÎUO³ ½ jO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL K dOšQ²« XË j³{ v« ÃU²%
s UŽUL « lOLł ‰öš s …—œUB« «uô« sJL²ð v²Š WOUô« UŽUL «
Æ©±π W×H ÎUC¹« dE½«® Xu« fHMÐ pO« ‰uu«
dOšQ²« XË »U Š r²¹ ¨Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ WI¹dÞ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ
Æs¹bO« oOHBð—jO Ð bŠ«Ë ¡«dł« WDÝ«uÐ ÎUOJOðUuðË« Ãd)« Èu² Ë WŽUL K
jO;« uB« j³{ WI¹dÞ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ ‰UF qJAÐ WŽUL « UuKF j³C •
«c¼ l Wuu*« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« lOL' WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« „öÝ« qB« ¨Ÿ—U³«
XOÝU q− Ë DBS n«u ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ¨Êu¹eHK²« q¦ q³I² *«
Æg¹uAð Ë« ZO−{ V³ ð Ê« sJ1 w²« VCR u¹bOH«
WŽUL « s Îö qË« ¨‰UF qJAÐ Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ WI¹dÞ ‰ULF²Ýô •
ÆjO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*«
Èb*« jG{ ¨iH M*« œœd²« WOUF nH ¨wdH*« œœd²« j³{ ÎUC¹« pMJ1 •
Æ©±π W×H dE½«® ÎU¹Ëb¹ wJOUM¹b«
ÆÈdš« …d WOU²« «uD)« qLŽ« ¨ UŽUL « dOOGð bMŽ •
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
•
5
6
KARAOKE
7
KEY
Ë«ØË “SILENT-ALL” ¨“SILENT” ·UA²« bFÐ W¦U¦«
Æ5ðd “FAILED”
Ë« “SILENT-ALL” XU t½UË uB« q³I² *« nA²J¹ UbMŽ •
WýUý vKŽ “MANUAL” dýR*« dNE¹ «d ÀöŁ “FAILED”
8
9
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
10
0
KEY
VOCAL
EFFECT
REPEAT
3D
+10
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
TEST
EFFECT
DECODE
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
…bŠË WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
V ²M j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS l{Ë vKŽ l{u«
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
WDÝ«uÐ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË WŽUL « UuKF j³{« Æ÷dF«
dE½«® ÍËbO« j³C« Ë« ©±∑ W×H dE½«® l¹d « j³C« ‰ULF²Ý«
jO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² Ë ¨©±∏ W×H
Æ©≥± v« ≤π U×HB« dE½«®
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Æ≤ …uD)«
¡UMŁ« SMART S. SETUP —e« jG{« ¨Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ ¡UGô
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “SETTING UP” dýR*« iOË
sŽ “SETTING UP” dýR*« nu²¹ Ë« bFÐ Èdš« öOGAð Í« qLŽ sJ1 ô •
ÆŸ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ qL« ÆiOu«
Æ uB« v« tM lL² ²Ý Íc« l{u*« w fKł« ±
UEŠö
dE½«® ÎU¹Ëb¹ Ãd)« Èu² Ë WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ UuKF j³{ v« ÃU²%
Æ©≤≤ Ë ±∏ U×HB«
WŽUL « dOšQð XË ÊU ¨Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ WI¹dÞ ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
ÆWUF dOž ÊuJð ·uÝ q³ s UN²D³{ w²« Ãd)« U¹u² Ë
©±∑ W×H dE½« ® l¹d « j³C« ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ UŽUL « UuKF j³{«
UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² Ë ¨©±∏ W×H dE½«® ÍËbO« j³C« Ë«
∫UbMŽ ©≥± v« ≤π U×HB« dE½«® jO;« uB«
uB« j³{ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ t²KLŽ Íc« WŽUL « j³{ dOOGð b¹dð —
ÆŸ—U³« jO;«
q¦ q«uF« iFÐ V³ Ð `O× qJAÐ Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ r²¹ ô—
Æs¹bO« oOHBð u …uË WŽUL « Ÿ«u½« ¨WDO;« W¾O³«
WUŽ« Ë« e−×Ð XL «–« `O× qJAÐ Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ r²¹ s
ÆÈdš« ÂU łUÐ Ë« pL −Ð uB«
Æp¹b¹ Í–Rð Ê« sJ1 t½ô …dO³ …uIÐ p¹bOÐ oHBð ô
•
•
MIN
MAX
•
•
ÆSMART S. SETUP —e« vKŽ jGC« lÐUðË jG{« ≤
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “SETTING UP” dýR*« iu¹
ANALOG
•
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
±∂
AR16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
16
19/5/03, 1:52 PM
wÐdŽ
WŽUL « UÞu³{
WŽUL « UÞu³{
ÆSET —e« jG{« µ
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ ‰ULF²Ý« ‰Ušœ« dýR dNE¹
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “ENTER USE OF SUBWOOFER”
wÐdŽ
b XM «–« ULO —UO²šö MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ∂
Æô « WOŽd dH¹Ë WŽULÝ XKË«
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
ANALOG
L
•
dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{
l¹d « j³C«—WŽd Ð WOŽdH«
Ë WdG« ”UIË UŽUL « œbŽ »U ŠË ¨WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ ‰ULF²Ý« ‰Ušœ« r²¹
ÎÆUOJOðUuðË« jO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË
ÆÈdš« …d UŽUL « ‰uŠ UuKF*« j³{« ¨ UŽUL « dOOGð bMŽ •
Èb*« jG{ ¨iH M*« œœd²« WOUF nH ¨wdH*« œœd²« j³{ ÎUC¹« pMJ1 •
Æ©±π W×H dE½«® ÎU¹Ëb¹ wJOUM¹b«
R
SUBWFR
DIMMER
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
VOL
STANDBY / ON
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
*
USE *
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
NO
ÆSET —e« jG{« ∑
∫WOUô« WŠuK« s jI
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “ENTER ROOM SIZE” WdG« ”UI ‰Ušœ« dýR dNE¹
ÆWdG« ”UI —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ∏
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
ANALOG
L
•
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Ʊ …uD)«
ÆSETTING —e« jG{« ±
R
SUBWFR
Æj³C« qOGA² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
VOL
SMALL*
dýR*« dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≤
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “QUICK SETUP”
MEDIUM
LARGE
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
*
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
…—uBÐ jO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹
WŽUL « dOšQð XË” ‰Ëbł r dE½« qOUH²K ÆWdG« ”UI V Š W×O×
ÆqHÝô« w “WdG« ”UI V Š
ANALOG
VOL
ÊUOÐ dNE¹ p– bFÐ rŁ ¨…dOB …b* “SETUP END” j³C« ¡UN²½« dýR dNE¹
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ oÐU « w —U²<« —bB*«
UEŠö
•
•
NO
NO
©…dOG® SML
©…dOG® SML
©…dOG® SML
©…dOG® SML
•
W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹
ÆWO½UŁ wKO ± vKŽ
uB« UŽULÝ dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹
ÆWO½UŁ wKO ≥ vKŽ jO;«
R
LS
RS
C
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
CNTR SP
FRNT SP
CNTR DL
SURR DL
LFE
D.COMP
DVD VIDEO
AUTO SR
QUICK SETUP
ÆSET —e« jG{« ≥
U?ŽUL « œbŽ ‰Ušœ« dýR dNE¹
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ
ÆoÐU « WŽUL « j³{ q¹bFð ` r²¹ ¨“QUICK SETUP” —UO²š« bMŽ •
- w²« UŽUL « œbŽ —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ¥
ÆUNKOuð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
ANALOG
L
R
VOL
5 SPEAKERS*
3 SPEAKERS
4 SPEAKERS
•
•
WOUô« UŽUL « ÊuJð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆWuu jO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*«WŽUL «Ë
WOUô« UŽUL « ÊuJð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆWuu jO;« uB« UŽULÝË
WOUô« UŽUL « ÊuJð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆWuu W¹ed*« WŽUL «Ë
:*5 SPEAKERS
:4 SPEAKERS
:3 SPEAKERS
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
ÆWuu*« UŽUL « œbŽ V Š W×O× …—uBÐ WŽULÝ ”UI q j³{ Æ—U O« vKŽ “ UŽUL « œbŽ V Š WŽUL « ”UI” ‰Ëbł r dE½« qOUH²K
WOU²« W×HB« vKŽ l³²¹
±∑
AR16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
•
SUBWFR
¨“SMALL ROOM” …dOG Wdž —UO²š« bMŽ
L
SUBWFR
SURR SP
CROSS
DIGITAL IN
DBS VIDEO
“ENTER THE NUMBER OF SPEAKERS”
UŽUL « œbŽ V Š WŽUL « ”UI
W¹ed*«
WOUô«
dH¹u«
œbŽ
WOŽdH« UŽUL «
©…dOG® SML ©…dO³® LRG
NO
≥
©…dOG® SML ©…dOG® SML (YES) USE ≥
NO
©…dO³® LRG
NO
¥
NO
©…dOG® SML (YES) USE ¥
©…dOG® SML ©…dO³® LRG
NO
µ
©…dOG® SML ©…dOG® SML (YES) USE µ
WdG« ”UI V Š WŽUL « dOšQð XË
uB«
jO;«
•
R
SUBWFR
Æj³C« ¡UN½ô SET —e« jG{« π
vKŽ “SETUP END” dýR*« dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG t²KLŽ Íc« j³C« qO− ð r²¹ ô
Æ÷dF« WýUý
wGK¹ …¡U{ô« XUš Ë« uB« Èu² q¹bFð ¡UM¦²ÝUÐ WHOþË Í« qOGA²Ð ÂUOI«
Æl¹d « j³C« WOKLŽ
j³C« ¡«dł« bFÐ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË WŽUL « UuKF dÒOGð Ê« b¹dð UbMŽ
Æ©±∏ W×H dE½«® ÍËbO« j³C« qLF²Ý« ¨l¹d «
L
17
19/5/03, 1:52 PM
WŽ«
WŽUL « UÞu³{
bM³K `O×B« j³C« —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨≤ …uD)« w tðd²š« Íc«
L
Æj³C« Êeš -
ANALOG
L
¨“MEDIUM ROOM” WDÝu² Wdž —UO²š« bMŽ
vKŽ W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹ •
R
C
ÆWO½UŁ wKO ±
uB« UŽULÝ dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹ •
ÆWO½UŁ wKO ≤ vKŽ jO;«
R
LS
RS
Æ“SUBWFR” bM³K “NO” ô —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
Æ≥ Ë ≤ «uD)« —d ¨Èdš« œuMÐ j³{ œ—« «–« ¥
¨“LARGE ROOM” …dO³ Wdž —UO²š« bMŽ
vKŽ W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹ •
R
ÆWO½UŁ wKO dH
uB« UŽULÝ dOšQð XË j³{ r²¹ •
ÆWO½UŁ wKO dH vKŽ jO;«
C
L
©WOŽdH« dH¹u«® SUBWFR —WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ UuKF j³{
Æô « WOŽd dH¹Ë WŽULÝ XKË« b XM «–« ULO j³{«
RS
:*YES
LS
ÆWOŽd dH¹Ë WŽUL pKOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
WýUý vKŽ ©SUBWFR® WOŽdH« dH¹u« ŸULÝ dýR ¡wC¹
WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð pMJ1 Æ©±µ W×H dE½«® ÷dF«
Æ©≤≤ W×H dE½«® WOŽdH« dH¹u«
dH¹u« WŽULÝ qB Ë« qOuð ÂbŽ bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆWOŽdH«
wÐdŽ
VOL
dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{
ÍËbO« j³C«—ÎU¹Ëb¹ WOŽdH«
:NO
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
*
¨©WOUô« UŽUL «® FRNT SP — UŽUL « ”UI j³{
©jO;« uB« UŽULÝ® SURR SP ¨©W¹ed*« WŽUL «® CNTR SP
ÆWuu*« UŽUL « lOLł UÝUI j³{«
s d³« WOÞËd<« WŽUL « ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« ∫©dO³® LRG
ÆrÝ ±≤
dG« WOÞËd<« WŽUL « ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« ∫*©dOG® SML
ÆrÝ ±≤ s
—UO²šö qÐU dOž® ÆWŽULÝ qOuð ÂbŽ bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
:NO
©ÆWOUô« UŽUL K
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
UEŠö
—UO²š« pMJ1 ô ¨WOUô« WŽUL « ”UI* “©dOG® SML” l{u« d²š« «–«
ÆjO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL « UÝUI* “©dO³® LRG” l{u«
W×HË vKŽô« w dE½«® WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ j³C “NO” l{u« d²š« «–«
ÆWOUô« WŽUL « ”UI* “©dO³® LRG” l{u« —UO²š« jI pMJ1 ¨©±∑
•
bMŽ Æb¹dð UL ÎU¹Ëb¹ WOU²« WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝË UŽUL « UuKF j³{ pMJ1
ÆÈdš« …d UuKF*« j³{« ¨ UŽUL « dOOGð
SUBWFR—WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ UuKF •
FRNT SP, CNTR SP, SURR SP —WŽUL « ”UI •
CNTR DL, SURR DL —WŽUL « dOšQð XË •
CROSS —wdH*« œœd²« •
LFE —iH M*« œœd²« WOUF nH •
D.COMP —wJOUM¹b« Èb*« jG{ •
qOGA²« ¡«dł«
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ jI
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Ʊ …uD)«
ÆSETTING —e« jG{« ±
•
Æj³C« qOGA² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —ËÒœ ≤
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ tD³{ b¹dð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
ANALOG
L
•
R
SUBWFR
VOL
SUBWFR
SURR SP
CROSS
DIGITAL IN
DBS VIDEO
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
CNTR SP
FRNT SP
CNTR DL
SURR DL
LFE
D.COMP
AUTO SR
DVD VIDEO
QUICK SETUP
±∏
AR16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
18
19/5/03, 1:52 PM
WŽUL « UÞu³{
wdH*« œœd²« j³{
wÐdŽ
CROSS —
qLF² ð XM «–« ƉUF qJAÐ ’U³« u s¹uJð UNMJ1 ô …dOGB« UŽUL «
’U³« u dUMŽ l¹“uð …œUŽUÐ q³I² *« «c¼ ÂuI¹ ¨l{u Í« w …dOG WŽULÝ
Æ…dO³J« UŽUL « v« …dOGB« WŽUL K WMOF*«
”UI V Š wdH*« œœd²« Èu² j³{« ¨W×O× …—uBÐ WHOþu« Ác¼ ‰ULF²Ýô
ÆWuu*« …dOGB« WŽUL «
Ác¼ ¨©±∏ W×H dE½«® UŽUL « lOL' “©dO³® LRG” l{u« d²š« «–« •
ÆWUF ÊuJð s WHOþu«
WOÞËd<« WŽUL « …bŠË ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆrÝ ±≤ w«uŠ WOKš«b«
WOÞËd<« WŽUL « …bŠË ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆrÝ ±∞ w«uŠ WOKš«b«
WOÞËd<« WŽUL « …bŠË ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆrÝ ∏ w«uŠ WOKš«b«
WOÞËd<« WŽUL « …bŠË ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆrÝ ∂ w«uŠ WOKš«b«
WOÞËd<« WŽUL « …bŠË ”UI ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆrÝ µ s q« WOKš«b«
:80HZ
¨©W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð® CNTR DL —WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{
©jO;« uB« UŽULÝ dOšQð® SURR DL
jO;« uB« j³{ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ WuN Ð WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ pMJ1
Æ©±∑ W×H® l¹d « j³C« Ë« ©±∂ W×H dE½«® Ÿ—U³«
vKŽ ‰uB×K WLN*« dUMF« bŠ« w¼ UŽUL « v« ŸUL²Ýô« WDI½ s WU *«
ÆjO;« uB« ŸU{Ëô sJ1 U qCUÐ jO× u
l ÎUO³ ½ jO;« uB« UŽULÝË W¹ed*« WŽUL K dOšQ²« XË j³{ v« ÃU²%
s UŽUL « lOLł ‰öš s …—œUB« «uô« sJL²ð v²Š WOUô« UŽUL «
ÆXu« fHMÐ pO« ‰uu«
©hI½ Ë«® …œU¹“ rÝ ≥∞ l oÐUD²¹ dOšQ²« XË w ©hI½ Ë«® …œU¹“ WO½UŁ wKO ± •
ÆWU *« w
:100HZ
:120HZ
:*150HZ
:200HZ
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
WO½UŁ wKO dH Èb sL{ W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³C :*CNTR DL
Æ©WO½UŁ wKO ± …—«bI wM“ qUHЮ WO½UŁ wKO µ v«
wKO dH Èb sL{ jO;« uB« UŽULÝ dOšQð XË j³{ :*SURR DL
Æ©WO½UŁ wKO ± …—«bI wM“ qUHЮ WO½UŁ wKO ±µ v« WO½UŁ
Æwz«b²Ðô« j³C«u¼ (WO½UŁ wKO dH) “0ms” *
*
WEŠö
ÆHEADPHONE ”√d« UŽULÝ l{u qG²A¹ ô wdH*« œœd²«
LFE —iH M*« œœd²« WOUF nH j³{
w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ dÒHA ZU½dÐ qOGAð ¡UMŁ« ‘uA Ë« X²A ’U³« u ÊU «–«
Æg¹uA²« W«“ô LFE Èu² j³{« ¨DTS Ë« wLd«
ÆLFE «—Uý« ‰ušœ bMŽ jI WUF ÊuJð WHOþu« Ác¼
Æl{u« «c¼ d²š« …œUŽ
Æ‘uA ’U³« u ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
:*0dB
:–10dB
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
D.COMP —
•
*
wJOUM¹b« Èb*« jG{ j³{
© uBK vKŽô« b(«Ë v½œô« b(« 5Ð ‚dH«® wJOUM¹b« Èb*« jG{ pMJ1
ÆqOK« w jO;« uB« uB ŸUL²Ýô« bMŽ bOH l{u« «c¼ ÆÊÒuJ²*« uBK
ÆwLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ dÒHA —bB qOGAð bMŽ jI WUF ÊuJð WHOþu« Ác¼ •
qUJÐ jO;« uBUÐ ŸU²L²Ýô« b¹dð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
Æ©WOUF WU{« ÊËbЮ ÆwJOUM¹b« Èb*«
ÎÆöOK wJOUM¹b« Èb*« iHš b¹dð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆqUJUÐ jGC« WOUF WU{« b¹dð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
Æ©qOK« w bOH®
:OFF
:*MID
¨WU(« Ác¼ w ∫‰U¦
Ë (WO½UŁ wKO ±) “1ms” vKŽ “CNTR DL” j³{«
Æ(WO½UŁ wKO ≤) “2ms” vKŽ “SURR DL” j³{«
WEŠö
dE½«® Wuu dOž jO;« uB« UŽULÝ Ë«ØË W¹ed*« WŽUL « X½U «–«
UŽULÝ Ë«ØË W¹ed*« WŽUL « dOšQð XË j³{ pMJ1 ô ¨©±∏ Ë ±∑ U×HB«
ÆjO;« uB«
:MAX
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
*
±π
AR16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
19
19/5/03, 1:52 PM
RX-ES1SL
WOÝUÝô« UÞu³C«
—wLd« qšb« (DIGITAL IN) ·«dÞ« j³{
ªWOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« :
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ∫DIGITAL 1
DBS n«u ∫DIGITAL 2
Êu¹eHK²« n«u ∫DIGITAL 3
ªWOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« :
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ∫DIGITAL 1
Êu¹eHK²« n«u ∫DIGITAL 2
DBS n«u ∫DIGITAL 3
ªWOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« :
DBS n«u ∫DIGITAL 1
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ∫DIGITAL 2
Êu¹eHK²« n«u ∫DIGITAL 3
ªWOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« :
DBS n«u ∫DIGITAL 1
Êu¹eHK²« n«u ∫DIGITAL 2
DVD W½«uDÝ« qGA
Ò ∫DIGITAL 3
ªWOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« :
Êu¹eHK²« n«u ∫DIGITAL 1
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ∫DIGITAL 2
DBS n«u ∫DIGITAL 3
ªWOU²« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š« :
Êu¹eHK²« n«u ∫DIGITAL 1
DBS n«u ∫DIGITAL 2
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ∫DIGITAL 3
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
wÐdŽ
DIGITAL IN
lË Wuu*« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« w¼ U j³{« ¨wLd« qšb« ·«dÞ« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
dNE¹ wJ p–Ë ©±≤ Ë ∏ U×HB« dE½«® DIGITAL 1/2/3 —Wuu ·«dÞ« Í«
ÆwLd« —bB*« —UO²š« bMŽ `O×B« —bB*« rÝ«
qOGA²« ¡«dł«
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ jI
*1DVD2DBS3TV
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
1DVD2TV3DBS
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Ʊ …uD)«
ÆSETTING —e« jG{« ±
Æj³C« qOGA² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
1DBS2DVD3TV
Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —ËÒœ ≤
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ tD³{ b¹dð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
1DBS2TV3DVD
ANALOG
L
•
R
SUBWFR
VOL
1TV2DVD3DBS
1TV2DBS3DVD
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
SUBWFR
SURR SP
CROSS
DIGITAL IN*
DBS VIDEO
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
CNTR SP
FRNT SP
CNTR DL
SURR DL
LFE
D.COMP
DVD VIDEO
AUTO SR
QUICK SETUP
dNE¹ Ê« bFÐ ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ Á—UO²š« pMJ1 Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ *
ÆWKOK Ê«uŁ …bF “DIGITAL IN” dýR*«
*
bM³K `O×B« j³C« —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨≤ …uD)« w tðd²š« Íc«
Æj³C« Êeš -
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
Æ“DIGITAL IN” wLd« qšb« bM³ “1DVD2DBS3TV” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
≤∞
AR16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
20
19/5/03, 1:53 PM
WOÝUÝô« UÞu³C«
—u¹bOH« X½U½u³L “UNł qšœ l{Ë j³{
wÐdŽ
DVD VIDEO/DBS VIDEO
n«u Ë«ØË DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA* u¹bOH« X½U½u³L qšœ ·«dÞ« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æqšb« ·«dÞ« Ÿu½ j³{ pOKŽ V−¹ ¨DBS
vKŽ `O×B« qšb« ÷dŽ pMJ1 ô ¨`O× qJAÐ j³C« «c¼ ¡«dł« ÊËbÐ
ÆÊu¹eHK²«
·«dÞ« l u¹bOH« X½U½u³L qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆS-video Ë« Vd*« u¹bOH« qšœ
·«dÞ« l u¹bOH« X½U½u³L qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
ÆX½U½u³LJ« u¹bO qšœ
:*S/C
:COMP.
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
*
ÎUOzUIKð jO;« uB« j³{
AUTO SR —
—UO²š« l® —bB*« —UO²š« WDÝ«uÐ WÞU ³Ð jO;« uB« l{uÐ ŸU²L²Ýô« pMJ1
Æ©—bB*« pc wLd« qšb«
ÆwzUIK²« jO;« uB« qOGAð bMŽ “ON” qOGAð d²š«
uB« l{Ë qOGAð r²¹ ·uÝ ¨…œbF² …UM …—Uý« XKšœ« «–« •
:ON
ÆVÝUM*« jO;«
Íu²% DTS …UM ≤ Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ …UM ≤ …—Uý« XKšœ« «–« •
Æ“PLII MOVIE” l?{u« —UO²š« r²¹ ·uÝ ¨jO× u …—Uý«
ô DTS …UM ≤ Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ …UM ≤ …—Uý« XKšœ« «–« •
l{u« —UO²š« r²¹ ·uÝ ¨jO× u …—Uý« vKŽ Íu²%
Æ“STEREO”
Æ¡wý dOG²¹ ô ¨wD)« PCM ÂUE½ …—Uý« XKšœ« «–« •
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ AUTO SR dýR*« ¡wC¹
ÆwzUIK²« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð ·UI¹ô l{u« «c¼ d²š«
:*OFF
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
UEŠö
∫WOU²« ôU(« w WUF ÊuJð ô WHOþu« Ác¼
Ë ¨dþUM² —bB qOGAð ¡UMŁ« ≠
…dHOý qOK% l{u “DGTL DTS” Ë« “DGTL D.D.” l{Ë —UO²š« ¡UMŁ« ≠
Æ©±¥ W×H dE½«® XÐUŁ wL—
jO;« uB« l{Ë WDÝ«uÐ ÎUOJOðUuðË« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð - «–«
nuð bMŽ ÆÎU²R qLF² dš« jO× u l{Ë Í« ¡UG« r²¹ ·uÝ ¨wzUIK²«
Æ“PLII MOVIE” l{u« qG²A¹ ¨…UMI« …œbF² WOLd« …—Uýô« ‰ušœ
¨wzUIK²« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð ¡UMŁ« SURROUND —e« jG{ - «–«
ÎÆUOUŠ —U²<« —bBLK ÎU²R wzUIK²« jO;« uB« l{Ë ¡UG« r²¹ ·uÝ
∫WOU²« ôU(« w wzUIK²« jO;« uB« …œUF²Ý« r²¹ ·uÝ
¨q³I² *« qOGAð ·UI¹«Ë qOGAð bMŽ ≠
¨—bB*« dOOGð bMŽ ≠
Ë ¨wLd«ØdþUM²*« qšb« dOOGð bMŽ ≠
qOGAð vKŽ “AUTO SR” wzUIK²« jO;« uB« l{Ë j³{ …œUŽ« bMŽ ≠
ÆÈdš« …d “ON”
≤±
AR16-21RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
21
19/5/03, 1:53 PM
•
•
•
RX-ES1SL
uB« UÞu³{
l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
WLGM« q¹bFð
BASS, TREBLE —
Æp²³ž— V Š qÐd²«Ë ’U³« «u« q¹bFð pMJ1
Æ—bB qJ ö¹bF²« Ác¼ qLŽ pOKŽ V−¹ •
qOGA²« ¡«dł«
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
DVD
DBS
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ ±∞≠ s® ’U³« u q¹bF²
:*BASS
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ ±∞≠ s® qÐd²« u q¹bF² :*TREBLE
Æ“0” dH u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
ÆTONE —e« jG{« ±
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
TREBLE
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
BASS
100+
TV RETURN
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
3
TREBLE
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
REPEAT
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
Ë« BASS 9/( —e« jG{« ≤
Èu² q¹bF² TREBLE 9/(
´±∞ v« q³O ¹œ ≠±∞ s® uB«
Æ©q³O ¹œ
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
VCR
TV
FM / AM
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Ʊ …uD)«
ÆADJUST —e« jG{« ±
Æj³C« qOGA² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —ËÒœ ≤
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ tD³{ b¹dð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
ANALOG
L
•
R
SUBWFR
VOL
WEŠö
jG{« ¨WLGM« ö¹bFð bFÐ Áb¹dð Íc« —bB*« qOGA² `OðUH ±∞ ‡« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æ…b¹dð Íc« —bBLK `OðUH ±∞ ‡« qG²Að v²Š oÐUD*« —bB*« —UO²š« —“ ôË«
—WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð
SUBWFR
l WOŽd dH¹Ë WŽULÝ XKË« «–« WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð pMJ1
w “USE” ‰ULF²Ý« d²š«—`O× qJAÐ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ UuKF j³{
±∑ U×HB« dE½«® ÍËbO« j³C« l{Ë w “YES” rF½ Ë« l¹d « j³C« l{Ë
Æ©±∏ Ë
Æ—bB qJ q¹bF²« «c¼ qLŽ pOKŽ V−¹ •
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT
B.BOOST
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
ATT
bM³K `O×B« j³C« —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨≤ …uD)« w tðd²š« Íc«
Æj³C« Êeš -
ANALOG
L
R
SUBWFR
VOL
“BASS”
’U³« bM³ “©q³O ¹œ® +10” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
v« q³O ¹œ ≠±∞ s® WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF² :*SUBWFR
Æ©q³O ¹œ ´±∞
Æ“0” dH u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
2
BASS
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
4
5
7
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
q¹bF² SUBWFR+/– —e« jG{«
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu²
Æ©q³O ¹œ ´±∞ v« q³O ¹œ ≠±∞ s®
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
≤≤
AR22-23RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
22
19/5/03, 11:49 AM
wÐdŽ
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
uB« UÞu³{
’U³« u W¹uIð
wÐdŽ
B.BOOST —
Æ’U³« u W¹uIð—’U³« Èu² W¹uIð pMJ1
Æ—bB qJ ö¹bF²« Ác¼ qLŽ pOKŽ V−¹ •
Æ©’U³« W¹uIð® ’U³« Èu² W¹uI² l{u« «c¼ d²š«
:ON
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ BASS BOOST ’U³« W¹uIð dýR ¡wC¹
Æ’U³« W¹uIð qOGAð ·UI¹ô l{u« «c¼ d²š«
:*OFF
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ u l{Ë j³{
l W½—UI*UÐ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ u W¹uIð r²¹ ¨u¹dO²Ý —bB qOGAð bMŽ
Æ…œbF²*« …UMI« —bB s uB«
dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² iH M¹ ¨WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ u l{Ë j³{ bMŽ
l{Ë dýR ¡wC¹ Æu¹dO²Ý —bB qOGAð bMŽ …—U²<« WLOI« —«bI0 WOŽdH«
ÆWHOþu« Ác¼ qOGAð bMŽ A.POSITION © uB«®
Æ—bB qJ q¹bF²« «c¼ qLŽ pOKŽ V−¹ •
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
WEŠö
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « ‰öš s ÂœUI« uB« vKŽ jI dŁRð WHOþu« Ác¼
ZOOM
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
2
BASS
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
ÆBASS BOOST —e« jG{«
ECHO
RESERVE
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
4
5
7
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
qOGAð ·UI¹«Ë qOGAð r²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w
ƉœU³²UÐ ’U³« W¹uIð
•
2
BASS
VFP
KARAOKE
4
5
7
8
REPEAT
DIMMER
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
AUDIO
1
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
lÐU²²UÐ A.POSITION —e« jG{«
WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ u l{Ë —UO²šô
Ë ¨“©q³O ¹œ® ≠¥” ¨“©q³O ¹œ® ≠≤” s
Æ“©q³O ¹œ® ≠∂”
Èu² *« iH ½« ULK ¨dG« rd« `³« ULK
Æu¹dO² « v« ŸUL²Ýô« bMŽ UOJOðUuðË«
Î
“OFF”
·UI¹« d²š« ¨q¹bF²K WłUŠ „UM¼ r «–«
Æ©wz«b²Ðô« j³C«®
•
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
TEST
EFFECT
DECODE
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
UEŠö
qšb« …—Uý« nOH ð
ATT —
Æ‘uA uB« ÊuJ¹ ·uÝ ¨Î«bł wUŽ dþUM²*« —bB*« qšœ Èu² ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
Æ uB« g¹uAð lM* qšb« …—Uý« Èu² nOH ð v« ÃU²% ¨Àb×¹ «c¼ ÊU «–«
ÆdþUM² —bB qJ q¹bF²« «c¼ qLŽ pOKŽ V−¹ •
Æj³C« «cN bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ô •
Æqšb« …—Uý« Èu² nOH ² l{u« «c¼ d²š«
:ON
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ INPUT ATT qšb« nH dýR ¡wC¹
Æqšb« nOH ð qOGAð ·UI¹ô l{u« «c¼ d²š« :*NORMAL
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
Æq³O ¹œ ≠±∞ u¼ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² * bŠ vB«
∫‰U¦
l{Ë Ë “©q³O ¹œ® ≠∏” vKŽ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² j³{ bMŽ
u¹dO² « v« ŸUL²Ýô« bMŽ ¨“©q³O ¹œ® ≠¥” vKŽ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ u
Æq³O ¹œ ≠±∞ WOŽdH« dH¹u« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² ÊuJ¹ ·uÝ
ÆjO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð bMŽ WUF ÊuJð ô WHOþu« Ác¼
23
•
WOUô« UŽUL « Ãdš Ê“«uð q¹bFð
BAL —
dOž Èd O«Ë vMLO« WOUô« UŽUL « s UNFL ð w²« «uô« X½U «–«
Æ UŽUL « Ãdš Ê“«uð q¹bFð pMJ1 ¨W¹ËU ²
Æ—bB qJ q¹bF²« «c¼ qLŽ pOKŽ V−¹ •
Æj³C« «cN bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ô •
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Ê“«uð q¹bF²
:*BAL
ÆÈd O« …UMI« Ãdš iHš ∫“L-21” v« “CENTER” •
ÆvMLO« …UMI« Ãdš iHš ∫“R-21” v« “CENTER” •
Æ“CENTER” nB²M*« vKŽ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
≤≥
AR22-23RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
•
19/5/03, 11:49 AM
RX-ES1SL
ÎU¹Ëb¹ UD;« vKŽ nOu²«
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
ÆWłu*« —UO²šô FM/AM —e« jG{« ±
Æ…—U²<« Włu*« vKŽ UNU³I²Ý« - WD× dš« vKŽ nOu²« r²¹
ÆAM Ë FM Włu 5Ð Włu*« ‰œU³ð r²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w •
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
ST
Wł—bUÐ n«u*« öOGA² qLF² ð bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ …œułu*« —«—“ô«
jG{« ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ …œułu*« —«—“ô« ‰ULF²Ýô ÆvËô«
ÆqOGA²« q³ FM/AM —e«
j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M
AUTO MUTING
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
MHZ
VOL
—bB*« V ²M d¹Ëbð WDÝ«uÐ “AM” Ë« “FM” Włu —UO²š« ÎUC¹« pMJ1
ÆWOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ SOURCE SELECTOR
OPEN/CLOSE
—e« vKŽ jGC« lÐUðË jG{« Ë« lÐU²²UÐ jG{« ≤
ÆÁb¹dð Íc« œœd²« b& Ê« W¹UG TUNING ( Ë«
TUNING 9
ÎUI³ WÞu³C*« UD;« Êe)
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Æ≤ …uD)«
DBS
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
CHANNEL
l{Ë d²š« ¨WD;« ÁcN FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý« l{Ë Êe ð Ê« œ—« «–«
Włu ‰U³I²Ý« l{Ë —UO²?š«” r dE½« ÆÁb¹dð Íc« FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý«
Æ≤µ W×H vKŽ
•
“FM
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
ST
SUBWFR
AUTO MUTING
VOLUME
FM MODE
TUNING
TOP MENU
MENU
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
AUDIO
KARAOKE SOUND
KEY
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
TREBLE
2
BASS
4
5
7
8
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
ANGLE
KEY
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
REPEAT
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
Włu n«u* wMe« qUH« j³{
AM
—UDô« iFÐË ¨eðd¼uKO π Á—b AM UD; wM“ qU qLF² ð —UDô« iFÐ
Æeðd¼uKO ±∞ …—b wM“ qU qLF² ð Èdšô«
Æwz«b²Ðô« j³C« u¼ eðd¼uKO π wMe« qUH«
bMŽ AC œœd²*« —UO²« cšQ l ‰uu WMJË ¨q³I² *« qOGAð nuð s bQð •
ÆAM Włu n«u* wMe« qUH« j³{
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
STANDBY
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ jI
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
r dE½«® ÎUI³ UND³{ b¹dð w²« WD;« vKŽ n«Ë ±
Æ©vKŽô« w “ÎU¹Ëb¹ UD;« vKŽ nOu²«”
TV
MEMORY
lÐU²¹ ¨TUNING ( Ë« TUNING 9 —e« d¹d%Ë jGC« WFÐU²Ë jGC« bMŽ •
ÆWD× vKŽ nOu²« rOð Ê« W¹UG dOOG²« œœd²«
vKŽ TUNED dýR*« ¡wC¹ ¨WOU …—Uý« …u «– WD× vKŽ nOu²« bMŽ •
Æ÷dF« WýUý
WýUý vKŽ ÎUC¹« ©u¹dO²Ý® ST dýR*« ¡wC¹ ¨FM u¹dO²Ý ZU½dÐ ‰U³I²Ý« bMŽ •
Æ÷dF«
qLŽ pMJ1 ÆWŽd Ð WD;« vKŽ nOu²« sJ1 ¨…UMI« r— vKŽ WD;« 5OFð bFÐ
ÆAM WD× ±µ Ë FM WD× ≥∞ W¹UG o³ j³{
VCR
DVD
TUNING
UEŠö
o³ *« j³C« nOuð ‰ULF²Ý«
DVD
DVD
TV VOL
—bB*« V ²M ‰ULF²ÝUÐ “AM” Ë« “FM” Włu d²š« «–
…bŠË vKŽ FM/AM —e« jG{« ¨WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ SOURCE SELECTOR
ÆqOGA²« «c¼ q³ bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
Æœœd²« œ«œe¹ TUNING 9 —e« vKŽ ©jGC« WFÐU²Ë jGC« Ë«® jGCUÐ •
iH M¹ TUNING ( —e« vKŽ ©jGC« WFÐU²Ë jGC« Ë«® jGCUÐ •
Æœœd²«
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
∫eðd¼uKO ±∞ wMe« qUH« —UO²šô
jG{« rŁ ADJUST —e« vKŽ qHÝô jGC« lÐUðË jG{«
ÆSTANDBY/ON —e«
∫eðd¼uKO π wMe« qUH« vKŽ Ÿułd«Ë dOOG²K
jG{« rŁ SETTING —e« vKŽ qHÝô jGC« lÐUðË jG{«
ÆSTANDBY/ON —e«
MHZ
VOL
ÆMEMORY —e« jG{« ≤
ÆÊ«uŁ µ w«uŠ …b* ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ iOuUÐ …UMI« r— l{u √b³¹
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
ST
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
≤¥
AR24-25RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
24
19/5/03, 11:54 AM
wÐdŽ
n«u*« öOGAð
n«u*« öOGAð
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
DIMMER
wÐdŽ
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
Æ5 rd« —“ jG{« µ r— …UMIK
Æ5 rd« —“ rŁ ¨+10 rd« —“ jG{« ¨±µ r— …UMIK
Æ10 rd« —“ rŁ ¨+10 rŁ ¨+10 rd« —“ jG{« ¨≥∞ r— …UMIK
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
…UMI« r— —UO²šô ©± ≠ ±∞ ¨´±∞® ÂU—ô« —«—“« jG{« ≥
Æ…UMI« r— l{u iOË ¡UMŁ«
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Æ≤ …uD)«
Ë« “FM” Włu —UO²šô SOURCE SELECTOR —Ëœ
Ò ±
Æ“AM”
Æ…—U²<« WłuLK WK³I² WD× dš« vKŽ nOu²« r²¹
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
VOL
r— iOË ¡UMŁ« Èdš« …d MEMORY —e« jG{« ¥
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ …—U²<« …UMI«
Æ…—U²<« …UMI« r— vKŽ WD;« 5OFð ÆiOu« sŽ …—U²<« …UMI« r— nu²¹ •
ANALOG
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SUBWFR
ST
L
R
TUNED
ST
SUBWFR
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
WÞu³C*« …UMI« r— —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
Î
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “P” ed« —uNþ ¡UMŁ« UI³
…UMI« ÂU—« œ«œeð WŽU « »—UIŽ ÁU&UÐ MULTI JOG ’dI« d¹Ëb²Ð
ÎÆUI³ WÞu³C*«
…UMI« ÂU—« iH Mð WŽU « »—UIŽ fJŽ MULTI JOG ’dI« d¹Ëbð
ÎÆUI³ WÞu³C*«
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
ÆTUNER PRESET —e« jG{« ≤
—UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« Êô« qLF¹Ë ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “P” ed« dNE¹
ÎÆUI³ WÞu³C*« «uMI«
ST
•
•
•
•
UD;« lOLł Êe ð Ê« W¹UG ¥ v« ± s «uD)« —d µ
ÆU¼b¹dð w²«
ÎUI³ W½Ëe WD× ` *
•
ÆWIÐU « W½Ëe<« WD;« ` 1 qLF² …UM r— vKŽ …b¹bł WD× Êeš Ê«
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
ÎUI³ WÞu³C WD× vKŽ nOu²K
VOL
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s
Włu ‰U³I²Ý« l{Ë —UO²š«
FM
l{Ë dOOGð pMJ1 ¨ZO−{ Ë« FM Włu YÐ ‰U³I²Ý« w WÐuF œułË bMŽ
ÆFM Włu YÐ ‰U³I²Ý« ¡UMŁ« FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý«
W×H dE½«® ÎUI³ WÞu³C WD× qJ FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý« l{Ë Êeš pMJ1 •
Æ©≤¥
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s jI
ÆFM MODE —e« jG{« ¨FM WD; ŸUL²Ýô« ¡UMŁ«
vKŽ SOURCE SELECTOR —bB*« V ²M ‰ULF²ÝUÐ “FM” Włu d²š« «–
ÆqOGA²« «c¼ q³ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ FM/AM —e« jG{« ¨WOUô« WŠuK«
uB« r² 5Ð FM Włu ‰U³I²Ý« l{Ë ‰œU³ð r²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w
Î
Æ“MONO” ÍœUŠô« uB« Ë “AUTO MUTING” UOzUIKð
Æl{u« «c¼ d²š« …œUŽ
lL ð ·uÝ ¨u¹dO²Ý uBÐ Y³ ZU½d³« ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
·uÝ ¨ÍœUŠ« uBÐ ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ ªu¹dO²Ý u
lM* ÎUC¹« bOH l{u« «c¼ ÆÍœUŠ« u lL ð
dýR*« ¡wC¹ Æ UD;« 5Ð wJOðU²Ýô« g¹uA²«
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ AUTO MUTING
bIHð ·uÝ sJË® ‰U³I²Ýô« sÒO ײ l{u« «c¼ d²š«
Æ©u¹dO² « u WOUF
vKŽ nOu²« ¡UMŁ« ZO−{ lL ð ·uÝ ¨l{u« «c¼ w
WýUý s AUTO MUTING dýR*« wH² ¹ Æ UD;«
©ÆST dýR*« ÎUC¹« wH² ¹® Æ÷dF«
ÆWłu*« —UO²šô FM/AM —e« jG{« ±
Êô« ÂU—ô« —«—“« qLFðË …—U²<« WłuLK WK³I² WD× dš« vKŽ nOu²« r²¹
Æn«u*« öOGA²
ÆAM Ë FM Włu 5Ð Włu*« ‰œU³ð r²¹ ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w •
ANALOG
L
TUNED
Æ…UMI« r— —UO²šô ©± ≠ ±∞ ¨´±∞® ÂU—ô« —«—“« jG{« ≤
—bB*« V ²M ‰ULF²ÝUÐ “AM” Ë« “FM” Włu d²š« «–«
…bŠË vKŽ FM/AM —e« jG{« ¨WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ SOURCE SELECTOR
ÆqOGA²« «c¼ q³ bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
Æ5 rd« —“ jG{« µ r— …UMIK
Æ5 rd« —“ rŁ ¨+10 rd« —“ jG{« ¨±µ r— …UMIK
Æ10 rd« —“ rŁ ¨+10 rŁ ¨+10 rd« —“ jG{« ¨≥∞ r— …UMIK
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
ST
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
VOL
:MONO
*
≤µ
25
AUTO MUTING
MHZ
SUBWFR
wz«b²Ðô« j³C«
AR24-25RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
ST
VOL
•
:*AUTO MUTING
R
SUBWFR
19/5/03, 11:54 AM
•
•
•
RX-ES1SL
WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ■
II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ •
wLd« w³Ëœ •
DTS wLd« jO;« uB« •
DSP ©WOLd« …—Uýô« ZUF® ŸU{Ë« ■
DAP ©wLd« uB« ZUF® ŸU{Ë« •
u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł •
Õd *U «u« s¹uJð
«dŁR s¹uJ² Ê«—b'« vKŽ UŽUL « s b¹bF« „UM¼ ¨Âöô« Õd WU qš«
Æ U¼U&ô« lOLł s pKB𠨜bF² jO× u
Æ uB« WdŠË uB« ed —UNþ« sJ1 ¨…b¹bF« UŽUL « Ác¼ WDÝ«uÐ
fH½ ÎU³¹dIð s¹uJð q³I² *« «c¼ qš«œ œułu*« DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« lOD² ð
ÆwIOI(« Âöô« Õd w tÐ dFAð Íc« jO;« uB«
jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ■
*II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ
…—uD …œbF²*« …UMI« qOGAð WGO II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ jO;« uB« l{Ë pK²1
—œUB*«Ë u¹dO² « —bB—…UM ≤ «– —œUB*« lOLł …dHOý qOKײ U¦¹bŠ
Î
Æ…UM µ[± v« w³Ëœ jO;« uBUÐ …dHA*«
Ò
ËdÐ w³Ëœ l{u WOKô« qO− ²« W½«uDÝ« vKŽ bL²Fð …dHOý qOK%ØdOHAð WI¹dÞ
jO× u oK ðË jO;« qÐd²« uB lDI« œœd²Ð bOI dOž pKF& II pOłu
ÆÍbOKI²« pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ l{Ë l W½—UI*UÐ u¹dO²Ý
ÊËœ wKô« uB« s lÝË« u s¹uJð s II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ l{Ë pMJ1
ÆWOLG½ Ê«u« Ë« …b¹bł «u« Í« WU{«
∫vIOÝu*« l{Ë Ë rKH« l{Ë—5²I¹dÞ II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ l{Ë pK²1
ÂUEMÐ …dÒHA*« —œUB*« qOGA² VÝUM—rK l{Ë II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ
WöF« qL% w²« w³Ëœ jO;« uB«
ŸU²L²Ýô« pMJ1 Æ
ÆWKBHM*« …UM µ[± «u« WDÝ«uÐ ÊÒuJ²*« uB« s Ϋbł V¹d u ‰U−0
—bB Í« s «u« sÒ¹uJ² VÝUM—vIOÝu*« l{Ë II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ
oOLŽË lÝ«Ë uBÐ ŸU²L²Ýô« pMJ1 Æ…UM ≤ «– u¹dO² « vIOÝu*« —œUB s
pODFO ¨U«—u½UÐ j³{ —UO²š« sJ1 ¨l{u« «cN ÆWI¹dD« Ác¼ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ
ÆWO³½Uł jzUŠ …—u l “wUH²«” u WOUF
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ PLII dýR*« ¡wC¹ ¨II pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ l{Ë qOGAð bMŽ •
DOLBY SURROUND
*wLd« w³Ëœ
q³ s —ÒuD ¨WOLd« …—Uýô« jG{ WI¹dÞ sŽ …—U³Ž u¼ wLd« w³Ëœ l{Ë
Æ©…UM µ[± W¹UG …UM ±® …dHOý qOK%Ë dOHAð tMJ1 ¨w³Ëœ «d³²
«—Uý« jG{Ë qO− ²Ð …UM µ[± wLd« w³Ëœ l{Ë …dHOý qOK% WI¹dÞ ÂuIð
jO;« uB« …UMË W¹ed*« …UMI«Ë vMLO« WOUô« …UMI«Ë Èd O« WOUô« …UMI«
ŸuL−0 ® LFE iH M*« œœd²« WOUF …UMË vMLO« jO;« uB« …UMË Èd O«
«c¼ vL ¹ «cN Æ∞[± …UMI LFE iH M*« œœd²« WOUF …UM V % sJË ¨ «uM ∂
Æ©…UM µ[± ÂUE½ l{u«
œœdð j³C¹Ë ¨u¹dO²Ý WODO× «u« vKŽ ‰uB(« s wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUE½ sJ1
Ò
w³Ëœ l{u eðd¼ uKO ∑ l W½—UI ¨eðd¼uKO ≤∞ vKŽ jO;« qÐd²« uB lDI«
“Àb(« l —uC(UД —uFA«Ë uB« WdŠ e¹eFð r²¹ ¨WI¹dD« ÁcNÐ ÆpOłu ËdÐ
ÆpOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ l{Ë s dO¦JÐ d¦«
—bB*« X½U½u³L qË« ¨wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ dÒHA ZU½d³Ð ŸU²L²Ýö •
Æ©±≤ Ë ∏ U×HB« dE½«® Æq³I² *« «c¼ WOHKš vKŽ wLd« ·dD« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
MIN
MAX
WEŠö
…UM vKŽ Èu²×¹ ZU½dЗ5Žu½ v« ÎU³¹dIð wLd« w³Ëœ ZU½dÐ nOMBð sJ1
¡UMŁ« jO× uBÐ ŸU²L²Ýö Æ…UM ≤ vKŽ Íu²×¹ ZU½dÐË ©…UM µ[± W¹UG® …œbF²
l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ¨…UM ≤ vKŽ Èu²×¹ wL— w³Ëœ ÂUEMÐ dÒHA ZU½dÐ qOGAð
ÆII pOłu ËdÐ w³Ëœ
WKÒ− W¹—U& UöŽ w¼ “DTS Digital Surround ” ÂUE½Ë “DTS” ÂUEM«**
ÆWOLd« Õd *« WLE½« W ÝR*
.Dolby Laboratories Wdý s WBš— Vłu0 Z²½√ *
WdAÐ WUš W¹—U& UöŽ w¼ ÃËœe*«
D
ed«Ë “Pro Logic” Ë “Dolby”
.Dolby Laboratories
≤∂
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
26
19/5/03, 1:54 PM
wÐdŽ
jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« n¹dFð
DSPØ
Æq³I² *« «c¼ l DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1
WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
wÐdŽ
∫q³I² *« «c¼ l …œÒËe WOU²« DAP uB« ŸU{«
nI « «– WO(« Íœ«uM« vIOÝu0 wzUC —uFý s¹uJ²
:LIVE CLUB
ÆiH M*«
Æhd« Íœ«uM „Ëd« vIOÝu0 wzUC —uFý s¹uJ² :DANCE CLUB
vIOÝu*« öHŠ UŽU vIOÝu0 wzUC —uFý s¹uJ²
:HALL
ÆWOJOÝöJ«
Æ…dO³J« UŽUI« vIOÝu* wzUC —uFý s¹uJ²
:PAVILION
s¹uJð ¡UMŁ« jO× u UOUF WU{ô DAP uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1
Ê« sJ1Ë ¨wDš PCM WOL— …—Uý« Ë« …dþUM² …—Uý« U« ¨…UM ≤ u¹dO²Ý ZU½dÐ
Æ“Àb(« l —uC(UД —uFý pODFð
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ DSP dýR*« ¡wC¹ ¨DAP uB« ŸU{Ë« bŠ« —UO²š« bMŽ •
u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł
UŽUL « lOLł ‰ULF²ÝUÐ lÝË« u¹dO²Ý u ‰U− s¹uJð tMJ1 l{u« «c¼
ÆWuu*« ©WKGA*«®
UŽUL « qOuð bMŽ u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1
qOuð …UŽ«d ÊËœ q³I² *« «c¼ l jO;« uB« UŽULÝË WOUô«
ÆW¹ed*« WŽUL «
Èd O« «—Uýô« —uÞ fH½ Zœ r²¹ ¨WKGAË Wuu W¹ed*« WŽUL « X½U «–« •
ÆW¹ed*« WŽUL « ‰öš s UNł«dš« r²¹Ë WOUô« vMLO«Ë
U« ¨…UM ≤ u¹dO²Ý ZU½dÐ s¹uJð ¡UMŁ« u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1
ÆwDš PCM WOL— …—Uý« Ë« …dþUM² …—Uý«
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ DSP dýR*« ¡wC¹ ¨u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ •
** DTS wLd« jO;«
uB«
WLE½« W ÝR q³ s —ÒuD ¨WOLd« …—Uýô« jGC Èdš« WI¹dÞ u¼ DTS ÂUEM«
Æ…dHOA« qOK%Ë dOHAð tMJ1Ë WOLd« Õd *«
qBHM*« …UM µ ¨ ± wLd« uB« WGOB dš« ÂUE½ u¼ DTS jO;« uB« ÂUE½
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ«Ë ¨LD W¹—eOK« W½«uDÝô«Ë ¨CD W−b*« W½«uDÝô« Z«dÐ vKŽ du²Ë
W³ ½ DTS wLd« jO;« uB« WGO pK²9 ¨wLd« w³Ëœ ÂUE½ l W½—UI
W−O²MË ÆW½uJ²*« «uö oLŽË ŸU ð« WU{« s tMÒJ9 ¨WCH M uBK jG{
Æ·UË ÍuË wFO³Þ uBÐ DTS wLd« jO;« uB« ÂUE½ eÒOL²¹ ¨pc
—bB*« X½U½u³L qË« ¨DTS jO;« uB« ÂUEMÐ dÒHA ZU½d³Ð ŸU²L²Ýö •
Æ©±≤ Ë ∏ U×HB« dE½«® Æq³I² *« «c¼ WOHKš vKŽ wLd« ·dD« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
DSP
©WOLd« …—Uýô« ZUF® ŸU{Ë« ■
DAP
©wLd« uB« ZUF® ŸU{Ë«
ÆWLN*« jO;« uB« dUMŽ s¹uJ² DAP uB« ŸU{Ë« rOLBð Ë« öH(« UŽUË ¨hd« Íœ«u½Ë ¨WO(« Íœ«uM« qš«œ UNFL ð w²« «uô«
…dJ³ UÝUJF½«—dýU³ dOž «u«Ë dýU³ «u« s ÊuJ²ð …dO³J« UŽUI«
s Æ”UJF½« Í« ÊËœ lL² *« …dýU³*« «uô« qBð ÆnK)« s UÝUJF½«Ë
Ê«—b'«Ë nI « WU WDÝ«uÐ …dýU³*« dOž «uô« dOšQð r²¹ ¨Èdšô« WOŠUM«
Æ©qHÝôUÐ jD<« dE½«®
l{u sJ1 ÆjO;« uB« UOUFH WLN dUMŽ w¼ …dýU³*« dOž «uô« Ác¼
“Àb(« l —uC(UД —uFý pODF¹Ë ¨WLN*« dUMF« Ác¼ s¹uJð DAP uB«
ÆwIOIŠ
nK)« s UÝUJF½«
…dJ³ UÝUJF½«
…dýU³ «u«
u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł s u s¹uJð
ÍœUŽ u¹dO²Ý u s¹uJð
WOUô« UŽUL « qOuð bMŽ DAP uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1
WŽUL « qOuð …UŽ«d ÊËœ® q³I² *« «c¼ l jO;« uB« UŽULÝË
WEŠö
X½U u v²Š W¹ed*« WŽUL « s u —Ëb r²¹ ô ∫W¹ed*«
ÆMPEG W½«uDÝô œbF² …UM «—Uý« s¹uJð sJ1 ô
Æ©Wuu
qšœ …—Uý qJ …du²*« DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë«
l?{u«
DOLBY
STEREO
sJ2 dOž :× sJ2 :‡
ALL CH
ST.
PAVILION
HALL
DANCE
CLUB
LIVE
CLUB
PRO LOGIC II PRO LOGIC II
DTS
MUSIC
MOVIE
SURROUND DIGITAL
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
‡
‡
×
×
×
×
×
‡
‡
×
×
‡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
‡
×
‡
×
×
×
×
×
‡
‡
×
×
‡
‡
‡
×
‡
‡
×
‡
‡
×
‡
‡
×
‡
‡
×
‡
‡
×
‡
‡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
‡
‡
×
≤∑
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
27
19/5/03, 1:54 PM
«—Uýô«
wL— w³Ëœ
©…œbF² …UM®
wL— w³Ëœ
©…UM ≤®
jO;« uB«
DTS wLd«
©…œbF² …UM®
jO;« uB«
DTS wLd«
©…UM ≤®
wDš PCM
dþUM²
DVD MULTI ÂUE½
WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
sŽ rJײ« …bŠË WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
Æ©±π v« ±∂ U×HB« dE½«® `O× qJAÐ UŽUL « UuKF j³{ s bQð
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
4
5
7
8
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s
TREBLE
2
3
BASS
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« p VÝUM*« s ÊuJ¹ ·uÝ
qLŽ pMJ1 t½« U*UÞ ¨ uB« ö¹bFð qLF bFÐ
…—Uý« ‰ULF²Ý«Ë ¨ŸUL²Ýô« WDI½ s ö¹bF²«
Æh×H«
II pOłu ËdÐ l{u U«—u½U³« j³{ —UO²šô •
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ —«—“ô« qLF²Ý« ¨vIOÝu
ŸU{Ë«Ë UŽUL « l¹“uð 5Ð UöF« ‰uŠ
DSPØjO;« uB«
UŽUL « œbŽ vKŽ «œUL²Ž«
Î
DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« duð nK² ¹ ·uÝ
Æq³I² *« «c¼ l Wuu*«
v« ±∂ U×HB« dE½«® `O× qJAÐ UŽUL « UuKF j³{ s bQð
Æ©±π
ÆjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²?Ý« pMJ1 ô ¨jI Wuu WOUô« UŽUL « X½U «–« •
ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ô ¨Wuu dOž jO;« uB« UŽULÝ X½U «–« •
ÆDSP uB«
uB« Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ q¦ …UMI« œbF² wL— ZU½dÐ qOGAð bMŽ
VÝUM*« …UMI« œbF²*« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð r²¹ ¨DTS wLd« jO;«
l® SURROUND —e« jG{ WDÝ«uÐ ©“DTS” Ë« “DOLBY D”® UOJOðUuðË«
Î
Æ©wLd« qšb« l{Ë —UO²š«
Ë« “PLII MUSIC” l{Ë —UO²š« pMJ1 ¨…UM ≤ wLd« w³Ëœ ZU½d³ •
ÆSURROUND —e« jG{ WDÝ«uÐ “PLII MOVIE”
“qšœ …—Uý qJ …du²*« DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë«” r dE½« ¨d¦« qOUH² •
Æ≤∑ W×H vKŽ
UŽULÝ ¥ Ë UŽULÝ µ qOuð bMŽ
ÆÁb¹dð Íc« ZU½d³« qÒGýË d²š« ±
vKŽ ◊u³C “©wzUIK²« jO;« uB«® AUTO SR” l{Ë ÊU «–«
“ON” qOGAð l{Ë
VÝUM*« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð r²¹ wL— —bB qOGA²Ð
Æ≥ …uD)« v« V¼–« ← ©Æ≤± W×H dE½«® ÆUOJOðUuðË«
Î
jO;« uB« l{Ë —UO²šô SURROUND —e« jG{« ≤
ÆVÝUM*«
∫wK¹ UL DSPØjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« dÒOG²ð ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w
∫…du²*« jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë«
©rK II pOłu ËdЮ PLII MOVIE
©vIOÝu II pOłu ËdЮ PLII MUSIC
•
∫…du²*« DSP uB« ŸU{Ë«
Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ q¦ …UMI« œbF² wL— ZU½dÐ qOGAð bMŽ
∫DTS wLd« jO;« uB«
L
C
wŠ ÍœU½ LIVE CLUB
hd« ÍœU½ DANCE CLUB
öH(« WŽU HALL
…dO³ WŽU PAVILION
u¹dO²Ý «uMI« lOLł ALL CH ST.
R
SUBWFR LFE
DOLBY D
LS
RS
DTS
VOL
Ë« DOLBY D
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO×
u®
UŽULÝ ≥ qOuð bMŽ
uB« Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ q¦ …UM ≤ wL— ZU½dÐ qOGAð bMŽ
∫DTS wLd« jO;«
PLII MUSIC
PLII MOVIE
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
∫vKŽô« w —uc*« dOž dš« ZU½dÐ Í« qOGAð bMŽ
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
∫…du²*« jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë«
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
©rK II pOłu ËdЮ PLII MOVIE
©vIOÝu II pOłu ËdЮ PLII MUSIC
WEŠö
W×H dE½«® “©wzUIK²« jO;« uB«® AUTO SR” l{Ë “ON” qOGAð bMŽ
wL— —bB qOGAðË —UO²š« bMŽ ÎUOJOðUuðË« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð r²¹ ¨©≤±
Æ…UMI« œbF²
≤∏
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
28
19/5/03, 1:55 PM
wÐdŽ
jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý«
Æ—bB qJ q¹bF²« kHŠ r²¹ ¨jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« q¹bFð bMŽ
Ÿ—U³« jO;« uB« j³{ l{Ë ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WŽUL « UuKF j³CÐ XL «–« •
ÆWŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bF² WłUŠ błu¹ ô ¨©±∂ W×H dE½«®
WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
ÆWOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ —«—“ô« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ h×H« WLG½ du²ð ô
•
wÐdŽ
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Æ≤ …uD)«
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
s h× WLG½ Ãd ðË ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ iOuUÐ “TEST L” dýR*« √b³¹
∫wK¹ UL UŽUL «
L
LPCM
R
PL ΙΙ
SUBWFR
VOL
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
Æ UŽUL « Ãdš Ê“«uð h×H TEST —e« jG{« ≥
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
ÆÁb¹dð Íc« ZU½d³« qÒGýË d²š« ±
◊u³C “©wzUIK²« jO;« uB«® AUTO SR” l{Ë ÊU «–«
“ON” qOGAð l{Ë vKŽ
VÝUM*« jO;« uB« l{Ë qOGAð r²¹ wL— —bB qOGA²Ð
Æ¥ …u?D)« v« V¼–« ← ©Æ≤± W×H dE½«® ÆÎU?OJOðUuðË«
ÆSURROUND —e« jG{« ≤
TEST C
TEST L
TEST R
©Èd O« WOUô« WŽUL «®
©W¹ed*« WŽUL «®
©vMLO« WOUô« WŽUL «®
TEST RS
TEST LS
©Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ®
©vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ®
v« q³O ¹œ ≠±∞ s® WOU²« WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² ‰bŽ
Ò ¥
Æ©q³O ¹œ ´±∞
◊u³C …—U²<« WŽUL K uB« Èu² ÊuJ¹ v²Š ö¹bF²« qLŽ«
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Èu² fH½ vKŽ
¨W¹ed*« WŽUL « Èu² q¹bF²
ÆDSPØjO;« uB« l{Ë —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
ÆCENTER +/– —e« jG{«
¨Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Èu² q¹bF²
jO;« uB« l{Ë —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
ÆVÝUM*«
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ q¦ …UMI« œbF² wL— ZU½dÐ qOGAð bMŽ
∫DTS wLd« jO;« uB«
L
C
ÆSURR R +/– —e« jG{«
L
LPCM
R
PL ΙΙ
SUBWFR
VOL
Æ“CENTER” W¹ed*« WŽUL K “©q³O ¹œ® +8” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
R
SUBWFR LFE
DTS
ÆSURR L +/– —e« jG{«
¨vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Èu² q¹bF²
•
DOLBY D
LS
RS
VOL
Ë« DOLBY D
STEREO
©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
Ë« wLd« w³Ëœ q¦ …UMI« œbF² wL— ZU½dÐ qOGAð bMŽ
∫DTS wLd« jO;« uB«
Æh×H« WLG½ ·UI¹ô Èdš« …d TEST —e« jG{« µ
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ ÎUOUŠ —U²<« —bB*« rÝ« dNE¹
PLII MUSIC
PLII MOVIE
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
∫vKŽô« w —uc*« dOž dš« ZU½dÐ Í« qOGAð bMŽ
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
ÆADJUST —e« jG{« ¥
Æ uB« q¹bF² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —ËÒœ µ
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ tD³{ b¹dð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
L
LPCM
•
R
•
PL ΙΙ
SUBWFR
VOL
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT
B.BOOST
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA*
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
ATT
Æ“PLII MUSIC” l{u jI du² *
WOU²« W×HB« vKŽ l³²¹
≤π
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
29
19/5/03, 1:55 PM
WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
sŽ rJײ« …bŠË WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
Æ©±π v« ±∂ U×HB« dE½«® `O× qJAÐ UŽUL « UuKF j³{ s bQð
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s
…bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« p VÝUM*« s ÊuJ¹ ·uÝ
U*UÞ ¨ uB« ö¹bFð qLF bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
¨ŸUL²Ýô« WDI½ s ö¹bF²« qLŽ pMJ1 t½«
Æh×H« …—Uý« ‰ULF²Ý«Ë
BASS
KARAOKE SOUND
ZOOM
1
2
BASS
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
4
5
7
8
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
:*±SURR R
w —U²<« bM³« q¹bF² MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ∂
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨µ …uD)«
3
6
9
:*±SURR L
u WOUFHÐ ŸU²L²Ýô« b¹dð UbMŽ “ON” qOGAð d²š« •
ÆWO³½Uł jzUŠ …—u l “wUH²«”
WK− *« «uô« ŸULÝ b¹dð UbMŽ “OFF” ·UI¹« d²š« •
ÆWOKô«
ÆWŽULÝ j³{ qJ “0” dH u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *±
Æ“OFF” ·UI¹« u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *≤
TREBLE
+10
:*±CENTER
:*≤PANORAMA j³{
TREBLE
100+
TV RETURN
v« q³O ¹œ –±∞ s® W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
Æ©q³O ¹œ ´±∞
–±∞ s® Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
Æ©q³O ¹œ ´±∞ v« q³O ¹œ
–±∞ s® vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
Æ©q³O ¹œ ´±∞ v« q³O ¹œ
Æj³C« Êeš Èu² ÊuJ¹ v²Š ö¹bF²« qLŽ« ¨WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² q¹bFð b½ •
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Èu² fH½ vKŽ ◊u³C …—U²<« WŽUL K uB«
L
LPCM
R
PL ΙΙ
SUBWFR
VOL
Æ“CENTER” W¹ed*« WŽUL K “©q³O ¹œ® +8” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
Ë« wDš PCM …—Uý« U«—…UM ≤ ZU½d³« qOGA²Ð √bЫ ±
Æ—bB*« d²š«Ë—…dþUM² …—Uý«
bŠ« dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG lÐU²²UÐ SURROUND —e« jG{« ≤
WýUý vKŽ UN²U{« b¹dð w²« DSP uB« ŸU{Ë«
Æ÷dF«
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ DSP dýR*« ¡wC¹
∫wK¹ UL DSP uB« ŸU{Ë« dÒOG²ð ¨—e« UNÐ jGCð …d q w •
L
LPCM
R
DSP
SUBWFR
VOL
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
Æ UŽUL « Ãdš Ê“«uð h×H TEST —e« jG{« ≥
s h× WLG½ Ãd ðË ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ iOuUÐ “TEST L” dýR*« √b³¹
∫wK¹ UL UŽUL «
L
LPCM
SUBWFR
R
DSP
VOL
TEST C
TEST L
TEST R
©Èd O« WOUô« WŽUL «®
©W¹ed*« WŽUL «®
©vMLO« WOUô« WŽUL «®
TEST RS
TEST LS
©Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ®
©vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ®
ÆÈdšô« UÞu³C« q¹bF² ∂ Ë µ «uD)« —d ∑
jO;« uB« l{Ë ¡UGô
—e« jG{« Ë« bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ lÐU²²UÐ SURROUND —e« jG{«
dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ MULTI JOG ’dI« —ÒËœ rŁ SURROUND
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “STEREO” u¹dO² « dýR
Zœ r²¹ ¨…œbF² …UM wL— ZU½dÐ qOGAð ¡UMŁ« jO;« uB« l{Ë ¡UG« - «–« •
WŽULÝË® WOUô« UŽUL « ‰öš s UNł«dš« r²¹Ë «uMI« lOLł «—Uý«
dH¹u« WŽULÝ j³CÐ XLË WOŽd dH¹Ë WŽULÝ XKË« b XM «–« WOŽdH« dH¹u«
vKŽ Ë« l¹d « j³CK “USE” ‰ULF²Ý« l{Ë vKŽ—`O× qJAÐ WOŽdH«
Æ©±∏ Ë ±∑ U×HB« dE½«—ÍËbO« j³CK “YES” rF½ l{Ë
UEŠö
ëdš« ÊËœ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² q¹bFð pMJ1 •
Æh×H« WLG½
s h×H« WLG½ ÃËdš ÊËœ W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð pMJ1 ô •
Æ“ON” qOGAð l{Ë vKŽ “CNTR SP” bM³« j³{ bMŽ W¹ed*« WŽUL «
s h×H« WLG½ ÃËdš ÊËœ jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš U¹u² q¹bFð pMJ1 ô •
Æ“ON” qOGAð l{Ë vKŽ “SURR SP” bM³« j³{ bMŽ jO;« uB« WŽULÝ
¨p– fJFÐ ªjO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý« ¡UMŁ« WŽUL « j³{ dÒOGð ô t½« dcð •
WÐuKD*« UŽUL « qOGAð ·UI¹« bMŽ jO;« uB« l{Ë wG²K¹ Ê« sJ1
ÆtKOGA²
bM³« —UO²š« bMŽ jO;« uB« ŸU{Ë« s l{Ë Í« ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ô •
ÆqOGAð —bBL DVD MULTI
≥∞
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
30
19/5/03, 1:55 PM
wÐdŽ
ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý«
DSP
Æ—bB qJ q¹bF²« kHŠ r²¹ ¨DSP uB« ŸU{Ë« q¹bFð bMŽ
jO;« uB« UŽULÝ sJð r «–« DSP uB« ŸU{Ë« ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ô •
ÆWuu
Æ“ALL CH ST.” l{u WOUFH« Èu² q¹bFð pMJ1 ô •
WOF«Ë u ôU− s¹uJð
Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —ËÒœ µ
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ tD³{ b¹dð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
L
LPCM
±∞≠ s® jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš U¹u² ‰bŽ
Ò ¥
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ
◊u³C …—U²<« WŽUL K uB« Èu² ÊuJ¹ v²Š ö¹bF²« qLŽ«
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Èu² fH½ vKŽ
•
R
¨Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Èu² q¹bF²
DSP
SUBWFR
ÆSURR L +/– —e« jG{«
wÐdŽ
VOL
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT*
B.BOOST
¨vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Èu² q¹bF²
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
ATT
ÆSURR R +/– —e« jG{«
L
LPCM
:*≤©DAP
R
Æ“SURR R” vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽUL “©q³O ¹œ® –8” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
Æh×H« WLG½ ·UI¹ô Èdš« …d TEST —e« jG{« µ
:*±SURR L
∫DAP uB« ŸU{Ëô jI ∂
uB« WOUF Èu² —UO²šô EFFECT —e« jG{«
ÆU¼b¹dð w²« ©µ v« ±® DAP
:*±SURR R
uB« ŸU{Ëô jI du²® EFFECT
ÆDAP uB« WOUF Èu² q¹bF²
vKŽ tD³{« …œUŽ® Èu« WOUF `³Bð ¨rd« œ«œ“« ULK
Æ©“EFFECT 3” Èu² *«
ÆWŽULÝ j³{ qJ “©q³O ¹œ® 0” dH u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *±
Æ“3” u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *≤
vKŽ tD³{« …œUŽ® Èu« DAP uB« WOUF `³Bð ¨rd« œ«œ“« ULK
Æ©“EFFECT 3” Èu² *«
L
LPCM
R
DSP
SUBWFR
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
EFFECT 2
j³C« Êeš Èu² ÊuJ¹ v²Š ö¹bF²« qLŽ« ¨WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² q¹bFð bMŽ •
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Èu² fH½ vKŽ ◊u³C …—U²<« WŽUL K uB«
LPCM
•
VOL
w —U²<« bM³« q¹bF² MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ∂
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨µ …uD)«
L
DSP
SUBWFR
VOL
ÆDAP uB« ŸU{u jI du² *
±∞≠ s® Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ
vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ ±∞≠ s®
•
EFFECT 5
EFFECT 1
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
ÆWOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ —«—“ô« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ h×H« WLG½ du²ð ô
•
R
SUBWFR
DSP
DIMMER
VOL
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
Æ“SURR R” vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽUL “©q³O ¹œ® –8” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
ÆÈdšô« UÞu³C« q¹bF² ∂ Ë µ «uD)« —d ∑
uB« ŸU{Ë« ¡UGô
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Æ≤ …uD)«
—e« jG{« Ë« bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ lÐU²²UÐ SURROUND —e« jG{«
dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ MULTI JOG ’dI« —ÒËœ rŁ SURROUND
WýUý s DSP dýR*« wH² ¹ Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “STEREO” u¹dO² « dýR
Æ÷dF«
Ë« wDš PCM …—Uý« U«—…UM ≤ ZU½d³« qOGA²Ð √bЫ ±
Æ—bB*« d²š«Ë—…dþUM² …—Uý«
ÆSURROUND —e« jG{« ≤
UEŠö
ŸU{Ë« bŠ« dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ UN²U{« b¹dð w²« DSP uB«
DSP
ëdš« ÊËœ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² q¹bFð pMJ1
Æh×H« WLG½
s h×H« WLG½ ÃËdš ÊËœ W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð pMJ1 ô
Æ“NO” qOGAð l{Ë vKŽ “CNTR SP” bM³« j³{ bMŽ W¹ed*« WŽUL «
h×H« WLG½ ÃËdš ÊËœ jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš U¹u² q¹bFð pMJ1 ô
qOGAð l{Ë vKŽ “SURR SP” bM³« j³{ bMŽ jO;« uB« WŽULÝ s
Æ“NO”
•
ÆDSPØjO;« uB« l{Ë —UO²šô MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ DSP dýR*« ¡wC¹
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK •
•
L
LPCM
•
SUBWFR
R
DSP
VOL
PLII MOVIE
LIVE CLUB
HALL
ALL CH ST.
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
PLII MUSIC
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
STEREO ©·UI¹« DSPØjO× u®
ÆADJUST —e« jG{« ¥
Æ uB« q¹bF² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
≥±
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
31
19/5/03, 1:55 PM
RX-ES1SL
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
DIMMER
STANDBY / ON
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
ÆÆÆ t½« dcð ¨√b³ð Ê« q³
s √bЫ ¨¡UN²½ô« q³ j³C« ¡UG« - «–« ¨WOU²« «uD)« qLF œb× XË „UM¼
Ʊ …uD)«
ÆADJUST —e« jG{« ±
Æ uB« q¹bF² MULTI JOG ’dI« qLF¹ Êô«
qBHM Ãdš l{Ë s¹uJ² DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë q³I² *« c¼ œËe¹
Ò
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA* ©…UM µ[± s¹uJð® dþUM²
qOGA² DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1 ¨p– v« WU{ôUÐ
ÆWOðuB« DVD Audio W½«uDÝ«
l od*« qOGA²« ULOKFð VO² v« ÎUC¹« lł—« ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qOGAð q³
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qGA
Ò
Ãd)« fÐUI qË« ¨DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ •
vKŽ DVD IN wLd« qšb« fÐUI l DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA* dþUM²*« qBHM*«
Æ©±± W×H dE½«® WOHK)« WŠuK«
ÆXV-NK58SL q¹œuLK DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1 ô •
sŽ rJײ« …bŠË WDÝ«uÐ q³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
l{Ë vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ÎULz«œ ¨bFÐ
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
Íc« j³C« bMÐ dNE¹ Ê« W¹UG MULTI JOG ’dI« —ËÒœ ≤
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« WýUý vKŽ tD³{ b¹dð
∫wK¹ UL ÊUO³« dÒOG²¹ ¨MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ ULK
DVD MULTI
∫WOUô« WŠuK« vKŽ
•
DIMMER
ANALOG
L
C
œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë qOGAð
SETTING
ADJUST
SET / TUNER PRESET
SURROUND
SOURCE SELECTOR
/ MULTI JOG
MASTER VOLUME
PHONES
R
STANDBY / ON
DVD MULTI
STANDBY
DVD
DBS
VCR
TV
FM / AM
SUBWFR LFE
LS
RS
BASS
CENTER
EFFECT
B.BOOST
VOL
Ê« W¹UG SOURCE SELECTOR —bB*« V ²M —Ëœ
Ò ±
Æ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ “DVD MULTI” dýR*« dNE¹
SUBWFR
TREBLE
SURR L
SURR R
BAL
PANORAMA
©W¹«b³« v« Ÿuł—®
ATT
ÆdLŠô« ÊuKUÐ DVD MULTI dýR*« ¡wC¹
q³O ¹œ ±∞≠ s® W¹ed*« WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bF² :*CENTER
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v«
±∞≠ s® Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
:*SURR L
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ
±∞≠ s® vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Ãdš Èu² q¹bF²
:*SURR R
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ
Æ“©q³O ¹œ® 0” dH u¼ wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
W½«uDÝ« qÒGA vKŽ dþUM²*« qBHM*« Ãd)« l{Ë d²š« ≤
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qOGAð √bÐ«Ë ¨DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
ÆDVD MULTI —e« jG{« ±
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
CHANNEL
TUNING
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
FM MODE
ÆdLŠô« ÊuKUÐ DVD MULTI dýR*« ¡wC¹
vKŽ dþUM²*« qBHM*« Ãd)« l{Ë d²š« ≤
qOGAð √bÐ«Ë ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qGA
Ò
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ«
VOLUME
TUNING
w —U²<« bM³« q¹bF² MULTI JOG ’dI« —Ëœ
Ò ≥
ÆSET —e« jG{« rŁ ¨≤ …uD)«
Æj³C« Êeš ◊u³C …—U²<« WŽUL K uB« Èu² ÊuJ¹ v²Š ö¹bF²« qLŽ« •
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Èu² fH½ vKŽ
ANALOG
L
C
l{Ë ‰ULF²ÝUÐ DVD W½«uDÝ« qOGAð ¡UMŁ« WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð pMJ1
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA vKŽ dþUM²*« qBHM*« Ãd)«
Æq¹bF²« kHŠ r²¹ ¨ uB« q¹bFð ¡«dł« bFÐ
UŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² q¹bF² UŽUL « ‰öš s h×H« WLG½ ÃËdš r²¹ ô •
ÆDVD MULTI l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ
R
SUBWFR LFE
LS
RS
VOL
Æ“CENTER” W¹ed*« WŽUL K “©q³O ¹œ® +8” —UO²š« bMŽ ∫‰U¦
ÆÈdšô« UÞu³C« q¹bF² ≥ Ë ≤ «uD)« —d ¥
UEŠö
uB« l{Ë ¡UG« r²¹ ¨qOGA²K —bBL DVD MULTI l{Ë —UO²š« bMŽ
ÆSURROUND —e« qLF¹ ôË ¨—U²<« DSPØjO;«
Èd O« «uMI« «u« ëdš« r²¹ ¨”√d« UŽULÝ s ÃË“ ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æ”√d« UŽULÝ s WOUô« vMLO«Ë
WŽUL « Ãdš Èu² q¹bFð
•
∫bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË s
¨ uB« ö¹bFð qLF bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« p VÝUM*« s ÊuJ¹ ·uÝ
ÆŸUL²Ýô« WDI½ s ö¹bF²« qLŽ pMJ1 t½« U*UÞ
ZOOM
1
VFP
KARAOKE
4
5
7
8
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
DIMMER
•
2
BASS
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
EFFECT
CENTER
L SURR R
s® WOU²« WŽUL « Ãdš U¹u² ‰bŽ
Ò
Æ©q³O ¹œ ±∞´ v« q³O ¹œ ±∞≠
WŽUL K uB« Èu² ÊuJ¹ v²Š ö¹bF²« qLŽ«
ÆWOUô« UŽUL « Èu² fH½ vKŽ ◊u³C …—U²<«
¨W¹ed*« WŽUL « Èu² q¹bF²
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
TEST
SUBWFR
•
ÆCENTER +/– —e« jG{«
¨Èd O« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Èu² q¹bF²
ÆSURR L +/– —e« jG{«
¨vMLO« jO;« uB« WŽULÝ Èu² q¹bF²
ÆSURR R
+/–
—e« jG{«
≥≤
AR26-32RX-ES&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
32
19/5/03, 1:55 PM
wÐdŽ
DVD MULTI œbF²*« qOGA²« l{Ë ‰ULF²Ý«
XV-NK58SL
qOGA²« q³
wLd«
r−F ∫D o×K” ∂¥ W×H lł«—® WOU²« wLd«
uB« mO
uB« mO rŽb¹ qÒGA*« «c¼
wÐdŽ
∫© u WGO q qOUHð WdF*
«uMI« œbF² ¨
qOb« «c¼ ‰uŠ
OSD WýUA«
“ U×KDB*«
U½UOÐ
«—UO²š« WLzUË ÷dF« WýUý w dNEð w²«
UuKF*«
«uDš w › ¤ 5Ýu 5Ð dNEð ©WýUA« vKŽ UN{dŽ r²¹ w²«
U½UO³«®
•
ÆqOGA²«
Dolby Digital wLd« w³Ëœ ¨ Linear PCM wD)« Â≈ wÝ wÐ
©eL² OÝ dÓðUOŁ ‰U²O−¹œ® DTS ”≈ wð Íœ ¨MPEG
UNO« —UA¹ WHOþËØWOKLŽ qJ UNULF²Ý« sJ1 w²« © U½«uDÝô«® W½«uDÝô«
∫WOU²«
•
U½uI¹_« WDÝ«uÐ
WEŠö
ÎUF³ð p–Ë
U½«uDÝô« vKŽ WK− w¼ UL wLd«
lł«— ÆqÒGA*« vKŽ ›DIGITAL
uB«
«—Uý≈ ëdš≈ r²¹ ô b
AUDIO OUTPUT¤ wLd« uB« Ãdš W¾ON²
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” r
U½«uDÝô« ‰uŠ
ÆqOUH²« s b¹e* µπ W×H w
U½«uDÝô« ‰uŠ
‰Ušœ≈ bFÐ ÎUOzUIKð ÷dF« qÒGA*« √b³¹ ¨DVD
U½«uDÝ« iFÐ l
VIDEO
UN{dŽ sJ1 w²«
UEŠö
ÆqÒGA*« «c¼ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ UN{dŽ sJ1 WOU²«
•
ÆW½«uDÝô«
ÆUN H½ W½«uDÝô« w »uOF W−O²½ ÎU½UOŠ√ WýÒuA Ë√ W¾¹œ— …—uB« ÊuJð b
dOž ÊuJð Ê√ qOb« «c¼ w WMO³*« qOGA²«
UOKLF sJ1
U½«uDÝô« iFÐ l
DVD VIDEO
•
•
SVCD
DVD-RW uOKÐœ —¬ ≠ Íœ w ÍœË DVD-R —¬ ≠ Íœ w Íœ U½«uDÝ√
ÆWL²² Ë DVD VIDEO WGOBÐ WÐu²J*«
mOBÐ WÐu²J*« CD-RW uOKÐœ —¬ ≠ Íœ wÝË CD-R —¬ ≠ Íœ wÝ U½«uDÝ√
ÆWL²² Ë Audio CD Ë√ Video CD Ë√ SVCD
”UOI* UI³Þ
Î
WMA Ë√ MP3 WGOBÐ WÐu²J*« CD-RW Ë CD-R U½«uDÝ√
©qOUH²« s b¹e* ¥∑ W×H lł«—® “ISO 9660” WGOB«
WGOBÐ WÐu²J*« CD-RW uOKÐœ —¬ ≠ Íœ wÝË CD-R —¬ ≠ Íœ wÝ U½«uDÝ√
©ÆqOUH²« s b¹e* ¥π W×H lł«—® “ISO 9660” ”UOI* UI³Þ
Î
JPEG
‰ËUM²«
ULNOKŽ oBKð ôË nK²K ÷dF« tłË Ë√ WÐU²J« tOKŽ Íc« W½«uDÝô« tłË ÷ ÒdFð ô
DVD Íœ w Íœ —UFý
U½«uDÝô« ÷dF¹ Ê√ ÎUC¹√ qÒGALK sJ1
Ë
u
ÆW½«uDÝô« `DÝ fLKð ô
Audio CD
ÆW¹—U& WöŽ u¼
∫WOU²«
…œuł iH Mð bI ¡«u²« Ë√ ‘Ëbš Ë√ —U³G X{ÒdFð Ë√ W½«uDÝô« X ð« «–≈
UÞUO²Šô« c ð≈ Æ÷dF«
•
•
ÆULNOKŽ WIô …œU qLF² ð Ë√ U—Ë
Î
U½«uDÝô« s¹e ð
iF³« UNCFÐ ‚u
U½«uDÝô« f¹bJð - «–≈ ÆUN³KŽ w
U½«uDÝôUÐ kH²Š≈
U½«uDÝô« lCð ô
sJL²¹ ô b Ë√ W½«uDÝô«
°…—UO « w
Ë
U½«uDÝô« „dð VM&
Ò
•
WFDIÐ UN× ≈ ¨W½«uDÝô« nOEMð VFB« s ÊU «–≈ Æ×U)« u×½ öI²MË
Î
MIX-MODE CD ŸU{Ë_« w WK− *«
•
uB«
«—Uý≈ ÷dF¹ Ê√ qÒGALK sJ1
ÆCD
TEXT Ë CD-EXTRA Ë CD-G
DVD VIDEO
UN
DVD VIDEO u¹bOH«
u¹bOH«
ÆÎöOK ¡U*UÐ W³ÒÞd ‘UL
•
U¹u²× …¡«d w ö¹uÞ
Î
ÎU²Ë ‚dG² ¹ Ê√ qÒGALK sJ1
U½«uDÝô« nOEMð
W½«uDÝô« ed0 ÎUzœUÐ ¨WUł WLŽU½ ‘UL WFD ‰ULF²ÝUÐ W½«uDÝô« ` ≈
•
Æ¡«u²« Ë√ ‘Ëbš UNÐ Ë√ W ² W½«uDÝô« X½U «–≈ W½«uDÝô« ÷dŽ s qGA*«
Ò
•
ÆWÐuÞd« Ë√ …—«d(« Wł—œ lHðdð
•
WEŠö
•
ÆnK²ð Ê√ UN sJL*« sL WO«u« UN³KŽ ÊËœ
YOŠ Ë√ dýU³*« fLA« ¡uC tO ÷ÒdF²ð Ê√ sJ1 ÊUJ w
U½«uDÝ_«
VIDEO
U½«uDÝôUÐ W¹UMF«
Æ U½«uDÝô« ‰ËUMð bMŽ W³ÝUM*«
UöF« qL% w²«
Video CD
ÆWMJ2
UNËUMðË
U½«uDÝô«
U½«uDÝ«Ë
U½«uDÝô WIDM*« e—
DVD VIDEO u¹bOH«
U½«uDÝ«
öGA
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ tMJ1 qÒGA*« «c¼ ÆWIDM qJ WU)« U¼“u—
¨qÒGALK WIDM*« e— sLC²¹ w²«Ë WIDM*« e— ÂU—√ UN w²«
DVD VIDEO
ÆWOHK)« WŠuK« vKŽ œułu*« WIDM*« e— —UFý vKŽ tO« —UA*«Ë
∫“2” WIDM*« u¼ qÒGALK WIDM*« e— ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
2
ALL
…œUC dUMŽ Í√ Ë√ ‰u×J« Ë√ s¹eM³« Ë√
U½«uDÝô«
UHEM ΫbÐ√ qLF² ð ô
•
ÆWMU « WOÐdNJK
l³D« ‚uIŠ ‰uŠ
Ë√ DVD VIDEO
1 2
3 4
123
456
Ê«u_« ÂUE½ WGO
NTSC wÝ ”≈ wð Ê≈Ë PAL ‰UÐ WLE½√ l o«u² qÒGA*« «c¼
vKŽ PAL/NTSC ÂUEM« —UO²š« ÕU²H ‰ULF²Ý« ¡UMŁ√ “NTSC” Ë√ “PAL” 5UEM«
Æ©π W×H lł«— ¨qOUH²« s b¹e*® WOHK)« WŠuK«
U½«uDÝ« s qO− ²« q³ „bKÐ w l³D« ‚uIŠ 5½«u lł«—
Æl³D« ‚uIŠ 5½«uI UÎdš qJ
Ò A¹ Ê√ sJ1 l³Þ ‚uIŠ vKŽ ÍuDMð w²« œ«u*« qO− ð
U³UD0 WOL;« l³D« ‚uIŠ W¹ULŠ WOMIð sLC²¹ “UN'« «c¼
Macrovision WdA WuK2 Èdš√ Íd?J WOJK ‚uIŠË WMOF W?OdO√ Ÿ«d²š«
«c¼ l³D« ‚u?IŠ W¹ULŠ W?OMIð ‰ULF?²Ý≈ Æs¹dš¬ ‚uI?Š »U×√Ë Corporation
UN{dŽ sJ1 ô w²«
pKð q¦ ÷dŽ XËUŠ «–≈ ÆÁU½œ√ Wł—b*«
ÆpOJH²«Ë w JF« wÝbMN« ¡UH²ô« dE×Ô¹
U½«uDÝô« ÷dF¹ Ê√ tMJ1 ô qGA*«
«c¼
Ò
U½«uDÝô«
•
∫÷dFÐ qÒGA*« ÂuI¹ ô ¨p– v« WU{ùUÐ
WL²²<« dOž
Ë√ j¹dý UNOKŽ oBK*«
U½«uDÝô« Ë√ W¹œUF« dOž ‰UJý_«
«–
U½«uDÝ_«
U½«uDÝ_«
q¦ ÷dŽ Æ÷dF« tłË vKŽ Ë√ WÐU²J« tOKŽ Íc« tłu« vKŽ WIô …œU Ë√ ‰“UŽ
ÆqÒGALK Ϋ—«d{√ V³ ¹ Ê√ sJ1
Ò
≥≥
33
U½«uDÝ
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD AUDIO, CD-ROM, PHOTO CD, SACD U?½«uDÝ√ •
U«b ²Ý« vKŽ tM
Æp– ·ö Ð Macrovision Corporation Wdý s
U½«uDÝ_«
Æ UŽUL K Ϋ—«d{√ V³ ¹ U2 ¡U{u{ bOuð r²¹ bI
Ò
VR —¬ w WGOBÐ WÐu²J*« DVD-RW
÷dG« d?B²I¹Ë ¨ Macrovision Corporation W?dý s i¹u?H²Ð r²?¹ Ê√ V−¹
i¹uH²Ð ô≈ jI Èdš_« …œËb;« …b¼UA*«Ë WOeM*« …b¼UA*«
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
U½«uDÝ« ‰uŠ ‰U¦
bŠ√ —UO²š« pMJ1 Æ
UEŠö
Æ JPEG discs Ë√ WMA Ë√ MP3 Ë√ Audio CD Ë√ Video CD Ë√ SVCD
«¡«d³ WI¹dD«
25
DVD
19/8/03, 9:09 AM
U½«uDÝô« pKð
•
•
XV-NK58SL
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
WEŠö
qþ U*UÞ œœd²*« —UO²« —bB sŽ qÒGA*« qB r²¹ sK qÒGA*« XHË√ uË v²Š
Ác¼ w Æ—UE²½ô« l{Ë vÒL ð WU(« Ác¼ Æ—«b'« w —UO²« Ãd 0 öu
Î
wÐdŽ
ÆwzUÐdNJ« —UO²« s «bł
Î
Î
öO¾{
Ϋ—b qÒGA*« pKN² ¹ ¨WU(«
WOzb³*« W¾ON²«
WýUý vKŽ wU²« —UDšù« dNE¹ ¨tz«dý bFÐ …d ‰Ë_ qÒGA*« qOGA²Ð ÂuIð UbMŽ
ÆÊu¹eHK²«
EXECUTE DVD PLAYER SETUP? - BASIC PICTURE/AUDIO
SETTING
YES - PRESS ENTER NO - CANCEL
WOÝUÝ_«
uB«Ø…—uB« W¾ONð ≠ ø Íœ w Íœ
©
U½«uDÝ« qÒGA
U¾ONð cOHMð®
CANCEL ≠ ô ENTER jG{≈ ≠ rF½
‰ULF²Ý« q³ wLd« Ãd)«Ë w½u¹eHK²« ÷dF« “UNł Ÿu½Ë ÷dF« WG W¾ONð pMJ1
ÆÁU½œ√ WI¹dD« ŸU³ðUÐ p–Ë qG
Ò A*«
ÆENTER jG{≈ ±
͜ w ͜
›ON
U½«uDÝ« qÒGA W¾ONð WýUý s W×H ‰Ë√ dNEð
WEŠö
ÆDVD PLAYER SET UP
SCREEN LANGUAGE¤ WýUA« vKŽ ÷dF« WG «—UO²š« WLzU ÊuJð
l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨qG
Ò A*« qOGAð bMŽ
ÆqFHUÐ WŠu²H qHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
Æ“DVD” vKŽ
DVD PLAYER SET UP
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
‰u³I*« dOž qOGA²« W½uI¹√ ‰uŠ
vKŽ
ENGLISH
dNEð r uË v²Š Wu³I dOž qOGA²«
CHINESE
SPANISH
SELECT
WöF« dNEð ¨—e« p– qOGAð qÒGA*« q³I¹ r «–≈Ë ¨Î«—“ jGCð UbMŽ
UOKLŽ ÊuJð ÎU½UOŠ√ Æp½u¹eHKð WýUý
Æ
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
iFÐ ¨‰U¦*« qO³Ý vKŽ ÆWu³I ÊuJð ô b qOGA²«
ENTER
Æ¡wD³« ÷dF« Ë√ l¹d « lOłd²«Ø.bI²UÐ `L ð ô b
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE WýUA« vKŽ ÷dF« WG
ÆWÐužd*« WGK« —UO²šô
U?GK« 5?Ð s a?«
öOC?H²?«
U½«uDÝô«
«—UO²š≈
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
U½UO?³ W?ýUA« v?KŽ ÷dF?« WG? —UO²?š« pM?J1
Æ SPANISH WO½U³Ýù«Ë CHINESE WOMOB«Ë ENGLISH W¹eOK$ù«
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≥
÷dF« “UNł Ÿu½
WöF«
UOKLŽ iFÐ Ê√ kŠô
qÒGA*« ·UI¹≈ Ø qOGAð
WŠuK« vKŽ
jG{≈
DVD
ÆWOU_«
¡UMŁ√ dLŠ√ ÊuKÐ ¡wC¹ Íc« ¨WOU_« WŠuK« w
STANDBY/ON —UE²½ô« dýR
ÆdCš« ÊuKÐ ¡wC¹ ¨—UE²½ô«
Æ÷dF« …cUM vMLO«Ë Èd O« V½«u'« ¡wCð
«—UO²š« WLzU UNOË WO½U¦« W×HB« dNEð
ÆqFHUÐ WŠu²H qHÝ√ v« W³× M*« ›MONITOR TYPE¤
jG{« Ë√ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ
qHÝ√ w wU²«
«—UDšù« dNEð bË Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ÕU²²ô« WýUý dNEð
ÆÕU²²ô« WýUý
DVD PLAYER SET UP
MONITOR TYPE
4:3 L.B.
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
MP3&WMA/JPEG
16:9 NORMAL
AUTO AUTO
16:9
4:3 LB
ON
4:3 PS
MP3 MULTI NORMAL
16:9
16:9 MULTI AUTO
4:3 MULTI LB
4:3 MULTI PS
NOW READING
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
SELECT
ENTER
MONITOR TYPE ÷dF« “UNł Ÿu½
Æ»užd*« ÷dF« “UNł Ÿu½ —UO²šô
ƛ4:3
«—UO²š≈
5Ø∞ jG{≈ ¥
PS¤ Ë√ ›4:3 LB¤ 5F{u« bŠ√ —UO²šUÐ r ¨©ÍbOKIð® ÍœUŽ Êu¹eHK²
NORMAL ¤ 5F{u« bŠ√ —UO²šUÐ r ¨WýUA« i¹dŽ Êu¹eHK²
Æ©µ∏ W×H lł«—® ›16:9 AUTO¤
—UDšù« WIDM
fO
©ÆW½«uDÝô« UuKF …¡«dIÐ qÒGA*« ÂuI¹® NOW READING •
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝUÐ WU)« WIDM*« e—® REGION CODE ERROR° •
©ÆW½«uDÝô« ÷dŽ sJ1 ô ÆqÒGA*UÐ ’U)« pc UIÐUD
Î
Ë√ ›16:9
OPEN •
CLOSE •
©W½«uDÝ« błuð ô® NO DISC •
©`²®
©‚öž≈®
≥¥
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
34
20/5/03, 4:25 PM
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
ÆENTER jG{≈ µ
wÝUÝ_« ÷dF«
wLd«
uB« Ãdš
«—UO²š« WLzU UNOË W¦U¦« W×HB« dNEð
wÐdŽ
ÆqFHUÐ WŠu²H qHÝ√ v« W³× M*« ›DIGITAL AUDIO
©bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ
OPEN/CLOSE
Ë√®
0
jG{≈ ±
OUTPUT¤
DVD PLAYER SET UP
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO `²H
ANALOG DOWN MIX
DOLBY PROLOGIC
DOLBY
DIGITAL/PCM
D RANGE CONTROL
STREAM/PCM
ON
OUTPUT LEVEL
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO w W½«uDÝ« l{ ≤
SELECT
vKŽ√
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
ENTER
v« WÐU²J« tOKŽ Íc« tłu« qFł≈
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT wLd«
uB« Ãdš
ÆWÐužd*« wLd« Ãd)« …—Uý≈ Ÿu½ —UO²šô
«—UO²š≈
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ∂
qK×0 qÒGA*« qOu²Ð ÂuIð UbMŽ `O×B« l{u« vKŽ bM³« «c¼ W¾ON²Ð r
q¦0 “UN'« qOu²Ð rIð r «–≈® Æ⁄uU½√ØwL— ‰Òu× Ë√ wł—Uš WÞUŠ≈ “u—
IVE
SS
RE
OG
PR
©ÆbM³« «c¼ W¾ON² WłU×Ð ÊuJð sK 5ðbŠu« 5ðU¼
—UO²šUÐ r ¨Dolby
ÆwKš«b« n¹u−²« w UNF{ ¨rÝ ∏ ”UI W½«uDÝ« ‰Ušœù
•
Æ3 jG{≈ ≥
Digital wL— w³Ëœ “u— qK×0 qOu²« bMŽ
Æ ›DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM¤ l{u«
Æ›STREAM/PCM¤ l{u« —UO²šUÐ r ¨DTS “u— qK×0 qOu²« bMŽ
Æ›PCM ONLY¤ l{u« —UO²šUÐ r ¨dš¬ wL— “UN−Ð qOu²« bMŽ
WLzU dNEð b ¨
«—UO²š« WLzU
ÆÕU²²ô« WýUý ÷dF Êu¹eHK²« WýUý œuFð
dNþ «–≈
Video CD Ë√ SVCD Ë√ DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ‰Ušœ≈ bMŽ
»užd*« bM³« —UO²š« pMJ1 ¨ «—UO²šô« WLzU s ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
«—UO²š«
DVD PLAYER ͜ w ͜
U½«uDÝ« qG?
Ò A W¾ONð WýU?ý …œUF²Ýô
bFÐ ULO SET UP
Æt{dF
ÆDVD
PLAYER SET UP WýUý dNEð Ê√ v« Ê«uŁ lC³ CHOICE jG{≈
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô
5Ø∞Ø2Ø3 jG{≈ ±
ÆENTER jG{≈
≤
÷dF« ©WýUý® …cU½ ŸuDÝ dOOG²
Æ»užd*« bM³« —UO²šô
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ
«–≈ Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë Ë√
Æ—U²<« bM³« ÷dFÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
SVCD/Video CD
ÆWýUA« vKŽ ¡wý Í√ dNE¹ ô ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë vKŽ ŸuD « j³{ -
Æ»užd*« bM³« —UO²šô ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
Æ—U²<« bM³« ÷dFÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
UEŠö
qš«œ W½«uDÝô« l{Ë s bQð ¨W½«uDÝô« WOMO w W½«uDÝ« ‰Ušœ≈ bMŽ
•
•
b Ë√ W½«uDÝô« WOMO ‚öž≈ bMŽ W½«uDÝô« nK²ð bI p– qFHð r «–≈ Æn¹u−²«
ÆqÒGA*« s W½«uDÝô« Ÿe½ s sJL²ð ô
PBC ÷dF« w rJײ« ‰uŠ
SVCD/Video CD U½«uDÝ« iFÐ
«—UO²šô« rz«u WDÝ«uÐ qOGA²UÐ l²L²UÐ p `L ð PBC WHOþË
ÆPBC ÷dF« w rJײ« WHOþË rŽbð
—uBUÐË
—uB« qOK% —b
«d lЗ√ UNKOK% mK³¹ w²« Õu{u« …b¹bA« WMU «
ÆWdײ*«
PBC WHOþË l WI«u²*« SVCD/Video CD U½«uDÝ« ÷dF •
Æ÷dF« ¡b³ 3 —e« s ÎôbÐ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ¨ PBC WHOþË
¨Èdš√ …d PBC WHOþË qOGA² •
MENU Ë√ TOP MENU jG{≈ ©±
qOGAð ÊËœ
Ë√
Æ
3 jG{« rŁ ¨÷dF« ·UI¹ù 7 jG{≈ ©≤
≥µ
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
35
DIMMER jG{≈
U¹u² WŁöŁ 5Ð s ÷dF« WýUý ŸuDÝ —UO²š« pMJ1
U½«uDÝô
Æ©≥≥ W×H lł«—® UN{dŽ sJ1 ô w²« Ÿ«u½_« s W½«uDÝ« ‰Ušœ≈ v« bLFð ô
•
•
ÆENTER jG{≈ ∑
ÆW¹«b³« s ÷dFUÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
•
20/5/03, 4:25 PM
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
WýUA« qOœ
U½uI¹√ ‰uŠ
U½uI¹_« Èdð b
ÆwK¹ UL UNO½UF
U½uI¹_« Ác¼
wÐdŽ
Æ…—uB« ‚u W{ËdF WOU²«
UOKLŽ
Æ©¥≥ W×H lł«—® …œbF² U¹«Ë“ s q− bNA W¹«bÐ bMŽ dNEð ∫
Æ©¥≥ W×H lł«—® …œbF²
u
UGKÐ q− bNA W¹«bÐ bMŽ dNEð ∫
…œbF² WÐu²J WLłdð
UGKÐ q− bNA W¹«bÐ bMŽ dNEð ∫
Æ©¥≥ W×H lł«—®
÷dF« ·UM¾²Ý≈
÷dF« ÁbMŽ nuð Íc« W½«uDÝô« vKŽ l{u*« tðd«– w kH×¹ Ê√ qGALK
Ò
sJ1
ÆbFÐ ULO l{u*« p– s ÷dF« n½Q² ¹Ë
·UM¾²Ý«Ë
OFF ·UI¹ù«Ë ON qOGA²« ∫w¼ ·UM¾²Ýö ŸU{Ë√ WŁöŁ błuð
ÆDISC RESUME W½«uDÝô«
ÆqÒGA*« Íd²Að UbMŽ ON qOGA²« l{Ë vKŽ ÎUOzb³ QON l{u« ÊuJ¹
Æ©µπ W×H lł«—®
öOCH²« WýUý ‰ULF²ÝUÐ l{u« —UO²š« pMJ1
•
÷dF« WUŠ s oIײK
“ON”
l{u« w ·UM¾²Ýô« ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
WFÞUI l{u …d«c« w kH×¹Ë ÷dF« sŽ qÒGA*« nu²¹
dýR ¡wC¹Ë Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ›RESUME
7 jGCð UbMŽ
STOP¤ …—U³F« dNEð Æ÷dF«
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w ›RESUME¤ ·UM¾²Ýô«
ÆqÒGA*« qOGAð ·UI¹SÐ XL «–≈ ÷dF« WFÞUI l{u …d«–
qBH«ØnÒMB*« r—® wU(« —UO²šô« r— Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ b¼UAð Ê√ pMJ1
U½«uDÝô ©—U *«® WOMž_« r— Ë√
¡UMŁ√ qBH« Ë√ WOMž_« s“® se«
Æ©a« ¨XR ·UI¹≈ ¨÷dŽ ¨·UI¹≈®
r WÞU ³Ð ¨÷dF« ·UM¾²Ý« WHOþË jG{ bFÐ p–Ë qÒGA*« ·UI¹SÐ ÂuIð UbMŽ
s ÷dF« √b³O
3 jGCÐ XL rŁ
ÆON
3 —e« jGCÐ
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO Xײ «–≈ UN× r²¹ …d«c«
U¹u²× Ê√ kŠô
l{u« w ·UM¾²Ýô« ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
7 jGCð UbMŽ
STOP¤ …—U³F« dNEð Æ÷dF«
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w ›RESUME¤ ·UM¾²Ýô«
WFÞUI l{u …d«c« w kH×¹Ë ÷dF« sŽ qÒGA*« nu²¹
dýR ¡wC¹Ë Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ›RESUME
Ë√ W½«uDÝô« WOMO Xײ «–≈ ÷dF« WFÞUI l{u …d«–
TITLE 33 CHAP 33
wU(« qBH« s“
jš X% —UO²šô« rz«u jš wŽb² ¹ Èdš√ …d
TOTAL 1:25:58
wU(« nÒMB*« r—
ON SCREEN jG{ Ê√ kŠô
qOUH²« s b¹e* ¥µ W×H lł«— ÆWHK²<« nzUþu« ⁄uKÐ pMJ1 tMË ¨WU(«
Æ—UO²šô« rz«u jš ‰uŠ
U¹u²× ` r²¹ ô
ÆqÒGA*« XHË√
jG{≈
WOU(« Wd(« WUŠ
wU(« qBH« r—
qIM« ‰bF
Ò
8.5Mbps
“DISC RESUME”
SCREEN
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô ∫‰U¦
jG{ o¹dÞ sŽ qÒGA*« qOGA²Ð XL
ÆW½«uDÝô« W¹«bÐ
DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝô
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
Wd(« WUŠË ©÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ qBH« Ë√ WOMž_« s wCIM*« se« Ë√ ·UI¹ù«
U¹u²× ` r²¹ ô
«–≈ Æ÷dF« WFÞUI l{u s ÷dF« √b³¹Ë qÒGA*« qOGAð bMŽ Æ
UuKFË ©
WU(« jš ·UI¹ù
ÆWU(« jš wH² ¹ Ê√ v« «—dJ²
Î
Î
UDG{
tOłuð
ON SCREEN jG{≈
qUJUÐ ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
s¹e ð ÆUN{dŽ - W½«uDÝ« ≥∞ dšü WFÞUI*« l{«u tðd«– w qÒGA*« kH×¹
Æ7 jG{≈
ÆW½«uDÝ« ‰Ë_ Êe²<« WFÞUI*« l{u ` v« ÍœR¹ b¹bł WFÞUI l{u
tOłuð
…d«c«
U¹u²× ` *
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë w W½«uDÝô« ÊuJð ULMOÐ
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO `²H¹Ë ÷dF« qGA*«
Ò
nuO ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
0 jGCÐ XL «–≈
ÎU²R ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
7 jG{≈
Æ8 jG{≈
©ÆwU²« bM³« lł«—® Æ3 jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ·UM¾²Ýô
WEŠö
qšb« …—Uý≈ ëdš≈ r²¹ ô ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð ¡UMŁ√ ÎU²R ÷dF« ·UI¹≈ bMŽ
ÆMIC f³I*« s
≥∂
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
36
20/5/03, 4:25 PM
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
WHK²
UŽd Ð ÷dF«
wÐdŽ
W³«d*« ¡UMŁ√ l¹d « wFOłd²« Ë√ w1bI²« ÷dFK
÷dF« ·UM¾²Ýô
l{u« w ·UM¾²Ýô« ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
“ON”
WOMO vKŽ X«“ U UN{dŽ XFÞU w²« W½«uDÝô« ÊuJð ULMOÐ
Æ
3 jG{≈ ¨W½«uDÝô«
…—U³F« dNEð ÆÁbMŽ lDI½« Íc« l{u*« s ÷dF« qÒGA*« n½Q² ¹
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ›RESUME
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË w
…Òd ∂∞ Ë …Òd ≤∞ Ë
«Òd µ Ë …Òd ±[µ
1 Ë√ ¡ jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆUÞuGC
Î
W¹«b³« s ÷dFK
UŽd « 5Ð s WŽd « —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆÍœUF« ÷dF« v« qÒGA*« bOF¹
Æ÷dF« ¡b³
3 jG{ ÆW¹œUF« WŽd « —b
“DISC RESUME”
4 Ë√ ¢ s¹—e« bŠQÐ kH²Š≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆÍœUF« WŽd « —b
PLAY¤
3 jG{ q³ 7 jG{≈
l{u« w ·UM¾²Ýô« ÊuJ¹ UbMŽ
l{u qÒGA*« Êe²š« w²« W½«uDÝô« ‰Ušœù
«d µ mK³ð WŽd Ð ÎUFOłdð Ë√ ÎU1bIð ÷dF« r²¹
WEŠö
Audio CD W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ ô≈ uB« r² r²¹ ¨l¹d « ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
—b …Òd ±[µ mK³ð WŽd Ð Video CD W½«uDÝ« Ë√ DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
ÆÎUFDI² uB« ŸULÝ r²OÝ ¨ Audio CD U½«uDÝ« ’uB Ð ÆW¹œUF« WŽd «
bMŽË
0
jG{≈ ±
ÆUN{dŽ WFÞUI
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ›RESUME
STOP¤ …—U³F« dNEð
qÒGA*« n½Q² ¹Ë Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ › RESUME
PLAY¤ …—U³F« dNEð
Æ
3
jG{≈ ≤
ÆÁbMŽ lDI½« Íc« l{u*« s ÷dF«
uB« l …d ±[µ WŽd Ð ÷dF«
W¹«b³« s ÷dFK
Æ÷dF« ¡b³
3 jG{ q³ 7 jG{≈ ¨W½«uDÝô« ‰Ušœ≈ bFÐ
UEŠö
W½«uDÝô« ·UM¾²Ý« s ›RESUME¤ ·UM¾²Ýô« W¾ONð dOOG²Ð XL «–≈
W½«uDÝô« ÷dŽ r²¹ ¨W¹œUF« ÷dF« WŽdÝ —b …d ±[µ mK³ð WŽdÝ —U² ð UbMŽ
Æ uB« l
DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝô W³ MUÐ •
¨DTS Ë√ wLd« w³Ëœ WGOBÐ ö−
Î
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« u ÊU «–≈ •
¨DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝ« iFÐ w ÆwD)« PCM u «—Uý≈ ëdš≈ r²¹
ÆWLłd²« wH² ð ô ¨
ÆržUM² dOž ÊuJ¹ Ê√
uBK sJ1 Ë√ ¨ uB« Èu² Ë …œuł dÒOG²ð Ê√ sJ1
ÎôË√ ¨…d ±[µ WŽd Ð l¹d « ÷dF« v« l¹d « wFOłd²« ÷dF« s dOOG²K
Æ…bŠ«Ë …d
WŽd Ð l¹d « ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
s UNł«dš≈ r²¹
W¾ON²Ð Èdš√ …d XL «–≈ sJË ÆÊe²
czbMŽ p½UJSÐ ÊuJO ›DISC
•
•
U¾ONð dOOGð pMJ1 ô t½« kŠô UC¹√ Ʊ[µ
MIC f³I*« s qšb« …—Uý≈ Ê√ s rždUÐ ¨±[µ WŽd Ð
ÆqGA*«
Ò
ÆW½«uDÝô« ÷dŽ n½Q² ð Ê√
s tłË q qÒGA*« d³²F¹ ¨5Nłu«
U½«uDÝô W³ MUÐ
•
ÆqHÝ√ v« tłu« fH½ ÊuJ¹ YO×Ð W½«uDÝô« ‰Ušœ≈ V−¹ W½«uDÝô«
ÆW¹Ë«e«Ë WÐu²J*« WLłd²«Ë
PBC WHOþË sLC²ð SVCD/Video CD
ÆW½«uDÝô« ÷dŽ WFÞUI l{u sŽ ¡wA« iFÐ …dšQ² Ë√ WbI²
Ò
8 —eK WDG{ q
3 jG{
20/5/03, 4:25 PM
•
uB«
W½«uDÝ« WUŠ wË Æj³CUÐ WFÞUI*« WDI½ s ÷dF« qÒGA*« n½Q² ¹ ô b
≥∑
37
DVD VIDEO
U¾ONð ÎUC¹√ kH×¹ t½S W½«uDÝ« WFÞUI l{u tðd«– w qÒGA*« kH×¹ UbMŽ
ÆÍœUF« ÷dF« v« qÒGA*« bOF¹
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
«–
•
U¹u²× Y¹b%
pKð q¦ ÷dŽ n½Q² ð wJK wU²UÐË ÆWHK² W½«uDÝ« t½√ vKŽ 5Nłu«
Æ8 jG{≈ ¨XR*« ·UI¹ù« ¡UMŁ√
ÆWOU²« …—uB« —UÞ≈ v« WMU « …—uB« .bIð v« ÍœRð
“UNUM¾²Ý«” l{u W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
r²O q³ s UN{dŽ WFÞUI l{u s¹e ð o³Ý W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ XFÞU «–≈
WDI½ s ÷dF« qÒGA*« n½Q² ¹ bI
dšü« uKð «—UÞ≈ WMU « —uB« .bI²
•
RESUME¤
RESUME¤ l{u« vKŽ ›RESUME¤ ·UM¾²Ýô«
Æb¹b'« WFÞUI*« l{u* ÎUI³Þ …d«c«
¡ jG{« rŁ 3 jG{≈
u ŸULÝ r²¹ s ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð bMŽ
÷dF« ¡UMŁ« vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË
·UM¾²Ý« pMJ1 ô ¨ ›ON¤ qOGA²« Ë√ ›OFF¤ ·UI¹ù« v« ›DISC
•
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
ÎUF³ð p–Ë ¨nÒMB Ë√ qB wD ð pMJ1 ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫
DVD VIDEO
wÐdŽ
WOMž√ Ë√ bNA W¹«bÐ œU−¹≈
U½«uDÝô
ÆW½«uDÝô« s¹uJ²
ÆWOMž√ wD ð pMJ1 ¨PBC WHOþË ÊËœ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫
SVCD/Video CD
Audio CD
ÆWOMž√ wD ð pMJ1 ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫
U½«uDÝô
U½«uDÝô
Æ¢ jG{≈ ¨©ÂU_« v«® w1bI²« wD ²K
Æ4 jG{≈ ¨©nK)« v«® wFOłd²« wD ²K
ÂU—_« —«—“√ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
·UI¹ù« l{Ë w Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫
DVD VIDEO/Audio CD
·UI¹ù« l{Ë w Ë√ PBC WHOþË ÊËœ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫ SVCD/Video CD
U½«uDÝô
U½«uDÝô
Ærd« b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
Æ5 jG{≈ ∫µ rd« —UO²šô
+10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ rd« —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ rd« —UO²šô
Æ3 rŁ
Æ…—U²<« W¹«b³« s ÷dFUÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
U EŠ ö
¡wD³« ÷dFK
∫qG
Ò A*« WUŠË W½«uDÝô« ŸuM UÎF³ð Áb¹b% r²¹ U nK² ¹ •
W½«uDÝô« Ÿu½
Áb¹b% r²¹ U
WýUý vKŽ
nMB
Ò
DVD VIDEO
WOMž√
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
qB
DVD VIDEO
WOMž√
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
«—UO²š« WLzU
dNþ «–≈ ¨
qÒGA*« WUŠ
·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
Ë …Òd ¥Ø± Ë …Òd ±∂ر Ë …Òd ≥≤ر
UŽd « 5Ð s ÷dF« WŽdÝ —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆW¹œUF« WŽd « —b …Òd ≤ر
÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
©¡wD³« w1bI²« ÷dFK®
Æ©jI
DVD VIDEO
¡ jG{« rŁ ¨ 8 jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
1 Ë√
ÆÍœUF« ÷dF« v« qÒGA*« bOF¹ 3 jG{
U½«uDÝô ¨¡wD³« wFOłd²« ÷dFK®
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√ •
UEŠö
Æ «—UO²šô« WLzU w bMÐ —UO²šô ÂU—_« —«—“√ ‰ULF²Ý« sJ1 ¨Êu¹eHK²«
Æ uB« r² r²¹ ¡wD³« ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆVideo
CD U½«uDÝ«Ë SVCD
U½«uDÝô sJ2 dOž ¡wD³« wFOłd²« ÷dF«
qOGAð ¡UMŁ√ ¡wD³« wFOłd²« l{u« w
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ≈ ÷dŽ bMŽ
•
•
•
ÆMIC f³I*« s qšb« …—Uý≈ ëdš≈ r²¹ ô ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË
…œUŽ≈ WHOþË® WIÐU « b¼UA*« ÷dŽ …œUŽù
©…bŠ«Ë W LKÐ ÷dF«
Æ
jG{≈ ¨DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√
ÆwU(« l{u*« q³ Ê«uŁ ±∞ —«bI nK)« v« ÷dF« l{u „dײ¹
Ò
UEŠö
WýUA« W¹ULŠ WHOþË ‰uŠ
vKŽ WMUÝ …—u ÷dŽ WUŠ w Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ‚d²% Ê√ —uBK sJ1
WHOþË qOGA²Ð ÎUOzUIKð qÒGA*« ÂuI¹ ¨p– ÀËbŠ lM* ÆWK¹uÞ WOM“ …d²H WýUA«
WLzU Ë√ WýUA«
U½UOÐ q¦ ¨WMUÝ …—u ÷dŽ - «–≈ WýUA« W¹ULŠ
ƉuBH« 5Ð qLFð X½U Ê≈Ë nÒMB*« fH½ sL{ jI qLFð WHOþu« Ác¼
ÆDVD VIDEO
U½«uDÝ« iFÐ l qLFð ô b WHOþu« Ác¼
ÕU²H*« W¾ONð s bQð ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð ¡UMŁ√ WHOþu« Ác¼ ‰ULF²Ý≈ q³
•
•
•
Æ“DVD” l{u« vKŽ l{u« V ²M QON bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ
ÆozUœ fLš sŽ b¹eð …b* ¨ «—UO²šô«
ÆÎUöþ≈ d¦√ WýUA« `³Bð WýUA« W¹ULŠ WHOþË qOGAð bMŽ
ÆWýUA« W¹ULŠ WHOþË wGK¹ —“ Í√ jG{
≥∏
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
38
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
«—UO²š« WLzU s »užd*« bNA*« œU−¹≈
U½«uDÝ«
wÐdŽ
PBC WHOþË l SVCD/Video CD
—UB²š« w¼
PBC ·Ëd(« ÆPBC WHOþË rŽbð SVCD/Video CD U½«uDÝ« iFÐ
U½«uDÝ« iFÐ Æ©÷dF« w rJײ«® “Playback Control” …—U³F
¨WU)« WOð«c« UNð«—UO²š« rz«u UN PBC WHOþË l WK− *« SVCD/Video CD
‰ULF²ÝUÐ 5F bNA œU−¹≈ pMJ1 ÆW½«uDÝô« vKŽ …œułu*«
UOMž_« WLzU q¦
ÆPBC
ÆTOP
MENU
Ë√
3
«—UO²š« WLzU
jG{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ W½«uDÝô«
±
«—UO²š« WLzU dNEð
Æ»užd*« bM³« —UO²šô ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
≤
Æ5 jG{≈ ∫µ rd« —UO²šô
Æ3 rŁ
+10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ rd« —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ rd« —UO²šô
WEŠö
l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨qG
Ò A*« qOGAð bMŽ
Æ—U²<« bM³« ÷dFÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
Æ“DVD” vKŽ
ÆRETURN jG{≈ ¨—UO²šô« WLzU v« …œuFK
tOłuð
jG{ ÊS Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ›PREVIOUS¤ Ë√ ›NEXT¤ q¦
W×HB« v« „bOF¹ …œuF«
«—U³Ž
dNþ «–≈
5F l{u s ÷dF«
4 jG{Ë WOU²« W×HB« v« pKIM¹ .bI²« ¢
ÆWIÐU «
DVD W½«uDÝ«
«—UO²š« WLzU s »užd*« bNA*« œU−¹≈
»užd nÒMB b¹b%
U¹u²× 5³ð w²« WOð«c« UNð«—UO²š« rz«u UN ÂUŽ qJAÐ
DVD VIDEO
U½«uDÝ√
UOMž_« ¡ULÝ√ Ë√ Âö_« s¹ËUMŽ q¦ WHK² ΫœuMÐ sLC²ð rz«uI« Ác¼ ÆW½«uDÝô«
Æ TITLE/GROUP jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w
ÆDVD
UHÒMB*« ÷dŽ WIDM w ›--¤ WöF« dNEð
Æt{dF nÒMB b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≤
Æ5 jG{≈ ∫µ rd« —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ
bNA*« œU−¹≈ pMJ1 ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ UN{dFð w¼Ë 5½UMH« sŽ
¨qÒGA*« w WŽu{u
Æ3 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ rd« —UO²šô
+10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ rd« —UO²šô
Æ—U²<« bM³« s ÷dFUÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÊuJð ULMOÐ ±
ÆMENU Ë√ TOP MENU jG{≈
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
jG{« rŁ ¨»užd*« bM³« —UO²šô
WEŠö
ÆDVD VIDEO
UuKF Ë√
«—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ »užd*«
«—UO²šô« WLzU dNEð
5Ø∞Ø2Ø3 jG{≈ ≤
ÆENTER
Æ—U²<« bM³« s ÷dFUÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
U½«uDÝ« iFÐ l qLFð ô√ sJ1 WHOþu« Ác¼
UNOłuð
WHK²
«—UO²š« WLzU vKŽ ÎUC¹√ Íu²% b
—UO²šô« WLzU ’uB Ð
DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝ« iFÐ •
ÆMENU jG{ bMŽ dNEð
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« qJÐ WU)«
ULOKF²« lł«—
•
ÆUNÐ WU)«
dþUM*« rd« ‰Ušœ≈ o¹dÞ sŽ œuM³« —UO²š« pMJ1 ¨ U½«uDÝô« iFÐ l
•
ÆÎUOzUIKð ÷dFUÐ √b³¹ qÒGA*« qF−¹ b U2 ÂU—_« —«—“√ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
WEŠö
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë w qLF¹ ô
≥π
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
39
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
MENU —UO²šô« WLzU —“
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
0
s® ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≥
ÆWÐužd*«
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
DVD
© DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô® ‰U¦
2(H):34(M):00(S) se« s ÷dFK
Æ4 rŁ 3 rŁ 2 jG{≈
©WO½UŁ dH Ë WIOœ ≥¥ Ë WŽUÝ ≤®
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
«—UO²šô« WLzU w dNE¹ Áb¹b% - Íc« se«
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
VOLUME
CHANNEL
TUNING
FM MODE
TUNING
MEMORY
TOP MENU
MENU
TIME 2:34: __
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
∫©
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD U½«uDÝô® ‰U¦
©WO½UŁ ¥∞ Ë WIOœ ≤≥® 23(M):40(S) se« s ÷dFK
Æ4 rŁ 3 rŁ 2 jG{≈
AUDIO
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KARAOKE SOUND
KEY
4
5
7
8
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
KEY
DIMMER
TREBLE
2
BASS
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
REPEAT
23:4_
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
ANGLE
TIME
wÐdŽ
WOMe« …b*« ‰Ušœù ©9 v«
UOKLŽ
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
EFFECT
DECODE
CENTER
L SURR R
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
‰U¦*« w 5²½Uš dšü® 5LO« vKŽ w²« —UH_« ‰Ušœù
TEST
SUBWFR
“0” jGC ÃU²% ô
Æ©ÁöŽ√
QDš `O×B²
¨`O× dOž ÎUL— UNO XKšœ√ w²« W½U)« v« …œuFK «—dJ²
Î
Î
UDG{
2 jG{≈
Æ`O×B« rd« ‰Ušœ≈ bŽ√Ë
5OU(« WOMž_« Ë√ nMB*« w »užd l{u œU−¹≈
ÆENTER jG{≈ ¥
©wMe« Y׳«®
Æœb;« se« s ÷dFUÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš ¡UGù
ÆON
SCREEN jG{≈
tOłuð
ÆWHOþu« Ác¼ l ULNULF²Ý« r²¹ ô
UuKF sLC²ð ô
U½«uDÝô® W½«uDÝô« W¹«bÐ s Ë√ ©DVD VIDEO
DVD VIDEO
U½«uDÝ« iFÐ
•
CD/Audio CD
·UI¹ù« l{Ë w Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫
DVD VIDEO/Audio CD U½«uDÝô
SVCD/Video CD U½«uDÝô
ÆPBC WHOþË l SVCD/Video CD
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ l{Ë ¡UM¦²ÝUÐ l{Ë Í√ w ∫
ÆUNF wMe« Y׳« WHOþË
ÆZd³*« ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ UNULF²Ý« sJ1 ô wMe« Y׳« WHOþË
U½«uDÝô® wU(«
Æ©SVCD/Video
“+10” Ë “10” Ê«—e«
UEŠö
‰ULF²Ý« sJ1 ôË WOM“
nÒMB*« W¹«bÐ s se« b¹b% o¹dÞ sŽ 5F l{u s W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ pMJ1
•
Æ5ðd
÷dF« VOðdð dOOGð
©Zd³*« ÷dF«® 5F VOðd²Ð ÷dFK
ON SCREEN
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
ÆENTER jG{« rŁ ¨
v«
jG{≈ ±
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš dNE¹
p¹dײ
Æse« ‰Ušœù qHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
2Ø3
jG{≈ ≤
«—UO²šô« WLzU dNEð
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô WýUA« vKŽ ‰U¦
ÆVOðdð ÍQÐ WOMž√ ππ w« qB¹ U ÷dŽ pMJ1 ¨ UOMžô« W−dÐ o¹dÞ sŽ
Æ…d s d¦√ WOMž_« fH½ W−dÐ pMJ1
Æ5ðd
ON SCREEN
jG{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
Æ PROG. v«
TITLE 33 CHAP 33
8.5Mbps
OFF
CHAP.
TIME
±
1/3
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš dNE¹
p¹dײ
TRACK 33
PROG.
1/3
_:__:__
2Ø3
jG{≈ ≤
Audio CD W½«uDÝô WýUA« vKŽ ‰U¦
Audio CD W½«uDÝô WýUA« vKŽ ‰U¦
OFF
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/5
TIME
25:58
TRACK 33
OFF
PROG.
TIME
RND.
TIME
25:58
RND.
__:__
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≥
ÆZ«d³« ‰Ëbł dNE¹
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w ›PRGM¤ W−d³« dýR ¡wC¹
¥∞
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
40
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
©wz«uAF« ÷dF«® wz«uAŽ VOðd²Ð ÷dFK
Æ»užd*« VOðd²UÐ
UOMž_« b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
¥
Æ5 jG{≈ ∫µ rd« —UO²šô
+10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ rd« —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ rd« —UO²šô
wÐdŽ
Æ3 rŁ
Æ5ðd
ON SCREEN
jG{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
Æ RND. v«
±
Z«d³K WOKJ« …b*«
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš dNE¹
p¹dײ
2Ø3
Total Program Time
PROGRAM
jG{≈ ≤
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Audio CD W½«uDÝô WýUA« vKŽ ‰U¦
TRACK 33
OFF
PROG.
TIME
25:58
RND.
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≥
2
3
7
4
3
5
6
00:25:12
TrackDisc
1
5
4
2
3
4
6
Æwz«uAF« ÷dFUÐ qÒGA*« √b³¹
ÆÎUOzUIKð
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš ¡UG≈ r²¹ ¨SVCD/Video
CD
U½«uDÝ« l
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
CANCEL DELETES THE LAST STEP. 7 DELETES ALL.
…cU½ w ›RND¤ wz«uAF« ÷dF« dýR ¡wC¹ ¨wz«uAF« ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
Æ÷dF«
·UI¹SÐ qÒGA*« ÂuI¹ ¨W½«uDÝô« vKŽ …œułu*«
…—U²<« WOMž_« r—
UOMž_« lOLł ÷dŽ bFÐ
Æwz«uAF« ÷dF« l{Ë ¡UN½≈Ë W½«uDÝô«
wz«uAF« ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
Æwz«uAF« ÷dF« l{Ë s Ãd ¹Ë ÷dF« sŽ qGA*«
Ò
nu²¹ Æ7 jG{≈
ZU½dÐ `O×B²
jG{« rŁ ¨UN×O×Bð b¹dð w²« WOMž_« v«
ÆÎU¹bŽUBð UNOKð w²« W−d³*«
p¹dײ
5Ø∞ jG{≈
UOMž_« „ÒdײðË WOMž_« ·cŠ r²¹ ÆCANCEL
ÆW−d³*«
UOMž_« lOLł ·c×¹
ÆZd³*« ÷dF« ¡b³
3
7 jG{
jG{≈ µ
÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ Z«d³« ‰Ëbł qE¹ ¨Audio
©Æ «—UO²šô« rz«u jš wŽb² ¹
‰Ëbł dNE¹Ë qÒGA*« ·UI¹≈ r²¹ ¨W−d³*«
CD W½«uDÝ« l
ON SCREEN jG{® ÆZd³*«
UOMž_« lOLł ÷dŽ s ¡UN²½ô« bMŽ
ÆÈdš√ …d Z«d³«
ÆqE¹ ÃU½d³« Ê√ kŠô
ÆZU½d³«
U¹u²× d¹d% pMJ1 ô ¨Zd³*« ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ZU½d³«
•
U¹u²× s oIײK
ÆZ«d³« ‰Ëbł dNE¹Ë ÷dF« ·UI¹≈ r²¹ Æ7 jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
¨ÎU{ËdF Z«d³« ‰Ëbł ÊuJ¹ ôË
Æ ≥ v« ± s
s ZU½d³«
Audio CD W½«uDÝ« ÷dFÐ qÒGA*« ÂUO bMŽ
«uD)« qÒGA*« cOHMð o¹dÞ sŽ ‰Ëb'« ¡UŽb²Ý« pMJ1
U¹u²× s oIײ« pMJ1 ¨
SVCD/Video CD
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√
Æ «—UO²šô« rz«u jš ‰öš
Zd³*« ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
Æ7 jG{≈
ZU½d³« ¡UGù
Æ7 jG{≈ ¨ÎU{ËdF Z«d³« ‰Ëbł Êu l ·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
W−d³« l{Ë ¡UN½ù
ÆON
SCREEN jG{≈ ¨ZU½d³« ¡UG≈ bFÐ
WEŠö
ÆZU½d³« ¡UG≈ r²¹ ¨qGA*«
Ò
·UI¹≈ Ë√ W½«uDÝô« WOMO `² bMŽ
¥±
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
41
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
UEŠö
ÈbŠ« —UO²šUÐ XL«–« v²Š ¨ U½«uDÝô« iFÐ l —dJ²*« ÷dF« WHOþË qLFð ô b
wÐdŽ
Æ—«dJ²« ŸU{Ë√
©A-B 5²DIM« 5Ð —dJ²*« ÷dF«® »užd ¡eł —«dJ²
∫s bQð ôË√
Î
l
SVCD/Video CD
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UM¦²ÝUÐ ÷dF« l{Ë w qÒGA*« Êu
•
ÆPBC WHOþË
Æ5ðd
ÆENTER jG{« rŁ ¨
v«
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš dNE¹
p¹dײ
Æ—«dJ²« l{Ë —UO²šô qHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
Á—«dJð b¹dð Íc« ¡e'« W¹«bÐ bMŽ
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
Æ
A-
Á—«dJð b¹dð Íc« ¡e'« W¹UN½ bMŽ
Æ
A-B
2Ø3
jG{≈ ≤
«—UO²šô« WLzU dNEð
Æ›A-B¤ —UO²šô
Æ“B” Ë
jG{≈ ±
ON SCREEN
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≥
—dJ²*« ÷dF«
ENTER jG{≈ ¥
Æ©A WDIM«®
UOMž_« lOLł Ë√ WOU(« …—U²<« —«dJ²
«—UO²šô« WLzU wH² ð
—«dJ²« W½uI¹√ dNEð
ENTER jG{≈ µ
Æ©B WDIM«®
—«dJ²« W½uI¹√ dNEð
÷dŽ ¡UM¦²ÝUÐ l{Ë Í√ w ∫
“A” 5²DIM« 5Ð —dJ²*« ÷dF« √b³¹Ë “A” WDIM« œU−¹SÐ qÒGA*« ÂuI¹
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w ›
PBC WHOþË l SVCD/Video CD
¤ dýR*« ¡wC¹
A-B
v«
p¹dײ
2Ø3 jG{≈
U½«uDÝ«
ÆREPEAT jG{≈
A-B 5²DIM« 5Ð —dJ²*« ÷dF« ¡UGù
l{Ë ·UI¹≈ r²¹ ÆENTER jG{«Ë ¨
÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ∫ DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD U½«uDÝô
Æ÷dF« ¡b³
3 jG{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w REPEAT jGCÐ XL «–≈
± —«dJðË qJ« —«dJð 5Ð —«dJ²« l{Ë dOOGð v« ÍœRð
REPEAT —eK WDG{ q
Æ·UI¹ù«Ë
ÆÍœUF« ÷dF« dL² ¹ rŁ ¨A-B 5²DIM« —«dJð
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w —U²<« —«dJ²« l{Ë dýR dNE¹
UEŠö
ÆnMB*«ØÊ«uMF« —U fH½ sL{
Ævƒ«—UJ« WHOþË
B Ë A 5²DIM« b¹b% V−¹ •
U¾ONð dOOGð pMJ1 ô ¨B-A 5²DIM« 5Ð —dJ²*« ÷dF« ¡UMŁ«
•
UOMž_« lOLł Ë√
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô wU(« nÒMB*« —ÒdJ¹ ∫
ÆSVCD/Video CD/Audio CD U½«uDÝô
WOU(« WOMžÏ_« Ë√ DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô wU(« qBH« —ÒdJ¹ ∫ 1
ÆSVCD/Video CD/Audio CD U½«uDÝô
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë w —«dJ²« WHOþË ∫dýR dNE¹ ô
w l{u« dýR ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ wU(« —«dJ²« l{Ë 5³ð …cU½ dNEð
Æ «—UO²šô« rz«u jš w dNE¹ Íc« dýR*« fH½ u¼ …cUM«
©Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ —«dJ²« l{u ‰U¦®
CHAP
—dJ²*« ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
s Ãd ¹Ë ÷dF« sŽ qÒGA*« nu²¹ ¨
Æ7 jG{≈
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æ—«dJ²« l{Ë
sŽ qÒGA*« nu²¹ ¨Audio
CD Ë√ Video CD Ë√ SVCD W½«uDÝ« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æ—«dJ²« l{Ë s Ãd ¹ ô tMJË ÷dF«
—dJ²*« ÷dF« ¡UGù
Æ÷dF« …cU½ s —«dJ²« l{Ë dýR wH² ¹ Ê√ v«
REPEAT jG{≈
tOłuð
¨Audio
CD Ë√ Video CD Ë√ SVCD W½«uDÝô Zd³*« ÷dF« l{Ë qOGAð bMŽ
qÒGA*« ÊS
“
” l{u« w t½√ kŠô sJË ÆWI¹dD« fHMÐ —«dJ²« l{Ë dOG²¹
Ò
ÆW½«uDÝô« vKŽ …œułu*«
UOMž_« s ÎôbÐ W−d³*«
UOMž_« lOLł —«dJ²Ð ÂuI¹
¥≤
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
42
15/8/03, 3:11 PM
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
Æ»užd*«
UOKLŽ
uB« —UO²šô
© ‰ U ¦ ®
wÐdŽ
Ë√
AUDIO
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
bNA*« W¹Ë«“Ë
AUDIO —e« Ë√ 5Ø∞ s¹—e« s Í_ WDG{ q
Æ uB« dOOGð v« ÍœRð
©W¹e OK$≈®
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô
©SUBTITLE® WÐu²J*« WLłd²?« WG —UO²šô
© W O ½U ³Ý ≈ ®
© W O ½ d ®
1/3 ENGLISH
uB«Ë WG?K« dOOGð
2/3 FRENCH
3/3 SPANISH
SVCD W½«uDÝô
ST1
ST2
L-1
R-1
L-2
…bŠ«Ë W?G s? d?¦√ s?LC?²ð
R-2
SVCD
U?½«u?DÝ«Ë
DVD VIDEO
U?½«uD?Ý« iF?Ð
ÆUNMOÐ s WÐužd*« WGK« —UO²š« pMJ1 ÆWÐu²J*« WLłd²K
Video CD W½«uDÝô
ST
(u¹dO²Ý)
L
t O ł uð
Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
R
WöF« dNEð ¨WÐu²J*« WLłd²« tOKŽ q− *« ¡e'« W¹«bÐ w
Æ©›OFF¤ ·UI¹ù« l{Ë vKŽ ›ON
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ—U²<«
SCREEN GUIDE¤
öOCHð W¾ONð bMŽ ô≈®
ÆSUBTITLE jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
uB« ŸULÝ pMJ1
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ WÐu²J*« WLłd²« —UO²š« …cU½ dNEð
Æ uB« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð
1/3
U EŠ ö
Æ uB« dOOG²Ð rIð rË Ê«uŁ …bŽ XCI½« «–≈ ÎUOzUIKð
uB« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ …dB² dNEð Ê√ …—U²<« WGK sJ1 ¨DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô
Æ∂≥ W×H w “UNð«—UB²š«Ë
U G K « ‰Ë b ł ∫
•
•
B o×K” lł«—
ENGLISH
ÆWÐu²J*« WLłd²« —UO²šô
WLłd²« WG dOOGð v« ÍœRð
SUBTITLE
Ë√
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
SUBTITLE —eK Ë√ 5Ø∞ s¹—e« s Í_ WDG{ q
ÆWÐu²J*«
DVD VIDEO
W½«uDÝô bNA*« W¹Ë«“ —UO²šô
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≥
©ANGLE®
Æ…—U²<« WGKUÐ WÐu²J*« WLłd²« ÷dŽ r²¹
ÆWÐu²J*« WLłd²« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð
UEŠö
sLC²ð
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« X½U «–≈ b¼UA*« U¹«Ë“ s WKO?JA²Ð l²L²« pMJ1
s bNA*« fH½ ◊UI²ô …œbF²
«dOU «b ²Ý« - YOŠ ¨“U¹«Ëe« …œbF²” ¡«eł√
5Ø∞ jG{ ÆWÐu²J
ULłdð ¥ v« qB¹ U sLC²ð Ê√
Â√ WK− WÐu²J*« WLłd²« X½U «–≈ ULŽ dEM« iGÐ
SVCD
U½«uDÝô sJ1
ÆWHK² U¹«Ë“
tOłuð
WöF« dNE𠨓U?¹«Ëe« œbF²*«” ¡e'« W¹«bÐ w
bM?Ž ô≈® Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
Æ©›OFF¤ ·UI¹ù« l{Ë vKŽ ›ON
SCREEN GUIDE¤
öOCHð W¾ONð
•
«uMI« pKð 5Ð q¹b³²UÐ ÂuI¹
Æô
dO?OG²Ð rIð r?Ë Ê«uŁ …bŽ XCI½« «–≈ U?
Î OzUIKð wH?² ð WÐu²J?*« WLłd²« —UO?²š« …cU½
•
ÆWÐu²J*« WLłd²«
WýU?ý vK?Ž …dB?² ? dN?E?ð Ê√ …—U²?<« WG?K s?J1 ¨
Æ∂≥ W×H w “UNð«—UB²š«Ë
ÆANGLE jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
U G K « ‰Ë b ł ∫
©AUDIO®
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ W¹Ë«e« —UO²š« …cU½ dNEð
DVD VIDEO U?½«uD?Ýô •
B ≠ o×K” lł«— ÆÊu¹eHK²«
uB« Ë√
uB« WG? dOOG²
1/3
1
Ë√ l wƒ«—UJK ŸUL²Ýô« Ë√ rKOH«
ÆWÐužd*« W¹Ë«e« —UO²šô
ÆW¹Ë«e« dOOGð v« ÍœRð
ANGLE Ë√ 5Ø∞
u WG dOOG²Ð p `L ð
uB« —UO²š« …cU½
Æ»dD*«
jG{≈ ≤
u ÊË b Ð
ANGLE —e« Ë√ 5Ø∞ s¹—e« s Í_ WDG{ q
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ…—U²<« W¹Ë«e« s …—uB« …b¼UA pMJ1
t O ł uð
WýUý vKŽ
WöF« dNEð ¨…œbF² WOðu
·UI?¹ù« l{Ë v?K?Ž ›ON
SCREEN GUIDE¤
«—U tOKŽ q− *« ¡e'« W¹«bÐ w
öO?CH?ð W¾?O?Nð b?MŽ ô≈® Êu?¹eH?K²?«
Æ©›OFF¤
ÆW¹Ë«e« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð
ÆAUDIO jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
W EŠ ö
ÆW¹Ë«e« dOOG²Ð rIð rË Ê«uŁ …bŽ XCI½« «–≈ UÎOzUIKð W¹Ë«e« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
uB« —UO²š« …cU½ dNEð
1/3
ENGLISH
¥≥
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
43
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
2Ø3
ÆWÐužd*« WI³ *« W¾ON²« —UO²šô
ÆwK¹ UL
UOKLŽ
jG{≈ ≤
VFP l{Ë dOOGð v« ÍœRð —eK WDG{ q
NORMAL
CINEMA
USER 1
wÐdŽ
ÆWdG« ·ËdE Ë√ wU(« ZU½d³K W¡ö d¦_« u¹bOH« Ÿu½ j³{√
USER 2
…—U²<« WI³ *« W¾ON²«
USER 1
GAMMA
+ 4
BRIGHTNESS
+ 4
CONTRAST
+13
SATURATION
+13
TINT
+13
SHARPNESS
+ 3
Y DELAY
+ 2
…d¹UF*« bMÐ
ÆW¹œUŽ Wdž w Êu¹eHK²« …b¼UA* ∫›
ÆW²Uš …¡U{≈
NORMAL¤
«– Wdž w rKOHÐ ’Uš ZU½dÐ …b¼UA* ∫ ›CINEMA¤
WU)«
…—uB« ’«uš vKŽ dŁRð w²« …d¹UF*« œuMÐ j³{ pMJ1 ∫ ›USER 2¤ ›USER 1¤
…uD?)« lł«— ÆÂb? ² ?*UÐ W?Uš WI?³ ?
U¾O?Nð U?N½√ vK?Ž
5Ø∞
«dŁR
U¾?ON²?« s¹e? ðË
ÆWOU²«
…d?¹UF*« bMÐ —UO²šô
uB«Ø…—uB«
ÂËe« WDÝ«uÐ …—uB« dO³J²
j?G{≈ ¨Âb ² *« W¾ONð n¹dF² ≥
ÆWOU²« œuM³« s Ád¹d% b¹dð Íc«
©UUł WFý√® GAMMA
•
WEU;« r²ð ÆUÎLKE Ë√ UÎFÞUÝ ©‰œUF²*«® b¹U;« ÊuK« ÊU «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
ÆWFÞU « ¡«eł_«Ë WLKE*« ¡«eł_« ŸuDÝ vKŽ
jG{≈ ¨XR*« ·UI¹ù« ¡UMŁ√ Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
Æ…—uB« dO³J²Ð qG
Ò A*« ÂUO v« ÍœR¹ ZOOM jG{
ÆUγ¹dIð Ê«uŁ µ …b* wU(« dO³J²«
Æ©ÎUŽuDÝ d¦_«® ¥´ v« ©UÎöþ≈ d¦_«® ¥≠ ∫ÕU²*« Èb*«
©ŸuD «® BRIGHTNESS
ÆZOOM
UuKF dNEð ¨WýUA« —U ¹ vKŽ√ w
Ë ≥≤ ¨ ±∂ ¨ ∏ ¨ ¥ ¨ ±[∏® dO³J²« WHŽUC v« ÍœRð
ZOOM —eK WDG{ q
•
Æ © …d
Ò ∂¥
ÆWLKE Ë√ WFÞUÝ qJ …—uB« X½U «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
Æ©UÎŽuDÝ d¦_«® ±∂´ v« ©UÎöþ≈ d¦_«® ±∂ ≠ ∫ÕU²*« Èb*«
©s¹U³²«® CONTRAST
ZOOM x 4
•
ÆWOFO³Þ dOž …bOF³«Ë W³¹dI« l{«u*« X½U «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
Ʊ∂ ´ v« ±∂ ≠ ∫ÕU²*« Èb*«
©l³A
Ò ²«® SATURATION
•
DVD VIDEO W½«u?DÝ« …—u …b?¼UA b?MŽ
Box 4:3 œUFÐ√
WOzd dOž ¡«œu « ◊uD)« `³B² “ZOOM ™ 1.8”l{u« d²š« «–≈ ¨WU(«
ÊS 1:1.85 Ë√ 1:2.35 œUFÐ√ W?³ MÐ DVD VIDEO —bB ÷dŽ bMŽ U?√ ÆUγ¹dIð
pKð w ÆWýUA« qHÝ√Ë vKŽ√ w ¡«œuÝ ◊uDš dNEð b ¨©Letter
Æœ«u « v« Ë√ ÷UO³« v« WKzU …—uB« X½U «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
Æ©ÎU{UOÐ d¦_«® ±∂ ´ v« ©Î«œ«uÝ d¦_«® ±∂ ≠ ∫ÕU²*« Èb*«
©ÊuK« ‰öþ® TINT
W³? MЮ ÍœU?Ž Êu¹eHK?ð WýUý v?KŽ
•
ÆWýUA« vKŽ WOzd ÊuJð ¡«œu « ◊uD)«
ÆwFO³Þ dOž ’U ý_« …dAÐ Êu dNE ÊU «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
Ʊ∂ ´ v« ±∂ ≠ ∫ÕU²*« Èb*«
©…b
Ò («® SHARPNESS
•
ÆdÒ³J*« l{u*« p¹dײ
ÍœUF« ÷dF« v« …œuFK
Æ`ö*« …eOÒ2 dOž …—uB« X½U «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
Æ≥ ´ v« dH ∫ÕU²*« Èb*«
Y DELAY
.ENTER jG{≈
•
UEŠö
ÆW³«d²ØWKBHM Ëb³ð …—uB« X½U «–≈ bM³« «c¼ j³{√
Æ≤ ´ v« ≤ ≠ ∫ÕU?²*« Èb?*«
ÆENTER jG{≈ ¥
Æ…d¹UF*« œuMÐ W¾ON² …cU½ dNEð
SATURATION
5Ø∞Ø2Ø3 jG{≈ ≤
Æ…d³ÒJ ÊuJð ULMOÐ WMAš Ëb³ð Ê√ …—uBK sJ1
ÊU «–≈ v²Š ÂËe« WDÝ«uÐ …—uB« dO³Jð pMJ1 ô ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð ¡UMŁ√
•
•
Æ“DVD” l{u« vKŽ QON bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ l{u« V ²M ÕU²H*«
©VFP® …—uB« ’«uš j³C
+ 4
—U²<« …d¹UF*« bMÐ
Æ…d¹UF*« bMÐ Èu² j³C
5Ø∞
jG{≈ µ
ZU½d³« ŸuM UÎF³ð …—uB« ’«uš j³CÐ p `L ð ©oOb« u¹bOH« ZUF® VFP WHOþË
ÆWOB A«
öOCH²« Ë√ …—uB« Êu Ë√
ÆdŁR*« e¹eFð wMFð vKŽ_« rOI«
ÆENTER jG{≈ ∂
ÆÈdš√ …d¹UF œuMÐ W¾ONð
œ—√ «–≈ ∂ v« ≥ s
«uD)« —d
Ò
ÆVFP jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
VFP l{Ë —UO²š« WýUý dNEð
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
¥¥
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
44
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
VFP l{Ë —UO²š« …cU½ ¡UHšù
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš nzUþË
ÆVFP jG{≈
wÐdŽ
UEŠö
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš ¡UŽb²Ýô
Ê«uŁ ±∞ v«uŠ XCI½« «–≈ …d¹UF*« œuMÐ W¾ONðË
VFP l{u« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð •
ÆqOGAð WOKLŽ ÍQÐ ÂUOI« ÊËœ
ÆON
SCREEN
jG{≈ ¨qÒGA*« w W½«uDÝô« ÊuJð ULMOÐ ±
w? WŽu?{u*« W?½«uD?Ýô« ŸuM?Ð ’U?)« WU?(« jš Êu?¹eH?K?²« W?ýUý v?KŽ d?NE?¹
VFP l{u« WH?OþË qOGAð sJ1 ô ¨v?ƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOG?Að ¡UMŁ√ •
Æ“DVD” l{u« vKŽ QON bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ l{u« V ²M ÕU²H*«
ÊU «–≈ v²Š
Æ“UN'«
©3D
ÆWU(« jš qOUHð ’uB Ð ≥∂ W×H lł«—
ÆÈdš√ …d
ON SCREEN
ÆWU(« jš X% qG
Ò A*« w WŽu{u*« W½«uDÝô« ŸuM
TITLE 33 CHAP 33
8.5Mbps
CHAP.
WÞUŠù«
u …UU;
jG{≈ ≤
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš dNE¹
dOŁQð vKŽ ‰uB(« pMJ1 ¨©œUFÐ_« wŁö¦«
©DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝô®
OFF
PHONIC®
1/3
uB«®
3D PHONIC WHOþË ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
Æu¹dO² « pUE½ s vU× WÞUŠ≈
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/5
Æ3D jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ 3D PHONIC …cU½ dNEð
1/3
©SVCD W½«uDÝô®
TRACK 33
OFF
PROG.
ST1
RND.
TIME
TRACK 33
PROG.
RND.
TIME
DRAMA
THEATER
jG{≈ ≤
NONE
25:58
ACTION
TRACK 33
PROG.
ACTION
CD W½«uDÝô®
ST
©Audio
OFF
2Ø3
∫wK¹ UL 3D PHONIC l{Ë dOOGð v« ÍœRð —eK WDG{ q
-/4
©Video
OFF
Æ»užd*« l{u« —UO²šô
25:58
+45
CD W½«uDÝô®
TIME
—U²<« dŁR*« l{Ë
25:58
RND.
ACTION •
Æ uB« —bB UNO „d
Ò ×²¹ w²« WO{U¹d« Z«d³«Ë …dO¦*«
W U ( « j š Ë
«œ—UD*« Âö_ rzö
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš ¡UHšù
ÆON
SCREEN jG{≈
DRAMA •
Æ¡Ušd²Ýô« s uł w Âö_UÐ l²L²« pMJ1 Æ¡v«œË wFO³Þ
u
THEATER •
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²« WI¹dÞ
ÆUNF qUF²« b¹dð w²« W½uI¹_« —UO²šô
Æ
2Ø3
jG{≈ ±
ÆULMO « —Ëœ w U¼b& w²« pK²
u
«dŁR0 l²L²« pMJ1
ÆdŁR*« Èu² j³C
WöFUÐ …—U²<« W½uI¹_« v« —UA¹
3D PHONIC
X½U? Ê≈Ë ¨qHÝ√ v« W?³× ?M WUš …c?U½ dN?Eð ¨ U½u?I¹_« s dO?¦JK? W³ M?UÐ
UEŠö
U EŠ ö
•
ÆdCš_« ÊuKUÐ ÊuJð ÎUOUŠ
p¹d% pMJ1 ô® Æ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ WŠU² ÊuJð ô nzUþu« iFÐ
©ÆWŠU² dOž WHOþu« ÊuJð UbMŽ
…cU½ ¡UHšù
Æ3D jG{≈
Æ «¡UM¦²Ýô« iFÐ „UM¼
WOMF*« W½uI¹_« v«
jG{≈ ≥
ÆdŁR*« e¹eFð wMFð vKŽ_« rOI«
ÆENTER jG{≈ ≤
—U²?<« l{u« Ë√ W?HO?þuUÐ W?U)« —UO?²šô« W?LzU W?½uI¹√ v?KŽ h?M« Ë√ Wö?F«
5Ø∞
Æ›5 ¤ v« ›1 ¤ s dŁR*« Èu² j³{ pMJ1
•
WO?K?LŽ ÍQ?Ð ÂU?OI?« ÊËœ Ê«u?Ł ±∞ v«u?Š X?CI?½« «–≈
3D PHONIC …c?U½ w?H?² ?ð •
ÆqOGAð
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ ô≈ W×O× WI¹dDÐ qLFð ô 3D PHONIC WHOþË
•
ÆwLd« w³Ëœ WGOBÐ WK−
…—Uýù« sLC²ð ôË wLd« w³Ëœ WGOBÐ WK− DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ
•
wŁöŁ dO?ŁQð oOI% s? sJL²ð s? pMJË 3D PHONIC W¾O?Nð dOOG?ð pMJ1 ¨WO?HK)«
Æ`O× 3D œUFÐ_«
Ãd)« f³I s wLd« w³Ëœ .d²Ý XÐ …—Uý≈ vKŽ dŁRð ô 3D PHONIC WHOþË
•
ÆDIGITAL OUT wLd«
w ›ANALOG DOWN MIX¤ W?¾?ON?ð ÊuJ?ð ô ¨ 3D PHONIC WH?O?þË qO?GA?ð bM?Ž
ÆWŠU² ›AUDIO ¤
Æ3D PHONIC WHOþË ¡UG≈ r²¹ ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð bMŽ
¥µ
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
45
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
•
uB« W¾ONð WýUý
•
…—ÒuD²*« qOGA²«
DVD VIDEO
W½«uDÝô
«—UO²šô« rz«u jš nzUþË
SVCD/Video CD/Audio CD
se« l{Ë —UO²š≈
ÆWU(« jš wË ÷dF« …cU½ w 5³*« se« l{Ë —U² ¹ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆWU(« jš wË ÷dF« …cU½ w 5³*« se« l{Ë —U² ¹
ÆWOU²« ŸU{Ë_« 5Ð s se« l{Ë —UO²šô ENTER jG{≈
WOU(« WOMžô« s WOCIM*« …b*«
se« l{Ë —UO²š≈
∫
TIME
REM
W½«uDÝ_« s WOCIM*« …b*« ∫ TOTAL
WOKJ« …b*« ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w ÊuJð ULMOЮ W½«uDÝô« s WOI³²*« …b*« ∫ T.REM
WOU(« WOMžô« s WOI³²*« …b*«
∫
ENTER jG{≈
TOTAL •
wU(« nMÒB*« s WOI³²*« …b*« ∫ T.REM •
wU(« qBH« s WOCIM*« …b*«
∫ TIME •
wU(« qBH« s WOI³²*« …b*«
∫ REM •
ÆWOU²« ŸU{Ë_« 5Ð s se« l{Ë —UO²šô
wU(« nMÒB*« s WOCIM*« …b*« ∫
•
•
•
•
©¥≤ W×H UÎC¹√ lł«—® —«dJ²« l{Ë
©W½«uDÝö
Æ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ —«dJ²« l{Ë —U² ¹
©¥≤ W×H ÎUC¹√ lł«—® —«dJ²« l{Ë
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
Æ—«dJ²« l{Ë —U² ¹
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
CHAPTER •
∫ TITLE •
∫ A-B •
∫ OFF •
ÆWOU²« ŸU{Ë_« 5Ð s —«dJ²« l{Ë —UO²šô
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
TRACK •
UOMž_« lOLł —«dJð
∫ ALL •
A-B 5²DIM« 5Ð U —«dJð
∫ A-B •
—«dJ²« l{Ë ¡UG≈
∫ OFF •
wU(« qBH« —«dJð
ÆWOU²« ŸU{Ë_« 5Ð s —«dJ²« l{Ë —UO²šô
WOU(« WOMž_« —«dJð ∫
Æ…—U²<« —«dJ²« WHOþË qOGA² ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
wU(« nMÒB*« —«dJð
B-A 5²DIM« 5Ð U —«dJð
—«dJ²« l{Ë ¡UG≈
Æ…—U²<« —«dJ²« WHOþË qOGA² ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
©¥∞ W×H ÎUC¹√ lł«—® wMe« Y׳«
Æ÷dF« W¹«b³ WDIM wU(« nMÒB*« W¹«bÐ s se« œÒb×¹
©¥∞ W×H UÎC¹√ lł«—® wMe« Y׳«
Æ÷dF« ¡b³ WDIM W½«uDÝô« W¹«bÐ s se« œb
Ò ×¹
©¥± Ë ¥∞ w²×H ÎUC¹√ lł«—® Zd³*« ÷dF«
PROG.
Æ UOMž_« ÷dŽ VOðdð œb
Ò ×¹ ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
©¥± W×H UÎC¹√ lł«—® wz«uAF« ÷dF«
u B « — U O ² š ≈
Æ uB« © «uM® …UM —U² ¹ ¨SVCD/Video
CD
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
ÆWÐužd*«
Æ…—U²<«
q BH « Y × Ð
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
uB« © «uM® …UM ÷dF ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
uB« © «uM® …UM —UO²šô
©¥≥ W×H ÎUC¹√ lł«—® WÐu²J*« WLłd²« —UO²š≈
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
¨‰U¦*« qO³Ý vKŽ® Æ»užd*« qBH« r— ‰Ušœù ©9 v«
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
Æ…—U²<« WÐu²J*« WLłd²« l ÷dF« ¡b³ ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
ÆWÐužd*« WÐu²J*« WLłd²« —UO²šô
0 s® ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ Æ≤
©Æ0 rŁ 1 jG{≈ ¨±∞ rd« b¹bײ
Æœb
Ò ;« qBH« s ÷dF« ¡b³
©¥≥ W×H ÎUC¹√ lł«—®
ÆwðuB« —U *« Ë√
ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
uB« —UO²š≈
uB« WG —U² ¹ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
Æ»užd*« wðuB« —U *« Ë√ WÐužd*«
Æ—U²<«
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
uB« WG —UO²šô
uBUÐ ÷dF« ¡b³
©¥≥ W×H UÎC¹√ lł«—® WÐu²J*« WLłd²« —UO²š≈
ÆWÐu²J*« WLłd²« WG —U² ¹ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆWÐu²J*« WLłd²« —U² ¹ ¨SVCD W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
CHAP.
ÆÁbMŽ s ÷dFK »užd*« qBH« œb
Ò ×¹ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
RND.
Æwz«uAF« ÷dF« qOGA²Ð ÂuI¹ ¨·UI¹ù« l{Ë w
©¥≥ W×H ÎUC¹√ lł«—®
∫
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
ÆWÐužd*« WÐu²J*« WLłd²« WG —UO²šô
Æ…—U²<« WÐu²J*« WLłd²« l ÷dF« ¡b³
©¥≥ W×H UÎC¹√ lł«—® W¹Ë«e« —UO²š≈
ÆU¹«Ëe« …œbF²*« ¡«eł_« w WÐužd*« bNA*« W¹Ë«“ —U² ¹ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*« …cUM« `²≈ Ʊ
5Ø∞ jG{≈ Æ≤
ENTER jG{≈ Æ≥
ÆbNA*« W¹Ë«“ —UO²šô
Æ…—U²<« bNA*« W¹Ë«eÐ ÷dF« ¡b³
¥∂
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
46
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
wÐdŽ
U½«uDÝô —UO²šô« rz«u jš nzUþË
UOKLŽ
XV-NK58SL
MP3/WMA
UÎb ² ‡¼ „ ¥¥[± Á—b WM¹UF ‰b
Ò F0 pðœU qO− ²Ð pOu½ ¨MP3
wÐdŽ
ÆÀØ» „ ±≤∏ Á—b
UHK* W³ MUÐ
•
U½UOÐ qI½ ‰ÒbF
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë vKŽ l³D« ‚uIŠ WOUš W¾ONð s bQð ¨WMA
UHK* W³ MUÐ
ÆvKŽ√ Ë√ ÀØ» „ ∂¥ Á—b XÐ ‰b
Ò F0 pðœU qO− ²Ð pOu½ ¨WMA
UHK* WK³ MUÐ
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
ÆMP3/WMA
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
•
•
UOKLŽ
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ w rJײK WOU²« —«—“_« qLF²Ý≈
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë s ÷dF« √b³¹
∫ENTER
ÆXR*« ·UI¹ù« Ë√ ·UI¹ù« l{Ë s ÷dF« √b³¹
∫3
Æ÷dF« nu¹
∫7
ÆUβR ÷dF« nu¹
∫8
Æ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ÂU_« v« Ë√ nK)« v« WOMž√ vD ²¹
∫4 Ø¢
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë w WIŠö« Ë√ WIÐU « WOMž_« —U² ¹
3 jGCÐ UÎŽu³² ÷dF« ·UI¹ù 7 jGCÐ XL Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ 3 jGCÐ XL «–≈
ÆWOU(« WOMž_« W¹«bÐ s ÷dFUÐ “UN'« √b³O
WEŠö
U EŠ ö
Æ“©UDF j/®
U²OU³« WÐU²”
U½«uDÝ« rŽb¹ ô qG
Ò A*« «c¼
•
•
Æ…œbF² ©qŠ«d® U Kł w WK− *« U½«uDÝô« rŽb¹ ô qG
Ò A*« «c¼ •
·Ëdþ Ë√ U?N H½ W½«uDÝô« hzUBš V?³ Ð UN{dŽ r²¹ ô b U?½«uDÝô« iFÐ •
Ò A*« qOGAð bMŽ
Æ“DVD” vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨qG
ÆID3 n¹dF²« WIŠô rŽb¹ ô qG
Ò A*« «c¼
ÆqO− ²«
ÆMP3/WMA
qOGA²«
U½«uDÝ« l ÊöLFð ô wz«uAF« ÷dF«Ë Zd³*« ÷dF« U²HOþË
•
ÆKARAOKE WHOþË qOGAð sJ1 ô ¨MP3/WMA W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ •
UI?Šô UN? w²?« «—U? *« j?I ÷d?F¹ Ê√ q?G?
Ò AL?K s?J1 ¨MP3 U?H?K* W?³ ?MU?Ð •
Æ“.mP3” Ë “.mp3” Ë “.Mp3” Ë “.MP3” ∫WOU²«
UIŠô U?N w²?«
«—U *« j?I ÷dF?¹ Ê√ qG?
Ò ALK? sJ1 ¨WMA
U?HK* W?³ M?UÐ
•
W¹uKF« ·Ëd(« 5Ð lL?& Èdš√ WIŠô Í√Ë “.wma” Ë “.WMA” ∫WOU²« ¡ULÝ_«
Æ©“.Wma” q¦® ©…dOGB«® WOKH «Ë ©…dO³J«®
Î F³?ð ¨Èdš_ W?½«uD?Ý« s n?K²? ¹ b? W½«u?DÝô«
U?
Æa« ¨WK− *« © UHK*«®
U?¹u²?× …¡«d?I »u?KD?*« se?«
UOMž_«Ë © «—buH«®
W?½«u??D??Ý« v?K??Ž …œu??łu?*«
WMA U??H??K?Ë MP3 U??H??K? ÷d??F?¹ Ê√ q??G??
Ò A?L??K?? s?J??1
CD-R/RW
ÆqOb« «c¼ w “MP3/WMA W½«uDÝ√” rÝUÐ WMA UHK Ë√ØË MP3 UHK sLC²ð
JPEG UH?KË MP3/WMA U?H?K s? ö
Î s?L?C²?ð W½«u?D?Ýô« X½U? «–≈ t½√ k?Šô
›MP3&WMA/JPEG¤ W¾ONð WDÝ«uÐ —U²<« ŸuM« jI ÷dFð Ê√ p½UJSÐ ÊuJO
Æ©µπ W×H lł«—® Æ›PICTURE¤ …—uB« öOCHð WýUý w
w?²« W½«u?DÝô« v?« dO?A½ ÆU?
Î ¹—U& …d?u²? CD W½«u?DÝ« Ë√ U?
Î Oe?M W?K−?
•
UŽuL:« œ«bŽ_
o¹dÞ sŽ Ë√ 1 Ë√ ¡ jG{ o¹dÞ sŽ nK)« v« Ë√ ÂU _« v« ÷dF« pMJ1 ô
UOKLŽ
MP3/WMA
•
MP3/WMA U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√ UÎÞuGC 4 Ë√ ¢ ¡UIÐ≈
WMA UHK q?GÒA*« q³I¹ •
ÆÀØ» „ ¥∏ s q√ XÐ ‰b
Ò F0 WK− *« WMA UHK ÷dF¹ Ê√ qG
Ò A L K
Æ
r²¹ UνUOŠ√ Æ©—U ® nK UN½√ vKŽ WOMž√ q qO− ð r²¹ ¨
sJ1 ô ÆvKŽ√ Ë√ ÀØ» „ ¥∏ Á—b? XÐ ‰b
Ò F0 WK− *«
Æa« Âu³_« Ë√ ÊUMHK UÎF³ð
U½«uDÝ« ‰uŠ
MP3/WMA W½«uDÝ« w
«—bu w
UHK*« lOL&
ÆWOMž√ d³²F¹ nK q
•
•
Æ UOMž√ Í√ …dýU³ sLC²¹ ô Íc« —buH« ‰UL¼≈ r²¹ •
Æ“ ± WŽuL:«” w UNFOL& r²¹ —bu Í_ wL²Mð ô w²« UHK*« •
v« qB¹ UË ¨WŽuL− qJ WOMž√ ±µ∞ v« qB¹ U qG
Ò A*« eOÒ1 •
ÆWŽuL− d³²F¹ d¦√ Ë√ UÎHK sLC²¹ Íc« —buH«
WÐužd*« WOMž_«Ë WŽuL:« —UO²š≈
WýU?ý dN?Eð ¨W?½«u?DÝô«
U?¹u²?× …¡«d? bF?ÐË ¨MP3/WMA W½«u?DÝ« ‰U?šœ≈ bM?Ž
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ UÎOzUIKð
MP3/WMA CONTROL rJײ«
ÆWOU²« WI¹dD« ŸU³ðUÐ WýUA« s WÐužd*« WOMž_«ØWŽuL:« b¹b% pMJ1
qJ WŽuL− ππ
sL{ UÎC¹√ w¼ V ײÔ
MP3/WMA UHK dOž UHK „UM¼ X½U «–≈ ÆW½«uDÝ«
W½«uDÝ« qJ WŽuL− ππ vB√ bŠ
Ʊµ∞ u¼Ë
UHK*« œbF vB_« b(«
œu?L?F?« w? ©l?{u?*« d?ýR?® œu?Ý_« j?)« œu?łË s bQð ±
Æd ¹_« © UŽuL:«®
Track 1.mp3
Æd ¹_« œuLF« v« tJ¹dײ 2 jG{≈ ¨s1_« œuLF« w ÊU «–≈
Track 2.mp3
ÆWÐužd*« WŽuL:« v« j)« p¹dײ
Æ…—U²<« WŽuL:«
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
≤ WŽuL:«
UOMž√ dNEð ¨s1_« œuLF« w
j??G??{« r??Ł ¨W?Ðu?žd?*« W?O?M?ž_« —U?O?²?šô
4Ø¢ j??G?{≈ ≥
Æ3 Ë√ ENTER
Track 4.mp3
Track 5.mp3
Track 6.mp3
¥ W Ž u L :«
Ë√
≥ W Ž u L :«
Æ…dýU³ WÐužd*« WOMž_« r— b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
Æ5 jG{≈ ∫µ rd« —UO²šô
Æ3 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ rd« —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ rd« —UO²šô
Æ…—U²<« WOMž_« s ÷dFUÐ qG
Ò A*« √b³¹
WŽuL− qJ WOMž√ ±µ∞ vB√ bŠ
‰U?LF?²?ÝUÐ p?Ð W?U?)«
MP3/WMA
47
U½«u?D?Ý« qL?F?
CD-R/CD-RW
ÆW½«uDÝö WGOB
¥∑
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
± WŽuL:«
Track 3.mp3
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
U?EŠö?
W½«uDÝ«
“ISO 9660 ” —UO²šUÐ r •
MP3/WMA
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
ÆWÐužd*« WŽuL:« r— b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≤
Æ5 jG{≈ ∫µ rd« —UO²šô
+10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ rd« —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ rd« —UO²šô
—uNþ ¡UMŁ√ Í√®
wÐdŽ
Æ3 rŁ
TITLE/GROUP jG{ s? Ê«uŁ …bŽ ‰öš WŽuL:« r— œÒbŠ
Æ©÷dF« …cU½ w ›--¤ WöF«
Æ…—U²<« WŽuL:« w ± r— WOMž_« s ÷dFUÐ qG
Ò A*« √b³¹
ÆWÐužd*« WOMž_« r— b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≥
Æ …œ b
Ò ;« WOMž_« s ÷dFUÐ qG
Ò A*« √b³¹
ÆÂU—_« —«—“√ s ÎôbÐ ¨WOMž_« b¹bײ
5Ø∞ Ë√ 4Ø¢ ‰ULF²Ý« UÎC¹√ pMJ1
—dJ²*« ÷dF«
ÆREPEAT jG{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« ¡UMŁ√ Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
¡b?³
ÆwK¹ UL —«dJ²« l{Ë dOOGð v« ÍœRð REPEAT —eK WDG{ q
3 Ë√ ENTER jGC ÃU?²% ¨·UI¹ù« ¡U?MŁ√ REPEAT jGC?Ð XL «–≈
Æ—dJ²*« ÷dF«
WOU(« WOMž_« s WOCIM*« …b*«
÷dF« …cU½ MP3/WMA CONTROL WýUý
W H O þ u «
ÆWOU(« WOMž_« —dJ¹
REPEAT TRACK
1
U?O?M?ž√ l??O?L?ł —d?J?¹
REPEAT GROUP
ÆWOU(« WŽuL:«
U?O?M?ž√ l??O?L?ł —d?J?¹
REPEAT ALL
ÆW½«uDÝô«
dýR dNE¹ ô
Æ·UI¹ù« l{Ë w —dJ²*« ÷dF«
—U²<« —«dJ²« l{Ë
MP3/WMA CONTROL
MP3/WMA CONTROL
Time : 00:03:08
Group : 01 / 10
Track : 01 / 06 (Total 28)
spring
summer
fall
winter
sea
mountain
camp
picnic
skiing
flower
begonia.mp3
german chamomile.mp3
kiwi fruit.mp3
orchard grass.mp3
petunia.mp3
north pole.mp3
©Êu¹eHK²« WýUý®
REPEAT TRACK
Group : 01 / 10
Track : 01 / 06 (Total 28)
spring
summer
fall
begonia.mp3
german chamomile.mp3
kiwi fruit.mp3
UŽuL:« œuLŽ
WOU(« WŽuL:«
UOMž√ œuLŽ
…—U²<« WOMž_«
t O ł uð
v?« œuÝ_« j)« p?¹dײ? 3 jG{ o?¹dÞ sŽ W?Ðužd*« W?OMž_« —U?O²š« U?
Î C¹√ pM?J1
Æ5Ø∞ ‰ULF²Ý« rŁ © UOMž_«® s1_« œuLF«
—dJ²*« ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
ÆqOGAð WUŠ w qE¹ —«dJ²« l{Ë Ê√ kŠô Æ 7 jG{≈
—dJ²*« ÷dF« ¡UN½ù
Æ÷dF« …cU½ s —«dJ²«
U½uI¹√ wH² ð Ê√ v«
REPEAT jG{≈ ¨÷dF« ¡UMŁ√
s —«d?J?²?« l?{Ë dýR? ¡v?H?D?M¹ Ê√ v?« REPEAT j?G?{≈ ¨·U?I¹ù« l?{Ë w?
ÆMP3/WMA CONTROL WýUý
UEŠö
sJL²?¹ sK X¹UÐ ≤ s ÊuJ ©·dŠ® e— sLC?²¹
MP3/WMA nK rÝ« ÊU «–≈ •
ÆW×O× WI¹dDÐ nK*« rÝ« —UNþ≈ s “UN'«
Æ
MP3/WMA CONTROL WýUý w MP3/WMA UHK ÈuÝ dNEð ô •
MP3/WMA CONTROL WýUý w 5³*« UO?Mž_«Ø UŽuL:« VOðdð •
nK² ¹ b
„“UNł w W½«uDÝô« l?Cð UbMŽ dðuO³LJ« „“UNł WýUý vK?Ž 5³*« VOðd²« sŽ
ÆdðuO³LJ«
d?ýU³*« —UO²šù«
ÆWŽuL:« r— b¹b% o¹dÞ sŽ …dýU³ WÐužd*« WŽuL:« —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆTITLE/GROUP j?G{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« ¡UMŁ√ Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
ÆÁU½œ√ ÷dF« …cU½ w UŽuL:« ÷dŽ WIDM w ›--¤ WöF« dNEð
¥∏
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
48
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
JPEG
W½«uDÝ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ pÐ WU)« JPEG W½«uDÝ« qLŽ ‰uŠ
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
UE Š ö
CD-R/CD-RW
ÆWGOB “ISO 9660” —UO²šUÐ r •
wÐdŽ
Æq JOÐ ¥∏∞ ™ ∂¥∞ Á—b qOK% ‰ÒbF0 pðœU qO− ²Ð pOu½
ÆWOÝUÝ_«
•
JPEG WGO q³I¹ qGÒA*« «c¼ •
WOÝUÝ_« qOGA²«
UOKLŽ
WÐužd*« …—uB« W¹ƒd
rJ?ײ?« WýU?ý dN?Eð ¨W?½«uD?Ýô«
U¹u?²×? …¡«d b?FÐ ¨JPEG W?½«uD?Ý« ‰Ušœ≈ b?MŽ
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ÎUOzUIKð
JPEG CONTROL
JPEG CONTROL
Group : 01 / 10
File : 01 / 06 (Total 28)
spring
summer
fall
winter
sea
mountain
camp
picnic
skiing
flower
begonia.jpg
german chamomile.jpg
kiwi fruit.jpg
orchard grass.jpg
petunia.jpg
north pole.jpg
WEŠö
Ò A*« qOGAð bMŽ
Æ“DVD” vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨qG
WK− *«
w
CD-R/RW U½«uDÝ« vKŽ …œułu*« JPEG UHK ÷dF¹ Ê√ qGÒALK sJ1
“JPEG W½«uDÝ√” rÝUÐ JPEG UHK sL?C²ð w²« W½«uDÝô« v« dOA½ ÆÎUOeM
ÆqOb« «c¼
ÆWýUA« Ác¼ ‰öš s p–Ë t{dŽ w Vždð Íc« nK*« —UO²š« pMJ1
JPEG UHKË MP3/WMA UHK s ö
Î sLC²ð W½«uDÝô« X½U «–≈ t½√ kŠô
d ¹_« œuLF« w ©l{u*« dýR® œuÝ_« j)« Êu s bQð ±
Æ©Èd O« WŽuL:«®
W¾ONð WDÝ«uÐ —U²<« ŸuM« s
Æ©µπ W×H lł«—® Æ[PICTURE] …—uB«
UHK*« jI ÷dFð Ê√ p½UJSÐ ÊuJO
öOCHð WýUý w
[MP3&WMA/JPEG]
Æd ¹_« œuLF« v« tKIM 2 jG{≈ ¨s1_« œuLF« w ÊU «–≈
ÆWÐužd*« WŽuL:« v« j)« qIM
Æ…—U²<« WŽuL:« sL{ …œułu*«
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
UHK*« dNEð ¨s1_« œuLF« w
JPEG
U½«uDÝ« ‰uŠ
UHK*« lOL& r²¹ UνUOŠ√Ë ÆqBHM nKL …—u q qO− ð r²¹ ¨JPEG W½«uDÝ« vKŽ
Æa« W¾H« V Š
ÆENTER jG{« rŁ ¨»užd*« nK*« —UO²šô
4Ø¢ jG{≈ ≥
tOłuð
Æ5Ø∞ ‰ULF²Ý« rŁ s1_« ©nK*«®
•
•
Æ“± WŽuL:«” w UNFOL& r²¹ —bu Í_ wL²Mð ô w²« UHK*« •
ππ vK?ŽË WŽuL?− qJ v?B√ b×? ÎUHK? ±µ∞ vKŽ qG?
Ò A*« ·d
Ò F?²¹ •
ÆtK¼U& r²¹
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ©WMUÝ …—u® —U²<« nK*« dNE¹
œuLF« v« œuÝ_« j)« qIM 3 jG{ o¹dÞ sŽ »užd*« nK*« —UO²š« UÎC¹√ pMJ1
b?× WŽuL?−
U?NÐU ?²Š« r²?O
JPEG
U?HK d?Ož
UHK Í√ …dýU³ sLC²¹ ô Íc« —buH«
UH?K „UM?¼ X½U? «–≈ ÆW½«uD?Ý« qJ v?B√
W½«uDÝ« qJ WŽuL− ππ vB√ bŠ
Ʊµ∞ u¼Ë
UHK*« ŸuL− sL{ UÎC¹√
W EŠ ö
File 1.jpg
Æ¡«œuÝ WýUý dNEð ¨t{dŽ sJ1 ô —U²<« nK*« ÊU «–≈
File 2.jpg
≤ WŽuL:«
…—uB« ¡UGù
ÆMENU Ë√ 7 jG{≈
ÆJPEG
CONTROL WýUý v« Êu¹eHK²« WýUý œuFð
File 4.jpg
¥ WŽuL:«
WŽuL− qJ UÎHK ±µ∞ vB√ bŠ
¥π
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
49
± WŽuL:«
File 3.jpg
Èdš√ …—u ÷dF
ÆWÐužd*« …—uB« —UO²šô 5Ø∞ Ë√ 4 Ø¢ jG{≈
« — b u w
ÆWŽuL− d³²F¹Ô d¦√ Ë√ ΫbŠ«Ë UÎHK sLC²¹ Íc« —buH«
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
File 5.jpg
File 6.jpg
≥ WŽuL:«
JPEG
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
©uý b¹ö « l{Ë® q«u² qJAÐ …—uB« …b¼UA
UHK*« W¹ƒ— pMJ1
wÐdŽ
ÆwzUIKð qJAÐ dšü« uKð ΫbŠ«Ë ©WMU « —uB«®
uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ ¡b³
Æ 3 j G {≈
ÆW½«uDÝô« W¹«bÐ s uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ √b³¹
ÆÎU³¹dIð Ê«uŁ ≥ …b* t{dŽ r²¹ ©WMUÝ …—u® nK q
qL²J¹ Ê√ q³ uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ ·UI¹ù
ÆMENU Ë√ 7 jG{≈
CONTROL WýUý v« Êu¹eHK²« WýUý œuFð
ÆW{ËdF …—u dš¬ s uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ ·UM¾²Ý« v« ÍœR¹ 3 jG{
ÆJPEG
WOU(« …—uB« ÷dŽ WK«u*
ÆENTER Ë√
Æuý b¹ö « ÷dŽ ·UM¾²Ý« v« ÍœR¹
8 jG{≈
3 jG {
U EŠ ö
ÆWOÝUÝ_«
Æ©UDF WGO®
uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ ¡bÐ WDI½ —UO²šô
JPEG CONTROL WýUý s
÷dF ö
Î ¹uÞ ÎU²?Ë ‚dG² ¹ b Ë√
Æ»užd*« nK*« —UO²šô
5Ø∞
4Ø¢
U½«uDÝ« qG
Ò A*« q³I¹ ô
•
•
ô b •
U½«uDÝô« qG
Ò A*« q³I¹
U½«uDÝô« iFÐ …¡«d s qG?
Ò A*« sJL²¹
qO− ²« ·Ëdþ Ë√ W½«uDÝô« hzUB) W−O²½ p–Ë W½«uDÝô« wKŽ …œułu …—u
Æa« © «—buH«® WŽuL:« œbŽ Ë√
ÆJPEG
Æ©Èd O« WŽuL:«®
ÆWÐužd*« WŽuL:« v« j)« qIM
U²OU³« WÐU²
Æ…œbF² qŠ«d vKŽ WK− *«
d ¹_« œuLF« w ©l{u*« d{R® œuÝ_« j)« Êu s bQð ±
Æd ¹_« œuLF« v« tKIM 2 jG{≈ ¨s1_« œuLF« w ÊU «–≈
“packet writing”
JPEG WGO qGÒA*« q³I¹ •
U½«uDÝ« l qLFð ô wz«uAF« ÷dF«Ë Zd³*« ÷dF« nzUþË
•
•
r?²¹ •
Ævƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð sJ1 ô ¨JPEG W½«uDÝ≈ ÷dŽ bMŽ
fLš sŽ b?¹eð …b* …—u?B« fH½ ÷d?Ž - «–≈ WýUA?« W¹ULŠ W?HOþË q?OGAð
Æuý b¹ö « ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√ ô≈ ozUœ
jG{≈ ≤
jG{≈ ≥
Æ3 jG{≈ ¥
ÆœÒb;« nK*« s uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ √b³¹
Ë
“.jpg” ∫W?OU?²?« r?Ýù«
U?IŠô
«–
U?H?K?*« Èu?Ý ÷dF?¹ Ê√ q?G?
Ò A?L?K s?J?1 ô
©…dO³J«® W¹uKF« ·Ëd(« 5Ð lL& Èdš√ WIŠô Í√Ë
•
“.JPEG” Ë “.JPG” “.jpeg”
Æ©“.Jpg” q¦® ©…dOGB«® WOKH « ·Ëd(«Ë
qG
Ò A*« dN?E¹Ô ô bI ¨X¹U³?« wzUMŁ ©Î«e—® UÎd?Š sLC²¹
JPEG nK? rÝ≈ ÊU «–≈ •
ÆW×O× WI¹dDÐ nK*« rÝ≈
÷dF UÎ²Ë ‚dG²? ¹ bI q JO?Ð ¥∏∞ ™ ∂¥∞ sŽ b¹e¹ qOKײ?Ð …—u kHŠ - «–≈
•
Æ…—uB«
dýU³*« —UO²šù«
ÆTITLE/GROUP jG{≈ ¨·UI¹ù« ¡UMŁ√ Ë√ ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ ±
ÆWÐužd*« WŽuL:« r— b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≤
Æ5 jG{≈ ¨µ —UO²šô
Æ3 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ¨≤≥ —UO²šô
Æ10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ —UO²šô
Æ»užd*« nK*« r— b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≥
ÆwIô« qOKײUÐ q JOÐ ≤¥∞∞ sŽ b¹eð w²« …—uB« qGA*« rŽb¹ ô
•
Æq« Ë« q JOÐ ≤¥∞∞ u¼ —uB« qOK% Ê« s s bQð
ÂËe« WDÝ«uÐ …—uB« dO³J²
ÆZOOM jG{≈ ¨XR*« nu²« l{Ë w ÊuJð ULMOÐ ±
ÆU¼dO³JðË …—uB« V¹dI²Ð qG
Ò A*« ÂUO v« ÍœR¹ ZOOM jG{
∂¥ Ë ≥≤ ¨ ±∂ ¨ ∏ ¨ ¥ ¨ ±[∏® dO³J²« WHŽUC v« ÍœRð ZOOM —eK WDG{ q
Æ©…d
Æœb;« nK*« s uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ qG
Ò A*« √b³¹
ÆWŽuL:« w nK ‰Ë√ s uý b¹ö « ÷dŽ qG
Ò A*« √b³¹ ¨UÎHK œb% r «–«
ÆdO³J²« l{u dOOG²
5Ø∞Ø2Ø3
jG{≈ ≤
µ∞
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
50
15/8/03, 3:11 PM
JPEG
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ
—«dJ²« WHOþË
wKŽ Ë√ WŽuL− w …œułu*«
JPEG UHK ÷dŽ —«dJð pMJ1 ¨uý b¹ö « l{Ë w
wÐdŽ
ÆW½«uDÝô«
jG{≈ ¨W{ËdF
JPEG CONTROL
WýUý ÊuJð ULMOÐ ±
ÆREPEAT
Æ—«dJ²« l{Ë ‰Òu×¹
Æ÷dF« …cU½ w ›
REPEAT jG{
¤ dýR*« ¡wC¹ —«dJ²« l{Ë qOGAð bMŽ
CONTROL WýUý vKŽ —U²<« —«dJ²« l{Ë dNE¹
ÆW½«uDÝô« vKŽ …œułu*« UHK*« lOLł —«dJð r²¹
∫REPEAT ALL
ÆWOU(« WŽuL:« sL{ …œułu*« UHK*« lOLł —«dJð r²¹
∫REPEAT GROUP
ÆJPEG
Æ·UI¹≈ WUŠ w —«dJ²« l{Ë ∫dýR dNE¹ ô
Æ—dJ²*« ÷dF« ¡b³
3
jG{≈ ≤
—dJ²*« ÷dF« ·UI¹ù
Æ7 jG{≈
Æô
Î UF —«dJ²« l{Ë qE¹
—dJ²*« ÷dF« ¡UGù
jG{«Ë ¨W?{ËdF
JPEG CONTROL W?ýUý Êu?Jð UL?MOÐ MENU Ë√ 7 j?G{≈
Æ—«dJ²« l{Ë dýR wH² ¹ Ê√ v« REPEAT
µ±
AR33-51RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
51
20/5/03, 4:26 PM
XV-NK58SL
KARAOKE tË«dJ«
öOGAð
ÊuËdJ¹U qOuð
wÐdŽ
ÆWOU_« WŠuK« vKŽ MIC ÊuËdJ¹U*« f³I0 ÊuËdJ¹U qOu²Ð r
ÊuËdJ¹U*« u Èu² j³C
ÆWOU_« WŠuK« vKŽ MIC LEVEL —œ√
ÁU&« fJ?FÐ tð—«œ≈ Ê√ 5?Š w uB« Èu?² ld?ð WŽU ?« »—UIŽ ÁU&U?Ð tð—«œ≈
Æ uB« Èu² iHÒ ð WŽU « »—UIŽ
U EŠ ö
¨Audio CD Ë√ Video CD Ë√ SVCD Ë√ DVD VIDEO W??½«u??D?Ý≈ ‰U??šœ≈ b??M??Ž
ÆDIGITAL OUT fÐUI*« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ MIC f³I*« s qšb« …—UýSÐ l²L²« pMJ1
ŸuM? ÎU¹—U³ł≈ “PCM ONLY” l{u« q?OGAð r²¹ ¨vƒ«—U?J« WHOþË qOG?Að ¡UMŁ√
[DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT] l{u« W¾ONð sŽ dEM« iGÐ ¨WOLd« Ãd)« …—Uý≈
Æ©µπ W×H lł«—® [AUDIO] lłd*« w
wFOłd²« l{u« w DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ≈ ÷dŽ ¡UMŁ√ ÎU²R ÷dF« ·UI¹≈ bMŽ
ÆMIC f³I*« s qšb« …—Uý≈ ëdš≈ r²¹ ô ¨¡wD³«
•
•
•
UOMž_« e−Š
V ²M j³{« ¨KARAOKE tË«dJ« WHOþË ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æ“KARAOKE” vKŽ l{u«
WO?ÞUO²Š« UNO³Mð
Æ»užd*« VOðd²UÐ UN{dF WOMž√ ±≤ v« qB¹ U e−Š pMJ1
Æ…bŠ«Ë …d s d¦√ UN H½ WOMž_« e−Š pMJ1
wƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð
…“u−;« UOMž_« ÷dŽ
∫wK¹ UL lÐUðË wƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGA²Ð r
ÆRESERVE jG{≈ ±
W EŠ ö
ÆKARAOKE jG{≈
WýUý vK?Ž [KARAOK] wƒ«—UJ« dýR ¡wC¹Ë wƒ«—UJ« WHO?þË qOGAð r²¹
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ wƒ«—UJ« «—UO²š« WLzU dNEðË ÷dF«
…c?U½ w? [PRGM] dýR?*« ¡wC?¹Ë ¨Êu¹e?HK?²« W?ýUý v?KŽ e?−(« ‰Ëb?ł dN?E¹
Æ÷dF«
Æ»užd*« VOðd²UÐ «—U *« b¹bײ ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≤
Æ5 jG{≈ ¨µ —UO²šô
Æ3 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫≤≥ b¹bײ
Æ+10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 rŁ +10 jG{≈ ∫¥∞ b¹bײ
NO
Track
1
5
2
4
3
2
4
3
5
6
6
e − ( « `O × B ²
Æ CANCEL jG{« rŁ ¨UN×O×Bð b¹dð w²« WOMž_« w« dýu*« qIM 5Ø∞ jG{≈
ÆvKŽ√ v« …“u−;« UOMž_« sL{ UNOKð w²« WOMž_« qI²MðË WOMž_« ` r²¹
Æ…“u−;« UOMž_« lOLł ` 1 7 jG{
Æ3 jG{≈ ≥
Æ…“u−× WOMž√ ‰Ë√ ÷dŽ w qGÒA*« √b³¹
Æe−(« ‰Ëbł s ·c×ðÔ UN{dŽ √bÐ w²« WOMž_«
ÆqGÒA*« ·UI¹≈ r²¹ ¨…“u−;« UOMž_« lOLł ÷dŽ bFÐ
Êu¹eHK²« WýUý
AUDIO
KARAOKE
VOCAL
ECHO
EFFECT
KEY CONT
1/1
L+R
NORMAL
2
OFF
0
wƒ«—UJ« «—UO²š« WLzU ¡UHš≈Ë —UNþù
ÆON SCREEN jG{≈
wƒ«—UJ« «—UO²š« WLzU ¡UH²š« Ë√ —uNþ v« ÍœRð ON SCREEN —eK WDG{ q
ÆWUF wƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qEð ULMOÐ
wƒ«—UJ« WHOþË ¡UGù
ÆÈdš√ …d KARAOKE jG{≈
Æ[KARAOK] wƒ«—UJ« dýR wH² ¹Ë wƒ«—UJ« WHOþË ¡UG≈ r²¹
U EŠ ö
Æwƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð pMJ1 ô ¨wz«uAF« ÷dF« Ë√ Zd³*« ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ •
Æwƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð sJ1 ô JPEG Ë√ MP3/WMA W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ •
ô ¨Êu¹eHK?²« WýUý vKŽ W{ËdF? vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË «—U?O²š≈ WLzU ÊuJ?ð UbMŽ •
5Ø∞Ø2Ø3 —«—“ô« ‰U?LF?²?ÝU?Ð DVD VIDEO W?½«u?D?Ý≈ …—u? W'U?F? s?J?1
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ …œułu*«
Ævƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð ¡UMŁ√ A-B 5²DIM« 5Ð —dJ²*« ÷dFUÐ ÂUOI« sJ1 ô •
µ≤
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
52
15/8/03, 3:12 PM
KARAOKE tË«dJ«
öOGAð
uB« —UO²š≈
wÐdŽ
¡UM?ž
e−(« ‰Ëbł ¡UHš≈Ë —UNþù
‰U¦*« q?O³Ý vKŽ ¨e−(« ‰Ëb?ł —UNþù Æe−(« ‰Ëbł ¡U?Hšù
ÆÈdš√ …d
u ®
“guide vocal” W?U{≈ vK?Ž …—bI« U?N¹b? wƒ«—UJ?« U½«uD?Ý« rE?F
ÁdÒuð Íc« VŠUB*« wIOÝu*« ·eF« v« ©tł
Ò u s(® “guide melody” Ë√ ©tł
Ò u
RESERVE jG{≈ ¨e−(«
RESERVE jG{≈
U¹u²× s oIײK
WOU{≈
Æwƒ«—UJ« WHOþË
—«—“√ jG{«Ë e−(« ‰Ëbł w WOMž√ dš¬ wK¹ U v« dOA¹
U O M ž √ e− (
dýR*« Êu s bQð
ÆU¼e−Š b¹dð w²« © UOMž_«® WOMž_« —UO²šô ÂU—_«
©AUDIO® wðuB« —U *« —UO²š≈
U¼e−Š b¹dð WOMž√ WU{ù
p?M?J?1 ¨
SVCD KARAOKE U½«u?D?Ý« Ë√ DVD VIDEO U?½«uD?Ý« r?E?F l?
¡UM?ž u l® “with guide vocal” q¦ ÎU¹—UO²š« «ÎbMÐ wDF¹ w?ðu —U —UO²š«
·eF«® “accompaniment only” Ë ©tł
Ò u s( l® “with guide melody” Ë√ ©tł
Ò u
Æ©jI VŠUB*« vIOÝu*«
rŁ ¨ÁbM?Ž WOM?ž_« nOCð Ê√ b?¹dð Íc« l?{u*« v«
WEŠö
l?
Video CD
U½«uDÝ«ØSVCD
ÆÁöŽ√
wƒ«—UJ«
Æwƒ«—UJ«
«—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
dýR*« qIM
2Ø3
b?¹d?ð Íc?« »u?žd?*« w?ðu?B?« —U *« —UO²šô
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ±
j?G{≈ ≤
Æt{dŽ
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« vKŽ ‰U¦
«u_« œbF² wƒ«—U
tł
Ò u ¡UMž
1/3
u l
2/3
jI VŠUB vIOÝu ·eŽ
3/3
SVCD W½«uDÝ« vKŽ ‰U¦
u l
1/2
jI VŠUB wIOÝu ·eŽ
2/2
tł
Ò u ¡UMž
AUDIO
Æwƒ«—UJ«
uB« —“ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
«—UO²š« WLzU qOFHð ÊËœ wðuB« —U *« —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆAUDIO jG{≈ ±
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
[AUDIO]
uB« —UO²š« WýUý dNEð
AUDIO
1/3
Æ»užd*« wðuB« —U *« —UO²šô
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
uB« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð Ê√ v« dE²½« Ë√ ENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ[AUDIO]
µ≥
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
53
U?½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ¡U?MŁ√
UOM?ž√ e−Š pM?J1 ô
UOKLFUÐ ÂUOI« q³ 7 jG{≈ ¨ UOMž_« e−( ÆPBC WHOþË
«—UO²š« WLzU —UNþ≈ WOHO ’uB Ð µ≤ W×H lł«—
Æ[AUDIO] v«
dýR?*« qIM 5Ø∞ j?G{≈
ÆU¼e−Š b¹dð w²« WOMž_« —UO²šô rd« —“ jG{«
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
KARAOKE tË«dJ«
Video CD W½«uDÝ« Ë√ SVCD W½«uDÝ« vKŽ ‰U¦
KARAOKE wƒ«—UJ« WHOþË l Audio CD
u¹dO²Ý
u
L+R
jI Èd O«
uB« …UM
L
jI vMLO«
uB« …UM
R
wÐdŽ
W ½ « u DÝ « Ë √
öOGAð
KARAOKE SOUND —e« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
Æwƒ«—UJ«
«—UO²š« WLzU qOFHð ÊËœ
uB« —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆKARAOKE SOUND jG{≈ ±
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
[KARAOKE] wƒ«—UJ« —UO²š« WýUý dNEð
KARAOKE
L+R
Æ»užd*«
uB« —UO²šô
5Ø∞
©KARAOKE
jG{≈ ≤
SOUND®
wƒ«—UJ«
u —UO²š≈
—U??O??²??š« W??ýU?ý w?H?²? ?ð Ê√ v?« d?E?²?½« Ë√ ENTER j??G?{≈ ≥
Æ[KARAOKE] wƒ«—UJ«
œb?F²? wƒ«—U?”
¡UMG«
U½«uD?Ý« „UM?¼ ¨KARAOKE
DVD VIDEO
ÆW½«uDÝô« vKŽ q− *« dšü«
WI?¹dD?Ð ¡UM?G« v?K?Ž »—
Ò b²?K W?×¹d?*« n?zUþu?« ‰UL?F²?Ý≈
©VOCAL® wƒ«—UJ«
wƒ«—UJ«
Æwƒ«—UJ«
wƒ«—UJ« “«dÞ dOž s W¹œUF«
U½«u?DÝô« vKŽ q− *« ¡UMG«
«—UO²š« WLzU —UNþ≈ WOHO ’uB Ð µ≤ W×H lł«—
UEŠö
u qFł Ë√
[AUDIO]
Æwƒ«—UJ«
«—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
u WODGð pMJ1
Æ¡UMG« sŽ nu²ð UbMŽ UÎOzUIKð pðu q× q×¹ tł
Ò u*« ¡UMG«
wƒ«—UJ«
U½«u?DÝ« 5?Ð s
u l wMGð Ê√ ‰U¦*« qO³Ý vKŽ pMJ1 ¨ U½«uDÝô« pKð q¦ l Æ“ «u_«
«—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
uB« j³{ w?G³M¹ ¨“ «u_« œbF² wƒ«—U” W?½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ •
Æ©µ≥ W×H lł«—® [1] vKŽ
DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝ« l •
ÆKARAOKE SOUND wƒ«—UJ« u dOOGð
sJ1 ô ¨“ «u_« œbF² wƒ«—U” sLC²ð ô w²«
«—UO²š« WLzU —UNþ≈ WOHO ’uB Ð µ≤ W×H lł«—
dýR*« qIM
2Ø3
jG{≈ ±
Æ[KARAOKE] l{u« v«
dýR*« qIM
2Ø3 jG{≈ ±
ÆWÐužd*« WHOþu« —UO²šô
5Ø∞
jG{≈ ≤
Æt{dŽ b¹dð Íc« »užd*«
uB« —UO²šô
5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
Æ[VOCAL] l{u« v«
REPLACE
MASK
NORMAL
«u_« …œbF²
KARAOKE DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« vKŽ ‰U¦
ÆÍœUŽ ÷dŽ ∫[NORMAL]
“«dÞ s X O W¹œUŽ W½«uDÝ« vKŽ q− *« ¡UMG«
u WODGð r²ð
∫[MASK]
Æwƒ«—UJ«
sŽ nu?²ð U?bM?Ž pðu q?× ÎU?OzU?IK?ð tł
Ò u*« ¡U?MG?«
u q?×¹ ∫[REPLACE]
Æ¡UMG«
©±® tł
Ò u ¡UMž
u l
1
©≤® tł
Ò u ¡UMž
u l
2
©≤ ´ ±® tł
Ò u ¡UMž
u l
1+2
jI VŠUB*« wIOÝu*« ·eF«
PRO
tł
Ò u s( l
OFF
µ¥
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
54
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
KARAOKE tË«dJ«
öOGAð
wÐdŽ
©VOCAL EFFECT® ¡UMG« uB WHK² «dŁR WU{≈
VOCAL
Æwƒ «—UJ«
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
wƒ«—UJ« «—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
Æwƒ«—UJ«
CHORUS
FLANGER
OFF
«u√ qŁU1 pðuB ÎUIb² ÎU³Þ— UÎO½bF UÎðu nOC¹ ∫[FLANGER]
Æw½Ëd²JOù« —U²O'«
dš¬ h ý „UM¼ ÊU u UL wðuB« 똓ü« dOŁQð pðu wDF¹
ÆVOCAL jG{≈ ±
u —UO²š« WýUý dNEð
NORMAL
ÆWÐužd*« WHOþu« —UO²šô 5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
u? —U?O²š« …cU½ wH² ð Ê√ v« dE²½« Ë√ ENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ[VOCAL] ¡UMG«
UEŠö
EFFECT
«—UO²š« WL zU qOFHð ÊËœ »užd*« ¡UMG«
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
[EFFECT]
[L] 5F{u« bŠ√ vKŽ [KARAOKE SOUND] wƒ«—UJ« u j³{ - «–≈ •
“REPLACE” Ë “MASK” ¡UMG« u WODGð WHOþË qLFð sK [R]
ÆW×O× WI¹dDÐ
«uQÐ U?NO? ¡UMG?« r²?¹ w²«Ë ÍœU?Š√
∫[CHORUS]
ÆXu« fH½ w pF wMG¹
Æwƒ«—UJ«
¡UMG«
VOCAL
Ë√
ô¬ iFÐ
[VOCAL]
«—UO²š« WLzU —UNþ≈ WOHO ’uB Ð µ≤ W×H lł«—
Æ[EFFECT] l{u« v« dýR*« qIM 2Ø3 jG{≈ ±
Æ»užd*« dŁR*« —UO²šô 5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
«u_« œbF² wƒ «—U
r?²ð ô√ s?J1 Èd?š√
ÆEFFECT jG{≈ ±
u Ë√ …œbF² UÎð«u√ sLC²ð W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ
U½«u?DÝ« lË Æ‚ö?Þ ù« vK?Ž tł
Ò u?*« ¡UM?G«
«u_«
«dŁRË ÈbB« nzUþË ‰ULF²ÝUÐ pðuB WHK²
ÆOFF ·UI¹ù«
«dŁR WU{≈ pMJ1
©ECHO® Èb dŁR WU{≈
OFF
W EŠ ö
u WODGð
p?ðuB dŁR WU{≈
ÆWOzUMG«
uB« Èu?² j?³CÐ X?L «–≈
•
u? ÷dŽ r?²¹
“REPLACE” Ë “MASK” ¡UMG« u WODGð WHOþË qLFð ô b •
.SVCD Ë Video CD U½«uDÝ«
«dŁR*« —UO²š« …cU½ dNEð
Æ»užd*« dŁR*« —UO²šô 5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
—UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð Ê√ v« dE²½« Ë√ ENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ[EFFECT] «dŁR*«
•
uB« WODGð r²ð ô√ sJ1 …œbF²
ÆWO{d WI¹dDÐ ¡UMG«
iFÐ l
u dŁR —UO²š« pMJ1
EFFECT
l{Ë v?KŽ dŁR?*« j ³{ œU?FO ? dŁR*« —U?O²š« b?FÐ
uBÐ W?K−? *« pK?ð q¦ ¨œ«u?*« iF?Ð l
ÆWO{d WI¹dDÐ
ô ¨
—e« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
—e« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
«—UO²š« WLzU qOFHð ÊËœ WÐužd*« WHOþu« —UO²š« pMJ1
wƒ«—UJ« «—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
Æwƒ«—UJ«
«—UO²š« WLzU —UNþ≈ WOHO ’uB Ð µ≤ W×H lł«—
Æ[ECHO] l{u« v« dýR*« qIM 2Ø3 jG{≈ ±
ÆÈbB« Èu² j³C 5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
OFF
1
2
3
ÆÈu√ ÈbB« dOŁQð ÊU ULK d³√ rd« ÊU ULK
ECHO
Æwƒ«—UJ«
—e« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
«—UO²š« WLzU qOFHð ÊËœ ÈbB« Èu² j ³{ pMJ1
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
[ECHO]
ÆECHO jG{≈ ±
ÈbB« —UO²š« WýUý dNEð
ECHO
OFF
ÆÈbB« Èu² j³C 5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
ÈbB« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð Ê√ w« dE²½« Ë√ ENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ[ECHO]
WEŠö
œUFO ? ÈbB« Èu²? j³{ bF?Ð ©VOCAL
EFFECT®
UÎOðu ΫdŁR?
d²š« «–≈
ÆOFF ·UI¹ù« l{Ë vKŽ ÈbB« Èu² j³{
µµ
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
55
20/8/03, 10:27 AM
KARAOKE tË«dJ«
öOGAð
U EŠ ö
∫ÁU½œ√ Wł—b*«
U½«uDÝô« s W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ wIOÝu*« ÂUI*« dOOGð pMJ1 ô
DTS
u sLC²ð
DTS
«uMI« œbF² MPEG
‡¼ „ π∂ wDš PCM
Audio CD
DVD
u sLC²ð DVD
u sLC²ð DVD
u sLC²ð
•
•
wÐdŽ
ÆWOU(« WOMž_« ¡UN²½« bFÐ ÍœUF« ÂUI*« v« ÂUI*« œuF¹
W½«uDÝ≈
–
–
W½«uDÝ≈ –
W½«uDÝ≈ –
W½«uDÝ≈
wIOÝu*« ÂUI*« dOOGð
Æpðu rzöO W½«uDÝ« vKŽ WK− WOMž_ wIOÝu*« ÂUI*« dOOGð pMJ1
wƒ«—UJ«
Æwƒ«—UJ«
Æ[KEY
CONT]
«—UO²š« WLzU ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
«—UO²š« WLzU —UNþ≈ WOHO ’uB Ð µ≤ W×H lł«—
l{u« v«
dýR*« qIM
ÆÂUI*« iH)
∞
2Ø3
jG{≈ ±
5
jG{≈ ≤
Ë√ ÂUI*« ld
Æ¥´ v« ¥≠ s u¼ sJL*« j³C« ‚UD½
KEY (ØKEY 9
Æwƒ«—UJ«
—«—“_« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
«—UO²š« WLzU qOFHð ÊËœ wIOÝu*« ÂUI*« dOOGð pMJ1
ÆKEY ( Ë√
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
KEY 9
jG{≈ ±
[KEY CONT] ÂUI*« —UO²š« WýUý dNEð
KEY CONT
+1
ÆÂUI*« iHš Ë√ ld
KEY (ØKEY9
jG{≈ ≤
ÂUI*« —UO²š« …cU½ wH² ð Ê√ v« dE²½« Ë√ ¨ENTER jG{≈ ≥
Æ[KEY
CONT]
µ∂
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
56
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
XV-NK58SL
WOzb³*«
U¾ON²« dOOGð
u B «
AUDIO
wÐdŽ
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
STREAM/PCM
ANALOG DOWN MIX
STEREO
D RANGE CONTROL
NORMAL
OUTPUT LEVEL
STANDARD
SELECT
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
OTHERS p– dOž
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
ON
AUTO STANDBY
OFF
AV COMPULINK MODE
DVD1
PARENTAL LOCK
SELECT
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
UEŠö
öOCH²« W¾ONð WOHO
Æ“DVD” vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{« ¨qG
Ò A*« qOGAð bMŽ •
ÆCHOICE jG{≈ ±
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
Æ U¾ON²K
öOCH²«
U½UOÐ
U½UO³« WýUý 51 vKŽ√ w
UýUý ÈbŠ≈ dNEð
U½uI¹√ lЗ√ W¹ƒ— pMJ1
LANGUAGE WGK«
«—UO²š« WLzU ∫
PICTURE …—uB«
«—UO²š« WLzU ∫
uB«
«—UO²š« WLzU ∫
OTHERS “p– dOž”
«—UO²š« WLzU ∫
AUDIO
ÆW×O×B« W½uI¹_« —UO²šô
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ WOMF*«
ÆÁd¹d% b¹dð Íc« bM³« —UO²šô
2Ø3
U¾ON²?« dOOGð q³ ÆW?Ozb³*«
v?KŽ l?{u?« V? ²?M? ÕU?²?H*« W?¾?O?NðË v?ƒ«—U?J?« WH?O?þË
Æ“DVD”
ö?OCH²« —UO²š≈
UbMŽ r I« «c?¼ √d≈ ÆqG
Ò ALK pz«d?ý bMŽ ö
Î √ …b
Ò F*Ô«
UÎöš
U¾?ON²« vMF¹Ô r? I« «c¼
U¾ON²« dOOGð b¹dð UbMŽ Ë√ W¹ƒd« i¹dŽ Êu¹eHK²Ð qG
Ò A*« «c¼ qOuð b¹dð
jG{≈ ≤
Æ…b¼UA*« W¾OÐË
öOCH² UÎF³ð pc
U½UO³« WýUý dNEð
p¹dײ
5Ø∞
öOCH²« WýUý ‰uŠ
jG{≈ ≥
Æ—U²<« bM³« Êu dOÒG²¹
ÆENTER jG{≈ ¥
Æ—U²<« bM³« ‚u qHÝ√ v« W³× M
U¾ON²« dOOGð pMJ1 ô ¨vƒ«—UJ« WHOþË qOGAð - «–√ •
qOGA?ð ·UI¹≈ bQð ¨WO?zb³*«
PICTURE …—uB«Ë LANGUAGE WGK« W¾ONð UýUý s öOCH²« WýUý ÊuJ²ð
ÆW¾ON²K «ÎœuMÐ rCð UNM qË ¨ OTHERS p– dOžË AUDIO uB«Ë
«—UO²š« WLzU dNEð
LANGUAGE WGK«
LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
CHINESE
SPANISH
SELECT
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
—U²<« bM³«
ÆENTER jG{« rŁ
«—UO²šô« bŠ√ ¡UI²½ô
5Ø∞
PICTURE …—uB«
jG{≈ µ
Æt²OI²½« Íc« —UO²šô« W¾ONð r²ð
PICTURE
Æwðü« lł«— ¨W¾ONð q ‰uŠ qOUH²« s b¹e* •
öOCH²« WýUý ¡UGù
MONITOR TYPE
4:3 LB
PICTURE SOURCE
AUTO
SCREEN SAVER
ON
MP3&WMA/JPEG
MP3&WMA
ÆCHOICE jG{≈
U EŠ ö
Í√ —UNþ≈ pMJ1 ô ¨qG
Ò A*« w
SELECT
ENTER
JPEG W½«uDÝ« Ë√ MP3/WMA W½«uDÝ« œułË bMŽ •
Æ öOCH²«
·cŠ ÎU½U?OŠ√ r²?¹ b ¨W?C¹dŽ Êu?¹eH?Kð WýU?ý vKŽ
UýUý s WýUý
ö?OC?Hð WýU?ý dNE?ð Ub?MŽ
•
r−Š rEM j³{√ ¨p– ÀbŠ «–≈ Æ öOCH?²« WýUý s wKH «Ë ÍuKF« 5ze'«
ÆÊu¹eHK²« “UNł w …—uB«
µ∑
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
57
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
USE 5∞23 TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
WOzb³*«
WGK«
MENU LANGUAGE
W?½«uD?Ý« X½U? «–≈ U?N{d?Ž r²?¹ w?²« W?Ozb?³*«
«—UO²š« WLzU
«—UO²šô« rz«u WG
«—U?O?²šô« r?z«u W?G? —UO?²š« p?MJ?1
ÆUNML
Ò C²ð
DVD VIDEO
W ¾ O N² «
q?Ouð b?MŽ l{u?« «c¼ —UO?²šU?Ð r ∫©WC?¹dŽ Êu¹e?HKð W?ýUý® ›16:9 AUTO¤
Æ©16:9 ® WýUA« i¹dŽ Êu¹eHK²Ð “UN'«
Êu¹eHK²Ð “UN'« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫©Letter Box q¹u%® › 4:3 LB¤
Æ©4:3® ÍœUŽ
◊uDš dNEð ¨WC¹dF« …—uB« WGOBÐ WK−
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ
« —U O ² š ≈
¨©W??O?? ?½d??®
FRENCH ¨©W??O?½U??³?Ý≈® SPANISH ¨©W??¹e??O?K??$≈® ENGLISH
JAPANESE ¨©WOUD¹≈® ITALIAN ¨©WO½U*√® GERMAN ¨©WOMO® CHINESE
ZU v« AA s UGK« “u— ¨©WO½UÐU¹®
ÆWOzb³*« W½«uDÝô« WG «b ²Ý« r²¹ ¨…—U²<« WGK« sLC²ð ô W½«uDÝô« X½U «–≈
U?G?K?« “u?— ‰Ëb?ł ∫
Æ…—uB« qHÝ√Ë vKŽ√ w ¡«œuÝ
•
B o?×?K?” l?ł«— ¨ U?G?K?« “u— ‰u?Š q?O?U?H?²?« s? b?¹e?* •
Æ∂≥ W×H w “UNð«—UB²š«Ë
Æ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ W¾ON²« dOOGð pMJ1 ô
•
AUDIO LANGUAGE uB« WG
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« X½U «–≈ UN{dŽ r²¹ w²« WOzb³*« uB« WG —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆUNML
Ò C²ð
W ¾ O N² «
Êu¹eHK²Ð “UN'« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫©Pan Scan q¹u%® ›4:3 PS¤
dO³?Jð r²¹ WC?¹dF« …—uB?« WGOB?Ð WK− ?
Æ©4:3® ÍœUŽ
DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« ÷d?Ž bMŽ
CHINESE ¨©WO ½d® FRENCH ¨©WO½U³Ý≈® SPANISH ¨©W¹eOK$≈® ENGLISH
¨©W?O½U?ÐU¹® JAPANESE ¨©W?OUD?¹≈® ITALIAN ¨©WO?½U*√® GERMAN ¨©W?OM?O®
ZU v« AA s UGK« “u—
ÆWOzb³*« W½«uDÝô« WG «b ²Ý« r²¹ ¨…—U²<« WGK« sLC²ð ô W½«uDÝô« X½U «–≈ •
U?G?K?« “u?— ‰Ëb?ł ∫ B o?×?K?” l?ł«— ¨ U?G?K?« “u— ‰u?Š q?O?U?H?²?« s? b?¹e?* •
Æd ¹_«Ë s1_« …—uB« w³½Uł h r²¹Ë ¨ÎU¹œuLŽ WýUA« úL² …—uB«
d²?š« uË v?²?Š
« —U O ² š ≈
Æ∂≥ W×H w “UNð«—UB²š«Ë
4:3 LB l{u?« w d?NE?ð …—u?B« Ê√ W?EŠö? w?G³?M¹ t?½√ dO?ž
ÆW½«uDÝö UÎF³ð p–Ë 4:3 PS l{u«
Æ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ W¾ON²« dOOGð pMJ1 ô •
SUBTITLE WÐu²J*« WLłd²«
W?½«u?D?Ý« X?½U? «–≈ U?N?{d?Ž r?²?¹ w?²?« W?Ðu?²?J?*« W?L?łd?²K WOzb³*« WGK« —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆUNMLC²ð
Ò
DVD VIDEO
W ¾ O N² «
« —U O ² š ≈
FRENCH ¨©WO?½U?³?Ý≈® SPANISH ¨©W¹e?O?K?$≈® ENGLISH ¨©·UI?¹≈® OFF
¨©WOUD¹≈® ITALIAN ¨©WO½U*√® GERMAN ¨©WOMO® CHINESE ¨©WO ½d®
ZU v« AA s UGK« “u— ¨©WO½UÐU¹® JAPANESE
›16:9
MULTI AUTO¤ ›16:9 MULTI NORMAL¤
«—UO²š≈ ∫ ›MULTI 4:3 PS ¤ ›4:3 MULTI LB¤
Ác ¼
“MULTI” œbF²*« l{u«
Ò A*« qO?u²Ð Âu?Ið UbM?Ž U¼ƒUI?²½« wG³?M¹
PAL w?UE½ ö?JÐ qLF?¹ Êu¹eH?K²Ð qG?
u¹bOH« …—Uý≈ ëdšSÐ qG
Ò A*« ÂuIO «—UO²šô« Ác¼ bŠ√ ¡UI²½UÐ XL «–≈ ÆNTSC
ÂUEM«—UO²š« ÕU²H W¾ONð sŽ dEM« iGÐ W½«uDÝö UÎF³ð NTSC ÂUE½ Ë√ PAL ÂUEMÐ
ÆPAL/NTSC
Ë
WG? «b ²?Ý« r²?¹ ¨…—U²?<« WG?KU?Ð WÐu?²J W?Lłd?ð sL?C²?ð ô W½«u?DÝô« X?½U «–≈ •
ÆWOzb³*« W½«uDÝô«
U?G?K?« “u?— ‰Ëb?ł ∫
Æ÷dF« ¡UMŁ√ W¾ON²« dOOGð pMJ1 ô •
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE WýUA« vKŽ ÷dF« WG
ÆqG
Ò A*« UNb ² ¹ w²« WýUA« vKŽ
PICTURE SOURCE …—uB« —bB
‰U−?LK? UÎF?³ð U?N²?'UF r?²²?Ý W½«u?DÝô«
B o?×?K?” l?ł«— ¨ U?G?K?« “u— ‰u?Š q?O?U?H?²?« s? b?¹e?* •
Æ∂≥ W×H w “UNð«—UB²š«Ë
U½UO³« ÷dŽ WG qG
Ò A*« pMJ1
W ¾ O N² «
U?¹u²×? X½U? «–≈ U —U?² ?¹ l{u?« «c¼
…—u …œuł vK?Ž ‰uB(« pMJ?1 Æ©rKOH« —b?B® —UÞû ÎUF?³ð Ë√ ©u¹bOH?« —bB®
W¾ON²« Ác¼Æ`O×B« —UO²šô« ¡UI²½UÐ p–Ë t{dŽ r²OÝ Íc« —bB*« ŸuM UÎF³ð WOU¦
©WO½U³Ý≈®
SPANISH ¨©WOMO® CHINESE ¨©W¹eOK$≈® ENGLISH
s?Ž dE?M« i?GÐ W?¹eO?K$ù« W?GK?UÐ Êu?Jð W?ýUA?« vK?Ž ÷dF?ðÔ w²?«
«—UD?šù« iF?Ð
Æwb
Ò I²« ` *« l{ËË …dHÒC*« …—Uýù« l{Ë s qJ WŠU²
W ¾ O N ² «
«—UO²š≈
« —U O ² š ≈
•
ÆW¾ON²«
ÆMP3
U½UOÐ WýUý vKŽ dNEð w²« WýUA« vKŽ ÷dF« WG dOOGð pMJ1 ô
•
VIDEO (ACTIVE) ¨VIDEO (NORMAL) ¨FILM ¨AUTO
PICTURE …—uB«
Í—b?B?0 œ«u s?L?C?²ð W?½«u?DÝ« ÷d?Ž b?MŽ l?{u?« «c?¼ —UO?²?šUÐ r? ∫ ›AUTO¤
ÆUÎF rKOH«Ë u¹bOH«
UÎF³?ð WOU(« W½«uD?Ýö ©u¹bO —b?B Ë√ rKO —bB?® …—uB« Ÿu½ qG
Ò A?*« eOÒ1
ÆW¹œUF« ‰«uŠ_« w —UO²šô« «c¼ ¡UI²½UÐ r ÆW½«uDÝô«
UuKF*
ÆrKO —bB0 W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫ › FILM¤
MONITOR TYPE ÷dF« “UNł Ÿu½
U?½«u?D?Ý« ÷d?Ž b?¹d?ð U?b?M?Ž Êu?¹e?H?K?²?« W?I?ÐU?D?* ÷d?F?« “UNł Ÿu½ —UO²š« pMJ1
ÆWC¹dF« WýUA«
«–
U½u¹eHK²K WK− *«
u¹bO —bB0 W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫ ›VIDEO (NORMAL)¤
ÆUÎO³ ½ WKOK WdŠ sLC²ð
u¹bO —bB0 W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ bMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫ ›VIDEO
(ACTIVE)¤
ÆUÎO³ ½ Wd(« s ΫdO³ «Î—b sLC²ð
SCREEN SAVER WýUA« W¹ULŠ
lł«—® ÆOFF ·UI¹ù« Ë√
ON qOGA²« l{Ë vKŽ WýUA« W¹ULŠ WHOþË W¾ONð pMJ1
©Æ≥∏ W×H
W ¾ O N ² «
©·UI¹≈®
«—UO²š≈
«—UO²š« WLzU
DVD VIDEO
W ¾ O N² «
« —U O ² š ≈
¨16:9 MULTI NORMAL ¨4:3 PS¨ 4:3 LB ¨16:9 AUTO ¨16:9 NORMAL
4:3 MULTI PS ¨4:3 MULTI LB ¨16:9 MULTI AUTO
qG
Ò A*« qOuð bMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫©WC¹dŽ Êu¹eHKð WýUý® ›16:9 NORMAL¤
UÎO?zUI?Kð qG?
Ò A*« Âu?I¹® π∫±∂ w¼ W?²ÐU?Ł œUF?Ð√ W³ ?½
«– ©16:9® WC?¹dŽ Êu¹e?HK?ð WýU?AÐ
Æ©≥∫¥ jLM« s —bB? ÷dŽ bMŽ 5×O×B« Ãd)« …—Uý≈Ë WýUA« ÷dŽ j³CÐ
U·?b ?² ? ≥∫¥ j‡?‡L?M« s?
DVD VIDEO W½«u?‡‡?DÝ« —b?‡‡?B ÷d?FÐ X?L «–≈
NORMAL¤ l?‡‡‡?{u«
W?−O²?½ ¡wA« i?FÐ …—uB« ’«u?š dOO?Gð r²?O ›16:9
Æ…—uB« ÷dŽ q¹u% WOKLF
OFF ¨©qOGAð® ON
µ∏
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
58
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
wÐdŽ
LANGUAGE
U¾ON²« dOOGð
WOzb³*«
U¾ON²« dOOGð
W??½«u???D??Ý«
u?? Èu??²?? ?? ÊU??? «–≈ l??{u??« «c??¼ —U??O??²???šU??Ð r?? ∫ ›TV
Æ—UO²šô« «c¼ ¡UI²½UÐ r ¨W¹œUF« ‰«uŠ_« w ∫ ›NORMAL¤
ŸUL?Ý pMJ?1 pc?Ð ÆÊu¹e?HK?²« Z«d?Ð
MODE¤
u Èu?² ? s i?Hš√ DVD VIDEO
wÐdŽ
ÆÕu{uÐ iHš√
u Èu² 0
u B «
MP3&WMA/JPEG
U½«uDÝ« vKŽ WK− *«
Ë
UHKË
JPEG
UHK ÷dF¹ Ê√ qG
Ò A L K s J 1
MP3/WMA
MP3/WMA UHK*« wŽu½ ö sLC²ð W½«uDÝô« X½U «–≈ sJË ÆCD-R/CD-RW
UHK j?I ÷dFð Ê√ p½UJSÐ Êu?JO JPEG
W?LzU s bM³« «c¼ w? —U²<« ŸuM«
Æ «—UO²šô«
OUTPUT LEVEL
Ãd)« Èu²
W ¾ O N² «
uB« Ãdš ·«dÞ√ s Wł—U)« …—Uýù« Èu² XOH ² p `L ð W¾ON²« Ác¼
ÆqG
Ò ALK ⁄uU½_«
Æ
JPEG ¨MP3&WMA
AUDIO OUT
ÆjI
W ¾ O N ² «
MP3/WMA
Æ jI
«—UO²š≈
UHK ÷dŽ sJ1 ¨bM³« «c¼ —UO²š« bMŽ ∫ ›MP3&WMA¤
UHK ÷dŽ sJ1 ¨bM³« «c¼ —UO²š« bMŽ ∫ ›JPEG¤
JPEG
©iH M® LOW ¨©wÝUO® STANDARD
[LOW] iH M*« l{u« —UO²šUÐ r ¨UμuÒA WŽUL « s ×U)« uB« ÊU «–≈ •
OTHERS p–
dOž
«—UO²š« WLzU
RESUME
·UM¾²Ýô«
Æ÷dF« ·UM¾²Ý« l{Ë —UO²š« pMJ1
AUDIO
uB«
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT wLd«
w …œułu X«“ U W½«uDÝô« X½U «–≈ ¨…d dš¬ ÷dF« ÁbMŽ lDI½« Íc« l{u*«
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO
Æ·UM¾²Ýô« WHOþË ¡UG≈ r²¹ ¨l{u« «c¼ —UO²š« bMŽ ∫ ›OFF¤
dš¬ ÷dŽ n½Q² ¹ Ê√ qG
Ò ALK sJ1 ¨l{u« «c¼ —UO²š« bMŽ ∫ ›DISC RESUME¤
÷dF« W?FÞUI? l{«u0 tðd?«– w qG?
Ò A*« kH?²×¹ ÆU?N{dŽ o?³Ý W½«u?DÝ« ≥∞
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO s UNŽe½ s ržd« vKŽ ¨W{ËdF W½«uDÝ« ≥∞ dšPÐ WU)«
uB« Ãdš
ÆW×O× WI¹dDÐ bM³«
qOUH²« s b¹e* ∂≥ W×H w “wLd« Ãd)«
ÆÃd)«
«—Uý≈ jD ∫
C o×K” lł«—
«—Uý≈Ë W¾ON²« 5Ð WöF« ‰uŠ
W ¾ O N² «
«—UO²š≈
DISC RESUME ¨OFF ¨ON
s? W½«u?D?Ýô« ÷dŽ n?½Q?² ?¹ Ê√ q?G
Ò A?L?K s?J?1 ¨l{u?« «c?¼ —UO?²?š« bM?Ž ∫ ›ON¤
«—UO²š« WLzU
«c¼ W?¾ONð V?−¹ ¨wL— q?šbÐ eN
Ò −? wł—Uš “UN?−Ð “UN−?K wLd?« Ãd)« qOu?²
Æ÷dF« ·UM¾²Ý« WHOþË ‰uŠ qOUH²« s b¹e* ≥∑ Ë ≥∂ w²×H lł«—
W ¾ O N ² «
« —U O ² š ≈
« —U O ² š ≈
STREAM/PCM ¨DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM ¨PCM ONLY
ONLY¤
Ædš¬ wðu “UN' wLd« wD)« PCM qšbÐ qG
Ò ALK DIGITAL OUT
qšb« qOu²Ð ÂuIð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫ ›DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM¤
wLd« Ãd)« f³I qOu²Ð ÂuIð UbMŽ l{u« «c¼ —UO²šUÐ r ∫ ›PCM
ÆwL— w³Ëœ “u— qK× UÎOML{ tO Zb r C* Ë√ wLd« w³Ëœ “u— qK; wLd«
MPEG WGOBÐ WK− W½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ ÊS —UO²šô« «c¼ ¡UI²½« bMŽ
ÆWOL— wDš PCM …—Uý≈ Ãd ¹Ô
w?Ld« q?šb« qO?u²Ð Âu?Ið U?bMŽ l?{u« «c¼ —U?O²šU?Ð r ∫ › STREAM/PCM¤
w?³Ëœ Ë√ «uM?I« œbF?² MPEG Ë√ DTS “u— q?K× ÎU?OML?{ tO Z?b r ?C*
«uMI« …œbF²*«
ÆqI² “u— qK× Ë√ ¨wL—
ON SCREEN GUIDE
U 5³ð w²«Ë …—uB« vKŽ “WýUA« qOœ” “u— Ë√
WýUA« qOœ
U½uI¹√ ÷dF¹ Ê√ qG
Ò ALK sJ1
ÆqG
Ò ALK Ë√ W½«uDÝö Àb×¹
¨
¨
∫ “WýUA« qOœ”
U½uI¹√ vKŽ ‰U¦
W ¾ O N ² «
«—UO²š≈
OFF ¨©qOGAð® ON
ÆWýUA« qOœ qOGAð r²¹ ¨l{u« «c¼ —UO²š« bMŽ ∫ ›ON¤
ëdš≈ r²¹ b ¨a M« b{ qUJUÐ WOL;« dOž
Ãd)« f?³I? s Ãd? ð v?KŽ√ Ë√ ‡?¼ „ π∂ Á—b W?M¹U?F œœd?²Ð W?K−? *«
ANALOG DOWN MIX
¨ «uMI« œbF² WÞUŠ≈
©Æ3D
PHONIC WHOþË qOGAð bMŽ qLFð ô WHOþu« Ác¼®
W ¾ O N² «
WÞUŠ≈
uBK dðuO³LJ« WKË ÂUE½ ‰ULF²Ýô W×O× WI¹dDÐ bM³« «c¼ W¾ON²Ð ÂuIð Ê√ V−¹
Æ
STEREO ¨DOLBY SURROUND
SURROUND¤
q?G
Ò A?LK ⁄u?U½_«
AUDIO OUT
u?B« Ãd?š ·«dÞ√ Êu? l
u?B ŸU?L?²Ýô« b?M?Ž l{u?« «c?¼ —UO?²?šUÐ r? ∫ ›STEREO¤
Ør ?C0 WK
Ò u q?G
Ò ALK?
W½«uDÝ« s
AUDIO OUT
uB« qO− ð
DVD3 ¨DVD2 ¨DVD1
Æ
uB« Ãdš ·«d?Þ√ Êu l ÍbO?KIð
œ—√ «–≈ Ë√ ¨Êu¹eHKð “UN−Ð Ë√ u¹dO²Ý ‰U³I²Ý« “UNł
Æa« XOÝU Ë√ p ¹œ wMO W½«uDÝ« vKŽ
D.RANGE CONTROL
«—UO²š≈
«u?MI?« …œbF?²
ÆWÞUŠ≈ “u— qK×0 WK
Ò u
AV COMPU LINK …—uB«Ë
W ¾ O N ² «
« —U O ² š ≈
u?B ŸUL?²Ýô« bMŽ l?{u« «c¼ —U?O²šU?Ð r ∫ ›DOLBY
5?ðUM? Í– u?¹dO?²?Ý
uBK dðuO³LJ« WKË l{Ë
uB `O×B« ÷dFK
ÆwðuB« pUE½ s¹uJ² UÎF³ð W×O× WI¹dDÐ bM³« «c¼ W¾ON²Ð ÂuIð Ê√ V−¹
OFF ¨©WIOœ ≥∞® 30 ¨©WIOœ ∂∞® 60
AV COMPULINK MODE …—uB«Ë
⁄uU½ú wCH)« Ãe*«
uBÐ WK− DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ«
Æ—UE²½ô«
©·UI¹≈®
•
DIGITAL OUT wLd«
q?LF?²?Ý≈ ¨DTS l Audio CD W?½«u?DÝ« Ë√ DVD VIDEO W?½«uD?Ý« ÷d?Ž bM?Ž •
ÆpðUŽULÝ s W×O×B« «—Uýù« vKŽ ‰uB×K DTS “u— qK×
l{Ë v« ÎUOzUIKð qG
Ò A*« ‰Òuײ¹ ¨WIOœ ∂∞ Ë√ WIOœ ≥∞ sŽ b¹eð …b* qG
Ò A*« ·UI¹≈ bMŽ
«—UO²š≈
«—U?ýù«
Ƈ¼ „ ¥∏ Á—b WM¹UF œœd²Ð
wzUIK²« —UE²½ù«
W ¾ O N ² «
•
ÆXÐ ≤¥ Ë√ ≤∞ WOL— …—Uý≈
©·UI¹≈®
AUTO STANDBY
U½«uDÝ« iFÐ l
DVD VIDEO
⁄uU½_«
DVD VIDEO
wJOUM¹b« ‚UDM« w rJײ«
AUDIO OUT uB« Ãdš ·«dÞ√ s u …œuł qC√ wDFð W¾ON²« Ác¼
DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝô ŸUL²Ýö
u Èu² 0 ¨wLd« w³Ëœ WGOBÐ WK− *«
ÆjÝu² Ë√ iH M
AV COMPU LINK WHOþË ‰uŠ qOUH²« s b¹e* ∂µ W×H lł«— •
W ¾ O N² «
« —U O ² š ≈
TV MODE ¨NORMAL ¨WIDE RANGE
wJOUM¹œ ‚UD½ lÝËQÐ
uB« ÷dŽ r²¹ ¨l{u« «c¼ —UO²š« bMŽ ∫ ›WIDE RANGE¤
ÆÍu ÷dŽ
µπ
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
59
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
uBÐ l²L²« pMJ1 YO×Ð
WOzb³*«
rN « dOA¹ ULMOÐ ≥
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
«—UO²šô« WLzU ¡UŽb²Ýô ENTERm{≈
5Ø∞
ÆWËb« e— —UO²šô
PARENTAL LOCK
s¹b«u« qH
WýUý wŽb² ¹ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË w
ENTER jG{ ÊS —UO²šô« «c¼ ¡UI²½« bMŽ
ÆÁU½œ√ WMO³*« PARENTAL LOCK s¹b«u« qH
ÆDVD VIDEO
U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ vKŽ ‰UHÞ_« …—b bOOIð WO½UJ≈ p– p `O²¹
jG{≈ ¥
U¹u²× nOM?B² UN O¹UI «b ?²Ý« - w²« WËbUÐ ’U)« ed« —U?O²šUÐ r
ÆDVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ«
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SA
A o×K” lł«—
SET LEVEL
NONE
PASSWORD
____
Æ∂≤ W×H w “s¹b«u« qHI oÞUM*«Ø‰Ëb« “u— WLzU ∫
EXIT
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SA
SA
SET LEVEL
NONE
SB
SELECT
PASSWORD
____
SC
ENTER
EXIT
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
SD
SE
SG
Æs¹b«u« qH W¾ONð ‰uŠ qOUH²« s b¹e* W×HB« Ác¼ lł«— •
SH
SELECT
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
ÆENTER jG{≈ µ
Æ ›SET
ÆqHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
s
LEVEL¤ Èu² *« W¾ONð bMÐ v«
rN « „d
Ò ×²¹
«—UO²šô« WLzU ¡UŽb²Ýô ENTER jG{≈ ∂
U¹u² *«Ë ›NONE ¤ l{u« błu¹ ¨qHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
«—UO²šô« WLzU w
Æ›1 ¤ v« ›8¤
U½«uDÝô« bOOIð r²¹ ÆW«d d¦_« u¼ ›1¤ ± Èu² *« Æ÷dF« bOÒI¹ ô ∫ ›NONE¤
Æ—U²<« Èu² *« s vKŽ√ WHMÒB*«
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SA
NONE
SET LEVEL
NONE
8
PASSWORD
____
EXIT
7
6
5
4
3
SELECT
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
ENTER
jG{« rŁ ¨»užd*« s¹b«u« qH Èu² —UO²šô
5Ø∞ jG{≈ ∑
‰UHÞ_« q³ s ÷dF« bOOIð
ÆENTER
Æ›PASSWORD¤ d « WLK bMÐ v«
rN « „d
Ò ×²¹
nM?Ž b?¼UA? sL?C²?ð w?²«
DVD VIDEO
U?½«uD?Ý« ÷dŽ b?O?
Ò Ið W?HO?þu« Ác?¼
rKO „UM¼ ÊU «–≈ ¨‰U¦*« qO³Ý vKŽ ÆÂb ² *« Áœb
Ò ×¹ Íc« Èu² LK ÎUF³ð ©ÁdOžË®
s W½uJ dÝ WLK ‰Ušœù ©9 v«
0
s® ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ∏
Æ U½U)« wŽUЗ r—
w²« b¼UA*« pKð q¦ ÊS nMŽ b¼UA sLC²¹Ë s¹b«u« qH WOUš l o«u²
ÆÈdš√ b¼UA0 UN«b³²Ý« Ë√ UNcŠ r²¹ U¼Ëb¼UA¹ Ê√ ‰UHÞú b¹dð ô
…d ‰Ë_ s¹b«u« qH W¾ON²
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SA
SET LEVEL
NONE
PASSWORD
1234
EXIT
ÆOTHERS åp– dOžò
NEW PASSWORD? ... PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEY
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
SELECT
ENTER
[PARENTAL LOCK]
ÆENTER jG{≈ π
ÆX9 b s¹b«u« qH WOUš W¾ONð ÊuJð pcÐ
v« „bOF¹ Èdš√ …d
ENTER jG{ Æ›EXIT¤ ¡U?N½ù« bMÐ v«
rN « „d
Ò ×²¹
Æ öOCH²« WýUA ›OTHERS¤ «—UO²š« WLzU
tOłuð
ÆENTER jG{ q³ p– qF≈ ¨∏ …uD)« w d « WLK dOOGð
«—UO²š« WLzU ¡UŽb²ÝUÐ r ±
—UO²šô
p¹dײ
5Ø∞ jG{≈ ≤
ÆENTER
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ s¹b«u« qH
jG{« rŁ
U½UOÐ WýUý dNEð
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SA
SET LEVEL
NONE
PASSWORD
____
EXIT
œ—√ « –≈
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS CHOICE.
∂∞
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
60
19/5/03, 1:57 PM
wÐdŽ
¨›COUNTRY CODE¤ WËb« e— v«
U¾ON²« dOOGð
WOzb³*«
U¾ON²« dOOGð
U¾ON²« dOOG²
wÐdŽ
UβR s¹b«u« qH pH
U½«uDÝô« iFÐ ÷dŽ ÊuJ¹ bI W—U WLO vKŽ QON s¹b«u« qH Èu² ÊU «–≈
ÆbFÐ ULO s¹b«u« qH
U¾ONð dOOGð pMJ1
Æ‚öÞù« vKŽ sJ2 dOž
q?H
U?½UOÐ W?ýUý d?NE?ð ¨UN{d?Ž ‰ËU%Ë W?½«uDÝô« p?Kð q?¦ ‰U?šœSÐ ÂuI?ð Ub?MŽ
ÆOTHERS
s¹b«u?« qH p b¹dð XM? «–≈ ULŽ …d H² ? Êu¹eHK²« W?ýUý vKŽ WOU²?« s¹b«u«
Æô Â√ ÎU²R
[TEMPORARY RELEASE] v«
[PARENTAL LOCK]
«—UO²š« WLzU ¡UŽb²ÝUÐ r ±
—U??O?²?šô
p??¹d?×?²? ∞Ø5 j??G?{≈ ≤
ÆENTER jG{«Ë
p¹dײ ∞Ø5 jG{≈ ±
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ s¹b«u« qH
ÆENTER jG{« rŁ
¨[PASSWORD] d? ?« WLK bMÐ v«
U½UOÐ WýUý dNEð
r?N? ?« dOA¹ ULMOÐ ≥
r?Ł W?O?U?(« W?O?ŽUÐd« d « WLK ‰Ušœù ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
ÆENTER jG{«
PARENTAL LOCK
TEMPORARY RELEASE
d ?« WLK? XK?šœ√ «–≈
NOT RELEASE
PASSWORD
____
[COUNTRY CODE] WËb« e?— v«
rN? « „d
Ò ×?²¹
ÆW×O×B«
°QDš®
SELECT
“WRONG! RETRY...” …—U³F« dNEð ¨W×O× dOž dÝ WLK XKšœ√ «–≈
ÆWOU²« …uD)« v« ‰UI²½ô« pMJ1 ôË Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ ©ÆÆÆWËU;« bŽ√
USE 5∞ TO SELECT, USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
ENTER
pMJ1Ë wU(« d « WLK ·cŠ r²¹ Æ“8888” r?d« qš
œ√ ¨d « WLK XO ½ «–≈
Æ…b¹bł dÝ WLK W¾ONð
ÆWOŽUÐd« d « WLK ‰Ušœù ©9 v«
0 s® ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈ ≤
Æ÷dFUÐ qG
Ò A*« √b³¹Ë s¹b«u« qH p r²¹
v KŽ
“WRONG! RETRY...” …—U?³F« d?NE?ð ¨W×O?× dO?ž dÝ W?LK X?Kšœ√ «–≈
QON*« Èu² *« Ë√
[COUNTRY CODE] WËb« e— dOOG² ¥
ENTER jG{≈ ¨[SET LEVEL]
«—UO²šô« WLzU ¡UŽb²Ýô
bM³« v«
r?N « dOA¹ ULMOÐ WOMF*« qHÝ√ v« W³× M*«
ÆW×O×B« d « WLK qš
œ√ ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý
W EŠ ö
rN « „d
Ò ×²¹ ¨ÁöŽ√ ≤ …uD)« w
Æ∞Ø5 Ê«—e« qLF¹ ôË
«d ≥ W×O× dOž dÝ WLK ‰UšœSÐ ÂuIð UbMŽ
Æ»užd*«
ÆENTER jG{« rŁ »užd*« —UO²šô« ¡UI²½ô
∞Ø5
jG{≈ µ
Æs¹b«u« qH Èu² —UO²š« bOFð Ê√ V−¹ ¨WËb« e— dOOG²Ð XL «–≈
[NOT RELEASE] qHI« p ÂbŽ bMÐ v« UÎOzUIKð
¨[PASSWORD] d? ?« WLK bMÐ v«
r?N? ?« dOA¹ ULMOÐ ∂
ÆWOŽUÐd« d « WLK ‰Ušœù ÂU—_« —«—“√ jG{≈
«–≈ Æ…b¹b'« d ?« WLK w¼ `³?Bð …uD)« Ác¼ w UN?Ušœ≈ r²¹ w²« d ?« WLK
Æd « WLK fH½ qšœ√ ¨q³ s X½U UL d « WLK fHMÐ ÿUH²Šô«
œ—√
ÆENTER jG{≈ ∑
v« „bOF¹ Èdš√ …d
ENTER jG{ Æ[EXIT] ¡UN½ù« bMÐ v«
rN « „d
Ò ×²¹
Æ öOCH²« WýUA [OTHERS] «—UO²š« WLzU
WEŠö
rN « „d
Ò ×²¹ ¨ÁöŽ√ ≥ …uD)« w
«d ≥ s d¦√ W×O× dOž dÝ WLK XKšœ√ «–≈
Æ∞Ø5 Ê«—e« qLF¹ ôË
∂±
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
61
19/5/03, 1:58 PM
[EXIT] ¡UN½ù« bMÐ v« ÎUOzUIKð
XV-NK58SL
©∂∞ W×HBK®
U¾ON²« dOOGð
s¹b«u« qHI oÞUM*«Ø‰Ëb« “u— WLzU ∫
Ê«œu «
b¹u «
…—uÐUG MÝ
U M OK O ¼ X ½U Ý
UOMOuKÝ
5¹U ÊUł Ë œ—U³UHÝ
UOUuKÝ
ÊuO«dOOÝ
uM¹—U ÊUÝ
‰UGM «
‰U u B «
 U M ¹— u Ý
w ³O M¹ d ÐË w u ð Ë U Ý
—ËœUHK «
W¹—u « WOÐdF « W¹—uN L'«
bMK¹“«uÝ
uUOAðË „d²« —eł
œUAð
WOÐuM'« WO ½dH« w{«—ô«
u žu ð
bMK¹Uð
ÊU² JOłUÞ
Ë ö O u ð
s K ² ML d ð
f ½u ð
U G ½u ð
WOdA« —uLOð
U O d ð
užUÐuðË œ«bOM¹dð
uUuð
WOMOB« Ê«u¹Uð WFÞUI ¨Ê«u¹Uð
…bײ*« UO½«eMð W¹—uNL ł ¨UOð«eMð
UO½«dË«
«bMžË«
U¹ôuK WFÐU²« …dOGB« —e'«
…bײ*«
…bײ*«
U¹ôu«
Í«užË—Ë«
ÊU² JГ˫
©ÊUJOðUH«® ÊUJOðUH« WM¹b WËœ
s¹œUM¹dž Ë XM M ÊUÝ
ôËeM
© WO½UD¹d³«® 5łdO —eł
© WOJ¹dô«® 5łdO —eł
 U M ²O
uð«u½U
U½uðu Ë fO«Ë —eł
« Ë u U Ý
s LO «
u¹U
UOö žu¹
UOI¹d« »uMł
U O³ « “
dOz«“
ÍuÐU³1“
SD
SE
SG
SH
SI
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
TG
TH
TJ
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
TT
TV
TW
TZ
UA
UG
UM
UOýu X½UÝ
5² M²AO
UJ½ö¹dÝ
U ¹d O³ O
uðu O
UO½«u¦O
⁄ — u ³L u
U OH ð ô
WO³OK« WOÐdF« W¹d¼UL'«
» d G* «
u U ½u
UO«bu W¹—uN Lł ¨UO«bu
dIAžb
‰Uý—U —eł
wU
— U / U O
UOuG M
ËUU
WOULA« U½U¹—U —eł
pOMOð—U
UO½U²¹—u
«d
Ò O ²½u
UDU
”uOA¹—u
n¹bU
ÍËôU
p O J * «
U¹eOU
oO³«“u
U O ³O U ½
UO½ËbOU uO½
d−OM«
pu—u½ …d¹eł
U¹dO−O½
«už«—UJO½
«b½ôu¼
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
VE
VG
VI
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
ZA
ZM
ZR
ZW
Z¹ËdM«
‰ U ³O ½
Ë—ƒU½
ÍuO½
Áb½ô“uO½
Ê U LŽ
Ô
ULMÓÐ
ËdOÐ
WO ½dH« UO OMOuÐ
U OM O ž u O½ « u ÐU Ð
5 ³K H «
ÊU² UÐ
« b M u Ð
ÊuKJO Ë dOOÐ ÊUÝ
ÊdOJ²OÐ
uJ¹— uðd¹uÐ
‰UGðd³«
ËôUÐ
Íuž«—UÐ
dD
Ê uO½u¹—
U O ½U Ë —
wÝËd« œU%ù«
« b ½« Ë —
W ¹œ u F «
ÊuuuÝ —eł
q OA O Ý
LC
LI
LK
LR
LS
LT
LU
LV
LY
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
ML
MM
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
MW
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
NI
NL
NO
NP
NR
NU
NZ
OM
PA
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
SC
UO½U³Ý≈
U O Ðu O Ł≈
«bMKM
w − O
©”UMOHU® b½öuH« —eł
…bײ*«
U ¹ô u « ® U ¹e O½ Ë d J ¹U
© W¹eO½ËdJ¹U*«
Ë—UH« —eł
U ½d
WLUF« ¨U ½d
ÊuÐUG «
…bײ*« WJ KL*«
«œUM¹dž
UOł—uł
WO ½dH« U½UOž
U ½U ž
‚—UÞ q³ł
b ½ ö M ¹d ž
U O³ U ž
U OM O ž
wÐuK¹œ«už
WOz«u²Ýô« UOMOž
ÊU½uO«
—ełË UOł—uł »uMł
WOÐuM'« g²¹Ëb½UÝ
ô U L O ð« u ž
« u ž
ËU OÐ UOMOž
U ½U O ž
m½u m½u¼
bU½Ëœ „U —eł Ë œdO¼ …d¹eł
”«—Ëb½u¼
UOð«Ëd
w ²¹ U ¼
U¹—UGM¼
UO O½Ëb½—
« b M d ¹«
qOz«dÝ«
bMN «
jO;« w WO½UD¹d³« w{«—ô«
ÍbMN «
‚«dF «
Ê«d¹« W¹—uN Lł® Ê«d¹«
©WOöÝô«
«bMK ¹¬
UOUD¹≈
U J ¹U U ł
Êœ—ô«
ÊUÐUO«
U OM O
ÊU²ÝeOžd
U¹œu³L
w ðU O ³¹ d O
© dLI« —eł® ”Ë—uuJ«
f OH O ½ Ë f ² O X ½U Ý
U¹—u W¹—uN Lł ¨U¹—u
WO³FA« WOÞ«dI1b«
U¹—u W¹—uN Lł ¨U¹—u
X¹uJ«
Ê U1U —eł
ÊU² š«e
WOÞ«dI1b« ”Ëô W¹—uNLł
WO³F A«
Ê U M ³
ES
ET
FI
FJ
FK
FM
A o×K
«——Ëb½«
…bײ*« WOÐdF«
« — U ù «
ÊU² ½UG«
«œuЗUÐ Ë «uGO²½«
öO G ½ «
UO½U³«
U OM O — «
FO
FR
FX
GA
GB
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
IE
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
bMu¼ eOKO²½«
ô u G½ «
wÐ u M ' « V D I «
5²Mł—ô«
W OJ ¹d ô « « Ë u U Ý
U LM«
UO«d²Ý«
U ÐË — Ë «
ÊU−OЗ–«
p ÝdN«Ë WMÝu³«
”ËœUЗUÐ
‘ œ öG M Ð
U J O− K Ð
uÝU UMO —uÐ
U ¹— U G K Ð
s ¹d׳«
Íb½Ë—uÐ
5 MO Ð
«œudOÐ
Âö « —«œ w½ËdÐ
U O H O u Ð
q¹“«d³«
U U N³ «
Ê U ðu Ð
XOuÐ …d¹eł
U ½« u ðu Ð
UOÝË—öOÐ
e OK O Ð
«bM
©mMKO® ”uuJ« —eł
vDÝu« UOI¹d« W¹—uNLł
u G½ u J «
«d ¹uÝ
ÃUF « qŠUÝ
„u —eł
w K OA ð
IS
IT
JM
JO
JP
KE
KG
KH
KI
KM
KN
KP
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
ÊËdOUJ«
5 B «
UO³uu
UJ¹—U²Ýu
UÐu
dCšô« ”“d«
”UL ¹dJ« —eł
’d ³
p O A ² « W ¹ — u N L ł
U O ½U * «
w ð u ³O ł
„ —U/b«
UJOMOËb«
ÊUJOMO Ëb« W¹—uNLł
dz«e'«
—Ëœ«u≈
U O ½u ² Ý ≈
d B
LB
WOÐdG« ¡«d×B«
U¹d²¹—≈
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
CA
CC
CF
CG
CH
CI
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
DK
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
∂≤
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
62
19/5/03, 1:58 PM
wÐdŽ
WOzb³*«
WOzb³*«
U¾ON²« dOOGð
wÐdŽ
©µ∏ Ë ¥≥ 5²×HBK®
UNð«—UB²š«Ë
UGK« ‰Ëbł ∫
B o×K
WO½«œuÝ
SU
WOË—Ë« ©Ê«dHŽ®
OM
W¹œu³L
KM
WOÝ—U
FA
W¹—UHŽ
AA
W¹b¹uÝ
SV
W ¹ —Ë«
OR
W¹bM
KN
W¹b½öMO
FI
W¹“U Ы
AB
WOKOŠ«uÝ
SW
WOÐU−MÐ
PA
(KOR) W¹—u
KO
WO−O
FJ
W¹e½UJ¹d«
AF
WOKOUð
TA
W¹b½ôuÐ
PL
W¹dOLýU
KS
WOÝË—U
FO
W¹dN«
AM
WOžuKOð
TE
u²ýuÐ ¨u²ýUÐ
PS
W¹œd
KU
WO½U¹e¹d
FY
WOÐdŽ
AR
WO½U² JOłUÞ
TG
WOUGðdÐ
PT
WO½Uðed
KY
W¹bMd¹«
GA
W¹eOUÝ«
AS
W¹b½ö¹Uð
TH
W¹—uA²O
QU
WOMOðô
LA
W¹bMKðuJÝ
GD
W¹—U1«
AY
WOM¹dGð
TI
WO MË— ≠ uð«—
RM
WOöGM
LN
WO½UO OUž
GL
WO½U−OЗ–«
AZ
WO½ULdð
TK
W¹b½ËdO
RN
WOÝËô
LO
WO½«—«už
GN
W¹dOJAÐ
BA
WOžuUGð
TL
WO½UË—
RO
WO½«uŁuO
LT
WOð«—Ułuž
GU
WOÝË—öOÐ
BE
WO½«u ²Ý
TN
WOÝË—
RU
WO²O ¨WOHðô
LV
WOÝËU¼
HA
W¹—UGKÐ
BG
WOUGMð
TO
W¹b½ËUOMO
RW
WOÝUžôU
MG
W¹bM¼
HI
W¹—UNÐ
BH
WOdð
TR
WO²¹dJO MÝ
SA
W¹—ËU
MI
WOð«Ëd
HR
WOö Ð
BI
WOG½u ð
TS
W¹bMÝ
SD
WO½ËbI
MK
W¹—UGM¼
HU
öGMÐ ¨WOUGMÐ
BN
BO
W¹—U²ð
TT
WOuGMÝ
SG
WOôU¹ö
ML
WOM—«
HY
WO²³ð
W¹uð
TW
WOð«Ëd ≠ WOÐd
SH
WOuGM
MN
WO«uGMd²½«
IA
WO½u²¹dÐ
BR
WO½«dË«
UK
W¹eOUGMÝ
SI
WO«bu
MO
WOuGMd²½«
IE
WO½ôU²
CA
CO
Ëœ—«
UR
WOUuKÝ
SK
WOŁ«—U
MR
WOJOÐu½«
IK
WO½UJOÝ—u
WO½U² JOГ˫
UZ
WOMOuKÝ
SL
(MAY) W¹eOU
MS
WO O½Ëb½«
IN
WOJOý
CS
WOUM²O
VI
WO½«uUÝ
SM
WODU
MT
W¹b½ö ¹«
IS
W¹eK¹Ë
CY
WOuÐôu
VO
U½uý
SN
WOdÐ
MY
W¹d³Ž
IW
WO—U/œ
DA
WOuË
WO
WOUu
SO
W¹—ËU½
NA
WOA¹œU¹
JI
WO½UðuÐ
DZ
WOÝuš
XH
WO½U³«
SQ
WOU³O½
NE
W¹ËUł
JW
WO½U½u¹
EL
WOÐË—«
YO
WOÐd
SR
W¹b½ôu¼
NL
WOł—uOł
KA
WO²½d³Ý«
EO
W¹uË“
ZU
WOð«u OÝ
SS
WO−¹Ëd½
NO
WO½U² š«e
KK
WO½«u²Ý«
ET
WOŁu OÝ
ST
WO½U² Ë«
OC
WOJ¹b½öM¹dž
KL
WOJOÝUÐ
EU
©µπ W×HBK®
WOLd«
Ãd )«
STREAM/PCM
.d²Ý XÐ
PCM ONLY
uKO ¥∏ l
PCM ¨XÐ ±∂ ¨eðd¼ uKO ¥∏
©WOKHÝ WM¹UF® u¹dO²Ý wDš
uKO π∂ l
PCM ¨XÐ ±∂ ¨eðd¼ uKO ¥∏
w Dš
.d²Ý XÐ wL— w³Ëœ
MPEG
u¹dO²Ý wDš
u¹dO²Ý wDš
.d²Ý XÐ
PCM
DTS ÂUE½ l DVD u¹bO W½«uDÝ«
PCM ¨XÐ ±∂ ¨eðd¼ uKO ¥∏
w³Ëœ ÂUE½ l
Audio CD/Video CDØSVCD W½«uDÝ«
PCM ¨XÐ ±∂ ¨‡¼ „ ¥∏
DTS ÂUE½ l Audio CD W½«uDÝ«
uB Ð
Ãdš błu¹ ô
63
CD-R/RW W½«uDÝ√
MP3/WMA
wƒ«—UJ« l{Ë sLC²ð W½«uDÝ« Í√
PCM
∂≥
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
wLd«
…UMI« œbF²
PCM ¨XÐ ±∂ ¨eðd¼ uKO ¥¥[±
XÐ ±∂ ¨‡¼ „ ¥¥[±Ø¥∏ ¨u¹dO²Ý wDš
DVD u¹bO W½«uDÝ«
MPEG ÂUE½ l DVD u¹bO W½«uDÝ«
PCM ¨XÐ ±∂ ¨eðd¼ uKO ¥∏
u¹dO²Ý wDš
DTS
DVD u¹bO W½«uDÝ«
PCM ¨eðd¼
XÐ ≤¥Ø≤≤ر∂ wDš
u¹dO²Ý
.d²Ý XÐ
DVD u¹bO W½«uDÝ«
PCM ¨eðd¼
XÐ ≤¥Ø≤∞ر∂ wDš
XÐ ±∂ ¨‡¼ „ ¥∏ ¨u¹dO²Ý wDš
DTS
C o×K
W½«uDÝô« Ÿu½
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
u¹dO²Ý wDš
«—Uýù« jD ∫
19/5/03, 1:58 PM
WOzb³*«
U¾ON²« dOOGð
U×KDB*« r−F ∫
525i/525p
525i Æ…—uB« …—Uýô ` *« WGOË ` *« ◊uDš œbŽ v« dOAð
ÆwÒbI²« ` *« WGOBÐ ` jš µ≤µ wMFð 525p Ê√ 5Š w …dÒHC WGOBÐ `
jš µ≤µ wMFð
Æ©Wd²A*« w«džuðuH«
JPEG WGOB WOŽd Ÿ«u½√ WŁöŁ „UM¼
«dOUJK Âb ² ð ∫©WOÝUÝ_« JPEG ® Baseline JPEG •
Aspect ratio œUFÐ_« W³ ½
ÆwK¹ UL
X½d²½ô« WJ³ýË WOLd«
W³ MUÐ …—uB« ÷dŽ q¦1 u¼Ë ÆÊu¹eHK²« w WKOD² *« …—uB« qJý œÒb% W³ ½
Æ≥∫¥ w¼ W¹bOKI²« WO½u¹eHK²« …—uB« œUFÐ√ W³ ½ ÆŸUHð—ö
Æa«
JPEG® Progressive JPEG •
JPEG® Lossless JPEG •
Linear PCM audio wD)« Â≈ wÝ wÐ u
5LCð® “pulse code modulation” W¹eOK$ù« …—U³FK —UB²š« w¼ PCM ·Ëd(«
ÊËœ ÎUOL— uB« dOHA² W¹œUF« WI¹dD« w¼ wD)« PCM WI¹dÞ Æ©wC³M« ed«
Ë DVD VIDEO U½«uDÝ« vKŽ …œułu*« WOðuB« «—U LK qLF² ð w¼Ë jG{
Æa« Audio CD
ÆX½d²½ô« WJ³A Âb ² ð ∫©wbI²«
Ò
ÆÂU¹_« Ác¼ qLF² ¹ U Ϋ—œU½ .b Ÿu½ ∫©bIH« W1bŽ
MP3 ≥ wÐ Â≈
MP3
U½UO³« w iHš oOI% pMJ1 MP3 ‰ULF²ÝUÐ ÆMPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
W¹eOK$ù« …—U³FK —UB²š« w¼ UNËdŠË
u×MÐ
uB«
U½UOÐ jGC WGO w¼
Bitstream .d²Ý XÐ
v« UNKOK% q³ ©…UM µ[± q¦®
«uMI« œbF²*«
Ò
Chapter/title nMB*«ØqBH«
u¼ qBH« ÆDVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« w r d³√ u¼ nMÒB*«Ë r dG√ u¼ qBH«
ÆAudio CD Ë«
Video CD U½«uDÝ« w ©—U *«® WOMž_« qŁU1Ë nMÒB*« ÂU √ bŠ√
Component video
„UM¼ Æ…—uB« UNM ÊuJ²ð w²« WKBHM*«
UuKF*« s
ÆY/CB(PB)ØCR(PR) Ë
UuKF® WOzd*«Ë WOŽuL *«
Æs«e²«Ë Ê«u_«Ë …¡U{ù«
ÆMPEG-4 Ë
© «uMI« œbF²
v« W½«uDÝô« vKŽ WK− *« …UM µ[±
MPEG® MPEG Multichannel
ÆpeM w ULMO « —Ëœ w
WM−K« ≠
National television system committee® NTSC wÝ ”≈ wð Ê≈
©w½u¹eHK²« ÂUEMK WOMÞu«
«bMË …bײ*«
U¹ôu« w Âb ² ð W½uK*«Ë W½uK*« dOž
U½u¹eHK²« ÂUEM WGO
ÆÊUÐUO«Ë pO J*«Ë
UuKF lOLł vKŽ Íu²%Ë
Dolby Digital (AC3) wLd« w³Ëœ
Èd ¹ WOHKš …UMË vM1 …UMË vDÝË …UMË Èd ¹ …UM s ÊuJ²¹
—UN− l ‰ULF²Ýö ¨iH M*« œœd²« dŁR …UM®
fO ÆwLd« ‚UDM« sL{ r²ð W'UF*«
Æ UuKF ©…UM µ[±®
u WGO ‚UD½ lOÝu²Ð ÂuIð WOU)« Ác¼
Áb& Íc« ¡«œ_« …UU× pOKŽ qÒN ¹ …UM µ[± WGO ‚UD½ lOÝuð Æ…UM ∑[± WGO
«—Uý≈
R/G/B q¦ ¨ U½uJ*« u¹bO Ÿ«u½√ iFÐ
pKN² LK …œÒbF*« u¹bOH« …eNł√ rEF w …œUŽ Âb ² ð …bŠ«Ë …—u …—Uý≈
UuKF*« jGC fO¹UI WŽuL−
MPEG-2 Ë MPEG-1 qLAð ”“MPEG”” fO¹UI
Ê√ 5Š w MPEG-1 ÂUE½ ”UÝ√ vKŽ ÂuIð MP3 Ë Video CD U½«uDÝ√
—UB²š« w¼ MPEG ·Ëd(« ÆMPEG-2 ÂUE½ ”UÝ√ vKŽ ÂuIð DVD U½«uDÝ«
Æ©Wdײ*« —uB« dOHAð ¡«d³š® Moving Picture Coding Experts Group …—U³F
U½uJ*« u¹bO
«uM Àö¦Ð …—uB«
Composite video VÒd*« u¹bOH«
MPEG
uB«
U½UO³ WOLd« WGOB«
ÆWHK²<« UNð«uM
Ʊ∞∫±
Æ©…—uB«Ë
uB«
«uM ∂ Ë– ÂUE½
LFE …UMË vM1 WOHKš …UMË
UOKLŽ q Æ©wŽdH« WCOH)«
«uM ∂ sLC²ð wLd« w³Ëœ
«œœd²«
U½«uDÝ« lOLł
Dolby Pro LogicØDolby Surround 5d²×LK wIDM*« w³ËœØw³Ëœ WÞUŠ≈
`L ð WI¹dDÐ 5ðUM w WOHKšË WOU√
w
u
«uM ¥ qO− ²Ð ÂuIð w³Ëœ WÞUŠ≈
uB« qO− ² ΫdE½Ë Æ÷dFK lЗ_« WOK_«
«uMI« …œUF²ÝUÐ “ud« qK;
Æ5ðUM Í– u¹dO²Ý ÂUE½ WDÝ«uÐ wFO³Þ qJAÐ t{dŽ ÊUJùUÐ ÊS 5ðUM
“ud« qK× sL{ W'UF*« w WN−² dz«Ëœ Àbײ ¹ 5d²×LK wIDM*« w³Ëœ
dOŁQð …œU¹e ©W²UB«
«uMI« Èu² iH M¹Ë WMOF
«uM Èu² b¹e¹ YO×Ю
w¼ W−O²M«Ë Æ—«u×K ÎUÝUÝ√ Âb ² Ôð vDÝË WŽULÝ nOC¹Ë ¨wzUCH« lÐUD«
©ÎUODš —uD« WÐËUM ≠
Æ «uMI« qB 5 %
Phase Alternation by Line® PAL ‰UÐ
ÆWOÐdG« UÐË—Ë√ w lÝ«Ë ‚UD½ vKŽ Âb ² ð ÊuK*« Êu¹eHK²« ÂUEM WGO
PBC ÷dF« w rJײ«
w rJײ«® “Playback control” W¹eOK$ù« …—U³FK —UB²š« w¼ PBC ·Ëd(«
pMJ1 ÆVideo CD (VCD) U½«uDÝ« ÷dŽ w rJײK WI¹dÞ w¼Ë ©÷dF«
Down-mix wCH)« Ãe*«
U½«uDÝ« qÒGA WDÝ«uÐ
Æu¹dO² « Ãdš
«uMI« œbF²*« WÞUŠù«
uB wKš«œ u¹dO²Ý Ãe
öu s wCH)« Ãe*«
Æ «—UO²šô« rz«u ‰öš s W½«uDÝô« l qŽUH²«
wÒbI²« ` *«
ÆbŠ«Ë —UÞS ¨…bŠ«Ë WFœ …—uBK WOI_« ◊uD)« lOLł ÷dF¹ wÒbI²« ` *«
…dÒHC*« u¹bOH« —u q¹uײРÂuI¹ wÒbI²« ` *« “«dÞ s
WýUAÐ qOu²K ©525p® wÒbI²« ` *« WGO v«
DVD U½«uDÝ« qGA
Ò
DVD U½«uDÝ« s ©525i®
DTS ”≈ wð Íœ
WKŁU2 ©…UM µ[±®
«uM ∂ s ÊuJ²ð wLd« WÞUŠù«
uB ©eOdð® dOHAð WGO
Æwł—Uš ‰U³I²Ý« “UNł w Ë√ qG
Ò A*« w U≈ ¨“u— qK× VKD²ð w¼Ë ÆwLd« w³Ëb
ÆDigital Theater Systems W¹eOK$ù« …—U³FK —UB²š« w¼
Æ UuKF ©…UM µ[±®
«uM ∂ vKŽ Íu²%
ÆÍ—cł qJAÐ ÍœuLF« qOKײ« b¹e¹ u¼Ë ÆwÒbIð ÷dŽ
DTS
DTS ·Ëd(«
U½«uDÝ« lOLł X O
(Dynamic range) wJOUM¹b« ‚UDM«
S-video qBHM*« u¹bOH«
w Âb ² ð ÆW³Òd*« W¹œUF«
«—Uý≈ Ãd ð ÆDVD
Æ «u_« √b¼√Ë vKŽ√ 5Ð ‚dH«
öOu²« w …—uB« …œuł sÒ % …—u …—Uý≈
Æ…—ÒuD²*« w½u¹eHK²« ÷dF« …eNł√Ë
ÆAudio CD Ë
dÒHC*« ` *«
DVD Ë VHS …eNł√
Track ©—U *«® WOMž_«
Video CD Ë SVCD U½«uDÝ« w r dG√
ÆWOHB½ ◊uDš 5Ð ULO ÷dF« WýUý vKŽ …—uB« dNEð ¨ÍœUF« u¹bOH« ÂUE½ w
nBM« ◊uDš 5Ð …—uB« s w½U¦« nBM« ◊uDš lC¹ dHÒHC*« ` *« ÂUE½
Æ…—uBK ‰Ë_«
WMA
U½UOÐ jGC WGO w¼Ë ¨“Windows Media Audio” …—U³F —UB²š« w¼ WMA
U½UO³« u …œuł ÆMicrosoft Corporation Wdý q³ s …—ÒuD uB«
r−Š ÊU Ê≈Ë ¨MP3 WGO …œuł fH½ w¼ WMA WGO ‰ULF²ÝUÐ WÞuGC*«
ÆMP3 UHK r−Š s dG√ WMA UHK
∂¥
AR52-64RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
64
19/5/03, 1:58 PM
wÐdŽ
JPEG
JPEG ·Ëd(« ÆUNM¹e ðË WMU « —uB« jGC «b ²Ýô« WFzUý UHK WGO
d¹uB²« ¡«d³š WŽuL−® Joint Photographic Experts Group …—U³FK —UB²š« w¼
D o×K
AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½
XOÝU q− Ë ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ¨Êu¹eHKð ® JVC W—U u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOGAð s AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½ pMJ1
Ò
Æq³I² *« «c¼ ‰öš s ©VCR u¹bOH«
wÐdŽ
rJײ« ÂUE½ ‰ULF²Ýô Æu¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« ·«dÞ« ‰öš s u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOGA² WHOþË nOC¹ U2 ¨AV COMPU LINK-III WHOþuÐ eÒN− q³I² *« «c¼
Æ∂∂ W×H vKŽ «¡«dłô«Ë qHÝô« w UDD<« ŸU³ðUÐ ¨UNKGAð Ê« b¹dð w²« u¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« qOuð v« ÃU²% ¨«c¼ bFÐ sŽ
Æu¹bOH« X½U½u³L …eNł« l od*« qOGA²« ULOKFð VÒO² v« ÎUC¹« lł—« •
AV COMPU LINK
VCR
u¹bOH« XOÝU q−
XV-NK58SL
qOuð ∫± öOu²«
Êu¹eHKð
W¹œUŠ« …dOG fЫu
AV
COMPU LINK EX
AV
COMPU LINK
AV
COMULINK-III
AV COMPU LINK
FM 75
AM LOOP
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
VIDEO
CENTER
W¹œUŠ« …dOG fЫu
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
VCR
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
COMPONENT VIDEO
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
LEFT
AV
COMPU LINK-ΙΙΙ
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
PR
DBS
CENTER
SPEAKER
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
PB
R
AV
COMULINK-III
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
MONITOR OUT
Y
SUBWOOFER
L
Ë«or
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
RX-ES1SL
∫ÂU¼
∫d¹c%
qË« ¨AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½ l Êu¹eHK²« qOuð bMŽ
ÆAV COMPU LINK-III Ë« AV COMPU LINK EX ·dÞ l q³I² *«
ÆAV COMPU LINK RECEIVER/AMP ·dÞ l q³I² *« quð ô
DBS
n«u*UÐ rJײ¹ Ê« AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUEM sJ1 ô
ÆDBS ·«dÞ« l ‰uu*«
UEŠö
UEŠö
Êu¹eHK²« qšœ l{u wzUIK²« —UO²šô« ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ô ¨X½U½u³LJ« u¹bO q³ ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ AV COMPU LINK EX ·dÞ l Êu¹eHK²«Ë q³I² *« qOuð bMŽ
Æ©∂∂ W×H dE½«®
ÆW¹œUŠ« …dOG fЫu pK²1 q³ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ q³I² *« l …dýU³ tKË« ¨q³I² *« «c¼ l Êu¹eHK²«Ë VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë« XV-NK58SL q¹œu*« qOuð bMŽ
•
•
u¹bOH« q³ qOuð ∫≤ öOu²«
sJ1 u¹bOH« ·«dÞ« Ÿ«u½« bŠ« ‰öš s q³I² *« «cN WKš«b« «—Uýô«Ë ¨X½U½u³L u¹bO Ë S-video ¨Vd u¹bO —u¹bOH« ·«dÞ« s Ÿ«u½« WŁö¦Ð eÒN− q³I² *« «c¼
ÆWOU²« Àö¦« ‚dD« bŠ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ q³I² *« «c¼ l Êu¹eHK²«Ë VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− qOuð v« ÃU²% «cN Æ·dD« Ÿu½ fH½ ‰öš s jI UNł«dš«
qšœ l{Ë j³{” r dE½«® `O× qJAÐ DBS n«u*«Ë DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA* X½U½u³LJ« u¹bO qšœ j³{« ¨AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½ qOuð bMŽ •
ÆÊu¹eHK²« vKŽ q³I² *« «cN `O×B« qšb« —UO²š« r²¹ s ¨p– fJFÐ ª©≤± W×H vKŽ“ DVD VIDEO/DBS VIDEO —u¹bOH« X½U½u³L “UNł
Êu¹eHKð
± u¹bOH« qšœ v«
S-video
Êu¹eHKð
≤ u¹bOH« qšœ v«
©Vd®
Êu¹eHKð
≤ u¹bOH« qšœ v«
©X½U½u³L®
pKÝ
u¹bO pKÝ
Vd
u¹bO pKÝ
X½U½u³L
WOU²« W×HB« vKŽ l³²¹
RX-ES1SL
RX-ES1SL
RX-ES1SL
S-video
pKÝ
u¹bO pKÝ
Vd
u¹bO pKÝ
X½U½u³L
—bB*« “UNł
—bB*« “UNł
—bB*« “UNł
·«dÞ« ‰öš s —bB*« “UNł qOuð bMŽ ∫± WUŠ
qšœ ·dÞ l q³I² *« «c¼ qË« ¨S-video
ÆS-video „öÝ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ Êu¹eHK²K ± u¹bOH«
·«dÞ« ‰öš s —bB*« “UNł qOuð bMŽ ∫≤ WUŠ
·dÞ l q³I² *« «c¼ qË« ¨Vd*« u¹bOH«
©Vd*« u¹bOH« qšœ® Êu¹eHK²K ≤ u¹bOH« qšœ
ÆVd*« u¹bOH« „öÝ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ
·«dÞ« ‰öš s —bB*« “UNł qOuð bMŽ ∫≥ WUŠ
l q³I² *« «c¼ qË« ¨X½U½u³LJ« u¹bO
u¹bO qšœ® Êu¹eHK²K ≤ u¹bOH« qšœ ·dÞ
u¹bO „öÝ« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ ©X½U½u³LJ«
ÆX½U½u³LJ«
∂µ
AR65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
65
19/5/03, 1:18 PM
…bŠ«Ë W LKÐ DVD W½«uDÝ« qOGAð
Ò
÷dFÐ ŸU²L²Ýô« pMJ1 ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qGA vKŽ ÷dF« ¡bÐ WDÝ«uÐ WÞU ³Ð
ÎÆU¹Ëb¹ Èdšô« `OðUH*« j³{ ÊËœ DVD W½«uDÝ«
«c¼ vKŽ wLd« qšb« ·«dÞ« ‰öš s DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA qOuð bMŽ •
—bB*« dOG¹Ë
Ò ÎUOJOðUuðË« q³I² *« qG²A¹ ¨©dþUM²*« qšb« —UO²š«Ë® q³I² *«
Æ“DVD MULTI” Ë« “DVD” l{Ë v«
«c¼ vKŽ dþUM²*« qšb« fÐUI ‰öš s DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA qOuð bMŽ •
v« —bB*« dOG¹Ë
Ò ÎUOJOðUuðË« q³I² *« qG²A¹ ¨©wLd« qšb« —UO²š«Ë® q³I² *«
Æ“DVD” l{Ë
pMJ1 v²Š VÝUM*« l{u*« v« qšb« l{Ë dOG¹Ë
Ò ÎUOJOðUuðË« Êu¹eHK²« qG²A¹
Æ…—uB« ÷dŽ …b¼UA
Êu¹eHK²« qšœ l{u wJOðUuðËô« —UO²šô«
Êu¹eHK²« dÒOG¹ ¨q³I² *« vKŽ qOGA²K —bBL “TV” Êu¹eHK²« —U² ð UbMŽ •
ÆÊu¹eHK²« …b¼UA s sJL²ð v²Š Êu¹eHK²« n«u v« qšb« l{Ë UOJOðUuðË«
Î
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë« “DVD MULTI” Ë« “DVD” W½«uDÝ« —U² ð UbMŽ •
Êu¹eHK²« dÒOG¹ ¨q³I² *« vKŽ qOGA²K —bBL “DBS” n«u Ë« “VCR”
©≤ u¹bO qšœ Ë« ± u¹bO qšœ U«® VÝUM*« l{u*« v« qšb« l{Ë UOJOðUuðË«
Î
Æ…—uB« ÷dŽ …b¼UA pMJ1 v²Š
WEŠö
WHOþË l Êu¹eHK²«Ë q³I² *« «c¼ qOuð bMŽ qG²Að ô nzUþu« Ác¼
Ác¼ w ÆAV COMPU LINK EX Êu¹eHK²« ·dÞ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ AV COMPU LINK
Æ∂µ W×H vKŽ ≤ WU(« Ë« ± WU(« v« ŸułdUÐ Êu¹eHK²« qOuð bŽ« ¨WU(«
ÎUOJOðUuðË« WUD« qBØqOuð
qGAË
Ò
VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë TV Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð ·UI¹«Ë qOGAð r²¹
Æq³I² *« l DVD W½«uDÝ«
ªq³I² *« qOGAð bMŽ
r²¹ ·uÝ “VCR” u¹bOH« XOÝU q− u¼ oÐU « w —U²<« —bB*« ÊU «–« •
ÎÆ
UOJOðUuðË«
VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð
Ë« “DVD” W½«uDÝ« qÒGA u¼ oÐU « w —U²<« —bB*« ÊU «–« •
DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGAË Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð r²¹ ·uÝ ¨“DVD MULTI”
ÎÆ
UOJOðUuðË«
·uÝ ¨“DBS” n«u Ë« “TV” Êu¹eHK²« u¼ oÐU « w —U²<« —bB*« ÊU «–« •
ÆjI ÎUOJOðUuðË« Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð r²¹
XOÝU q− Ë TV Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð ·UI¹« r²¹ ·uÝ q³I² *« qOGAð ·UI¹« bMŽ
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qGAË
Ò
VCR u¹bOH«
WEŠö
s ¨VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ qO− ²« ¡UMŁ« q³I² *« qOGAð XHË« «–«
ÆqO− ²« lÐU²¹ ·uÝ sJË ¨qOGA²« sŽ VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− nu²¹
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½
qÒGA ¨VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− XKË« b XM «–« Ʊ
cšQ Wײ l q³I² *« «c¼Ë Êu¹eHK²« ¨DVD W½«uDÝ«
—UO²« WUÞ „öÝ qB« ôË« ¨q³ s AC œœd²*« —UO²«
ÆAC œœd²*«
«c¼Ë Êu¹eHK²« ¨VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− qË« Æ≤
…dOG fЫu pK²9 w²« „öÝô« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ ¨q³I² *«
Æ©WId dOž® W¹œUŠ«
ÆWIÐU « W×HB« vKŽ “± öOu²«” r dE½«
•
XOÝU q− vKŽ uB« ÃdšØqšœ ·«dÞ« qË« Æ≥
«c¼Ë Êu¹eHK²« ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ¨VCR u¹bOH«
ÆRCA ”uÐœ fЫu ‰ULF²ÝUÐ q³I² *«
Ʊ± Ë ∏ U×HB« dE½«
•
XOÝU q− vKŽ u¹bOH« ÃdšØqšœ ·«dÞ« qË« Æ¥
«c¼Ë Êu¹eHK²« ¨DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ¨VCR u¹bOH«
fÐU Ë« RCA ”uÐœ fЫu ‰ULF²ÝUÐ q³I² *«
ÆX½U½u³L u¹bO fЫu Ë« S-video
ÆWIÐU « W×HB« vKŽ “≤ öOu²«” r dE½«
•
X½U½u³LJ« …eNłô AC œœd²*« —UO²« WUÞ „öÝ« qË« Ƶ
ÆAC œœd²*« —UO²« cšQ Wײ l q³I² *«Ë
qOuð bFÐ …d ‰Ëô Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð bMŽ Æ∂
Êu¹eHK²« u Èu² iHš« ¨AV COMPU LINK
vKŽ uB« Èu² jÐU{ ‰ULF²ÝUÐ Èu² v½œ« vKŽ
ÆÊu¹eHK²«
qÒGý p– bFÐ rŁ ¨Wuu*« X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« ôË« qGý
Ò Æ∑
Æq³I² *« «c¼
bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË qLF²Ý« ¨VCR d¹bOH« XOÝU q− qOGAð bMŽ
Æ©VCR d¹bOH« XOÝU jG{≈® Æq³I² *« «c¼ l WId*«
•
nzUþË fLš ‰ULF²Ý« s AV COMPU LINK bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ÂUE½ pMJ1
Ò
Æ qHÝôUÐ Wł—b WOÝUÝ«
XOÝU q− Ë DVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGAË Êu¹eHK²UÐ bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
Ác¼ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²ÝUÐ VCR u¹bOH«
ÆqOUH²K ∂µ W×H dE½«
“UNł q vKŽ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« ”U Š v« …dýU³ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË tłË
ÆÁb¹dð X½U½u³L
•
…bŠ«Ë W LKÐ u¹bO qOGAð
q− qš«œ ` *« s W¹UL(« ÊU œułË ÊËœ u¹bO XOÝU ‰UšœUÐ WÞU ³Ð
Èdšô« `OðUH*« j³{ ÊËœ u¹bOH« qOGA²Ð ŸU²L²Ýô« pMJ1 ¨VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ —bB*« dOG¹Ë
Ò ÎUOJOðUuðË« q³I² *« qG²A¹ ÆU¹Ëb¹
Î
Æ“VCR”
pMJ1 v²Š VÝUM*« l{u*« v« qšb« l{Ë dOG¹Ë
Ò ÎUOJOðUuðË« Êu¹eHK²« qG²A¹
Æ…—uB« ÷dŽ …b¼UA
vKŽ 3 qOGA²« —“ jG{« ¨` *« s W¹ULŠ ÊU œułuÐ u¹bO XOÝU ‰Ušœ« bMŽ
fH½ vKŽ qB% ¨pcÐ ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË vKŽ Ë« VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q−
ÆW−O²M«
∂∂
AR65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
66
19/5/03, 1:18 PM
wÐdŽ
AV COMPU LINK
Èdšô« JVC …eNł« qOGAð
VCR
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− 7
∫WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« ÎULz«œ pMJ1
wÐdŽ
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− ·UI¹« Ë« qOGAð
:VCR
¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨©—bB*« —UO²š« —“® VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− —“ jG{ bFÐ
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ WOU²« öOGA²«
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ «uMI« ÂU—« dOOGð
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ «uMI« ÂU—« —UO²š«
ÆqOGA²« ¡bÐ
ÆqOGA²« ·UI¹«
Æ3 —e« jG{« ¨qOGA²« WFÐU²* ÆÎU²R qOGA²« ·UI¹«
ÆWŽd Ð j¹dA« .bIð
Æj¹dA« lOłdð
DVD
:CHANNEL +/–
:1 – 9, 0
«c¼ jI fO qOGA² bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1
ÆJVC W—U Èdšô« …eNłô« qOGAð ÎUC¹« pMJ1 sJË q³I² *«
ÆÈdšô« …eNłôUÐ ’U)« od*« qOGA²« ULOKFð VÒO² v« ÎUC¹« lł—« •
«—Uý« s 5Žu½ ‰u³ UNMJ1 JVC VCRs u¹bOH« XOÝU ö− iFÐ –
Ác¼ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠu sJ1 Æ“B” Ë “A” bFÐ sŽ rJ% …dHOý —rJײ«
Æ“A” w¼ t bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …dHOý Íc« VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− qGAð Ê«
”U Š v« …dýU³ bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË tłË ¨Èdšô« …eNłô« qOGA² •
ÆÁb¹dð Íc« “UN'« vKŽ bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{«
:3
:7
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
:8
OPEN/CLOSE
:¡
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
:1
W½«uDÝ« qGA
Ò 7
TV VOL
CHANNEL
VOLUME
∫WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« ÎULz«œ pMJ1
TUNING
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA ·UI¹« Ë« qOGAð
:DVD
TUNING
MEMORY
—UO²š« —“® DVD —e« jG{ rŁ “DVD” vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{ bFÐ
ÆDVD W½«uDÝ« qÒGA vKŽ WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨©—bB*«
ÆqOGA²« ¡bÐ
ÆqOGA²« ·UI¹«
Æ3 —e« jG{« ¨qOGA²« WFÐU²* ÆÎU²R qOGA²« ·UI¹«
ÆwU²« qBH« W¹«bÐ v« eHI«
Æ©oÐU « Ë«® wU(« qBH« W¹«bÐ v« Ÿułd«
WLzUI« WýUý ` Ë« ÷dŽ
ÆWLzUI« WýUý vKŽ bMÐ —UO²š«
Æ—U²<« bM³« ‰Ušœ«
FM MODE
TOP MENU
MENU
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
:3
:7
:8
:¢
:4
AUDIO
KARAOKE SOUND
KEY
ANGLE
:5/∞/3/2
:ENTER
REPEAT
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
KEY
:MENU
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
2
BASS
4
5
7
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
qOGAð —«—“« ‰ULF²Ý« ÎUC¹« pMJ1
¡, 1, OPEN/CLOSE,
AUDIO, SUBTITLE, TITLE/GROUP, RETURN, ZOOM, VFP,
PUTPUT , ANGLE, REPEAT, DIMMER, 3D, PROGRESSIVE,
JVC
DVD
KARAOKE
Æ
W—U
W½«uDÝ« qÒGA qOGA² ÂU—ô« —«—“«Ë
TV
Êu¹eHK²« 7
∫WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« ÎULz«œ pMJ1
ÆÊu¹eHK²« ·UI¹« Ë« qOGAð
ÆÊu¹eHK²« vKŽ uB« Èu² q¹bFð
vKŽ ©Êu¹eHK²« n«uË u¹bO qšœ® qšb« l{Ë dOOGð
ÆÊu¹eHK²«
:TV
:TV VOL +/–
:TV/VIDEO
WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨©—bB*« —UO²š« —“® TV Êu¹eHK²« —“ jG{ bFÐ
ÆÊu¹eHK²« vKŽ
Æ «uMI« ÂU—« dOOGð
Æ «uMI« ÂU—« —UO²š«
ÆTV RETURN Êu¹eHK²K Ÿułd« —“ q¦ qG²A¹
∂∑
AR65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
67
19/5/03, 1:19 PM
:CHANNEL +/–
:1 – 9, 0, +10 (100+)
:10 (TV RETURN)
Èdšô« …eNłô« qOGAð
n«u qOGA² qIMK WKÐUI« «—Uýô« dOOGð ❏
—e« vKŽ jGC« lÐUðË jG{« ±
ÆDBS —e« jG{« ≤
Æ∞ d?H Ë ¨π ≠ ± —«—“ô« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ lÒM?BÔ*« …dHOý qšœ« ≥
ÆDBS —e« —— ¥
ÆDBS
ÆDBS n«u vKŽ WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨Êô«
ÆDBS n«u ·UI¹« Ë« qOGAð
:DBS
öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨©—bB*« —UO²š« —“® DBS n«u*« —“ jG{ bFÐ
ÆDBS n«u WOU²«
ÆDBS n«u vKŽ «uMI« ÂU—« dOOGð :CHANNEL +/–
ÆDBS n«u vKŽ «uMI« ÂU—« —UO²š«
:1 – 9, 0
ÆDBS —e« jG{ WDÝ«uÐ DBS n«u*« qOGAð ‰ËUŠ
…dHOA« XKšœ« p½« wMF¹ «c¼ ¨DBS n«u*« nu²¹ Ë« qG²A¹ UbMŽ
ÆW×O×B«
µ
‰ËUŠ ¨DBS n«u*« W—U* Wł—b …dHOý s d¦« „UM¼ ÊU «–«
ÆW×O×B« …dHOA« ‰Ušœ« r²¹ Ê« W¹UG …dHOý q ‰Ušœ«
…bŠË ‰ULF²Ý« pMJ1 ¨qIMK WKÐUI« «—Uýô« dOOGð WDÝ«uÐ
s WFMB*« …eNłô« qOGA² “UN'« «c¼ l WId*« bFÐ sŽ rJײ«
ÆÈdš« Udý q³
ÆÈdšô« …eNłô« l WId*« qOGA²« ULOKFð U³O² v« UC¹«
Î lł—«
v« ÃU²% ôË« ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË WDÝ«uÐ Ác¼ X½U½u³LJ« …eNł« qOGA²
VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− Ë DBS n«u s qJ lMB
Ò Ô*« «dHOý j³{
ÆTV Êu¹eHK²«Ë
ÆÈdš« …d lMÒB*Ô« «dHOý j³{« ¨bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË U¹—UDÐ ‰«b³²Ý« bFÐ
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
01*
02
03 – 06
07 – 15
16 – 18
19
20 – 22
23, 24
25 – 30
31, 32
33 – 35
36
37
38, 39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
AUDIO
KARAOKE
AUDIO/TV
/VCR/DBS
DVD
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
DVD MULTI
FM/AM
TV/VIDEO
MUTING
TV VOL
CHANNEL
VOLUME
FM MODE
TUNING
MEMORY
n«u* lMB
Ò Ô*« «dHOý
«dHOA«
•
ÆAUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{«
TUNING
DBS
•
•
TOP MENU
MENU
lMB
Ò *«Ô
G.I.
GEMINI
HAMLIN
JERROLD
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
S. ATLANTA
SAMSUNG
TOCOM
ZENITH
ECHOSTAR
G.I.
HITACHI
HUGHES
PANASONIC
PRIMESTAR
RCA
SONY
TOSHIBA
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
CHOICE
AUDIO
RESERVE
ECHO
SUBTITLE TITLE/GROUP RETURN
KARAOKE SOUND
KEY
ANGLE
KEY
REPEAT
BASS
1
ZOOM
PROGRESSIVE
VFP
KARAOKE
2
BASS
4
5
7
8
TREBLE
3
TREBLE
6
9
100+
TV RETURN
10
0
VOCAL
EFFECT
+10
3D
DIMMER
SLEEP ANALOG/DIGITAL CANCEL
INPUT
SMART S. SETUP BASS BOOST
A.POSITION
TONE
SURROUND
DECODE
TEST
EFFECT
SUBWFR CENTER
L SURR R
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
∂∏
AR65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
68
20/5/03, 8:59 AM
wÐdŽ
DBS
Èdšô« …eNłô« qOGAð
TV
Êu¹eHK²K qIMK WKÐUI« «—Uýô« dOOGð ❏
—e« vKŽ jGC« lÐUðË jG{«
ÆTV —e« jG{«
Æ∞ d?H Ë ¨π ≠ ± —«—“ô« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ lÒM?BÔ*« …dHOý qšœ«
ÆTV —e« —dŠ
wÐdŽ
ÆTV
±
≤
≥
¥
VCR
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− * qIMK WKÐUI« «—Uýô« dOOGð ❏
—e« vKŽ jGC« lÐUðË jG{« ±
ÆVCR —e« jG{« ≤
Æ∞ d?H Ë ¨π ≠ ± —«—“ô« ‰ULF²ÝUÐ lÒM?BÔ*« …dHOý qšœ« ≥
ÆVCR —e« —dŠ ¥
ÆVCR
ÆÊu¹eHK²« vKŽ WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨Êô«
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ WOU²« öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨Êô«
ÆÊu¹eHK²« ·UI¹« Ë« qOGAð
:TV
Æ uB« Èu² q¹bFð :TV VOL +/–
u¹bO Ë« TV Êu¹eHKð U«® qšb« l{Ë dOOGð :TV/VIDEO
Æ©VIDEO
öOGA²« ¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨©—bB*« —UO²š« —“® TV Êu¹eHK²« —“ jG{ bFÐ
ÆTV Êu¹eHK²« WOU²«
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− ·UI¹« Ë« qOGAð
:VCR
¡«dł« pMJ1 ¨©—bB*« —UO²š« —“® VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− —“ jG{ bFÐ
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− WOU²« öOGA²«
Æ «uMI« ÂU—« dOOGð :CHANNEL +/–
Æ «uMI« ÂU—« —UO²š«
:1 – 9, 0
ÆTV —e« jG{ WDÝ«uÐ Êu¹eHK²« qOGAð ‰ËUŠ
…dHOA« XKšœ« p½« wMF¹ «c¼ ¨Êu¹eHK²« nu²¹ Ë« qG²A¹ UbMŽ
ÆW×O×B«
µ
‰Ušœ« ‰ËUŠ ¨TV Êu¹eHK²« W—U* Wł—b …dHOý s d¦« „UM¼ ÊU «–«
ÆW×O×B« …dHOA« ‰Ušœ« r²¹ Ê« W¹UG …dHOý q
Êu¹eHK²K lMB
Ò Ô*« «dHOý
«dHOA«
01*
02
03
04
05
06 – 08
09 – 13
14
15, 16
17
18, 19
20, 21
22, 23
24
25
25
26, 27
24
28
29
30
31
02, 17, 32 – 35
36, 37
14
38
39
40
41, 42
38
43,44
lMB
Ò *«Ô
JVC
AKAI
BELL+HOWELL
CENTURION
CORONAD
DAEWOO
EMERSON
FISHER
GE•PANA
GE•RCA
GOLD STAR
HITACHI
KTV
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROSCAN
QUASAR
RADIOSHACK
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SEARS
SHARP
SONY
SYMPHONIC
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
rJײ« …bŠË ¨U¼dOOGð - «–« Æo³ —UFý« ÊËœ dOOG²K W{dF lMB
Ò Ô*« «dHOý
Æ“UN'« qOGAð UNMJ1 ô Ác¼ bFÐ sŽ
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ «uMI« ÂU—« dOOGð
ÆVCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− vKŽ «uMI« ÂU—« —UO²š«
ÆqOGA²« ¡bÐ
ÆqOGA²« ·UI¹«
Æ3 —e« jG{« ¨qOGA²« WFÐU²* ÆUβR qOGA²« ·UI¹«
ÆWŽd Ð j¹dA« .bIð
Æj¹dA« lOłdð
ÆVCR
69
:1 – 9, 0
:3
:7
:8
:¡
:1
—e« jG{ WDÝ«uÐ VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− qOGAð ‰ËUŠ µ
p½« wMF¹ «c¼ ¨VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− nu²¹ Ë« qG²A¹ UbMŽ
ÆW×O×B« …dHOA« XKšœ«
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− W—U* Wł—b …dHOý s d¦« „UM¼ ÊU «–«
ÆW×O×B« …dHOA« ‰Ušœ« r²¹ Ê« W¹UG …dHOý q ‰Ušœ« ‰ËUŠ ¨VCR
VCR
u¹bOH« XOÝU q− * lMB
Ò Ô*« «dHOý
«dHOA«
lMB
Ò *«Ô
01* – 04
05
06 – 08
09
10
11 – 15
16 – 19
20, 21
22
23
24
25
20, 26
27 – 29
30 – 33
34, 35
36, 37
27
38
39 – 41
16 – 19
42
43, 44
45
46 – 51
52
53, 54
55
56
JVC
AIWA
AKAI
BELL+HOWELL
DAEWOO
EMERSON
FISHER
G.E.
GO VIDEO
GOLD STAR
GO-VIDEO A
GO-VIDEO B
HITACHI
MAGNAVOX
MITSUBISHI
NEC
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SCOTT
SHARP
SHINTOM
SONY
SYMPHO
TEKNICA
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
wz«b²Ðô« j³C« *
∂π
AR65-69RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
:CHANNEL +/–
19/5/03, 1:19 PM
UNŠö«Ë ‰UDŽô« sŽ Y׳«
ÆJVC …eNł« W½UO Ubšed0 qBð« ¨UNKŠ lOD² ð ô qUA Í« „UM¼ błu¹ ÊU «–«ÆWOuO« qOGA²« qUA ÒqŠ w pðbŽU * ‰Ëb'« «c¼ qLF²Ý«
RX-ES1SL
WKJA*«
qL²;« V³ «
ÆAC œœd²*« —UO²« cšQ Wײ qš«œ fÐUI« qšœ«
Ɖuu dOž WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ
ÆWOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qOuð r²¹ ô
ÎÆU¹—Ëd{ p– ÊU «–« UNKOuð bŽ«Ë WŽUL « öOuð h׫
ÆWuu dOž WŽUL « …—Uý« qЫu
Æ UŽUL « s u —bB¹ ô
Æ`O×B« —bB*« d²š«
Æ uB« r² WHOþË ¡UGô MUTING —e« jG{«
Æ`O×B« ©wL— Ë« dþUM²® qšb« l{Ë d²š«
ÆQDš —bB —UO²š« Æ uB« r² WHOþË qOGAð ©wL— Ë« dþUM²® qšœ l{Ë —UO²š« Æ QDš
Æ öOu²« h׫
ÆQDš öOu²«
Æ©≤≥ W×H dE½«® Æ`O× qJAÐ Ê“«u²« ‰bŽ
Ò
ÆqOGA²« —bB nË« Ʊ
Æ uB« Èu² ‰ÒbŽË ¨Èdš« …d “UN'« qGý
Ò Æ≤
ÆWŽUL « öOuð h׫
ÆqOuUÐ qBð« ¨…dz«b« w dOBIð „UM¼ sJ¹ r «–«
Æ…bŠ«Ë WŽULÝ vKŽ ◊u³C Ê“«u²«
uB« V³ Ð UŽUL « vKŽ bz«“ qLŠ błu¹
ÆlHðd*«
œułË V³ Ð UŽUL « vKŽ bz«“ qLŠ błu¹
Æ UŽUL « ·«dÞ« vKŽ …dz«b« w dOBIð
ÆWOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ qB bFÐ pKOË dA²Ý«
WODKH« V³ Ð “UN'« vKŽ bz«“ qLŠ błu¹
ÆWOUF«
wÐdŽ
q(«
ÂUŽ
ÆjI …bŠ«Ë WŽULÝ s uB«
l{Ë vKŽ Ë p– WŽd Ð “UN'« nu²¹ sJË
ÆqOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô«
jG{« p– bFÐ rŁ ¨TONE Ë« —bB —UO²š« —“ ôË« jG{« Íc« qOGA²K …e¼Uł dOž bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË Ê« U¼b¹dð UL bFÐ rŽ rJײ« …bŠË qG²Að ô
ÆÁb¹dð
©Æ∂π ≠ ∂∑ Ë ≤≤ U×HB« dE½«® ÆUNULF²Ý« b¹dð w²« —«—“ô«
ÆqG²Að
ÆozUF« ‰“«
Æ U¹—UD³« ‰b³²Ý«
Æ`O×B« l{u*« vKŽ l{u« V ²M j³{«
Æ©≤≥ W×H dE½«® uB« l{u Èu² ‰bŽ
Ò
”U ŠË bFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË 5Ð ozUŽ „UM¼
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ«
ÆWHOF{ U¹—UD³«
l{u vKŽ ◊u³C l{u« V ²M
ÆQDš
ÆVÝUM*« ’U³« Èu² —UO²š« r²¹ r
ÆbFÐ sŽ rJײ« …bŠË qG²Að ô
bMŽ Ϋbł Íu qJAÐ ’U³ « u W¹uIð r²¹
Æu¹dO² « uBÐ ŸUL²Ýô«
∑∞
AR70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
70
20/5/03, 8:50 AM
UNŠö«Ë ‰UDŽô« sŽ Y׳«
jO;« uB«
DSPØ
wÐdŽ
q(«
qL²;« V³ «
j³{ h׫ Ë« …œbF² …UM Íu²×¹ ô ZU½dÐ qGý
Ò
ÆWŽUL «
WKJA*«
Íc« ZU½d³« vKŽ du² dOž jO;«
jI WOUô«
uB« l{Ë
ÆjO;«
uB« l{Ë —UO²š« sJ1 ô
ÆDSP
uB« l{Ë —UO²š« sJ1 ô
UŽUL « j³{ - t½« Ë« ¨qG²A¹
ƉULF²Ýö
j ³ { h × « Ë« d þUM ² Ë « wD š
PCM ZU½ dÐ q GÒý
ÆWŽUL «
Íc« ZU½d³« vKŽ du² dOž
jI WOUô«
DSP
uB« l{Ë
UŽUL « j³{ - t½« Ë« ¨qG²A¹
ƉULF²Ýö
ÆpKOuÐ qBð« Ë« wł—Uš
FM Włu wz«u¼ qË«
ÆWHOF{ WK³I² *« …—Uýô«
Æ…b¹bł WD× d²š«
ÆΫbł …bOFÐ ‰UÝ—ô« WD×
wz«uN« vKŽ puBŠ s bQ²K pKOË l h׫
ÆQDš wz«u¼ ‰ULF²Ý« -
¡UMŁ« …dL² …—uBÐ 5MÞ Ë« W N ¼
FM/AM
Włu
ÆFM Włu ‰U³I²Ý«
Æ`O×B«
Æ öOu²« h׫
ÆW×O× …—uBÐ Wuu dOž
Æ «—UO « WdŠ WIDM sŽ d¦« wz«uN« bFЫ
UOz«uN«
Æ «—UO « s qOGAð g¹uAð
‰U³I²Ý« ¡UMŁ« WIDIÞ ZO−{ U½UOŠ«
Î
ÆFM Włu
WEŠö
«c¼ ÆÎUOJOðUuðË«
uB« œUF² ¹ ·uÝ sJË ‚d³«
UM×ý m¹dHð q¦ wł—U)«
uB« V³ Ð
uBK lDI² g¹uAð Àb×¹ Ê« sJ1 ¨—u;« bײ*« qOu²« ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ
Æ“UN'UÐ qDŽ fO
∑±
AR70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
71
19/5/03, 1:37 PM
UNŠö«Ë ‰UDŽô« sŽ Y׳«
XV-NK58SL
qL²;« V³ «
ÆrJ× qJAÐ qšb dOž WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« fÐU
.ÆWOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qOuð r²¹ ô
ÆW½«uDÝô« ·öž vKŽ Ÿu³D*« W½«uDÝö WIDM*« …dHOý h׫
l oÐUD²ð ô WKšb*« W½«uDÝö WIDM*« …dHOý
“REGION CODE ERROR!” …—Uýô« ÷dFð
ÆqGA*«
Ò
ÆÊu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ
rŁ ¨WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ Ÿe½« rŁ WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB«
¡UÐdNJ« Ë« ‚d³« V³ Ð dðuO³LËdJO*UÐ qDŽ
ÆqOGA²« sJ1 ô
ÆÈdš« …d WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« pKÝ qË«
ÆWMU «
bFÐ ÎUIŠô WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qË« rŁ ¨WOzUÐdNJ« WUD« qB«
Wł—œ w ¡vłUH*« dOOG²« t³³Ý WÐuÞdK nŁUJð
Æ UŽUÝ …bŽ
ÆWÐuÞd« Ë« …—«d(«
Æ©≥≥ W×H dE½«® W½«uDÝô« ‰b³²Ý«Ë h׫
W½«uDÝ« ‰Ušœ« - ¨qOGA²UÐ `L ð ô W½«uDÝô«
WUD«
ÆrJ× qJAÐ fÐUI« qšœ«
ÆqOGA²K WKÐU dOž
u¹bO XOÝU q− l …dýU³ ‰uu qGA*«
Ò
ÆWKÒGA l³D« ‚uIŠ W¹ULŠ WHOþËË
ÆWýuA …—uB«
VCR
dOž …—uB« ÊuJð Ê« sJ1 ¨ U½«uDÝô« iFÐ l
Ë«
vKŽ WOHK)« WŠuK« vKŽ
525i/525p/REMOTE V ²M*« j³{«
“REMOTE” vKŽ tD³{« Ë« “525i”
dE½«® PROGRESSIVE —e« ‰ULF²Ý« WDÝ«uÐ ÂbI²*« ` *«
Ë«
Æ©±∞ W×H
l{Ë vKŽ
[D.RANGE CONTROL] qOCH²« j³{«
Æ©µπ W×H dE½«® [TV MODE]
[LOW] l{Ë vKŽ [OUTPUT LEVEL] qOCH²« j³{«
Æ©µπ W×H dE½«®
ÆW½«uDÝô« qOGAð sJ1 ô
vKŽ
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Ãdš
ÆS-VIDEO
s ržd« vKŽ ÂbI²*« ` *« l{Ë w qGA*«
Ò
Ë« Êu¹eHK²« WýUý vKŽ …—u ÷dŽ r²¹ ô
VIDEO f³I WDÝ«uÐ Êu¹eHK²« l tKOuð
ÆS-VIDEO
Æ5L v« WL I Ë« W×{«Ë dOž WýUA«
[D.RANGE CONTROL] qOCH²« j³{ - DVD VIDEO W½«uDÝ« qOGAð u Èu²
Æ[TV MODE] j³C« dOž j³{
ÆÊu¹eHK²« YÐ Èu² s q«
vKŽ
[OUTPUT LEVEL] qOCH²« j³{ Æ[STANDARD] j³{
©UDF WGOBЮ” WK−
ÆÁuA dþUM²*«
MP3/WMA W½«uDÝ«
uB« Ãdš
Æ u —bB¹ ô
Æ“WŽuL:« WÐU²
ÆWOzU−N« ·dŠô« VOðdð V Š
UHK*« qOGA²Ð qÒGA*« ÂuI¹
Íc« VOðd²UÐ © «—U *«®
ÆqOGA²« nK² ¹ Ê« sJ1 ¨pc
Æl³D« ‚uI×Ð WOL×
ÆWMA
ÆÍbŽUI« j)«
«–
UHK qOGAð qÒGALK sJ1 ô
UHK q¦
UHK rŽb¹ ô qGA*«
Ò
JPEG WGO jI rŽb¹ qGA*«
Ò
UHK*« qOGAð r²¹ ô
ÆtÐ XK−Ý
Æl³D« ‚uI×Ð wL× nK*«
ÆWMA
UHK qOGAð sJ1 ô
ÆWIObUÐ X¹UÐuKO ¥∏ s q« X¹UÐ ‰bF0 q− nK*«
ÆJPEG …bŽU jš X O
UHK*« WGO
v« WýUA« ‰uײð Ë« ¨…—u ÷dŽ r²¹ ô
ÆœuÝô« ÊuK«
ÆqOCH²« WýUý qOGAð sJ1 ô
ÆJPEG W½«uDÝ« ‰Ušœ« bMŽ qOCH²« WýUý qOGAð pMJ1 ô
qOGAð ¡UMŁ«
KARAOKE tË«dJ« WHOþË qOGAð pMJ1 ô
ÆMP3/WMA W½«uDÝ«
ÆMP3/WMA
W½«uDÝ« qOGAð -
ÆKARAOKE tË«dJ« WHOþË qOGAð sJ1 ô
ÆvIOÝu*« ÕU²H qI½ sJ1 ô
WOðu W½«uDÝ« qOGAð bMŽ wIOÝu*« ÕU²H*« qI½ pMJ1 ô
Íu²%
DVD W½«uDÝ« Ë« ¨DTS ÂUE½ vKŽ Íu²% Audio CD
π∂ wDš PCM Ë« MPEG …œbF² …UM ¨DTS ÂUE½ vKŽ
Æeðd¼uKO
ÆKARAOKE tË«dJ« WHOþË qOGAð nË«
uB«
©fÐUI® f³I ‰ULF²Ý« bMŽ W¼uA …—uB«
ÆS-video
W½«uDÝ«
qOuðË X½U½u³LJ« qOuð s ö qLŽ -
MP3/WMA
ÆqLF² *« dOž qOu²« qB«
[FILM] l{Ë vKŽ
…—uB«
[PICTURE SOURCE] l{Ë j³{ bMŽ W×{«Ë
Æ[AUTO] Ë«
l{Ë qOGAð nË«Ë
[LOCK] …—Uýô« ÷dFð
ÆW½«uDÝô« WOMO `²Hð ôË
ÆKARAOKE tË«dJ« WHOþË qOGAð -
Æ…œbF²*« …UMI« qOGAð ¡«dł« sJ1 ô
W½«uDÝ«
[PICTURE SOURCE] j³{«
(ACTIVE)] Ë« [VIDEO (NORMAL)]
l{Ë vKŽ
÷dF« …cU½ vKŽ
ÆWOMOB« qH WHOþË qOGAð
ÆÊu¹eHK²«
Æ[VIDEO
0 —e« jG{ bMŽ
7
JPEG
v« …dýU³ …—uB« …—Uý« ‰UÝ—« r²¹ YO×Ð qÒGA*« qË«
—e« vKŽ qHÝô jGC« ¡UMŁ«
r²¹ ¨qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« l{Ë w qÒGA*« vKŽ
tËË«dJ«
0 —e« jG{« ¨WU(« Ác¼ d¹dײ
ÆqOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« l{Ë w “UN'« vKŽ 7 —e«
KARAOKE
ÆWU(« Ác¼ w W½«uDÝô« WOMO ‚öž« Ë« `² pMJ1 ô
vKŽ qHÝô jGC« ¡UMŁ«
∑≤
AR70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
72
19/5/03, 1:37 PM
wÐdŽ
WKJA*«
WUD«
q(«
UH«u*«
Æo³ —UFý« ÊËœ dOOG²K W{dF UH«u*«Ë rOLB²«
RX-ES1SL
wÐdŽ
(IHF) FM
±∞∏[∞∞ v« eðd¼U−O ∏∑[µ∞
eðd¼U−O
Włu n«u r
uB« r C r
∫nOu²« ‚UD½
WUD« Ãdš
∫u¹dO²Ý qOGAð bMŽ
∫WOUô« «uMI«
ÂË« ∏ vKŽ qOGAð ¨v½œ« bŠ RMS ¨*…UM qJ ◊«Ë ±∞∞
sŽ b¹e¹ ô wK wI«uð g¹uA²Ð eðd¼uKO ± vKŽ
(IEC268-3) ◊Ëdý V Š Æ•∞[∏
∫jO;« uB« qOGAð bMŽ
ÂË« ∏ vKŽ qOGAð ¨v½œ« bŠ RMS ¨*…UM qJ ◊«Ë ±∞∞
∫WOUô« «uMI«
sŽ b¹e¹ ô wK wI«uð g¹uA²Ð eðd¼uKO ± vKŽ
Æ•∞[∏
ÂË« ∏ vKŽ qOGAð ¨v½œ« bŠ RMS ¨*…UM qJ ◊«Ë ±∞∞
∫W¹ed*« …UMI«
sŽ b¹e¹ ô wK wI«uð g¹uA²Ð eðd¼uKO ± vKŽ
Æ•∞[∏
ÂË« ∏ vKŽ qOGAð ¨v½œ« bŠ RMS ¨*…UM qJ ◊«Ë ±∞∞ ∫jO;« uB« «uM
sŽ b¹e¹ ô wK wI«uð g¹uA²Ð eðd¼uKO ± vKŽ
Æ•∞[∏
ÆXu ≤¥∞ Ë Xu ≤≤∞ ¨Xu ±≤∑ ¨Xu ±±∞ AC œœd² —UOð vKŽ ”UI*
©ÂË« ∑µØXu ÊËdJO ±[≤® dBf ±∂[∏
∫‰ULF²Ýö WKÐUI« WOÝU («
∫ÍœUŠ«
©ÂË« ∑µØXu ÊËdJO ±[∑® dBf ±∂[∞
©ÂË« ∑µØXu ÊËdJO ≤∞[µ® dBf ≥∑[µ
eðd¼uKO ± vKŽ q³O ¹œ ≥µ
∫WMUÝ WOÝU Š q³O ¹œ µ∞
∫ÍœUŠ«
∫u¹dO²Ý
∫REC OUT Ãdš bMŽ u¹dO² « qB
AM
Włu n«u r
©eðd¼uKO π wM“ qUHЮ eðd¼uKO ±∂∞≤ v« eðd¼uKO µ≥±
©eðd¼uKO ±∞ wM“ qUHЮ eðd¼uKO ±∂∞∞ v« eðd¼uKO µ≥∞
∫nOu²« ‚UD½
uB«
∫©eðd¼uKO ±® WF½UL*«Ø uB« qšœ WOÝU Š
∫DVD, DVD MULTI, DBS, VCR, TV
ÂË« ¥∑ØXu wKO ≤∂∞
ÂUŽ
≤≤∞ØXu ±≤∑بXu ±±∞ AC œœd² —UOð
∫WUD« U³KD²
j³CK qÐU ¨Xu ≤¥∞ ≠ Xu ≤≥∞ØXu
eðd¼ ∂∞Øeðd¼ µ∞ ¨WODKH« V ²M WDÝ«uÐ
©qOGA²« bMŽ® ◊«Ë ±∞∞
∫WUD« „öN²Ý«
Æ©qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« l{Ë w ® ◊«Ë µ
3 ≥≥∞[µ ™ ∂π[µ ™ 3 ¥≥µ ∫©oLŽ ™ ŸUHð—« ™ ÷dŽ® œUFÐô«
r− ∂[µ
∫WK²J«
∫(DIGITAL IN)* uB« qšœ
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ∞[µ ∫DIGITAL 1 (DVD) ∫—u;« bײ
DIGITAL 2/3 (DBS/TV) ∫ÍdBÐ
dBm ±µ≠ v« dBm ≤±≠
©d²Ou½U½ ≥∞ ± d²Ou½U½ ∂∂∞®
DTS wLd« jO;« uB«Ë wLd« w³Ëœ ¨wD)« PCM ÂUE½ l oÐUD²« *
Æ©eðd¼ uKO ¥∏ ¨eðd¼uKO ¥¥[± ¨eðd¼uKO ≥≤—WMOŽ œœdð l®
∫VCR u¹bOH« XOÝU q− ∫ uB« Ãdš Èu²
Xu wKO ≤µ∞
∫©IHF/DIN ∂∂® ∫ZO−C« v« …—Uýô« W³ ½
q³O ¹œ ∂≤Øq³O ¹œ ∏∑
∫DVD MULTI
∫©ÂË« ∏® œœd²« WÐU−²Ý«
eðd¼uKO ≤∞ v« eðd¼ ≤∞
∫DVD, DBS, VCR, TV
©q³O ¹œ ±±®
∫WLGMUÐ rJײ«
q³O ¹œ ≤± q³O ¹œ ±∞±
∫©eðd¼uKO ±∞∞® ’U³«
q³O ¹œ ≤± q³O ¹œ ±∞±
∫©eðd¼ uKO ±∞® qÐd²«
eðd¼ ±∞∞ vKŽ q³O ¹œ ±± q³O ¹œ ¥´
∫’U³« W¹uIð
u¹bOH«
∫©eðd¼ uKO ±® WF½UL*«Øu¹bOH« qšœ WOÝU Š
∫DVD, DBS, VCR ∫Vd u¹bO
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ∞[≤∏∂
∫DVD, DBS, VCR ∫S-Video
∫©ŸuBM« ∫Y®
∫©w½uK« l³A²« ∫C®
∫DVD, DBS ∫X½U½u³LJ« u¹bO
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±
∫©ŸuBM« ∫Y®
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ∞[∑
∫(P /P )
∫©eðd¼ uKO ±® WF½UL*«Øu¹bOH« qšœ WOÝU Š
∫VCR, MONITOR OUT ∫Vd u¹bO
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±
B
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ∞[≤∏∂
R
∫VCR, MONITOR OUT ∫S-video
∫©ŸuBM« ∫Y®
∫©w½uK« l³A²« ∫C®
∫MONITOR OUT ∫X½U½u³LJ« u¹bO
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±
∫©ŸuBM« ∫Y®
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ∞[∑
∫(P /P )
w³KÝ
∫s«e²«
B
∑≥
AR70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
73
20/5/03, 8:50 AM
R
UH«u*«
XV-NK58SL
∫©”uÐœ f³I® ANALOG OUT ·dÞ
©ÂË« uKO ±∞® Xu rms ≤[∞
∫©COAXIAL —u;« bײ® DIGITAL OUT ·dÞ
©wzUN½ ÂË« ∑µ® V(p-p) ∞[µ
∫©OPTICAL ÍdBЮ DIGITAL OUT ·dÞ
©WL® dBm ±µ- v« dBm ≤±-
ÂUŽ
¨©u¹bO WGO® DVD-R ¨DVD VIDEO ∫…¡«dIK WKÐUI«
¨Video CD ¨SVCD ¨©u¹bO WGO® DVD-RW
¨JPEG ¨MP3/WMA WGO ¨Audio CD ©CD-DA®
¨Video CD ¨SVCD ¨CD-DA® CD-R/RW
©JPEG ¨MP3/WMA WGO
Ø©pÐUA² ` ® 525i —UO²šö qÐU ∫NTSC
©ÂbI² ` ® 525p
©pÐUA² ` ® 596i ∫PAL
U½«uDÝô«
wÐdŽ
uB« Ãdš ·«dÞ«
∫u¹bOH« WGO
uB« hzUBš
œœd²« WÐU−²Ý«
eðd¼ uKO ≤∞ v« eðd¼ ≤ ∫©eðd¼ uKO ¥¥[± WMOF« œœdð® CD W½«uDÝ«
eðd¼ uKO ≤≤ v« eðd¼ ≤ ∫©eðd¼ uKO ¥∏ WMOF« œœdð® DVD W½«uDÝ«
©.d² ²Ð wLd« w³Ëœ Ë DTS «—Uýô eðd¼ uKO ≤∞ v« eðd¼ ¥ ®
eðd¼ uKO ¥¥ v« eðd¼ ≤ ∫©eðd¼ uKO π∂ WMOF« œœdð® DVD W½«uDÝ«
Èdšô«
¨
UH«u*«
Xu ≤¥∞ ≠ Xu ±±∞ AC œœd² —UOð
eðd¼∂∞Øeðd¼µ∞
∫WUD« U³KD²
©POWER ON qOGAð l{Ë® ◊«Ë ±≥
©qOGA²K œ«bF²Ýô« l{Ë® ◊«Ë ±[±
∫WUD« „öN²Ý«
∫WK²J«
q³O ¹œ π∏ s d¦« ∫X¹UÐ ±∂
q³O ¹œ ±∞∞ s d¦« ∫X¹UÐ ≤¥Ø≤∞
∫wJOUM¹b« Èb*«
r− ≤[±
©•∞[∞∞≤ ± s q«® ”UOIK qÐU dOž
∫qK)«Ë ËUH²«
∫©oLŽ ™ ŸUHð—« ™÷dŽ® œUFÐô«
3 ≤∑∞[µ ™ 3 ¥µ ™ 3 ¥≥µ
∫wKJ« wI«u²« g¹uA²«
•∞[∞∞∂ s q«
u¹bOH« Ãdš ·«dÞ«
.Dolby Laboratories Wdý s WBš— Vłu0 Z²½√ •
.Dolby Laboratories WdAÐ WUš W¹—U& UöŽ w¼ ÃËœe*« D ed«Ë “Dolby”
W ÝR* WKÒ− W¹—U& UöŽ w¼ “DTS Digital Out” ÂUE½Ë“DTS” ÂUEM« •
ÆWOLd« Õd *« WLE½«
∫©”uÐœ fÐUI® COMPONENT ·dÞ
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±[∞ ∫Y Ãdš
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ∞[∑ ∫P /P Ãdš
B
R
∫©”uÐœ fÐUI® VIDEO OUT ·dÞ
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±[∞
∫©S f³I® S-VIDEO ·dÞ
ÂË« ∑µØV(p-p) ±[∞ ∫Y Ãdš
ÂË« ∑µØXu wKO ≤∏∂ ∫C Ãdš
d¦« Ë« jš µ∞∞
∫wIô« qOKײ«
uB« Ãdš
©ÂË« uKO ∏[≤® Xu WuÐ rms ¥
∫MIC ·dÞ
∑¥
AR70-74RX-ES1&XV-NK58(UGUX)3
74
21/8/03, 7:31 PM
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Australia
and U.K.)
FM 75
AM LOOP
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
ANTENNA
COAXIAL
AV
COMULINK-III
AM EXT
AUDIO
DVD
IN
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
R
DVD IN
L
DBS IN
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
Y
CENTER
L
PB
R
PR
DBS
IN
OUT VCR IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TV
IN
SURR (REAR)
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
IN
DBS
IN
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL 3
(TV)
DIGITAL 1
(DVD)
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
IN
(PLAY)
VIDEO
DIGITAL 2 (DBS)
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKERS
RIGHT
LEFT
DIGITAL IN
MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
CAUTION:
SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE
8 ~ 16
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V
110V
230 240V
127V
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains
(AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the
voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this
equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector
switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/
electric shock.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN, AR
2003 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
coverRX-ES1&XV-NK58[UG&UX]f
2
0503NHMMDWJEIN
03.5.19, 10:57
Instructions
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
RX-ES1SL/XV-NK58SL
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit) User Access : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res Create Date : 2003:05:19 11:01:58 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Macintosh Author : JVC Creator : PageMaker 6.5 Title : RX-ES1&XV-NK58[UG&UX] Modify Date : 2003:08:27 16:05:20+09:00 Subject : LVT1002-009B Page Count : 154 Page Mode : UseThumbs Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools